12.1: Human Resources and Relevant Laws
12.1.1: National Labor Relations Act
The National Labor Relations Act establishes the right of most private-sector workers to form unions, bargain with management and strike.
Learning Objective
Explain the development of the National Labor Relations Act (NLRA)
Key Points
- The key principles of the National Labor Relations Act include: encouraging the practice and procedure of collective bargaining and protecting the exercise by workers of full freedom of association.
- The law defined and prohibited five unfair practices which include: interfering with, restraining or coercing employees in their rights; and dominating or interfering with the formation or administration of any labor organization.
- The act was controversial as it was viewed as a threat to freedom and the NLRB was accused of a pro-union and anti-employer bias.
- While opponents have introduced several hundred bills to amend or repeal the lay only the Taft-Hartley amendment was passed in 1947.
Key Term
- National Labor Relations Act
-
An act to diminish the causes of labor disputes burdening or obstructing interstate and foreign commerce, to create a National Labor Relations Board, and for other purposes.
Examples
- It was found that an employer unlawfully interrogated three employees. The Board adopted the judge’s finding that the employer threatened one of the employees during the course of his interrogation. The Board also adopted the judge’s finding that the employer unlawfully laid off five employees, including the three employees it had interrogated. Member Hayes concurred in part and would have affirmed the judge’s analysis of the unlawful layoff without further comment. Charge filed by Local 713, International Brotherhood of Trade Unions. Administrative Law Judge Raymond P. Green issued his decision on August 30, 2011. Members Hayes, Griffin, and Block participated.
- It was found that an employer, a commercial laundry company, violated the Act by: (1) warning the union’s shop steward not to provide information about bargaining to employees; (2) warning employees not to provide information to the union; (3) warning employees not to speak about the union during the workday, including break and lunch times; (4) threatening to discharge employees if they participated in union or other protected activities; (5) threatening employees that the shop would be closed and they would be discharged if the employer had to accept the union’s contract proposals; (6) threatening to discharge employees if they went on strike; (7) promising employees a wage increase and new benefits if the union no longer represented them; (8) polling employees as to whether they supported the union; (9) interrogating employees about their union membership, activities, and sympathies; (10) deducting union dues from employees’ paychecks, but failing to remit those funds to the union; (11) issuing written warnings to, and then discharging, an employee for supporting the union; (12) failing to bargain in good faith with the union; (13) conditioning bargaining upon the commitment of the union to refrain from handbilling the employer’s customers or engaging in any strike or picketing activity; (14) unilaterally stopping payments to various union funds; (15) unilaterally granting employees a wage increase; (16) refusing to bargain with the union because the union’s shop steward was present; and (17) unilaterally implementing new rules regarding the union’s access to unit employees at the facility. Charge filed by Laundry, Dry-Cleaning & Allied Workers Joint Board. Administrative Law Judge Steven Davis issued his decision on December 17, 2010. Chairman Pearce and Members Hayes and Griffin participated.
Introduction
The end of wartime economic controls saw the revelation of previously pent-up demands by American workers for better wages. This led to a series of major labor strikes that polarized American attitudes toward unions, as occurred in the 1890s. In 1935, the Democratic-controlled Congress enacted the National Labor Relations Act, establishing the right of most private-sector workers to form unions, bargain with management over wages and working conditions, and hold strikes to obtain their demands. The National Labor Relations Board, a federal agency, was established to oversee union elections and address unfair labor complaints.
President Roosevelt signed this legislation into law on July 5, 1935. A key principle of the NLRA is embodied in the concluding paragraph of section 1: “Encouraging the practice and procedure of collective bargaining and by protecting the exercise by workers of full freedom of association, self-organization, and designation of representatives of their own choosing, for the purpose of negotiating the terms and conditions of their employment or other mutual aid or protection. “
NLRA key principles also include:
- Protecting a wide range of activities, whether a union is involved or not, in order to promote organization and collective bargaining
- Protecting employees as a class and expressly not on the basis of a relationship with an employer
- Allowance of one exclusive bargaining representative for a unit of employees
- Promotion of the practice and procedure of collective bargaining
- Employers’ duty to bargain with the representative of its employees
Unfair Practices
The law defined and prohibited five unfair labor practices. These prohibitions still exist, while others have been added under subsequent legislation. The original employer unfair labor practices consisted of:
- Interfering with, restraining or coercing employees in their rights under Section 7*
- “Dominating” or interfering with the formation or administration of any labor organization
- Discriminating against employees to encourage or discourage acts of support for a labor organization
- Discriminating against employees who file charges or testify
- Refusing to bargain collectively with the representative of the employer’s employees
*Section 7 rights include: freedom of association; mutual aid or protection; self-organization; to form, join, or assist labor organizations; to bargain collectively for wages and working conditions through representatives of their own choosing; and to engage in other protected concerted activities with or without a union.
Amendments
In the decade following its passage, opponents of the Wagner Act introduced several hundred bills to amend and/or repeal the law. These bills either failed or were vetoed, until the passage of the Taft-Hartley amendments in 1947. More recent failed amendments included attempts in 1978 to permit triple backpay awards and union collective bargaining certification based on signed union authorization cards—a provision similar to a proposed amendment in the Employee Free Choice Act. Under the NLRA, unions can become the representative based on signed union authorization cards only if the employer voluntarily recognizes the union. If the employer refuses to recognize the union, the union can then be certified through a secret-ballot election conducted by the NLRB.
Labor
The National Labor Relations Act is to establish the right of most private-sector workers to form unions, bargain with management.
12.1.2: Labor-Management Relations Act
The Labor-Management Relations Act (or the Taft-Hartley Act) is a U.S. federal law that monitors the activities and power of labor unions.
Learning Objective
Explain the purpose of the Labor-Management Relations Act
Key Points
- The Taft–Hartley Act amended the National Labor Relations Act (informally the Wagner Act), which Congress passed in 1935. The principal author of the Taft–Hartley Act was J. Mack Swigert of the Cincinnati law firm Taft, Stettinius & Hollister.
- The Taft–Hartley Act added a list of unfair labor practices on the part of unions to the National Labor Relations Act. It was seen, by some, as a means of demobilizing the labor movement by imposing limits on labor’s ability to strike and by prohibiting radicals from their leadership.
- Despite President Truman arguing that it would “conflict with important principles of our democratic society” and his attempted veto, he would subsequently use it 12 times during his presidency.
Key Terms
- Labor Management Relations Act
-
The official name of the Taft-Hartley Act.
- Taft-Hartley Act
-
The Taft-Hartley Act is a United States federal law that monitors the activities and power of labor unions.
Example
- The Taft-Hartley Act makes it illegal for federal government employees or workers in corporations owned by the government to strike. Those who do so can expect to be met with harsh sanctions. An example of the consequences can be seen in the outcome of the Professional Air Traffic Controllers Organization’s (PATCO) strike in 1981. Workers were fired; some were jailed and in the end, the (PATCO) was dismantled.
History of the Labor-Management Relations Act
Enacted June 23, 1947, the Labor-Management Relations Act (informally the Taft-Hartley Act) is a United States federal law that monitors the activities and power of labor unions. The act, still effective, was sponsored by Senator Robert Taft and Representative Fred A. Hartley, Jr. and became law by overriding U.S. President Harry S. Truman’s veto on June 23, 1947 ; labor leaders called it the “slave-labor bill,” while President Truman argued that it was a “dangerous intrusion on free speech,” and that it would “conflict with important principles of our democratic society. ” Nevertheless, Truman would subsequently use it 12 times during his presidency. The Taft–Hartley Act amended the National Labor Relations Act (informally, the Wagner Act), which Congress passed in 1935. The principal author of the Taft–Hartley Act was J. Mack Swigert of the Cincinnati law firm Taft, Stettinius & Hollister.
President Harry S. Truman
A portrait of former U.S. President Harry S. Truman who failed in his attempted veto of the 1947 Labor-Management Relations Act.
Taft–Hartley was one of more than 250 union-related bills pending in both houses of Congress in 1947. As a response to the rising union movement and Cold War hostilities, the bill could be seen as a response by business to the post-World War II labor upsurge of 1946. During the year after D-Day, more than five million American workers were involved in strikes, which lasted on average four times longer than those during the war. The Taft–Hartley Act was seen as a means of demobilizing the labor movement by imposing limits on labor’s ability to strike and by prohibiting radicals from their leadership.
Purpose of the Labor-Management Relations Act
The National Labor Relations Act was enacted for a number of reasons, including to promote the full flow of commerce, prescribe the legitimate rights of both employees and employers in their relations affecting commerce, provide orderly and peaceful procedures for preventing the interference by either with the legitimate rights of the other, protect the rights of individual employees in their relations with labor organizations whose activities affect commerce, define and proscribe practices on the part of labor and management which affect commerce and are inimical to the general welfare, and to protect the rights of the public in connection with labor disputes affecting commerce.
The amendments enacted in the Labor Management Relations Act (Taft-Hartley) added a list of prohibited actions, or unfair labor practices, on the part of unions to the NLRA, which had previously only prohibited unfair labor practices committed by employers. The Taft–Hartley Act prohibited jurisdictional strikes, wildcat strikes, solidarity or political strikes, secondary boycotts, secondary and mass picketing, closed shops, and monetary donations by unions to federal political campaigns. It also required union officers to sign non-communist affidavits with the government. Union shops were heavily restricted, and states were allowed to pass right-to-work laws that outlawed closed union shops. Furthermore, the executive branch of the Federal government could obtain legal strikebreaking injunctions if an impending or current strike imperiled the national health or safety, a test that has been interpreted broadly by the courts.
12.1.3: Fair Labor Standards Act
The Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 established a national minimum wage, forbade “oppressive” child labor, and provided for overtime pay in designated occupations.
Learning Objective
Explain the specifications of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 (FLSA)
Key Points
- While the Fair Labor Standards act of 1938 declared a goal of assuring “a minimum standard of living necessary for the health, efficiency, and general well-being of workers,” it also allowed employers to replace striking workers.
- The standards apply to employees in the private sector as well as those in Federal, State, and local governments.
- Not all jobs are covered under the FLSA overtime rules. This is because they either are specifically excluded from the statue or because they are governed by another federal act.
- Employees whose jobs are covered by the FLSA are classified as being either “exempt” or “nonexempt. ” Nonexempt employees are entitled to overtime pay while exempt employees are not.
Key Terms
- Fair Labor Standards Act
-
The FLSA established a national minimum wage, guaranteed “time-and-a-half” for overtime in certain jobs, and prohibited most employment of minors in “oppressive child labor,” a term that is defined in the statute. It applies to employees engaged in interstate commerce or employed by an enterprise engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce, unless the employer can claim an exemption from coverage.
- exempt
-
Not entitled to overtime pay when working overtime.
- nonexempt
-
Nonexempt employees are entitled to overtime pay.
Examples
- In many companies, you’ll find exempt and nonexempt workers. The category they fall in depends on rules established by the Fair Labor Standards Act. Those who are nonexempt are paid overtime. Blue collar workers (including manual workers) fall into this category. Police officers, fire fighters, paramedics, and other first responders are also entitled to overtime wages and minimum wage pay.
- Jobs that are excluded from coverage under the FLSA include movie theater employees and many agricultural workers. These jobs are specifically excluded from the statute. Most railroad workers are also not covered as they are governed by the Railway Labor Act or the Motor Carriers Act.
Introduction
The Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 established a national minimum wage, forbade “oppressive” child labor, and provided for overtime pay in designated occupations. It declared the goal of assuring “a minimum standard of living necessary for the health, efficiency, and general well-being of workers.” But it also allowed employers to replace striking workers.
Specifications
The standards apply to employees in the private sector and in Federal, State, and local governments. Covered nonexempt workers are entitled to a minimum wage of not less than $7.25 per hour effective July 24, 2009. Many states also have minimum wage laws, at a rate not less than one and one-half times the regular rate of pay is required after 40 hours of work in a workweek.
Covered nonexempt employees must receive for hours worked over 40 per workweek (any fixed and regularly recurring period of 168 hours — seven consecutive 24-hour periods) at a rate not less than one and one-half times the regular rate of pay. There is no limit on the number of hours employees 16 years or older may work in any workweek. The FLSA does not require [[#|overtime pay]] for work on weekends, holidays, or regular days of rest, unless overtime is worked on such days. Particular jobs may be completely excluded from coverage under the FLSA overtime rules. There are two general types of exclusion. Some jobs are specifically excluded in the statute itself. For example, employees of movie theaters and many agricultural workers are not governed by the FLSA overtime rules. Another type of exclusion is for jobs which are governed by some other specific federal. As a general rule, if a job is governed by some other federal, the FLSA does not apply. For example, most railroad workers are governed by the Railway Labor Act, and many are governed by the Motor Carriers Act, and not the FLSA.
Exempt or Nonexempt
Employees whose jobs are governed by the FLSA are either “exempt” or “nonexempt. ” Nonexempt employees are entitled to overtime pay. Exempt employees are not. Most employees covered by the FLSA are nonexempt.
History of the Minimum Wage
This graph of the minimum wage in the United States shows the fluctuation in government guarantees for minimum standards of labor.
12.1.4: Equal Pay Act
The Equal Pay Act of 1963 is a U.S. Federal law amending the Fair Labor Standards Act aimed at abolishing wage disparity based on sex.
Learning Objective
Explain the reasons and results of the Equal Pay Act of 1963
Key Points
- Congress denounced sex discrimination due to its effect on wages and living standards, resource utilization, and commerce.
- While women’s salaries when compared to men’s have seen a dramatic increase since the Equal Pay Act was implemented, the act’s goal of equal pay for equal work still has not been completely achieved.
- The act was signed into law on June 10, 1963 by John F. Kennedy as part of his New Frontier Program.
Key Terms
- seniority
-
A measure of the amount of time a person has been a member of an organization, as compared to other members, and with an eye towards awarding privileges to those who have been members longer.
- merit
-
Something worthy of a high rating.
Example
- After graduating from college with the same degrees, both Charlie and Lucy start working at the same IT company. Their resumes look so similar that it is hard to distinguish the two new hires on paper. Their jobs are basically the same, they work at the same location, and neither one of them has a supervisory role. Based on this, both Charlie and Lucy should receive equal salaries as they are doing what is considered “substantially equal work. “
The Equal Pay Act
The Equal Pay Act of 1963 is a United States federal law amending the Fair Labor Standards Act, aimed at abolishing wage disparity based on sex. It was signed into law on June 10, 1963 by John F. Kennedy as part of his New Frontier Program.
John F. Kennedy
Former President John F. Kennedy signed the Equal Pay Act into law in 1963.
Reasons for the Act
In passing the bill, Congress denounces sex discrimination for the following reasons:
- It depresses wages and living standards for employees necessary for their health and efficiency.
- It prevents the maximum utilization of the available labor resources.
- It tends to cause labor disputes, thereby burdening, affecting, and obstructing commerce.
- It burdens commerce and the free flow of goods in commerce.
- It constitutes an unfair method of competition.
The law states:
“No employer having employees subject to any provisions of this section shall discriminate, within any establishment in which such employees are employed, between employees on the basis of sex by paying wages to employees in such establishment at a rate less than the rate at which he pays wages to employees of the opposite sex in such establishment for equal work on jobs, the performance of which requires equal skill, effort, and responsibility, and which are performed under similar working conditions, except where such payment is made pursuant to (i) a seniority system; (ii) a merit system; (iii)a system which measures earnings by quantity or quality of production; or (iv) a differential based on any other factor other than sex. “
Results
According to the Bureau of Labor Statistics, women’s salaries vis-à-vis men’s have risen dramatically since the EPA’s enactment, from 62% of men’s earnings in 1970 to 80% in 2004. Nonetheless, the EPA’s equal pay for equal work goals have not been completely achieved, as demonstrated by the BLS data and Congressional findings within the text of the proposed Paycheck Fairness Act.
12.1.5: Civil Rights Act
The Civil Rights Act of 1964 outlawed major forms of discrimination against African Americans and women, including racial segregation.
Learning Objective
Outline the stipulations in the Civil Rights Act of 1964
Key Points
- The Civil Right Acts ended racial segregation in public venues like schools, the workplace, and public accommodations (facilities that served the general public).
- John F. Kennedy called for the bill in his civil rights speech on June 11, 1963 after a series of protests from the African-American community, but it was Lyndon B. Johnson who signed the Act into law in July, 1964.
- The Civil Rights Act has 11 titles which deal with voting and discrimination issues. Powers given to enforce the act were initially weak, but were supplemented during later years.
Key Terms
- discrimination
-
(sometimes discrimination against) distinct treatment of an individual or group to their disadvantage; treatment or consideration based on class or category rather than individual merit; partiality; prejudice; bigotry.
- segregation
-
Passing of laws to separate people geographically, residentially, racially, religiously or by gender.
Example
- White-only restaurants are an example of the type of discrimination that was outlawed as a result of the Civil Rights Act.
The Civil Rights Act of 1964 was a landmark piece of legislation in the United States that outlawed major forms of discrimination against African Americans and women. It ended unequal application of voter registration requirements and racial segregation in schools, at the workplace and by facilities that served the general public (“public accommodations”).
Powers given to enforce the act were initially weak, but were supplemented during later years. Congress asserted its authority to legislate under several different parts of the United States Constitution, principally its power to regulate interstate commerce under Article One, its duty to guarantee all citizens equal protection of the laws under the Fourteenth Amendment and its duty to protect voting rights under the Fifteenth Amendment. The Act was signed into law by President Lyndon B. Johnson, who would later sign the landmark Voting Rights Act into law.
The bill was called for by President John F. Kennedy in his civil rights speech of June 11, 1963, in which he asked for legislation “giving all Americans the right to be served in facilities which are open to the public—hotels, restaurants, theaters, retail stores, and similar establishments,” as well as “greater protection for the right to vote. ” Kennedy delivered this speech following a series of protests from the African-American community, the most concurrent being the Birmingham campaign which concluded in May 1963.
Titles under the Civil Rights Act
Title I
- Barred unequal application of voter registration requirements.
Title II
- Outlawed discrimination based on race, color, religion or national origin in hotels, motels, restaurants, theaters, and all other public accommodations engaged in interstate commerce; exempted private clubs without defining the term “private. “
Title III
- Prohibited state and municipal governments from denying access to public facilities on grounds of race, color, religion or national origin.
Title IV
- Encouraged the desegregation of public schools and authorized the U.S. Attorney General to file suits to enforce said act.
Title V
- Expanded the Civil Rights Commission established by the earlier Civil Rights Act of 1957 with additional powers, rules and procedures.
Title VI
- Prevented discrimination by government agencies that receive federal funds. If an agency is found in violation of Title VI, that agency may lose its federal funding.
Title VII
- Prohibited discrimination by covered employers on the basis of race, color, religion, sex or national origin. Title VII also prohibited discrimination against an individual because of his or her association with another individual of a particular race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. An employer cannot discriminate against a person because of his interracial association with another, such as by an interracial marriage.
Title VIII
- Required compilation of voter-registration and voting data in geographic areas specified by the Commission on Civil Rights.
Title IX
- Made it easier to move civil rights cases from state courts with segregationist judges and all-white juries to federal court. This was of crucial importance to civil rights activists who could not get a fair trial in state courts.
Title X
- Established the Community Relations Service, tasked with assisting in community disputes involving claims of discrimination.
Title XI
- Gives the jury rights to put any proceeding for criminal contempt arising under title II, III, IV, V, VI, or VII of the Civil Rights Act, on trial, and if convicted, can be fined no more than $1,000 or imprisoned for more than six months.
12.1.6: Age Discrimination and Health Act
Under this act both employees and applicants who are 40 years old or over are protected from employment discrimination based on their age.
Learning Objective
Explain how the Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967 (ADEA) protects individuals
Key Points
- Not only does the ADEA make it unlawful to discriminate against employees and job applicants based on their age (40 or over), but the act also allows employers to favor older workers even if it is at the expense of younger workers.
- The ADEA applies to organizations with 20 or more employees and also include state and local governments, employment agencies, labor organizations, and the federal government.
- Eligibility for apprenticeship programs, job noticies and advertisements, pre-employment inquiries about age, and the provision of benefits, are all covered under the act.
Key Terms
- apprenticeship
-
The system by which a person learning a craft or trade is instructed by a master for a set time under set conditions.
- discrimination
-
(sometimes discrimination against) distinct treatment of an individual or group to their disadvantage; treatment or consideration based on class or category rather than individual merit; partiality; prejudice; bigotry.
Example
- The following announcement of the National Association of Broadcasters Education Foundation apprenticeship program exemplifies the lack of age discrimination in appreticeship programs. “Who Can Participate? College seniors, recent graduates and individuals with the appropriate skill set seeking to enter the broadcast industry. Participants must have been trained in IT, digital technologies, broadcast engineering or other related areas. ” Source: http://www.nabef.org/initiatives/tap.asp
Introduction
The Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967 (ADEA) protects individuals who are 40 years of age or older from employment discrimination based on age. It was signed into law by former U.S. President Lyndon B. Johnson.
Lyndon B. Johnson, in the Oval Office.
Former U.S. President Lyndon B. Johnson.
The ADEA’s protections apply to both employees and job applicants. Under the ADEA, it is unlawful to discriminate against a person because of his/her age with respect to any term, condition, or privilege of employment, including hiring, firing, promotion, layoff, compensation, benefits, job assignments, and training. The ADEA permits employers to favor older workers based on age even when doing so adversely affects a younger worker who is 40 or older.
It is also unlawful to retaliate against an individual for opposing employment practices that discriminate based on age or for filing an age discrimination charge, testifying, or participating in any way in an investigation, proceeding, or litigation under the ADEA.
The ADEA applies to employers with 20 or more employees, including state and local governments. It also applies to employment agencies and labor organizations, as well as to the federal government. ADEA protections include:
- Apprenticeship Programs It is generally unlawful for apprenticeship programs, including joint labor-management apprenticeship programs, to discriminate on the basis of an individual’s age. Age limitations in apprenticeship programs are valid only if they fall within certain specific exceptions under the ADEA or if the EEOC grants a specific exemption.
- Job Notices and Advertisements The ADEA generally makes it unlawful to include age preferences, limitations, or specifications in job notices or advertisements. A job notice or advertisement may specify an age limit only in the rare circumstances where age is shown to be a “bona fide occupational qualification” (BFOQ) reasonably necessary to the normal operation of the business.
- Pre-Employment Inquiries The ADEA does not specifically prohibit an employer from asking an applicant’s age or date of birth. However, because such inquiries may deter older workers from applying for employment or may otherwise indicate possible intent to discriminate based on age, requests for age information will be closely scrutinized to make sure that the inquiry was made for a lawful purpose, rather than for a purpose prohibited by the ADEA.
- Benefits The Older Workers Benefit Protection Act of 1990 (OWBPA) amended the ADEA to specifically prohibit employers from denying benefits to older employees. Congress recognized that the cost of providing certain benefits to older workers is greater than the cost of providing those same benefits to younger workers, and that those greater costs would create a disincentive to hire older workers. Therefore, in limited circumstances, an employer may be permitted to reduce benefits based on age, as long as the cost of providing the reduced benefits to older workers is the same as the cost of providing benefits to younger workers. Employers are permitted to coordinate retiree health benefit plans with eligibility for Medicare or a comparable state-sponsored health benefit.
- Waivers of ADEA Rights An employer may ask an employee to waive his/her rights or claims under the ADEA either in the settlement of an ADEA administrative or court claim or in connection with an exit incentive program or other employment termination program. However, the ADEA, as amended by OWBPA, sets out specific minimum standards that must be met in order for a waiver to be considered knowing and voluntary and, therefore, valid. Among other requirements, a valid ADEA waiver must: be in writing and be understandable; specifically refer to ADEA rights or claims; not waive rights or claims that may arise in the future; be in exchange for valuable consideration; advise the individual in writing to consult an attorney before signing the waiver; and provide the individual at least 21 days to consider the agreement and at least seven days to revoke the agreement after signing it.
12.1.7: Occupational Safety and Health Act
The goal of the OSHA Act is to make sure employers provide employees a place to work that is free from recognized hazards.
Learning Objective
Explain the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
Key Points
- The act came about due to an increased awareness of the impact chemicals had on the environment.
- The Occupational Safety and Health Administration was created to enforce workplace health and safety standards.
- The act applies to many diverse employers but does not include the United States or any state of political sub division of a state.
Key Term
- toxic
-
Having a chemical nature that is harmful to health or lethal if consumed or otherwise entering into the body in sufficient quantities.
Example
- Jill’s office was small but at least it was her own, and she enjoyed the convenience of having a state-of-the art printer and copier within arms reach. Then one day everything changed. He boss ran in and told her that the printer and copier would have to be moved immediately as having them that close to her was in violation of the Occupational Safety and Health Act. In addition to the noise they make, both machines emit Volatile Organic Compounds and other hazardous particles.
The Occupational Safety and Health Act is the primary federal law which governs occupational health and safety in the private sector and federal government in the United States. It was enacted by Congress in 1970 and was signed by President Richard Nixon on December 29, 1970. Its main goal is to ensure that employers provide employees with an environment free from recognized hazards, such as exposure to toxic chemicals, excessive noise levels, mechanical dangers, heat or cold stress, or unsanitary conditions.
Origin
In the mid-1960s, growing awareness of the environmental impact of many chemicals had led to a politically powerful environmental movement. Some labor leaders seized on the public’s growing unease over chemicals in the environment, arguing that the effect of these compounds on worker health was even worse than the low-level exposure plants and animals received in the wild. On January 23, 1968, President Lyndon B. Johnson submitted a comprehensive occupational health and safety bill to Congress. Led by the United States Chamber of Commerce and the National Association of Manufacturers, the legislation was widely opposed by business. Many labor leaders, including the leadership of the AFL-CIO, did not fight for the legislation, claiming workers had little interest in the bill.
In passing the Act, Congress declared its intent “to assure so far as possible every working man and woman in the Nation safe and healthful working conditions and to preserve our human resources. “
Purposes of the Act
- OSHA was given the authority both to set and enforce workplace health and safety standards. The act also created the independent Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission to review enforcement priorities, actions, and cases.
- Established the National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), an independent research institute in the then-Centers for Disease Control.
- Defines an employer to be any “person engaged in a business affecting commerce who has employees, but does not include the United States or any state or political subdivision of a State. ” The act applies to employers as diverse as manufacturers, construction companies, law firms, hospitals, charities, labor unions, and private schools.
- The “general duty clause” requires employers to 1) maintain conditions or adopt practices reasonably necessary and appropriate to protect workers on the job; 2) be familiar with and comply with standards applicable to their establishments; and 3) ensure that employees have and use personal protective equipment when required for safety and health.
- All employers must report to OSHA within eight hours if an employee dies from a work-related incident, or three or more employees are hospitalized as a result of a work-related incident. Additionally, all fatal on-the-job heart attacks must also be reported.
- OSHA inspectors are permited to enter, inspect, and investigate, during regular working hours, any workplace covered by the Act.
- Employers must also communicate with employees about hazards in the workplace. By regulation, OSHA requires that employers keep a record of every non-consumer chemical product used in the workplace.
- The act prohibits any employer from discharging, retaliating, or discriminating against any employee because the worker has exercised rights under the act. These rights include complaining to OSHA and seeking an OSHA inspection, participating in an OSHA inspection, and participating or testifying in any proceeding related to an OSHA inspection.
OSHA Symbol
Employers must communicate to their employees their rights under OSHA.
12.1.8: Employee Retirement Income Security Act
Businesses who voluntarily set up pension and health plans in private industry must adhere to rules ERISA rules that protect employees.
Learning Objective
Explain the Employee Retirement Income Security Act (ERISA) of 1974
Key Points
- ERISA protects the interests of benefit plan participants and their beneficiaries by requiring the disclosure of financial and other information concerning the plan; establishing standards of conduct for plan fiduciaries; providing appropriate remedies and access to federal courts.
- ERISA’s rules protect participants by making sure they are informed about the plan’s features and funding; their grievances are heard; they are able to collect their money.
- ERISA was created in part due to the 1963 Studebaker plant closure in which thousands of employees were left pension-less due to poor funding. Legislation proposed in 1967 addressing the funding, vesting, reporting, and disclosure issues, was opposed by business group and labor unions.
Key Terms
- pension
-
A regularly paid gratuity paid regularly as benefit due to a person in consideration of past services; notably to one retired from service, on account of retirement age, disability or similar cause; especially, a regular stipend paid by a government to retired public officers, disabled soldiers; sometimes passed on to the heirs, or even specifically for them, as to the families of soldiers killed in service.
- fiduciary
-
Related to trusts and trustees.
Example
- The Consolidated Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1985 (COBRA) is an example of the type of protection ERISA provides. Because of COBRA certain former employees, retirees, spouses, former spouses, and dependent children (“qualified beneficiaries”) the right to temporary continuation of health coverage at group rates.
The Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (ERISA) was enacted on September 2, 1974. ERISA is a federal law that establishes minimum standards for pension plans in private industry and provides for extensive rules on the federal income tax effects of transactions associated with employee benefit plans. ERISA was enacted to protect the interests of employee benefit plan participants and their beneficiaries by:
- Requiring the disclosure of financial and other information concerning the plan to beneficiaries.
- Establishing standards of conduct for plan fiduciaries.
- Providing for appropriate remedies and access to the federal courts.
In general, ERISA does not cover retirement plans established or maintained by governmental entities, churches for their employees, or plans which are maintained solely to comply with applicable workers compensation, unemployment or disability laws. ERISA also does not cover plans maintained outside the United States primarily for the benefit of nonresident aliens or unfunded excess benefit plans
ERISA Rules
- Requires plans to provide participants with plan information including important information about plan features and funding.
- Sets minimum standards for participation, vesting, benefit accrual, and funding. provides fiduciary responsibilities for those who manage and control plan assets.
- Requires plans to establish a grievance and appeals process for participants to get benefits from their plans.
- Gives participants the right to sue for benefits and breaches of fiduciary duty
- If a defined benefit plan is terminated, guarantees payment of certain benefits through a federally chartered corporation, known as the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation (PBGC).
History
In 1961, U.S. President John F. Kennedy created the President’s Committee on Corporate Pension Plans. The movement for pension reform gained some momentum when the Studebaker, an automobile manufacturer, closed its plant in 1963. Studebaker’s pension plan was so poorly funded that only 3,600 workers who were of retirement age received full pension benefits, 4,000 workers aged 40–59 who had ten years with Studebaker received lump sum payments valued at roughly 15% of the actuarial value of their pension benefits, and the remaining 2,900 workers received no pensions .
Studebaker Avanti 1963
The Avanti was one of the last cars created by Studebaker before their plant was closed. At the time of closure, more than 2500 employees didn’t receive owed benefits and compensation due to poor plan funding.
In 1967, Senator Jacob K. Javits proposed legislation that would address the funding, vesting, reporting, and disclosure issues identified by the presidential committee. His bill was opposed by business groups and labor unions, that sought to retain the flexibility they enjoyed under pre-ERISA law.
ERISA was enacted in 1974 and signed into law by President Gerald Ford on September 2, 1974, Labor Day. In the years since 1974, ERISA has been amended repeatedly.
Pension & Health Benefit Plans
ERISA does not require employers to establish pension plans. Likewise, as a general rule, it does not require that plans provide a minimum level of benefits. Instead, it regulates the operation of a pension plan once it has been established. Under ERISA, pension plans must provide for vesting of employees’ pension benefits after a specified minimum number of years. ERISA requires that the employers who sponsor plans satisfy certain minimum funding requirements.
ERISA does not require that an employer provide health insurance to its employees or retirees, but it regulates the operation of a health benefit plan if an employer chooses to establish one. There have been several significant amendments to ERISA concerning health benefit plans two of which are the Consolidated Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1985 (COBRA) and the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996 (HIPAA).
Pension Vesting
Before ERISA, some defined benefit pension plans required decades of service before an employee’s benefit became vested. It was not unusual for a plan to provide no benefit at all to an employee who left employment before the specified retirement age (e.g. 65), regardless of the length of the employee’s service.
Under the Pension Protection Act of 2006 (PPA), employer contributions made after 2006 to a defined contribution plan must become vested at 100% after three years or under a second sixth year gradual-vesting schedule Employee contributions are always 100% vested. Accrued benefits under a defined benefit plan must become vested at 100% after five years or under a third seventh year gradual vesting schedule.
Pension Funding
Under ERISA, minimum funding requirements were established for defined benefit plans. By their nature, defined contribution plans are always fully funded, even if the employee has not yet become vested in the employer contributions.
The funding requirement under PPA is simply that a plan must stay fully funded (that is, its assets must equal or exceed its liabilities). If a plan is fully funded, the minimum required contribution is the cost of benefits earned during the year. If a plan is not fully funded, the contribution also includes the amount necessary to amortize over seven years the difference between its liabilities and its assets. Stricter rules apply to severely underfunded plans (called “at-risk status”).
12.1.9: Affirmative Action
Affirmative action prevents discrimination against employees on the basis of race, religion, gender, or nationality.
Learning Objective
Assess the role of affirmative action in the US
Key Points
- Federal contractors and subcontractors are legally required to adopt affirmative action measures. Government contractors undergo compliance reviews conducted by the OFCCP.
- Affirmative action measures are meant to remedy the disadvantages that were associated with blatant historical discrimination.
- Some affirmative action policies have been criticized for bringing on reverse discrimination.
- Government contractors undergo compliance reviews conducted by the OFCCP.
Key Terms
- affirmative action
-
a policy or program providing advantages for people of a minority group who are seen to have traditionally been discriminated against, with the aim of creating a more egalitarian society through preferential access to education, employment, health care, social welfare, etc.
- quota
-
a restriction on the import of something to a specific quantity.
Example
- Examples of affirmative action measures undertaken by the United States Department of Labor include outreach campaigns, targeted recruitment, employee and management development, and employee support programs.
In the United States, affirmative action refers to equal opportunity employment measures that Federal contractors and subcontractors are legally required to adopt. These measures are intended to prevent discrimination against employees or applicants for employment, on the basis of race, religion, gender, or nationality.
Examples of affirmative action offered by the United States Department of Labor include outreach campaigns, targeted recruitment, employee and management development, and employee support programs.The impetus towards affirmative action is to redress the disadvantages associated with overt historical discrimination. Further impetus is a desire to ensure public institutions, such as universities, hospitals, and police forces, are more representative of the populations they serve. Affirmative action began as a tool to address the persisting inequalities for African Americans in the 1960s and the specific term was first used to describe U.S. government policy in 1961.
Slaves Waiting for Sale: Richmond, Virginia. Painted upon the sketch of 1853
Slaves were forced to work on plantations often under brutal conditions.
Controversy
Affirmative action is a large subject of controversy. Some policies adopted as affirmative action, such as racial quotas or gender quotas for collegiate admission, have been criticized as a form of reverse discrimination, and such implementation of affirmative action has been ruled unconstitutional by the majority opinion in the case of Gratz v. Bollinger. Affirmative action as a practice was upheld by the court’s decision in Grutter v. Bollinger.
Requirements
- Each government contractor with 50 or more employees and $50,000 or more in government contracts is required to develop a written affirmative action program (AAP) for each of its establishments.
- A written affirmative action program helps the contractor identify and analyze potential problems in the participation and utilization of women and minorities in the contractor’s workforce.
- If there are problems, the contractor will specify in its AAP the specific procedures it will follow and the good faith efforts it will make to provide equal employment opportunity.
- Expanded efforts in outreach, recruitment, training and other areas are some of the affirmative steps contractors can take to help members of the protected groups compete for jobs on equal footing with other applicants and employees.
Enforcement and Compliance
OFCCP conducts compliance reviews to investigate the employment practices of government contractors. During a compliance review, a compliance officer examines the contractor’s affirmative action program, checks personnel, payroll, and other employment records, interviews employees and company officials, and investigates virtually all aspects of employment in the company. The investigator also checks to see whether the contractor is making special efforts to achieve equal opportunity through affirmative action. If problems are discovered, OFCCP will recommend corrective action and suggest ways to achieve equal employment opportunity.
12.1.10: Americans with Disabilities Act
The ADA makes it illegal to discriminate against people with disabilities in employment, public transportation, and communications.
Learning Objective
Analyze the effect of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) on various parties involved
Key Points
- The Americans with Disabilities Act covers the entire range of employment practices and was signed into law in 1990 by President George H. W. Bush.
- The Americans with Disabilities Act applies to private employers, state and local governments, employment agencies, and labor unions.
- The Americans with Disabilities Act is enforced by four federal agencies: (1) the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC); (2) the Department of Transportation; (3) the Federal Communications Commission (FCC); (4) the Department of Justice.
- The Department of Labor’s Office of Disability Employment Policy (ODEP) only provides publications and technical assistance regarding the ADA’s basic requirements.
Key Terms
- discrimination
-
(sometimes discrimination against) distinct treatment of an individual or group to their disadvantage; treatment or consideration based on class or category rather than individual merit; partiality; prejudice; bigotry.
- disability
-
State of being disabled; deprivation or want of ability; absence of competent physical, intellectual, or moral power, means, fitness, and the like.
Example
- Application of the ADA: A moving company conducts job interviews in a second floor office and there is no elevator. Beth, who uses a wheelchair is called in for an interview. She has applied for a secretarial position. Since she uses a wheelchair, she requests a reasonable accommodation. It would be undue hardship for the company to install an elevator, but the employer has another option. It can conduct the interview in a first floor office. The employer is responsible for moving the location of the interview to a reasonable accommodation.
The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) prohibits discrimination against people with disabilities in employment, transportation, public accommodation, communications, and governmental activities. It covers all employment practices, including application procedures, hiring, firing, advancement, compensation, training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. It applies to recruitment, advertising, tenure, layoff, leave, fringe benefits, and all other employment-related activities .
Signing of the ADA Act of 1990
President George H. W. Bush signs the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 into law. Pictured (left to right): Evan Kemp, Rev Harold Wilke, Pres. Bush, Sandra Parrino, Justin Dart
Specifications of ADA
The ADA applies to private employers, state and local governments, employment agencies, and labor unions. Employers with 25 or more employees were covered as of July 26, 1992. Employers with 15 or more employees were covered two years later, beginning July 26, 1994.
Employment discrimination is prohibited against “qualified individuals with disabilities. ” This includes applicants for employment and current employees. An individual is considered to have a “disability” if he or she has a physical or mental impairment that substantially limits one or more major life activities, has a record of such an impairment, or is regarded as having such an impairment. Persons discriminated against because they have a known association or relationship with an individual with a disability also are protected.
Compliance and Enforcement
The Department of Labor’s Office of Disability Employment Policy (ODEP) provides publications and other technical assistance on the basic requirements of the ADA. It does not enforce any part of the law.
There are four federal agencies that enforce the ADA:
- The Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC) enforces regulations covering employment.
- The Department of Transportation enforces regulations governing transit.
- The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) enforces regulations covering telecommunication services.
- The Department of Justice enforces regulations governing public accommodations and state and local government services.
Opposition to the Act
Employers: The ADA has been a frequent target of criticism by employers who claim that individuals who are diagnosed with one of the so-called “lesser disabilities” are being “accommodated” when they should not be. On the other hand, court decisions have made necessary “an individualized assessment to prove that an impairment is protected under the ADA. Therefore, the plaintiff must offer evidence that the extent of the limitation caused by the impairment is substantial in terms of his or her own experience. ” A medical diagnosis or physician’s declaration of disability is no longer enough. Even those who support the intent of the law worry that it might have unintended consequences. Among other arguments, supporters hypothesize that the Americans with Disabilities Act creates additional legal risks for employers who then quietly avoid hiring people with disabilities to avoid this risk.
Religious Groups: The debate over the Americans with Disabilities Act led some religious groups to take opposite positions. Groups, such as the Association of Christian Schools International, opposed the ADA in its original form. ACSI opposed the Act primarily because the ADA labeled religious institutions public accommodations, and thus would have required churches to make costly structural changes to ensure access for all. The cost argument advanced by ACSI and others prevailed in keeping religious institutions from being labeled as public accommodations, and thus churches were permitted to remain inaccessible if they chose. In addition to opposing the ADA on grounds of cost, church groups like the National Association of Evangelicals testified against the ADA’s Title I (employment) provisions on grounds of religious liberty. The NAE felt that the regulation of the internal employment of churches was “… an improper intrusion [of] the federal government. “
Business Interests: Many members of the business community opposed the passage of the Americans with Disabilities Act. The U.S. Chamber of Commerce argued that the costs of the ADA would be “enormous” and have “a disastrous impact on many small businesses struggling to survive. ” The National Federation of Independent Businesses, an organization that lobbies for small businesses, called the ADA “a disaster for small business. ” Pro-business conservative commentators joined in opposition, writing that the Americans with Disabilities Act was “an expensive headache to millions” that would not necessarily improve the lives of people with disabilities.
12.2: Performance, Promotion, and Firing
12.2.1: Review Techniques
The four methods of collecting performance review data: objective production, personnel, judgmental evaluation, and peer or self evaluation.
Learning Objective
Explain the rationale and characteristics of review and turnover techniques
Key Points
- The objective production method consists of direct, limited measures such as sales figures, production numbers, and electronic performance monitoring.
- The personnel method involves the recording of withdrawal behaviors, such as absenteeism and accidents.
- In Peer evaluations, members of a group evaluate and appraise the performance of their fellow group members, and in self-assessments, individuals assess and evaluate their own behavior and job performance.
- Strategic Human Resource Management is gaining in popularity over Traditional Human Resource Management.
Key Term
- staff turnover
-
The relative rate at which an employer gains and loses staff.
Example
- The following example portrays how employees can give a company a competitive advantage. IBM releases a new software package. A few months later Microsoft realeases a similar version. This can be easily imitated and thus easy to copy. However, if IBM offers a superior, “knock them out of the park” customer service, they will have a competitive advantage over Microsoft because this is not easily copied. Having a highly skilled and knowedgeable customer service team is difficult for Microsoft to imitate, thus IBM has the advantage.
Turnover Defined
In a human resources context, turnover is the rate at which employees leave an organization. Simple ways to describe it are “how long employees tend to stay” or “the rate of traffic through the revolving door. “
Staff turnover can be optimal when a poorly performing employee decides to leave an organization, or dysfunctional when the high turnover rate increases the costs associated with recruitment and training of new employees, or if good employees consistently decide to leave .
Employee Turnover
Turnover can be optimal when a poorly performing employee decides to leave an organization.
Measuring Turnover
Turnover is measured for individual companies and for their industry as a whole. If an employer is said to have a high turnover relative to its competitors, it means that employees of that company have a shorter average tenure than those of other companies in the same industry. High turnover may be harmful to a company’s productivity if skilled workers are often leaving and the worker population contains a high percentage of novice workers.
In the United States, the average total non-farm seasonally adjusted monthly turnover rate was 3.3% for the period from December 2000 to November 2008. However rates vary widely when compared over different periods of time or different job sectors. For example, during the period 2001 to 2006, the annual turnover rate for all industry sectors averaged 39.6% before seasonal adjustments, while the leisure and hospitality sector experienced an average annual rate of 74.6% during the same period.
Preventing Turnover
Preventing the turnover of employees is important in any business. Without them, the business would be unsuccessful. However, more and more employers today are finding that employees remain for approximately 23 to 24 months, according to the 2006 Bureau of Labor Statistics. The Employment Policy Foundation states that it costs a company an average of $15,000 per employee, which includes separation costs, including paperwork, unemployment; vacancy costs, including overtime or temporary employees; and replacement costs including advertisement, interview time, relocation, training, and decreased productivity when colleagues depart.
Research on employee job turnover has attempted to understand the causes of individual decisions to leave an organization. It has been found that lower performance, lack of reward contingencies for performance, and better external job opportunities are the main causes. Other variables related to turnover are the conditions in the external job market, the availability of other job opportunities, and the length of employee tenure.
Providing a stimulating workplace environment, which fosters happy, motivated, and empowered individuals, lowers employee turnover and absentee rates. Promoting a work environment that fosters personal and professional growth promotes harmony and encouragement on all levels, so the effects are felt company wide.
Continual training and reinforcement also develops a workforce that is competent, consistent, competitive, effective, and efficient. Beginning on the first day of work, providing individuals with the necessary skills to perform their job is important. Before the first day, it is important the interview and hiring process expose new hires to an explanation of the company, so individuals know whether the job is their best choice.
Networking and strategizing within the company provides ongoing performance management and helps build relationships among coworkers. It is also important to motivate employees to focus on customer success, profitable growth, and the company well-being. Employers can keep their employees informed and involved by including them in future plans, new purchases, policy changes, as well as introducing new employees to the employees who have gone above and beyond in meetings. Engagement shows employees that they are valuable through information or recognition rewards and makes them feel included.
In addition, by paying above-market wages, the worker’s motivation to leave the job and look for a job elsewhere will be reduced. This strategy makes sense because it is often expensive to train replacement workers.
When companies hire the best people, new hired talent and veterans are enabled to reach company goals, maximizing the investment of each employee. Taking the time to listen to employees and making them feel involved will create loyalty, in turn reducing turnover and allowing for growth.
12.2.2: Managing Up and Employee Feedback
Organizations derive significant value from empowering employees to help manage their managers.
Learning Objective
Identify the value of empowering employees to provide feedback to managers
Key Points
- Management can be viewed as a functional skill, just like any other field. As a result, the individuals being managed will be quite valuable in assessing how skilled a manager is at their function.
- Not all management is from manager to employee. It is also critical for employees to assess management, and provide meaningful feedback about their performance.
- Through promoting upwards management, organizations derive the substantial benefit of an iterative improvement between both managers and employees through a feedback loop.
- Effective evaluations of performance should include a work assessment, comparison to established objectives, room for providing qualitative feedback, and rewards.
Key Term
- feedback
-
Providing observations and suggestions based on current performance to achieve improvements.
Management is more complex than a simple top-down mentality. Management is a functional discipline in many ways, where the ability for an individual to successfully manage is the professional skill being assessed. Just as an accountant is measured by their performance producing accurate and timely financial submissions, so too is a manager measured by the satisfaction and productivity of their employees.
Why Manage Up
As an employee, it is important to organizational success to manage one’s manager to some degree. This is because managers are working towards becoming better managers, and the people in the best position to help them accomplish this objective are the employees themselves. Good managers will value employees willing to provide feedback, make objective observations, and help managers grow.
Through encouraging employees across the organization to manage up, organizations capture the benefit of having an open feedback loop between work groups and their managers, where both parties can potentially improve their performance. Managing down improves employees’ ability to accomplish their tasks, while managing up improves management’s ability to enable employees.
Effective Evaluation in the Workplace
A proper evaluation will have different requirements based upon the function being evaluated. However, most effective evaluation approaches will include the following:
- Assessment – For both managers managing down and employees managing up, some form of formal assessment is useful in enabling effective evaluations. This assessment should focus on strengths and weaknesses, usually utilizing some sort of sliding scale. An effective assessment should be as objective as possible, focusing on actionable areas of improvement.
- Objectives – Evaluation requires an understanding of what that individual should be trying to accomplish, and some form of benchmark to measure if these objectives are being met. It can also be useful to provide feedback which can actively be applied to achieving these objectives.
- Sharing Feedback – Aside from assessment metrics and objectives, good feedback also tends to include qualitative thinking. It’s not always as simple as rating an individual’s performance on a scale of 1-10. More often comments and discussions are necessary for feedback to be useful. Any evaluation in the workplace should have some outlet for this, be it 1-to-1 discussions or more formal quarterly feedback sessions.
- Rewards and Consequences – Finally, feedback and evaluations must be tied to some sort of motivating outcome for the individual receiving it. If a manager is performing well, and the team is satisfied, it would be reasonable to provide the manager a bonus or a raise. Similarly, if employees are exceeding expectations, the same rules apply.
Feedback Loop
This image demonstrates the basic concept of iterative feedback, where suggestions lead to evolving behavior.
12.2.3: Promotions
When a person receives a promotion, they are rewarded for good performance by receiving a higher rank or position in the organization.
Learning Objective
Explain the impact of a promotion
Key Points
- A person’s promotion can involve advancement in several areas including: designation, salary and benefits, and the type of job activities they have to perform.
- The power that hiring and promoting managers have in terms of awarding promotions differs from one organization to the next.
- The degree to which job activities change varies between industries and sectors. In some fields, even after an employee is promoted, they continue to do similar work and the differences may be in the complexity of the task rather than the activity.
Key Term
- Promotion
-
the advancement of an employee’s rank or position in an organizational hierarchy system.
Promotions
A promotion is the advancement of an employee’s rank or position in an organizational hierarchy system .A promotion may be an employee’s reward for a good performance, such as a positive appraisal. Before a company promotes an employee to a particular position, it ensures that the person is able to handle the added responsibilities by screening the employee with interviews and tests and giving them training or on-the-job experience.
Organizational chart
A military organizational chart
A Promotion’s Impact on Salary & Benefits
A promotion can involve advancement in terms of designation, salary, and benefits. In some organizations, the type of job activities may change a great deal. In many companies and public service organizations, more senior positions have a different title: an analyst who is promoted becomes a principal analyst, an economist becomes a senior economist, and an associate professor becomes a full professor.
The amount of salary increase associated with a promotion varies between industries and sectors, and depends on what parts of the hierarchical ladder an employee is moving. In some industries or sectors, there may be only a modest increase in salary for a promotions; in other fields, a promotion may substantially increase an employee’s salary.
The same is true with benefits and other privileges. In some industries, the promotion only changes the title and salary, and there are no additional benefits or privileges (beyond the psycho-social benefits that may accrue to the individual). In some not-for-profit organizations, the values of the organization or the tightness of funding may result in there being only modest salary increases associated with a promotion. In other industries, especially in private sector companies, a promotion to senior management may carry a number of benefits, such as stock options, a reserved parking space, a corner office with a secretary, and bonus pay for good performance.
A Promotion’s Impact on Job Activities
The degree to which job activities change varies between industries and sectors. In some fields, even after an employee is promoted, they continue to do similar work. For example, a policy analyst in the federal government who is promoted to the post of senior policy analyst will continue to do similar tasks such as writing briefing notes and carrying out policy research. The differences may be in the complexity of the files to which the individual is assigned, or in the sensitivity of the issues with which they are asked to deal.
In other fields, when an employee is promoted, their work changes substantially. For example, whereas a staff engineer in a civil engineering firm will spend their time doing engineering inspections and working with blueprints, a senior engineer may spend most of their day in meetings with senior managers and reading financial reports.
Who Can Grant a Promotion
Different organizations grant hiring and promoting managers different levels of discretion with which to award promotions. In some parts of the private sector, the senior management has a very high level of discretion to award promotions. They can promote employees without going through as many procedures or formalities, such as testing, screening, and interviewing. In the public sector and in academia, there are usually many more checks and balances in place to prevent favoritism or bias.
In many Western public service bodies, when a manager wants to promote an employee, they must follow a number of steps, such as advertising the position, accepting applications from qualified candidates, screening and interviewing candidates, and then documenting why they chose a particular candidate. In academia, a similar approach is used, with the added safeguard of including several layers of committee review of the proposed promotion using committees that include members of other faculty and experts from other universities.
12.2.4: Terminations
Terminations occur in a variety of ways, both voluntary and involuntary, and determine the employee’s future relationship with the employer.
Learning Objective
Explain the various methods of termination of one’s work
Key Points
- Being fired is generally thought of as the employee’s fault, and therefore is mostly considered dishonorable and a sign of failure. Being laid off is a less severe form of involuntary termination because it is most often caused by economic cycles or the company’s need to restructure itself.
- Firms that wish for an employee to exit on his or her own accord but do not wish to pursue firing, may degrade the employee’s working conditions, hoping that he or she will leave “voluntarily. ” This type of forced resignation is considered illegal in certain areas.
- Whether a person’s ability to get a new job is negatively impacted by the termination or the person has the possibility to return to the former company in the future depends on the nature of the termination.
Key Term
- Dismissal
-
Dismissal is where the employer chooses to require the employee to leave, generally for a reason which is the fault of the employee. The most common colloquial term for dismissal in America is “getting fired” whereas in Britain the term “getting the sack” is used.
Example
- Rehire post-termination: Public school teachers in New York who are laid off are placed on a preferred eligible list for employment in the school district where they were laid off for seven years. If a teacher who was laid off applies to fill a job opening, he or she is given priority over other applicants.
Terminations can occur in a variety of methods, both voluntary and involuntary. The type of termination will determine the employee’s future relationship (or lack of) with the employer.
Being Fired
To be fired is generally thought of to be the employee’s fault, and therefore is considered in most cases to be dishonorable and a sign of failure. Often, it may hinder the new job seeker’s chances of finding new employment, particularly if he or she has been fired from earlier jobs. Job seekers sometimes do not mention jobs which they were fired from on their résumés; accordingly, unexplained gaps in employment, and refusal to contact previous employers are often regarded as “red flags. “
Being Laid-Off
A less severe form of involuntary termination is often referred to as a layoff. A layoff is usually not strictly related to personal performance, but instead due to economic cycles or the company’s need to restructure itself, the firm itself going out of business, or a change in the function of the employer. In a postmodern risk economy, such as that of the United States, a large proportion of workers may be laid off at some time in their life, and often for reasons unrelated to performance or ethics.
Often, layoffs occur as a result of “downsizing”, “reduction in force”, or “redundancy. ” These are not technically classified as firings; laid-off employees’ positions are terminated and not refilled, because either the company wishes to reduce its size or operations or otherwise lacks the economic stability to retain the position. In some cases, a laid-off employee may eventually be offered their old position again by his or her respective company, though by this time he or she may have found a new job.
Attrition
Some companies resort to attrition as a means to reduce their workforce. Under such a plan, no employees are forced to leave their jobs. However, those who do depart voluntarily are not replaced. Additionally, employees are given the option to resign in exchange for a fixed amount of money, frequently a few years of their salary. Such plans have been carried out by the United States Federal Government under President Bill Clinton during the 1990s, and by the Ford Motor Company in 2005. However, “layoff” may be specifically addressed and defined differently in the articles of a contract in the case of unionized work.
Mutual Agreement Termination
Some terminations occur as a result of mutual agreement between the employer and employee. When this happens, it is sometimes debatable if the termination was truly mutual. In many of these cases, it was originally the employer’s wish for the employee to depart, but the employer offered the mutual termination agreement in order to soften the firing (as in a forced resignation). But there are also times when a termination date is agreed upon before the employment starts in an employment contract.
Forced Resignation
Firms that wish for an employee to exit on his or her own accord but do not wish to pursue firing, may degrade the employee’s working conditions, hoping that he or she will leave “voluntarily” . The employee may be moved to a different geographical location, assigned to an undesirable shift, given too few hours if part time, demoted, or assigned to work in uncomfortable conditions. Other forms of manipulation may be used and often these tactics are done so that the employer won’t have to fill out termination papers in jurisdictions without at-will employment. In addition, with a few exceptions, employees who voluntarily leave generally cannot collect unemployment benefits. Such tactics may amount to constructive dismissal, which is illegal in some jurisdictions.
Gen. David H. Petraeus Retires August 2011
Most military or armed forces personnel are subject to a type of forced resignation. Retirement age for military personnel is between 55 to 65, no matter their level of performance.
Rehire Following Termination
Depending on the circumstances, one whose employment has been terminated may or may not be able to be rehired by the same employer. If the decision to terminate was the employee’s, the willingness of the employer to rehire is often contingent upon the relationship the employee had with the employer, the amount of notice given by the employee prior to departure, and the needs of the employer.
In some cases, when an employee departed on good terms, he or she may be given special priority by the employer when seeking rehire. An employee may be terminated without prejudice, meaning that the fired employee may be rehired readily for the same or a similar job in the future. This is usually true in the case of a layoff. Conversely, a person can be terminated with prejudice, meaning that an employer will not rehire the former employee to a similar job in the future. This can be for many reasons, including: incompetence, misconduct, insubordination or “attitude. “
12.2.5: Retirements
When a person retires, they stop working completely or semi-retire by reducing their hours.
Learning Objective
Explain post-retirement financing
Key Points
- Many people choose to retire when they are eligible for private or public pension benefits, although some are forced to retire when physical conditions no longer allow the person to work or as a result of legislation concerning their position.
- Retirement in most countries is of recent origin, being introduced during the late 19th and early 20th centuries. Previously, low life expectancy and the absence of pension arrangements meant that most workers continued to work until death.
- When retiring prior to age 59½, there is a 10 percent IRS penalty on withdrawals from a retirement plan like a 401(k) or IRA.
Key Terms
- Individual Retirement Account
-
An Individual Retirement Arrangement (IRA) is a form of retirement plan that provides tax advantages for retirement savings in the United States. The term encompasses an individual retirement account; a trust or custodial account set up for the exclusive benefit of taxpayers or their beneficiaries; and an individual retirement annuity, by which the taxpayers purchase an annuity contract or an endowment contract from a life insurance company
- Retirement
-
Retirement is the point where a person stops employment completely. A person may also semi-retire by reducing work hours.
Examples
- These days, many baby boomers are semi-retired. They may have taken early retirement from the companies they worked for, but like Brent Bowers, who took early retirement from the New York Times, they still work for themselves. They fall into a category of graying entrepreneurs.
- A 401(K) is an example of an individual retirement plan.
Retirement is the point where a person stops employment completely. A person may also semi-retire by reducing work hours. Many people choose to retire when they are eligible for private or public pension benefits, although some are forced to retire when physical conditions no longer allow the person to work (by illness or accident) or as a result of legislation concerning their position.
International Views on Retirement
In most countries, the idea of retirement is of recent origin, being introduced during the late 19th and early 20th centuries. Previously, low life expectancy and the absence of pension arrangements meant that most workers continued to work until death. Germany was the first country to introduce retirement. Most developed countries today have systems to provide pensions or retirement, which may be sponsored by employers and/or the state. In many poorer countries, support for the old is still mainly provided through the family.
Retirement with a pension is considered a right of the worker in many societies. Hard ideological, social, cultural and political battles have been fought over whether this is a right. In many western countries, this right is mentioned in national constitutions. While conventional wisdom has it that one can retire and take 7 percent or more out of a portfolio year after year, this would not have worked in the past. Making periodic inflation-adjusted withdrawals from retirement savings can make meaningless many assumptions that are based on long term average investment returns.
Post-Retirement Finances
Those contemplating early retirement will want to know if they have enough to survive possible bear markets. The history of the U.S. stock market shows that one would need to live on about 4 percent of the initial portfolio per year to ensure that the portfolio is not depleted before the end of the retirement. This allows for increasing withdrawals with inflation to maintain a consistent spending ability throughout the retirement, and to continue making withdrawals even in dramatic and prolonged bear markets. The 4 percent figure does not assume any pension or change in spending levels throughout the retirement.
When retiring prior to age 59½, there is a 10 percent IRS penalty on withdrawals from a retirement plan like a 401(k) plan or a Traditional Individual Retirement Account (IRA). Exceptions apply under certain circumstances. At age 59 and six months, the penalty-free status is achieved and the 10 percent IRS penalty no longer applies. To avoid the 10 percent penalty prior to age 59½, a person should consult a lawyer about the use of IRS rule 72 T. This rule must be applied for with the IRS. It allows the distribution of a IRA account prior to age 59½ in equal amounts of a period of either 5 years or until the age of 59½, which ever is the longest time period without a 10 percent penalty. Taxes still must be paid on the distributions.
Navy Retiree
In addition to traditional retirement benefits from 401(k)s or IRAs, military personnel are eligible for veterans benefits from things such as the G.I. Bill.
World Pop 65+, retirement age
This bubble map shows the global distribution of population aged at least 65 years in 2005 as a percentage of the top nation (China – 99,142,000).
12.2.6: Attrition
An employee leaving one company to join another one is known as attrition.
Learning Objective
Explain how and why people leave their company
Key Points
- The contract between employees and employers specifies the responsibility of each party in the case that the employment relationship ends.
- Personal reasons and the state of the company itself make up the reasons an employee may decide to leave and join a new organization.
- Attrition rate (%) = number of employees resigned for the month / (total number of employees at the start of the month + number of employees joined for that month – number of employees resigned) x 100.
Key Term
- severance pay
-
Money paid as compensation to someone whose employment is ended.
Example
- Attrition is a key concern in the auto industry as it matures and becomes more and more competitive. In addition to ensuring that salary needs are met, companies also must make sure that they offer employees growth opportunities within the company to maintain them.
Attrition
An employee or employer may end the relationship at any time. This is referred to as at-will employment. The contract between the two parties specifies the responsibilities of each when ending the relationship and may include requirements such as notice periods, severance pay, and security measures.
Employees leaving a company to join another company is known as attrition.
The top reasons why people change careers:
- The downsizing or the restructuring of an organization (54%)
- New challenges or opportunities that arise (30%)
- Poor or ineffective leadership (25%)
- Having a poor relationship with a manager (22%)
- For better work-life balance (21%)
- Contributions are not being recognized (21%)
- For better compensation and benefits (18%)
- For better alignment with personal and organizational values (17%)
- Personal strengths and capabilities are not a good fit with an organization (16%)
- The financial instability of an organization (13%)
- An organization relocated (12%)
Churn Rate
In some business contexts, churn rate could also refer to high employee turnover within a company. For instance, most fast food restaurants have a routinely high churn rate among employees. For larger companies, such as Fortune 500 companies, the attrition rate tends to be much lower compared to a fast food franchise. The company size and industry also play a key role in attrition rate. An “acceptable” attrition rate for a given company is relative to its industry. It would not likely be useful to compare the attrition of fast food employees with a Fortune 500 company in a corporate setting.
Attrition Rate
Churn rate can also describe the number of employees that move within a certain period. For example, the annual churn rate would be the total number of moves completed in a 12-month period divided by the average number of occupants during the same 12-month period. Monthly and quarterly churn rates can also be calculated.
Formulae:
Attrition rate (%) = number of employees resigned for the month / (total number of employees at the start of the month + number of employees joined for that month – number of employees resigned) x 100
Labor Economics – Short Run Supply
The income and leisure trade-off in the short run
12.3: Compensation
12.3.1: Forms of Financial Compensation
Compensation is a monetary benefit given to workers in return for services provided by them and it can take a number of different forms.
Learning Objective
Explain each part of a total rewards system including salary, benefits, incentive pay, and an employee stock option (ESO)
Key Points
- There are six basic forms of compensation: salary, short-term incentives (STIs or bonuses), long-term incentive plans (LTIPs), benefits, paid expenses, and insurance.
- Short-term incentives are usually formula-driven, whereas bonuses are awarded after-the-fact and are usually discretionary.
- Wages are given to workers whereas salaries are given to employees. They are both affected by market forces, as well as other factors, such as tradition, social structure, or government regulation (e.g., minimum wage laws).
- Executive pay is usually a mixture of these different forms of compensation, with a salary, bonuses, benefits and expenses, and shares or call options on company stock.
- Salaries are often seen as part of a “total rewards” system that includes benefits and perquisites.
- Employee stock options (ESOs) are sometimes offered to management, with the objective of giving them an incentive to behave in a way that boosts the company’s stock price.
Key Terms
- perquisite
-
Any monetary or other incidental benefit beyond salary.
- salary
-
A fixed amount of money paid to a worker, usually measured on a monthly or annual basis, not hourly, as wages. Implies a degree of professionalism and/or autonomy.
Examples
- Different companies offer different types of stock options to their employees, allowing them to buy company stock at a discounted price. One such scheme, for example, may allow employees to buy shares of the company by calculating the mean share price over the last six months, and offering a discount of 10% or 15% on that price to employees.
- Different companies offer different types of stock options to their employees, allowing them to buy company stock at a discounted price. One such scheme, for example, may allow employees to buy shares of the company by calculating the mean share price over the last six months, and offering a discount of 10% or 15% on that price to employees.
There are six basic tools of compensation or remuneration:
- Salary
- Short-term incentives (STIs), sometimes known as bonuses
- Long-term incentive plans (LTIP)
- Employee benefits
- Paid expenses (perquisites)
- Insurance
A salary is a form of renumeration paid periodically by an employer to an employee, the amount and frequency of which may be specified in an employment contract. From a business point of view, salary can be deemed as the cost of acquiring human resources for running operations and is then termed personnel expense or salary expense.
Salary
A salary is a form of remuneration paid periodically by an employer to an employee, the amount and frequency of which may be specified in an employment contract.
In accounting practice, salaries are typically recorded in payroll accounts. While there is no first pay stub for the first work-for-pay exchange, the first salaried work would have required a human society advanced enough to have a barter system to allow work to be exchanged for goods or other work. More significantly, it presupposes the existence of organized employers—perhaps a government or a religious body—that would facilitate work-for-hire exchanges on a regular enough basis to constitute salaried work.
Today, the idea of a salary continues to evolve as part of a system of all the combined rewards that employers offer to employees. Salary (also now known as fixed pay) is coming to be seen as part of a “total rewards” system, which includes bonuses, incentive pay, and commissions, benefits and perquisites (or perks), and various other tools which help employers link rewards to an employee’s measured performance. An employee stock option (ESO) is a call option on the common stock of a company, granted by the company to an employee as part of the employee’s remuneration package.
The objective is to give employees an incentive to behave in ways that will boost the company’s stock price. If the company’s stock market price rises above the call price, the employee would exercise the option, pay the call price, and would be issued with ordinary shares in the company. The employee would experience a direct financial benefit of the difference between the market and call prices. If the market price falls below the stock call price at the time the option needs to be exercised, the employee is not obligated to call on the option, in which case the option will lapse.
Restrictions on the option (such as vesting and limited transferability) attempt to align the holder’s interest with those of the business shareholders. Employee stock options are mostly offered to management as part of their executive compensation package. They may also be offered to non-executive level staff, especially by businesses that are not yet profitable, insofar as they may have few other means of compensation.
Alternatively, employee-type stock options can be offered to non-employees: suppliers, consultants, lawyers, and promoters for services rendered. Employee stock options are similar to warrants, which are call options issued by a company with respect to its own stock.
12.3.2: Pay Systems
Organizations can remunerate labor according to different criteria, including hours worked, output produced, or a combination of the two.
Learning Objective
Identify the different wage payment systems used by organizations by which they remunerate labor
Key Points
- Under a time rate system, the worker is paid by hour, day, week or month. Under a high wage plan, the worker is paid highly in exchange for a high level of performance.
- Under a piecework system, the worker is paid according to output. A straight piecework system is completely independent of time taken, whereas a differential piecework system rewards more efficient workers.
- A combination of time and piecework systems also exist, such as the Gantt Task and Bonus System, and Emerson’s Efficiency System (see examples).
- Under a lockstep compensation system, salaries are based purely on seniority within an organization. This system is easy to administer, but can reduce incentives for employees to perform.
Key Terms
- remuneration
-
a payment for work done; wages, salary, emolument
- wage
-
An amount of money paid to a worker for a specified quantity of work, usually expressed on an hourly basis.
- contingent worker
-
a provisional group of employees who work for an organization on a non-permanent basis
Examples
- Frederick Winslow Taylor (1896) introduced a piecework system that sought to counter the negative incentives of a straight piecework system. His system offered two different rates for the same job: A higher pay rate if the work is finished quickly and with high quality, and a lower rate for slower, lower quality work.
- Frederick Winslow Taylor (1896) introduced a piecework system that sought to counter the negative incentives of a straight piecework system. His system offered two different rates for the same job: a higher paying rate if the work is finishes quickly and with high quality, and a lower rate for slower, lower quality work.
- The Gantt task and bonus system is a combination of time and piece work. Under this system, the worker is paid on a time basis if the work is below a certain standard, and a piece rate basis if it meets or exceeds this standard.
Wage payment systems are the different methods adopted by organizations by which they remunerate labor There exists several systems of employee wage payment and incentives, which can be classified as following:
Time Rate System: Under this system, the worker is paid by the hour, day, week, or month.
High Wage Plan: Under this plan, a worker is paid a wage rate that is substantially higher than the rate prevailing in the area or in the industry. In return, he is expected to maintain a very high level of performance, both quantitative and qualitative.
Measured Day Work: According to this method, the hourly rate of the time worker consists of two parts viz, fixed and variable. The fixed element is based on the nature of the job (i.e., the rate for this part is fixed on the basis of job requirements). The variable portion varies for each worker depending upon his merit rating and the cost-of-living index.
Differential Time Rate: According to this method, different hourly rates are fixed for different levels of efficiency.
Payment by Results Piece Work Straight Piecework System: The wages of the worker depends upon his output and rate of each unit of output; it is in fact independent of the time taken by him.
Piecework system
A family in New York City making dolls’ clothes by piecework in 1912. Each family member earns money based on how many pieces they produce.
Differential Piece Work System: This system provides for higher rewards to more efficient workers. For different levels of output below and above the standard, different piece rates are applicable.
Taylor Differential Piece Work System Merrick Differential Piece Rate System Combination of Time and Piece Work Gantt Task and Bonus System: The system consists of paying a worker on a time basis if he does not attain the standard and on piece basis (high rate) if he does.
Emerson’s Efficiency System: Under this system, minimum time wages are guaranteed. Beyond a certain efficiency level, bonus in addition to minimum day wages is given.
Renumeration systems are procedures for determining an employee’s salary.
For example, lockstep compensation is a system of remuneration in which the employees’ salaries are based purely on their seniority within the organization. In the legal profession, where this system is most commonly found, all law school graduates hired by a law firm who graduated in the same year, receive the same base pay, regardless of the background, experience, or ability of each. During the late-2000s financial crisis, some law firms began replacing the lockstep system with “merit-based” systems.The lockstep system of compensation has the benefit of being easy to administer, reducing internal competition within firms, and maintaining a single company philosophy. At the same time, however, it has been criticized for being inefficient and reducing incentives for employees to improve performance.
12.3.3: Standard Benefits
Human resource requisites regarding employee compensation include a wide variety of common benefits beyond salary.
Learning Objective
List the various standard benefits human resource professionals must take into account when compensating employees
Key Points
- Compensation is more than just salary. Employees require a wide variety of supports in order to work and live comfortably.
- Benefits are a great source of differentiation and talent recruiting for organizations, as excellent benefits can tip the scales in an organization’s favor when negotiating with new potential employees (as well as when trying to retain current talent).
- Standard benefits can vary fairly widely, but generally revolve around health care, transportation, retirement, various forms of insurance, relocation, dependent support, childcare, and a strong work-life balance.
Key Terms
- dependent
-
An individual who an employee supports financially, often a spouse or a child.
- pension
-
An annuity paid regularly as benefit due to a retired employee, serviceman etc. in consideration of past services, originally and chiefly by a government but also by various private pension schemes.
Compensation incorporates more than just salary, and benefits are a key legal, motivational, and organizational consideration when it comes to employee relations. Organizations provide a wide range of benefits for employees, and understanding what can be expected as a new employee is an important aspect of negotiation.
Standard Benefits
Standard benefits span a wide variety of employee needs, and represent a key reason for employees to find full-time employers who provide a full selection of standard benefits. Human resource professionals must familiarize themselves with the organizational offerings revolving around:
- Relocation assistance – Often enough, hiring employees requires some percentage of those employees to move from one location to another. Talent is found all across the globe, and motivating talent to come to you requires assistance with visas, housing, flights, and a wide variety of other costs.
- Medical, prescription, vision and dental plans – Particularly in countries with poor social benefits, medical insurance is a requisite for hiring full-time talent (sometimes even legally required). In socially supportive countries, these benefits are provided by the government as a basic need.
- Dependent care – Just as noted above regarding health insurance, many working professionals have individuals who are dependent upon them (spouses and children primarily). These individuals are covered under group health insurance plans for that given employee.
- Retirement benefit plans (pension, 401(k), 403(b)) – Employees are entitled to various retirement-related benefits such as long-term investments, pensions, and other savings for retirement age. The primary draw for most of these benefits is the tax benefits, whereas withdrawing this capital past the retirement age is tax free.
- Group-term life and long term care insurance plans – Life insurance and long-term care are benefits paid by employers to insure individuals against various types of risks and disasters. Employees with life insurance or long-term care insurance will see their dependents (and themselves, in the case of long-term care) supported if a serious ailment or tragedy occurs.
- Legal assistance plans – Not quite as standard as the rest of the benefits above, legal assistance plans can be put in place for jobs where personal liability is high. Legal assistance is expensive, and in circumstances where legal assistance is in place the employee will be covered by organizational resources.
- Child care benefits – Supporting employee families is absolutely critical to retaining great talent. With two working parents being quite common, having childcare options in place for employees is a key benefit, allowing parents to focus on their work (not to mention the huge cost savings of group plans via an organization).
- Transportation benefits – Another common benefit is paid transportation. Particularly in countries/regions where public transportation is the norm (as opposed to personal vehicles), it’s quite common for the employer to pay for all work related transportation.
- Paid time off (PTO) in the form of vacation and sick pay – All organizations must provide paid time off, vacation, and sick pay in certain circumstances. Many countries have stringent legislation governing minimum requirements for paid time off and vacation leave to ensure the people in that country have a healthy working environment.
While there are other, less common benefits that can be provided, this list is a comprehensive overview of what employees can normally expect from employers in regards to standard benefits of employment.
12.3.4: Fringe Benefits
Fringe benefits are various indirect benefits, often of a more discretionary nature than standard benefits.
Learning Objective
Explain fringe benefits
Key Points
- The term was coined during World War II to describe the various indirect benefits which industry had devised to attract and retain labor when direct wage increases were prohibited.
- Companies that offer such work-life perks aim to raise employee satisfaction and thus corporate loyalty.
- Certain fringe benefits may be excluded from an employee’s gross income and are thus not subject to federal income taxes. An example of this is flexible spending accounts, 401(k), and 403(b). Accident, health, and life insurance plans also act in this way.
Key Terms
- 401(k)
-
401(k) are “defined contribution plans” with annual contributions limited (currently to $17,000). Contributions are “tax-deferred” in that they are deducted from paychecks before taxes and then taxed when a withdrawal is made from the 401(k) account. Depending on the employer’s program, a portion of the employee’s contribution may be matched by the employer.
- tax shelter
-
A legal structure that reduces tax liability for a person or that person’s assets.
- 403 (b)
-
A U.S. tax-advantaged retirement savings plan available for public education organizations, some non-profit employers, cooperative hospital service organizations, and self-employed ministers in the United States. It has tax treatment similar to a 401(k) plan.
Example
- Examples of fringe benefits, depending on employee seniority and job requirement, are take-home vehicles, hotel stays, and first choice of such things as job assignments and vacation scheduling, as well as first option to apply to certain internal vacancies. Other fringe benefits can include employee discount programs at shops, hotels, gyms, movie theaters, and so on.
The term “fringe benefits” was coined by the War Labor Board during World War II to describe the various indirect benefits which industry had devised to attract and retain labor when direct wage increases were prohibited. The term perks (also perqs) is often used colloquially to refer to those benefits of a more discretionary nature.
Perks are often given to employees who are doing notably well or have seniority. Common perks are hotel stays, free refreshments, leisure activities on work time, stationery, allowances for lunch, and take-home vehicles . When multiple choices exist, select employees may also be given first choice on such things as job assignments and vacation scheduling. They may also be given first chance at job promotions when vacancies exist.
Company Car
One of the perks this lifeguard enjoys is the use of a company car.
Benefits may also include formal or informal employee discount programs that grant workers access to specialized offerings from local and regional vendors (e.g., movies and theme park tickets, wellness programs, discounted shopping, hotels and resorts, and so on). Companies who offer these types of work-life perks seek to raise employee satisfaction, corporate loyalty, and worker retention by providing valuable benefits that go beyond a base salary figure.
Some fringe benefits (for example, accident and health plans, and group-term life insurance coverage up to US $50,000) may be excluded from the employee’s gross income and are therefore not subject to federal income tax in the United States. Some function as tax shelters (for example, flexible spending accounts, 401(k),and 403 (b)). Fringe benefits are also thought of as the costs of keeping employees other than salary. These benefit rates are typically calculated using fixed percentages that vary depending on the employee’s classification and often change from year to year.
12.4: Developing Employees
12.4.1: Training
Training is the acquisition of knowledge, skills, and competencies through a conscious skills development program.
Learning Objective
Compare and contrast on-the-job and off-the-job training
Key Points
- Training has specific goals of improving one’s capability, capacity, and performance, so that he or she may perform his or her job with higher quality and more efficiency.
- On-the-job training takes place in a normal working situation, and has a general reputation as being most effective for vocational work. Off-the-job training takes place away from normal work situations, and has proven more effective in inculcating concepts and ideas.
- An On the Job Training Plan or an OJT Plan is a detailed plan of what is to be covered, how long it will take, and what the training outcomes should be.
- A more recent development in job training is the On the Job Training Plan or OJT Plan. According to the United States Department of the Interior, a proper OJT plan should include an overview of the subjects to be covered, the number of hours the training is expected to take, an estimated completion date, and a method by which the training will be evaluated.
Key Terms
- on-the-job training
-
Training that takes place in regular working situations using actual tools and equipment that trainees will use when fully trained.
- off-the-job training
-
Training that takes place away from normal work situations, and tends to be more effective in inculcating concepts and ideas.
Example
- Training might involve days of work where employees learn to operate machinery, review safety practices, or be introduced to workplace decorum.
The concept behind training is for the trainee to acquire knowledge, skills, and competencies from the trainer as a result of being taught vocational or practical skills. The trainee gains knowledge that relates to specific useful competencies in his or her field. Training has specific goals of improving one’s capability, capacity, and performance. It forms the core of apprenticeships and provides the backbone of content at institutes of technology (also known as technical colleges or polytechnics). These activities are often focused upon, and evaluated against, the job that an individual currently holds.
Types of Training
One can generally categorize training as on-the-job or off-the-job:
On-the-job training takes place in a normal working situation, using the actual tools, equipment, documents or materials that trainees will use once they are fully trained. On-the-job training has a general reputation as being most effective for vocational work.
Off-the-job training takes place away from normal work situations—implying that the employee does not count as a directly productive worker while such training takes place. Off-the-job training has the advantage in that it allows people to get away from work and concentrate more thoroughly on the training itself. This type of training has proven more effective in inculcating concepts and ideas .
An astronaut in training.
An Example of Training
A more recent development in job training is the On the Job Training Plan or OJT Plan. According to the United States Department of the Interior, a proper OJT plan should include:
- An overview of the subjects to be covered;
- The number of hours the training is expected to take, with an estimated completion date;
- A method by which the training will be evaluated.
The stakeholders in training and development are categorized into several classes. The sponsors of training and development are senior managers. The clients of training and development are business planners. Line managers are responsible for coaching, resources, and performance. The participants are those who actually undergo the processes. The facilitators are Human Resources management staff. And the providers are specialists in the field. Each of these groups has its own agenda and motivations, which sometimes conflict with the agendas and motivations of the others.
12.4.2: Long-Term Development
Professional development refers to skills and knowledge attained for both personal development and career advancement.
Learning Objective
Outline the various methods used for long term professional development
Key Points
- Those who engage in professional development share a common purpose of enhancing their ability to do their work. At the heart of professional development is the individual’s interest in lifelong learning and increasing their own skills and knowledge.
- There are a variety of approaches to professional development, including consultation, coaching, communities of practice, lesson study, mentoring, reflective supervision and technical assistance.
- Professional development on the job may develop or enhance process skills, sometimes referred to as leadership skills, as well as task skills. Some examples for process skills are ‘effectiveness skills,’ ‘team functioning skills,’ and ‘systems thinking skills’.
- The 21st century has seen a significant growth in online professional development. Content providers incorporate collaborative platforms such as discussion boards and wikis, thereby encouraging and facilitating interaction, and optimizing training effectiveness.
- The 21st century has seen a significant growth in online professional development. Content providers incorporate collaborative platforms such as discussion boards and wikis, thereby encouraging and facilitating interaction, and optimizing training effectiveness.
Key Terms
- technical assistance
-
A method of professional development that aims to assist individuals and their organization to improve by offering resources and information, supporting networking and change efforts.
- reflective supervision
-
A method of professional development which aims to support, develop, and ultimately evaluate the performance of employees through a process of inquiry that encourages their understanding and articulation of the rationale for their own practices.
- communities of practice
-
Approach to professional development by engaging in shared inquiry and learning with people who have a common goal.
Examples
- Many American states have professional development requirements for school teachers. For example, Arkansas teachers must complete 60 hours of documented professional development activities annually. Professional development credits are named differently from state to state. For example, teachers in Indiana are required to earn 90 Continuing Renewal Units (CRUs) per year; in Massachusetts, teachers need 150 Professional Development Points (PDPs); and in Georgia, must earn 10 Professional Learning Units (PLUs). American and Canadian nurses, as well as those in the United Kingdom, are required to participate in formal and informal professional development (earning Continuing education units, or CEUs) in order to maintain professional registration. Other groups such as engineering and geoscience regulatory bodies also have mandatory professional development requirements.
- Some examples of approaches to professional development include the case study method, consultation, coaching, communities of practice, lesson study, mentoring, reflective supervision, etc.
Long Term Development
In addition to the basic training required for a trade, occupation, or profession, observers of the labor-market recognize the need to continue training beyond initial qualifications: to maintain, upgrade, and update skills throughout working life. This is known as professional development.
Professional development refers to skills and knowledge attained for both personal development and career advancement. Professional development encompasses all types of facilitated learning opportunities, ranging from college degrees to formal coursework, conferences, and informal learning opportunities situated in practice. It has been described as intensive and collaborative, ideally incorporating an evaluative stage. There are a variety of approaches to professional development, including consultation, coaching, communities of practice, lesson study, mentoring, reflective supervision and technical assistance.
Who Participates and Why?
A wide variety of people, such as teachers, military officers and non-commissioned officers, health care professionals, lawyers, accountants and engineers engage in professional development. Individuals may participate in professional development because of an interest in lifelong learning, a sense of moral obligation, to maintain and improve professional competence, enhance career progression, keep abreast of new technology and practice, or to comply with professional regulatory organizations.
Many American states have professional development requirements for school teachers. For example, Arkansas teachers must complete 60 hours of documented professional development activities annually. American and Canadian nurses, as well as those in the United Kingdom, are required to participate in formal and informal professional development to maintain professional registration. Other groups such as engineering and geoscience regulatory bodies also have mandatory professional development requirements.
Approaches
In a broad sense, professional development may include formal types of vocational education, typically post-secondary or poly-technical training leading to a qualification or credential required to obtain or retain employment . Professional development may also come in the form of pre-service or in-service professional development programs. These programs may be formal, or informal, group, or individualized. Individuals may pursue professional development independently, or programs may be offered by human resource departments. Professional development on the job may develop or enhance process skills, sometimes referred to as leadership skills, as well as task skills. Some examples for process skills are ‘effectiveness skills,’ ‘team functioning skills,’ and ‘systems thinking skills. ‘
CPR Training
This first-aid course is a form of professional development. While not directly relevant to, say, teachers, it nonetheless provides an important skill that may be used in case of an emergency, and thus would indirectly benefit a teacher who learns these skills.
Some examples of approaches to professional development include:
Case Study Method – the case study method is a teaching approach that consists of presenting the students with a case, putting them in the role of a decision maker facing the problem.
Consultation – to assist an individual or group of individuals to clarify and address immediate concerns by following a systematic problem-solving process.
Coaching – to enhance a person’s competencies in a specific skill area by providing a process of observation, reflection, and action.
Lesson Study – to solve practical dilemmas related to intervention or instruction through participation with other professionals in systematically examining practice.
Mentoring – to promote an individual’s awareness and refinement of his or her own professional development by providing and recommending structured opportunities for reflection and observation.
Other methods include communities of practice, reflective supervision, and technical assistance.
Online Professional Development
The 21st century has seen a significant growth in online professional development. Content providers incorporate collaborative platforms such as discussion boards and wikis, thereby encouraging and facilitating interaction, and optimizing training effectiveness.
Whereas many other industries have used online sources of continuing education and professional practices for many years, traditionally, educators have turned solely to internal professional development departments, local education agencies (LEAs), and local colleges and universities to acquire the necessary education to meet the required hours/units for renewal of their state teaching licenses.
However, the economic pressures facing school districts, combined with a greater conviction that online professional development can be effective, has led to increased interest in this option. Rather than replacing traditional sources of professional development, online sources and providers have served to augment existing options and can bring a widening access to topics and a broader scope to “learning communities. ” As teacher performance comes under increased scrutiny, a study conducted by Boston College found that English and math teachers who took professional development courses online improved their instructional practices and boosted their subject knowledge scores, producing modest performance gains for their students. This type of research-based and outcomes-focused study has lent credibility to the idea that online professional development can and will serve an important role in supporting the educational goals of the United States Department of Education.
12.4.3: Performance Assessment
A performance appraisal is done to assess an employee’s job performance and productivity on certain preestablished criteria and objectives.
Learning Objective
Explain the steps in performance appraisal (PA)
Key Points
- A performance appraisal is a systematic and periodic process that assesses an individual employee’s job performance and productivity in relation to certain preestablished criteria and organizational objectives.
- There are three main methods used to collect performance appraisal data: objective production, personnel, and judgmental evaluation. The latter are the most commonly used with a large variety of evaluation methods.
- A performance assessment is typically conducted annually, though the frequency of an evaluation, and policies concerning them, varies widely from workplace to workplace.
- An evaluation may include an assessment on how well the employee is doing, and employee goals that are expected to be met (or have significant progress made) by a set time, such as the next evaluation.
- Performance assessment is often included in performance management systems. These systems are used “to manage and align” all of an organization’s resources in order to achieve the highest possible performance.
Key Terms
- Evaluation
-
An assessment, such as an annual personnel performance review, used as the basis for a salary increase or bonus, or a summary of a particular situation.
- performance appraisal
-
a method by which how well an employee did a job is evaluated
Example
- Sometimes, an employee who has performed very well since his last review period may get an increase in pay or be promoted to a more prestigious position. However, a pay raise that is denied is not always the result of a poor review, as economic conditions and other factors dictate the ability for employers to raise their workers’ pay.
A performance appraisal (PA) or performance evaluation is a systematic and periodic process that assesses an individual employee’s job performance and productivity, in relation to certain preestablished criteria and organizational objectives. Other aspects of individual employees are considered as well, such as organizational citizenship behavior, accomplishments, potential for future improvement, strengths and weaknesses .
Performance Appraisal
A performance appraisal (PA) or performance evaluation is a systematic and periodic process that assesses an individual employee’s job performance and productivity in relation to certain preestablished criteria and organizational objectives.
Three main methods are used to collect PA data: objective production, personnel, and judgmental evaluation. The latter are the most commonly used with a large variety of evaluation methods.
A PA is typically conducted annually. However, the frequency of an evaluation, and policies concerning them, varies widely from workplace to workplace. Sometimes, an evaluation will be given to a new employee when a probationary period lapses, after which they may be conducted on a regular basis (such as every year).
Usually, the employee’s supervisor (and frequently, a more senior manager) is responsible for evaluating the employee. A private conference is often scheduled to discuss the evaluation. The interview could function as:
“Providing feedback to employees, counseling and developing employees, and conveying and discussing compensation, job status, or disciplinary decisions”.
The process of an evaluation may include one or more of these things:
- An assessment on how well the employee is doing. Sometimes, this may include a scale rating indicating strengths and weaknesses in key areas (e.g., following instructions, promptness, and ability to get along with others). Often, the supervisor and manager will discuss the key areas. Or, as some have dared to expose, employers often don’t care about following instructions, arriving on time, or the ability to get along with others.
- Employee goals that are expected to be met (or have made significant progress) by a set time, such as the next evaluation. Sometimes, the employee may voluntarily offer a goal, while at other times it will be set by his boss. A significantly-underperforming employee may be given an performance improvement plan, which details specific goals that must be met to maintain his/her job.
- Sharing of feedback by a worker’s fellow employees and supervisors. The employee is given his chance to share his/her feelings, concerns and suggestions about the workplace as well.
- Details about workplace standing, promotions and pay raises. Sometimes, an employee who has performed very well since his last review period may get an increase in pay or be promoted to a more prestigious position. However, a pay raise that is denied is not always the result of a poor review, as economic conditions and other factors dictate the ability for employers to raise their workers’ pay.
PA is often included in performance management systems. These systems are used “to manage and align” all of an organization’s resources in order to achieve the highest possible performance. How performance is managed in an organization determines to a large extent its success or failure. Therefore, improving PA for everyone should be among the highest priorities of contemporary organizations.
12.4.4: Reducing Turnover
Turnover is the rate at which employees leave an organization.
Learning Objective
Explain the root causes for high turnover
Key Points
- Turnover is measured for individual companies and for their industry as a whole.
- Turnover can be optimal when a poorly performing employee decides to leave an organization. Turnover can be dysfunctional if a high turnover rate increases the costs associated with recruitment and training of new employees, or if good employees consistently decide to leave.
- Research on job turnover has attempted to understand the causes of individual decisions to leave an organization. It has been found that lower performance, lack of reward contingencies for performance, and better external job opportunities are the main causes.
- Providing a stimulating workplace environment, which fosters happy, motivated, and empowered individuals, lowers employee turnover and absentee rates.
Key Term
- staff turnover
-
The relative rate at which an employer gains and loses staff.
Example
- In the United States, the average total non-farm seasonally adjusted monthly turnover rate was 3.3% for the period from December 2000 to November 2008. However rates vary widely when compared over different periods of time or different job sectors. For example, during the period 2001 to 2006, the annual turnover rate for all industry sectors averaged 39.6% before seasonal adjustments, while the leisure and hospitality sector experienced an average annual rate of 74.6% during the same period.
Turnover Defined
In a human resources context, turnover is the rate at which employees leave an organization. Simple ways to describe it are “how long employees tend to stay” or “the rate of traffic through the revolving door. “
Staff turnover can be optimal when a poorly performing employee decides to leave an organization, or dysfunctional when the high turnover rate increases the costs associated with recruitment and training of new employees, or if good employees consistently decide to leave .
Employee Turnover
Turnover can be optimal when a poorly performing employee decides to leave an organization.
Measuring Turnover
Turnover is measured for individual companies and for their industry as a whole. If an employer is said to have a high turnover relative to its competitors, it means that employees of that company have a shorter average tenure than those of other companies in the same industry. High turnover may be harmful to a company’s productivity if skilled workers are often leaving and the worker population contains a high percentage of novice workers.
In the United States, the average total non-farm seasonally adjusted monthly turnover rate was 3.3% for the period from December 2000 to November 2008. However rates vary widely when compared over different periods of time or different job sectors. For example, during the period 2001 to 2006, the annual turnover rate for all industry sectors averaged 39.6% before seasonal adjustments, while the leisure and hospitality sector experienced an average annual rate of 74.6% during the same period.
Preventing Turnover
Preventing the turnover of employees is important in any business. Without them, the business would be unsuccessful. However, more and more employers today are finding that employees remain for approximately 23 to 24 months, according to the 2006 Bureau of Labor Statistics. The Employment Policy Foundation states that it costs a company an average of $15,000 per employee, which includes separation costs, including paperwork, unemployment; vacancy costs, including overtime or temporary employees; and replacement costs including advertisement, interview time, relocation, training, and decreased productivity when colleagues depart.
Research on employee job turnover has attempted to understand the causes of individual decisions to leave an organization. It has been found that lower performance, lack of reward contingencies for performance, and better external job opportunities are the main causes. Other variables related to turnover are the conditions in the external job market, the availability of other job opportunities, and the length of employee tenure.
Providing a stimulating workplace environment, which fosters happy, motivated, and empowered individuals, lowers employee turnover and absentee rates. Promoting a work environment that fosters personal and professional growth promotes harmony and encouragement on all levels, so the effects are felt company wide.
Continual training and reinforcement also develops a workforce that is competent, consistent, competitive, effective, and efficient. Beginning on the first day of work, providing individuals with the necessary skills to perform their job is important. Before the first day, it is important the interview and hiring process expose new hires to an explanation of the company, so individuals know whether the job is their best choice.
Networking and strategizing within the company provides ongoing performance management and helps build relationships among coworkers. It is also important to motivate employees to focus on customer success, profitable growth, and the company well-being. Employers can keep their employees informed and involved by including them in future plans, new purchases, policy changes, as well as introducing new employees to the employees who have gone above and beyond in meetings. Engagement shows employees that they are valuable through information or recognition rewards and makes them feel included.
In addition, by paying above-market wages, the worker’s motivation to leave the job and look for a job elsewhere will be reduced. This strategy makes sense because it is often expensive to train replacement workers.
When companies hire the best people, new hired talent and veterans are enabled to reach company goals, maximizing the investment of each employee. Taking the time to listen to employees and making them feel involved will create loyalty, in turn reducing turnover and allowing for growth.
12.5: The Functions and Goals of HR
12.5.1: Activities in the Human Resources Department
Human resource departments are responsible for a wide variety of activities across a number of core organizational functions
Learning Objective
Understanding the activities of human resource departments
Key Points
- Human resource management is a central pillar of many organizations. Human resource departments are responsible for activities spanning a wide variety of core functions.
- In short, human resource activities fall under the following five core functions: staffing, development, compensation, safety and health, and employee and labor relations.
- Within each of these core functions, HR conducts a wide variety of activities.
- These activities are all linked by a concern for employee well-being and ensuring organizations treat employees in a way that provides mutual benefit for both the employee and the organization.
Key Terms
- On-boarding
-
A series of activities designed to train new employees and prepare them for integration with the organization and their responsibilities.
- unions
-
Legal groups of professionals in a given field who collectively address common issues within that discipline.
Core Functions of HR
Human resources (HR) professionals conduct a wide variety of tasks within an organizational structure. A brief review of the core functions of human resource departments will be useful in framing the more common activities a human resource professional will conduct. The core functions can be summarized as:
Staffing
This includes the activities of hiring new full-time or part-time employees, hiring contractors, and terminating employee contracts
Staffing activities include:
- Identifying and fulfilling talent needs (through recruitment, primarily)
- Utilizing various recruitment technologies to acquire a high volume of applicants (and to filter based on experience)
- Terminating contracts when necessary
- Maintaining ethical hiring practices and aligning with the regulatory environment
- Writing employee contracts and negotiating salary and benefits
Development
On-boarding new employees and providing resources for continued development is a key investment for organizations, and HR is charged with maintaining a developmental approach to existing human resources.
Development activities include:
- Training and preparing new employees for their role
- Providing training opportunities (internal training, educational programs, conferences, etc.) to keep employees up to date in their respective fields
- Preparing management prospects and providing feedback to employees and managers
Compensation
Salary and benefits are also within the scope of human resource management. This includes identifying appropriate compensation based on role, performance, and legal requirements.
Compensation activities include:
- Setting compensation levels to match the market, using benchmarks such as industry standards for a given job function
- Negotiating group health insurance rates, retirement plans, and other benefits with third party providers
- Discussing raises and other compensation increases and/or decreases with employees in the organization
- Ensuring compliance with legal and cultural expectations when it comes to employee compensation
Safety and Health
Achieving best practices in various industries include careful considering of safety and health concerns for employees.
Safety and health activities include:
- Ensuring compliance with legal requirements based on job function for safety measures (i.e. hard hats in construction, available counseling for law enforcement, appropriate safety equipment for chemists, etc.)
- Implementing new safety measures when laws change in a given industry
- Discussing safety and compliance with relevant government departments
- Discussing safety and compliance with unions
Employee and Labor Relations
Defending employee rights, coordinating with unions, and mediating disagreements between the organization and its human resources is also a core HR function.
Employee and labor relations activities include:
- Mediating disagreements between employees and employers
- Mediating disagreements between employees and other employees
- Considering claims of harassment and other workplace abuses
- Discussing employee rights with unions, management, and stakeholders
- Acting as the voice of the organization and/or the voice of the employees during any broader organizational issues pertaining to employee welfare
HR Competencies
This chart highlights a few of the key competencies expected of human resource teams in organizations.
12.5.2: Development of Human Resources
Human resource development combines training and career development to improve the effectiveness of the individual, group, and organization.
Learning Objective
Explain the function of Human Resource development (HRD)
Key Points
- Human resources is the set of individuals who make up the workforce of an organization, business sector, or an economy.
- As a process, human resource development takes place within organizations and includes both training and development and organization development.
- Human resources development (HRD) as a theory is a framework for the expansion of human capital within an organization through the development of both the organization and the individual to achieve performance improvement.
Key Term
- human capital
-
Human capital is the stock of competencies, knowledge, and social and personality attributes, including creativity, embodied in the ability to perform labor so as to produce economic value. It is an aggregate economic view of the human being acting within economies, which is an attempt to capture the social, biological, cultural, and psychological complexity as they interact in explicit and/or economic transactions.
Example
- Examples of human resource development include formal activities like classroom training, college coures, and a change effort planned by the organization. An example of an informal activity is a manager coaching his or her employee.
Human resources is the set of individuals who make up the workforce of an organization, business sector, or an economy. “Human capital” is sometimes used synonymously with human resources, although human capital typically refers to a more narrow view (i.e., the knowledge the individuals embody and can contribute to an organization). Likewise, other terms sometimes used include “manpower,” “talent,” “labor,” or simply “people. “
Human resources development (HRD) as a theory is a framework for the expansion of human capital within an organization through the development of both the organization and the individual to achieve performance improvement. Adam Smith states, “The capacities of individuals depended on their access to education. ” The same statement applies to organizations themselves, but it requires a much broader field to cover both areas.
Human resource development is the integrated use of training, organization, and career development efforts to improve individual, group, and organizational effectiveness. HRD develops the key competencies that enable individuals in organizations to perform current and future jobs through planned learning activities. Groups within organizations use HRD to initiate and manage change. Also, HRD ensures a match between individual and organizational needs.
HRD as a process occurs within organizations and encapsulates:
- Training and development (TD), the development of human expertise for the purpose of improving performance
- Organization development (OD), empowering the organization to take advantage of its human resource capital.
TD alone can leave an organization unable to tap into the increase in human, knowledge, or talent capital. OD alone can result in an oppressed, under-realized workforce. HRD practicitioners find the interstices of win/win solutions that develop the employee and the organization in a mutually beneficial manner. HRD does not occur without the organization, so the practice of HRD within an organization is inhibited or promoted upon the platform of the organization’s mission, vision, and values.
Human Resource
Human resource development combines training and career development to improve the effectiveness of the individual, group, and organization.
12.5.3: The Mission of Human Resource Management
Human resource management is responsible for the attraction, selection, training, assessment, and rewarding of employees.
Learning Objective
Break down human resource management (HRM) to Attraction, Selection, Training, Assessment, Rewarding
Key Points
- HR also oversees organizational leadership and culture, and ensures compliance with employment and labor laws.
- Employer brand was first used in the early 1990s to denote an organization’s reputation as an employer. Since then, it has become widely adopted by the global management community. Employer branding is “the image of your organization as a ‘great place to work'”.
- Just as a customer brand proposition is used to define a product or service offer, an employee value proposition (EVP) is used to define an organization’s employment offer.
- A performance appraisal (PA) or performance evaluation is a systematic and periodic process that assesses an individual employee’s job performance and productivity in relation to certain pre-established criteria and organizational objectives.
- Remuneration is the total compensation that employees receive in exchange for the service that they perform for their employer.
- A performance appraisal (PA) or performance evaluation is a systematic and periodic process that assesses an individual employee’s job performance and productivity in relation to certain pre-established criteria and organizational objectives. To collect PA data, there are three main methods: objective production, personnel, and judgmental evaluation.
- Remuneration is the total compensation that an employee receives in exchange for the service they perform for their employer. Typically, this consists of monetary rewards, also referred to as wage or salary, and complementary benefits including healthcare, pension plans, and stock options. The HR department plays a critical role in determining raises or bonuses based on employee performance.
Key Terms
- candidate
-
A person who applies to a job position.
- recruiter
-
One who recruits, particularly one employed to recruit others.
Example
- An HR manager at a firm such as an investment bank may work to recruit new researchers for the bank, train those entry-level researchers for other positions at the bank, monitor their performance throughout their tenure at the bank, and may determine their pay raises.
Human resource management (HRM, or simply HR) is the management of an organization’s workforce, or human resources . It is responsible for the attraction, selection, training, assessment, and rewarding of employees. HR also oversees organizational leadership and culture, and ensures compliance with employment and labor laws.
Human Resource Management
Human resource management is the management of an organization’s workforce, or human resources.
Attraction
Employer brand was first used in the early 1990s to denote an organization’s reputation as an employer. Since then, it has become widely adopted by the global management community. Employer branding is “the image of your organization as a ‘great place to work.'” Just as a customer brand proposition is used to define a product or service offer, an employee value proposition (EVP) is used to define an organization’s employment offer. Likewise, the marketing disciplines associated with branding and brand management have been increasingly applied by the human resources and talent management community to attract, engage, and retain talented candidates and employees.
Selection
The stages in selection include sourcing candidates by networking, advertising, or other methods. The HR recruiter utilizes professional interviewing techniques to understand the candidate’s skills, motivations to make a move, and to screen potential candidates using testing (skills or personality). The process is meant to evaluate the candidate and also evaluate how the candidate will fit into the organization. The recruiter will meet with the hiring manager to obtain specific position and type information before beginning the process. After recruiters understand the type of person the company needs, they begin the process of informing their network of the opportunity. Recruiters play an important role by preparing the candidate and company for the interview, providing feedback to both parties, and handling salary and benefits negotiations.
Training
Training and development (T&D) encompasses three main activities: training, education, and development. Garavan, Costine, and Heraty, of the Irish Institute of Training and Development, note that these ideas are often considered to be synonymous. However, to practitioners, they encompass three separate, although interrelated, activities:
Training: This activity is both focused upon, and evaluated against, the job that an individual currently holds.
Education: This activity focuses upon the jobs that an individual may potentially hold in the future, and is evaluated against those jobs.
Development: This activity focuses upon the activities that the organization employing the individual, or that the individual is part of, may partake in the future, and is almost impossible to evaluate.
Assessment
A performance appraisal (PA) or performance evaluation is a systematic and periodic process that assesses an individual employee’s job performance and productivity in relation to certain pre-established criteria and organizational objectives. Other aspects of individual employees are considered as well, such as organizational citizenship behavior, accomplishments, potential for future improvement, and strengths and weaknesses.
To collect PA data, there are three main methods: objective production, personnel, and judgmental evaluation. Judgmental evaluations are the most commonly used with a large variety of evaluation methods. A PA is typically conducted annually. The interview could function as “providing feedback to employees, counseling and developing employees, and conveying and discussing compensation, job status, or disciplinary decisions.”
Rewarding
Remuneration is the total compensation that employees receive in exchange for the service that they perform for their employer. Typically, this consists of monetary rewards, also referred to as wage or salary, and complementary benefits including healthcare, pension plans, and stock options. The HR department plays a critical role in determining raises or bonuses based on employee performance.
12.5.4: Demand Planning
HR forecasting is the process of ascertaining the net requirements for staff by determining present and future HR needs.
Learning Objective
Explain the benefits of HR forecasting
Key Points
- HR forecasting can be categorized into transaction-based forecasting, event-based forecasting, and process-based forecasting.
- Transaction-based forecasting focuses on tracking internal change by the organization’s managers. Event-based forecasting is concerned with changes in the external environment. Process-based forecasting is focused on the flow or sequencing of several work activities.
- HR forecasting can reduce HR costs, increase organizational flexibility, ensure a close linkage to the Macro Business Forecasting Process, and ensure that organizational requirements take precedence over issues of resource constraint and scarcity.
- The five stages of the HR forecasting process are: identifying organizational goals, objectives and plans, determining overall demand requirements for personnel, assessing in-house skills and other internal supply characteristics, determining the net demand requirements that must be met from external, environmental supply sources and developing HR plans and programs to ensure that the right people are in the right place.
- The HR process may be affected by environmental factors including the economy, labor markets and unions, governmental laws and regulations, industry product life cycles, technology changes, demographic changes, etc. The HR process may also be affected by organizational factors such as restructuring, strategic goals, corporate missions, job satisfaction, workforce coverage, job analysis, organizational culture, etc.
- HR forecasting can be categorized into current, short-run, medium-run and long-run forecasting. Current forecasting can be used to meet the immediate operational needs of the organization (up to the end of the current operating cycle, or a maximum of one year into the future). On the other hand, long-run forecasting typically extends five or more years ahead of the current operational period. Due to the number of changes that could affect an organization’s operations, the long-run forecast is extremely flexible.
Key Terms
- mission
-
A set of tasks that fulfills a purpose or duty; an assignment set by an employer.
- forecast
-
An estimation of a future condition.
- restructuring
-
A reorganization; an alteration of structure.
Example
- An HR forecaster at a large firm, like a pharmaceutical company, may examine a variety of different internal and external factors. She may consider the workforce demand for the pharmaceutical company, like how many researchers and chemists the company may need, assess the in-house skills of the current employees, and develop programs to develop the new and existing workforce of the company. The HR forecaster will also consider environmental factors, such as the pharmaceutical market, technological changes in pharmaceutical production, and demographic changes of employees and customers. The forecaster will consider organizational factors as well, such as the company’s corporate mission, operational goals, and pharmaceutical production budgets. Finally, the HR forecaster will consider these plans over a time horizon that is approved by an HR manager.
Demand Planning
HR Forecasting and Planning
HR forecasting is the heart of the HR planning process. The purpose of HR forecasting is to ascertain the net requirements for staff by determining the levels of demand for, and supply of, human resources now and in the future.
Forecasting Activity Categories
- Transaction-based forecasting focuses on tracking internal change instituted by the organization’s managers.
- Event-based forecasting is concerned with changes in the external environment.
- Process-based forecasting is not focused on a specific internal organizational event but on the flow or sequencing of several work activities.
Benefits of HR Forecasting
- Reduces HR costs.
- Increases organizational flexibility.
- Ensures a close linkage to the Macro Business Forecasting Process.
- Ensures that organizational requirements take precedence over issues of resource constraint and scarcity.
HR Demand is the organization’s projected requirement for human resources, whereas HR Supply is defined as the source of workers to meet demand requirements, obtained either internally (current members of the organization’s workforce) or from external agencies.
Key Personnel Analyses Conducted by HR Forecasters
- Specialist/Technical/Professional Personnel: These employees tend to be in high demand due to trade qualifications that are essential.
- Employment Equity-Designated Group Membership: Should be a proportional representation of each grouping. Examples of these groups include African Americans, women, and those with disabilities.
5 Stages of the Forecasting Process
- Identify organizational goals, objectives, and plans.
- Determine overall demand requirements for personnel.
- Assess in-house skills and other internal supply characteristics.
- Determine the net demand requirements that must be met from external, environmental supply sources.
- Develop HR plans and programs to ensure that the right people are in the right place.
Environmental factors affecting the HR process include the following:
- economy,
- labor markets and unions,
- governmental laws and regulations,
- industry and product life cycles,
- technological changes,
- competitor labor usage,
- global market for skilled labor,
- demographic changes.
The following are the organizational factors affecting HR forecasting:
- Corporate mission, strategic goals;
- Operational goals, production budgets;
- HR Policies;
- Organizational structure, restructuring;
- Worker KSA’s, competencies, expectations;
- HRMS level of development;
- Organizational culture, climate, job satisfaction, communications;
- Job analysis, workforce coverage, current data.
HR Forecasting Time Horizons
Current Forecast
The current forecast is the one being used to meet the immediate operational needs of the organization (up to the end of the current operating cycle, or a maximum of one year into the future).
Short-Run Forecast
The short-run forecast extends forward from the current forecast and states the HR requirements for the next one-to-two year period beyond the current operational requirements.
Medium-Run Forecast
Typically, the medium-run forecast identifies requirements for two to five years into the future.
Long-Run Forecast
The long-run forecast extends five or more years ahead of the current operational period. Due to the number of changes that could affect an organization’s operations, the long-run forecast is extremely flexible.
12.6: Diversity in Human Resources
12.6.1: Defining Diversity
Diversity in an organization should reflect a globalized and multicultural workforce where value is placed on diversity of thought.
Learning Objective
Differentiate between a Monolithic, a Plural, and a Multicultural organizational structure
Key Points
- A company that employs a diverse workforce is better able to understand the demographics of the marketplace it serves. It is thus better equipped to thrive in that marketplace than a company that has a more limited range of employee demographics.
- According to the deficit model, organizations that do not have a strong culture of diversity and inclusion will invite lower productivity, higher absenteeism, and higher turnover, all of which will result in higher costs to the company.
- One of the greatest challenges an organization has when trying to adopt a more inclusive environment is assimilation for any member outside of the dominant group.
Key Term
- Diversity
-
A variety; the quality of being different
Example
- Beginning in the 1970s, women began to enter fields like medicine, law, and business. More women were going to college and expected to be employed at the age of 35, as opposed to past generations of women who only worked intermittently due to marriage and childbirth. Women entering the workforce created diversity.
Components of a Diverse Organization
A multicultural or diverse organization not only contains many different cultural groups, but it values this diversity. It encourages healthy conflict as a source of avoiding groupthink. Groupthink can occur when group members try to minimize conflict and reach a consensus decision without critical evaluation of alternative ideas or viewpoints.
In this globalized economy, a multicultural workforce should reflect a diversity of thought. The perspectives shared from individual standpoints will benefit organizations that are savvy enough to capitalize on them. The theory is that a company with a diverse workforce is better able to understand the demographics of the marketplace it serves. It is thus also better equipped to thrive in that marketplace than a company that has a more limited range of employee demographics.
Productivity and costs can be analyzed to assist in building the business case for diversity. According to the deficit model, organizations that do not have a strong diversity inclusion culture will invite lower productivity, higher absenteeism, and higher turnover, all of which will result in higher costs to the company.
According to the investment model, or value-added model to diversity inclusion strategies, a company choosing to foster an inclusive environment will experience many benefits. These benefits include increased productivity, better problem solving capabilities, and increased market share. Either model, however, requires an intentional implementation from top leadership for the organizational culture to truly be one of inclusion and acceptance.
Three Types of Organizations
In a journal article entitled “The Multicultural Organization”, Taylor Cox, Jr. talks about three organization types that focus on the development of cultural diversity. These three types are the monolithic organization, the plural organization, and the multicultural organization. In the monolithic organization, the amount of structural integration (the presence of persons from different cultural groups in a single organization) is minimal and white male privilege is very tangible. This type of organization may have women and marginalized members within the workforce, but not in positions of leadership and power.
The plural organization has a more heterogeneous membership than the monolithic organization and takes steps to be more inclusive of persons from cultural backgrounds that differ from the dominant group. This type of organization seeks to empower those from a marginalized standpoint to encourage opportunities for promotion and positions of leadership. The multicultural organization contains many different cultural groups and it highly values this diversity and encourages healthy conflict to avoid groupthink.
12.6.2: How Businesses Benefit from Diversity
Diversity brings substantial potential benefits such as better decision making and problem solving, and greater creativity and innovation.
Learning Objective
Explain the benefits of diversity in an organization
Key Points
- Diversity provides organizations with the ability to compete in global markets.
- Simply recognizing diversity in a corporation helps link the variety of talents within the organization. The act of recognizing diversity also allows for those employees with these talents to feel needed and have a sense of belonging, which in turn increases their commitment to the company.
- Standpoint theory suggests that marginalized groups bring a different perspective to an organization that challenges the status quo since their socially constructed world view will differ from that of the dominant group.
Key Term
- Diversity
-
A variety; the quality of being different
Example
- An example of a company involved with creating diversity in the workplace is MentorNet, a nonprofit online mentoring organization that focuses on women and underrepresented minorities in the STEM (Science, Technology, Engineering, and Mathematics) fields. MentorNet has used an algorithm to match over 30,000 mentor relationships since 1997. The organization gives students, especially women and underrepresented minorities, the chance to seek mentors to discuss how to overcome obstacles in their fields and eventually their workplace.
Diversity is beneficial to both the organization and its members. Diversity brings substantial potential benefits such as better decision making and improved problem solving; greater creativity and innovation, which leads to enhanced product development; and more successful marketing to different types of customers. Diversity provides organizations with the ability to compete in global markets.
Simply recognizing diversity in a corporation helps link the variety of talents within the organization. The act of recognizing diversity also allows for those employees with these talents to feel needed and have a sense of belonging, which in turn increases their commitment to the company and allows each of them to contribute in a unique way. Standpoint theory suggests that marginalized groups bring a different perspective to an organization that challenges the status quo since their socially constructed world view will differ from that of the dominant group.
Although the standpoint of the dominant group will often carry more weight, a transformational leader will encourage conflicting standpoints to coexist within an organization. This will create a forum for sanctioned conflict to ensue. Conflict stems from challenging the way things have always been done, and ideas and problems that have not been explored from multiple perspectives. Standpoint theory gives a voice to those in a position to see patterns of behavior that those immersed in the culture have difficulty acknowledging. These unique and varying standpoints help eradicate groupthink which can develop within a homogenous group. But there are still many challenges to fostering an inclusive environment in the workplace for diversity of thought and ideas.
12.7: Recruitment
12.7.1: Finding Good Candidates
It is beneficial to attract applicants with the highest potential for success at the organization.
Learning Objective
Explain the different types of hiring concepts and placement classifications
Key Points
- Selective hiring helps prevent the costly turnover of staff and increases the likeliness of high employee morale and productivity.
- The proper start to a recruitment effort is to perform a job analysis—to document the actual or intended requirement of the job to be performed. This information is captured in a job description and provides the recruitment effort with the boundaries and objectives of the search.
- Job descriptions need to be reviewed or updated prior to a recruitment effort to reflect present day requirements. Each job description should be associated with a list of critical skills, behaviors or attitudes that will make or break the job performance.
- When screening potential employees, managers need to select based on cultural fit and attitude as well as technical skills and competencies.
Key Terms
- recruitment
-
Recruitment refers to the process of attracting, screening, and selecting a qualified person for a job.
- job analysis
-
Job analysis is the formal process of identifying the content of a job in terms of activities involved and attributes needed to perform the work.
- job description
-
an outline of the description of the tasks and responsibilities in a post within an organization
Example
- There are some companies, such as Southwest Airlines, based out of the United States, who hire primarily based on attitude because they espouse the philosophy that you hire for attitude, train for skill. According to former CEO Herb Kelleher, “We can change skill levels through training. We can’t change attitude” (O’Reilly & Pfeffer).
In recruiting, it is beneficial to attract not only a large quantity of applicants but a group of individuals with the necessary skills and requirements for the position. After obtaining a large, qualified applicant base managers need to identify those applicants with the highest potential for success at the organization. According to Pfeffer and Veiga 1998, selecting the best person for the job is an extremely critical piece of the human resources inflow process. Selective hiring helps prevent the costly turnover of staff and increases the likeliness of high employee morale and productivity.
The proper start to a recruitment effort is to perform a job analysis, to document the actual or intended requirement of the job to be performed. This information is captured in a job description and provides the recruitment effort with the boundaries and objectives of the search. Often a company will have job descriptions that represent a historical collection of tasks performed in the past. These job descriptions need to be reviewed or updated prior to a recruitment effort to reflect present day requirements. Each job description should be associated with a list of critical skills, behaviors, or attitudes that will make or break the job performance. When screening potential employees, managers need to select based on cultural fit and attitude as well as technical skills and competencies. In recent years, the focus of hiring is increasingly shifted from solely the immediate hard skills such as engineering, finances, or accounting, to the longer term soft skills such as communication, team leadership, brand building.
There are some companies, such as Southwest Airlines, who hire primarily based on attitude because they espouse the philosophy that one must “hire for attitude and train for skill. ” According to former CEO Herb Kelleher, “We can change skill levels through training. We can’t change attitude” (O’Reilly & Pfeffer). After determining the most important qualifications, managers can design the rest of the selection process so that it is in alignment with the other human resource processes. Starting a recruitment with an accurate job analysis and job description ensures the recruitment process effort starts off on a proper track for success. This soft skills requirement is especially critical for multinationals, where expatriates, local employees, customers, and vendors would need to work together. To ease the situation, recruiters are beginning to adopt the IITTI (pronounced as “ET”) standardized image and etiquette certification tool to measure the background soft skills of job-seekers.
After the job analysis, the process moves onto sourcing, which involves 1) advertising, a common part of the recruiting process, often encompassing multiple media, such as the Internet, general newspapers, job ad newspapers, professional publications, window advertisements, job centers, and campus graduate recruitment programs; and 2) recruitment research, which is the proactive identification of passive candidates who are happy in their current positions and are not actively looking to move companies. This initial research for so-called passive candidates, also called name generation, results in a contact information of potential candidates who can then be contacted discreetly to be screened and approached on behalf of an executive search firm or corporate client.
Managers must strive to identify the best applicants at the lowest cost. Companies have a variety of processes available to screen potential employees, so managers must determine which system will generate the most accurate results. The methods of selection vary both in levels of effectiveness and in cost of application. In addition to biographical information, companies can conduct personal interviews, perform background checks, or request testing. Because of the costs associated with these measures, companies try to narrow down the number of applicants in each round of hiring. In some countries, such as the United States, the selection procedures are subject to Equal Employment Opportunity guidelines. Therefore, the companies also need to ensure that the process is accurate, with a high level of validity, reliable, and related to critical aspects of the job. Proactively taking these measures will help companies avoid litigation related to discrimination in the selection process.
Recruitment
Recruitment for the Army
12.7.2: Selecting the right People
Having a common set of information about applicants allows hiring managers to avoid prejudices.
Learning Objective
List the various interview styles used by employers to hire efficiently
Key Points
- Many companies choose to use several rounds of screening with different interviewers to discover additional facets of the applicant’s attitude or skill as well as develop a more well-rounded opinion of the applicant from diverse perspectives.
- There are two common types of interviews: behavioral and situational.
- The purpose of behavioral interviewing is to find links between the job’s requirement and how the applicant’s experience and past behaviors match those requirements.
- A situational interview requires the applicant to explain how he or she would handle a series of hypothetical situations. Situational-based questions evaluate the applicant’s judgment, ability, and knowledge.
Key Term
- interview
-
A formal meeting, in person, for the assessment of a candidate or applicant.
Examples
- Example of situational interview question: You and a colleague are working on a project together; however, your colleague fails to do his agreed portion of the work. What would you do?
- Examples of behavioral interview questions: Describe a time when you were faced with a stressful situation. How did you handle the situation? Give me an example of when you showed initiative and assumed a leadership role?
Having a common set of information about the applicants upon which to compare after all the interviews have been conducted allows hiring managers to avoid prejudices . This also ensures that all interviewees are given a fair chance (Smith G.). Many companies choose to use several rounds of screening with different interviewers to discover additional facets of the applicant’s attitude or skill as well as develop a more well-rounded opinion of the applicant from diverse perspectives. Involving senior management in the interview process also acts as a signal to applicants about the company culture and value of each new hire. There are two common types of interviews: behavioral and situational.
Online Recruiting
Monster.com is a popular job board for people seeking employment.
Behavioral Interview
In a behavioral interview, the interviewer asks the applicant to reflect on his or her past experiences (Janz, 1982). After deciding what skills are needed for the position, the interviewer will ask questions to find out if the candidate possesses these skills. The purpose of behavioral interviewing is to find links between the job’s requirement and how the applicant’s experience and past behaviors match those requirements. Examples of behavioral interview questions:
- Describe a time when you were faced with a stressful situation.
- How did you handle the situation?
- Give me an example of when you showed initiative and assumed a leadership role.
Situational Interview
A situational interview requires the applicant to explain how he or she would handle a series of hypothetical situations. Situational-based questions evaluate the applicant’s judgment, ability, and knowledge (Latham & Saari, 1984). Before administering this type of interview, it is a good idea for the hiring manager to consider possible responses and develop a scoring key for evaluation purposes. Examples of situational interview questions:
- You and a colleague are working on a project together; however, your colleague fails to do his agreed portion of the work. What would you do?
- A client approaches you and claims that she has not received a payment that supposedly had been sent five days ago from your office. She is very angry. What would you do?
Selection Tests
When making a hiring decision, it is critical to understand the applicant’s personality style, values, and motivations (Smith G.). Technical aptitude is important, but attitude is often more important. The reality is that technical skills can be learned, but interpersonal work attitudes are usually more difficult to change (Schaefer). Behavioral assessments and personality profiles are a good way for hiring managers to learn how the individual will interact with their coworkers, customers, and supervisors (Smith G.). Tests such as the Myers Briggs and D.I.S.C profile assessments are popular tools that provide an accurate analysis of an applicant’s attitudes and interpersonal skills; however, it is critical that the tests are administered, scored, and interpreted by a licensed professional. Other selection tests used in hiring may include cognitive tests, which measure general intelligence, work sample tests that demonstrate the applicant’s ability to perform specific job duties, and integrity tests, which measure honesty (Kulik, 2004).
Background Checks
Background checks are a way for employers to verify the accuracy of information provided by applicants in resumes and applications. Information gathered in background checks may include employment history, education, credit reports, driving records, and criminal records. Employers must obtain written consent from the applicant before conducting a background check, and the information gathered in a background check should be relevant to the job.
Evaluation
Employers may choose to use just one or a combination of the screening methods to predict future job performance. It is important for companies to assess the effectiveness of their selective hiring process using metrics. This provides a benchmark for future performance as well as a means of evaluating the success of a particular method. Companies can continuously improve their selection practices to ensure a good fit for future employees that will successfully accomplish all that the job entails as well as fit into the organizational culture. If companies are not successful in their hiring practices, high turnover, low employee morale, and decreased productivity will result. Research shows that the “degree of cultural fit and value congruence between job applicants and their organizations significantly predicts both subsequent turnover and job performance” (Pfeffer & Viega, Putting People First for Organizational Success, 1998). Thus, companies need to assess their hiring in terms of technical success as well as cultural fit. Evaluating the hiring process will help ensure continuing success because human capital is often a company’s most important asset.
Chapter 11: Motivation Theories and Applications
11.1: Management and Motivation
11.1.1: Introduction to Motivation
Motivation is a term that refers to the process that elicits, controls, and sustains certain behaviors.
Learning Objective
Discuss the relevance of motivation to the workplace
Key Points
- Conceptually, motivation should not be confused with either volition or optimism. Motivation is related to, but distinct from, emotion.
- Studies have found that employees are not motivated solely by money but motivation is linked to employee behavior and their attitudes.
- At one time, employees were considered just another input into the production of goods and services, but this changed after the Hawthorne studies.
Key Terms
- motivation
-
Willingness of action, especially in behavior.
- volition
-
The mental power or ability of choosing; the will.
Motivation is a term that refers to a process that elicits, controls, and sustains certain behaviors. It is a group phenomenon which affects the nature of an individual’s behavior, the strength of the behavior, and the persistence of the behavior. For instance: an individual has not eaten, so he or she feels hungry, and as a response he or she eats and diminishes feelings of hunger.
There are many approaches to motivation: physiological, behavioral, cognitive, and social. It is the crucial element in setting and attaining goals—and research shows you can influence your own levels of motivation and self-control. According to various theories, motivation may be rooted in a basic need to minimize physical pain and maximize pleasure; or it may include specific needs such as eating and resting; or a desired object, goal, state of being, or ideal; or it may be attributed to less-apparent reasons such as altruism, selfishness, morality, or avoiding mortality. Conceptually, motivation should not be confused with either volition or optimism. Motivation is related to, but distinct from, emotion.
At one time, employees were considered just another input into the production of goods and services. But this changed after the Hawthorne studies. The Hawthorne studies were conducted by Elton Mayo at Hawthorne Plant in the 1920s. The researchers were studying the effect of different working environments on productivity. They used lighting as an experimental variable (the effect of bright lighting and dull lighting). Initially they noticed that employees were working harder but it was not because of the lighting. They concluded that productivity increased due to attention that the workers got from the research team and not because of changes to the experimental variable . The Hawthorne studies found that employees are not motivated solely by money but motivation is linked to employee behavior and their attitudes. The Hawthorne Studies began the human relations approach to management, so the needs and motivation of employees became the primary focus of managers.
Carrot and Stick
Motivation theories often use the metaphor of a carrot dangling from a stick to describe how people are motivated to achieve goals.
11.1.2: Classical Theory of Motivation
The classical theory of motivation includes the hierarchy of needs from Abraham Maslow and the two-factor theory from Frederick Herzberg.
Learning Objective
Compare Maslow’s and Herzberg’s theories of the hierarchy of needs
Key Points
- A good manager will try to figure out which levels of needs are important for a certain individual or employee.
- Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs consist of the following: Physiology (hunger, thirst, sleep, etc. ); Safety/Security/Shelter/Health; Belongingness/Love/Friendship; Self-esteem/Recognition/Achievement; Self actualization.
- Frederick Herzberg’s two-factor theory, a.k.a. intrinsic/extrinsic motivation, concludes that certain factors in the workplace result in job satisfaction but, if absent, they don’t lead to dissatisfaction but rather to no satisfaction at all.
Key Term
- demotivation
-
Feeling or state of being unmotivated or demotivated.
Needs Hierarchy Theory
The content of this theory includes the hierarchy of needs from Abraham H. Maslow and the two-factor theory from Frederick Irving Herzberg. Maslow’s theory is one of the most widely discussed theories of motivation .
History of Motivation
Maslow’s theory is one of the most widely discussed theories of motivation.
The American motivation psychologist Abraham H. Maslow developed the Hierarchy of Needs consistent of five hierarchical classes. It shows the complexity of human requirements. According to him, people are motivated by unsatisfied needs. The lower level needs such as physiological and safety needs will have to be satisfied before higher level needs are to be addressed. We can relate Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs theory with employee motivation. For example, if a manager is trying to motivate his employees by satisfying their needs, according to Maslow, he should try to satisfy the lower-level needs before he tries to satisfy the upper-level needs or the employees will not be motivated. Also the manager has to remember that not everyone will be satisfied by the same needs.
A good manager will try to figure out which levels of needs are active for a certain individual or employee. The basic requirements build the first step in his pyramid. If there is any deficit on this level, the whole behavior of an individual will be oriented to satisfy this deficit. Subsequently we do have the second level, which awakens a need for security. Basically it is oriented on a future need for security. After securing those two levels, the motives shift in the social sphere, which form the third stage. Psychological requirements comprise the fourth level, while the top of the hierarchy is self-realization. So the theory can be summarized as follows: Human beings have wants and desires which influence their behavior.
Only unsatisfied needs influence behavior; satisfied needs do not. Since needs are many, they are arranged in order of importance, from the basic to the complex. The person advances to the next level of needs only after the lower-level need is at least minimally satisfied. The further the progress up the hierarchy, the more individuality, humanness and psychological health a person will show. The needs, listed from basic (lowest or earliest) to most complex (highest or latest) are as follows:
- Physiology (hunger, thirst, sleep, etc. )
- Safety/Security/Shelter/Health
- Belongingness/Love/Friendship
- Self-esteem/Recognition/Achievement
- Self actualization
Herzberg’s Two-factor Theory
Frederick Herzberg’s two-factor theory, a.k.a. intrinsic/extrinsic motivation, concludes that certain factors in the workplace result in job satisfaction, but if absent, they don’t lead to dissatisfaction but rather to no satisfaction at all. The factors that motivate people can change over their lifetime, but “respect for me as a person” is one of the top motivating factors at any stage of life. He distinguished between: Motivators (e.g. challenging work, recognition, responsibility) which give positive satisfaction, and Hygiene factors (e.g. status, job security, salary and fringe benefits) that do not motivate when present but, if absent, result in demotivation. The name Hygiene factors is used because, like hygiene, the presence will not make you healthier, but absence can cause health deterioration. The theory is sometimes called the “Motivator-Hygiene Theory” or “The Dual Structure Theory. ” Herzberg’s theory has found application in such occupational fields as information systems and in studies of user satisfaction.
11.1.3: Frederick Taylor
Scientific management, also called Taylorism, concerns the analysis and synthesis of workflows to improve productivity.
Learning Objective
Explain Taylorism: the theory of scientific management
Key Points
- It can be said that the quality of life at work extends to life outside of work. This can be evaluated by comparing the wages of the “expert leaders” to those of “general laborers”.
- Taylor proposed a “neat, understandable world in the factory, an organization of men whose acts would be planned, coordinated, and controlled under continuous expert direction”.
- Factory production was to become a matter of efficient and scientific management—the planning and administration of workers and machines alike as components of one big machine.
Key Term
- workflow
-
A process and/or procedure in which tasks are completed. It may be defined with a flowchart to define actors, actions, results, decisions, and action paths.
Scientific management, also called Taylorism, is a theory of management that analyzed and synthesized workflows. Its main objective was improving economic efficiency, especially labor productivity. It was one of the earliest attempts to apply science to the engineering of processes and to management. Its development began with Frederick Winslow Taylor in the 1880s and 1890s within the manufacturing industries. Its peak of influence came in the 1910s, but by the 1920s, its influence started to dwindle. The 1920s saw the beginning of an era of competition and syncretism with opposing or complementary ideas.
Frederick Taylor
Scientific management, also called Taylorism, is a theory of management that analyzed and synthesized workflows.
Although scientific management as a distinct theory or school of thought was obsolete by the 1930s, most of its themes are still important parts of industrial engineering and management today. These include analysis; synthesis; logic; rationality; empiricism; work ethic; efficiency and elimination of waste; standardization of best practices; disdain for tradition preserved merely for its own sake or merely to protect the social status of particular workers with particular skill sets; the transformation of craft production into mass production; and knowledge transfer between workers and from workers into tools, processes, and documentation.
Features of Scientific Management
- Social philosophy, a promise of reform through growth and expansion
- Application of engineering principles to the industrial system of the production
- Time and motion studies to ensure efficiency
- Standarization
- Factory work to be planned, coordinated, and controlled under expert direction
- Information centralized/controlled in planning department, which increases potential for survillance and controlling the production process
- Expert directions by engineers, factory planning, time and motion studies, standardization, and the intensive division of labors
Taylor proposed a “neat, understandable world in the factory, an organization of men whose acts would be planned, coordinated, and controlled under continuous expert direction. ” Factory production was to become a matter of efficient and scientific management—the planning and administration of workers and machines alike as components of one big machine.
11.1.4: Elton Mayo
George Elton Mayo concluded that people’s work performance is dependent on both social issues and job content.
Learning Objective
Analyze Elton Mayo’s theories on motivation and management
Key Points
- The human relations movement refers to the researchers of organizational development who study the behavior of people in groups, particularly workplaces.
- The movement viewed workers in terms of their psychology and fit with companies rather than as interchangeable parts, and it resulted in the creation of the discipline of human resource management.
- Norms of cooperation and higher output were established because of a feeling of importance, physical conditions or financial incentives had little motivational value.
Key Term
- human resource management
-
The process of hiring and developing employees so that they become more valuable to the organization.
The human relations movement refers to the researchers of organizational development who study the behavior of people in groups, in particular workplace groups. It originated in the 1930s’ Hawthorne Studies, which examined the effects of social relations, motivation, and employee satisfaction on factory productivity. The movement viewed workers in terms of their psychology and fit with companies rather than as interchangeable parts, and it resulted in the creation of the discipline of human resource management.
George Elton Mayo is known as the founder of the Human Relations Movement and was known for his research, including the Hawthorne Studies and his book, The Human Problems of an Industrialized Civilization (1933). The research he conducted under the Hawthorne Studies of the 1930s showed the importance of groups in affecting the behavior of individuals at work. Mayo’s employees, Roethlisberger and Dickson, conducted the practical experiments. This enabled Mayo to make certain deductions about how managers should behave. He carried out a number of investigations to look at ways of improving productivity—for example, by changing lighting conditions in the workplace. What he found, however, was that work satisfaction depended to a large extent on the informal social pattern of the work group. Where norms of cooperation and higher output were established because of a feeling of importance, physical conditions or financial incentives had little motivational value. People will form work groups, and this can be used by management to benefit the organization. In short, he concluded that people’s work performance is dependent on both social issues and job content. He suggested a tension between workers’ “logic of sentiment” and managers’ “logic of cost and efficiency” which could lead to conflict within organizations.
Motivation
Motivation makes for courageous decisions.
George Elton Mayo stressed the importance of natural groups, in which social aspects take precedence over functional organizational structures. He also encouraged upwards communication, by which communication is two-way, from worker to chief executive, as well as vice versa. Companies need their employees to be able to successfully communicate and convey information, to be able to interpret others’ emotions, to be open to others’ feelings, and to be able to solve conflicts and arrive at resolutions. By acquiring these skills, the employees, those in management positions, and the customer can maintain more compatible relationships. Cohesive and good leadership is needed to communicate goals and to ensure effective and coherent decision making. It has become a concern of many companies to improve the job-oriented interpersonal skills of employees. The teaching of these skills to employees is referred to as “soft skills” training.
Criticisms
Elton Mayo’s work is considered the counterpoint of Taylorism and scientific management by various academics. Taylorism, founded by F. W. Taylor, sought to apply science to the management of employees in the workplace in order to gain economic efficiency through labor productivity. On the other hand, Elton Mayo’s work has been widely attributed to the discovery of the “social person,” thereby allowing for workers to be seen as individuals rather than merely robots designed to work for unethical and unrealistic productivity expectations. However, this theory has been contested, as Mayo’s purported role in the human relations movement has been questioned. Nonetheless, although Taylorism attempted to justify scientific management as a holistic philosophy rather than a set of principles, the human relations movement worked parallel to the notion of scientific management aiming to address the social welfare needs of workers and therefore elicit their co-operation as a workforce.
11.1.5: The Hawthorne Effect
The Hawthorne effect refers to a series of studies starting in 1924 at the Hawthorne Works concerning productivity.
Learning Objective
Apply the Hawthorne effect to business organizations
Key Points
- Changing a variable usually increased productivity, even if the variable was just a change back to the original condition.
- The central idea behind the Hawthorne effect is that changes in the behavior of participants during the course of a study may be related only to the special social situation and social treatment that they received.
- Output was measured mechanically by counting how many finished relays each worker dropped down a chute.
Key Term
- illumination
-
The act of illuminating, or supplying with light; the state of being illuminated.
The Hawthorne Effect
The central idea behind the Hawthorne effect, a term used as early as 1950 by John R. P. French, is that changes in the behavior of participants during the course of a study may be “related only to the special social situation and social treatment they received. ” The term gets its name from a factory called the Hawthorne Works, where a series of experiments on factory workers was carried out between 1924 and 1932 . This effect was observed for minute increases in illumination.
The Last Vestige of the Hawthorne Works Plant in Cicero, Illinois
The term Hawthorne effect was applied in reference to a set of studies begun in 1924 at the former Hawthorne Works plant.
Evaluation of the Hawthorne effect continues in the present day. Most industrial and occupational psychology and organizational behavior textbooks refer to the illumination studies. Only occasionally are the rest of the studies mentioned. In the lighting studies, light intensity was altered to examine its effect on worker productivity. In one of the studies, experimenters chose two women as test subjects and asked them to choose four other workers to join the test group. Together the women worked in a separate room over the course of five years (1927–1932) assembling telephone relays. Output was measured mechanically by counting how many finished relays each worker dropped down a chute. This measuring began in secret two weeks before moving the women to an experiment room and continued throughout the study.
Relay Assembly Experiments
In the experiment room, they had a supervisor who discussed changes with them and at times used their suggestions. Then the researchers spent five years measuring how different variables impacted individual and group productivity. Some of the variables were: giving two five-minute breaks (after a discussion with them on the best length of time), and then changing to two ten-minute breaks (not their preference). Productivity increased, but when they received six five-minute rests, they disliked it and reduced output.
Providing food during the breaks shortened the day by 30 minutes (output went up), while shortening it more increased the output per hour, but decreased overall output. Changing a variable usually increased productivity, even if the variable was just a change back to the original condition. However, it is said that this is the natural process of the human being to adapt to the environment without knowing the objective of the experiment occurring. Researchers concluded that the workers worked harder because they thought that they were being monitored individually. Researchers hypothesized that choosing one’s own coworkers, working as a group, being treated as special (as evidenced by working in a separate room), and having a sympathetic supervisor were the real reasons for the productivity increase.
One interpretation, mainly due to Elton Mayo, was that “the six individuals became a team and the team gave itself wholeheartedly and spontaneously to cooperation in the experiment. ” (There was a second relay assembly test room study whose results were not as significant as the first experiment. )
Bank Wiring Room Experiments
The purpose of the next study was to find out how payment incentives would affect productivity. The surprising result was that productivity actually decreased. Workers apparently had become suspicious that their productivity may have been boosted to justify firing some of the workers later on. The study was conducted by Elton Mayo and W. Lloyd Warner between 1931 and 1932 on a group of fourteen men who put together telephone switching equipment. The researchers found that although the workers were paid according to individual productivity, productivity decreased because the men were afraid that the company would lower the base rate. Detailed observation between the men revealed the existence of informal groups or “cliques” within the formal groups. These cliques developed informal rules of behavior as well as mechanisms to enforce them. The cliques served to control group members and to manage bosses; when bosses asked questions, clique members gave the same responses, even if they were untrue. These results show that workers were more responsive to the social force of their peer groups than to the control and incentives of management.
11.2: Theories of Motivation
11.2.1: Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs
Maslow’s hierarchy of needs are a series of physiological and emotional requirements for human contentment, arranged in order of necessity.
Learning Objective
Explain Maslow’s hierarchy of needs
Key Points
- Maslow’s hierarchy of needs is often portrayed in the shape of a pyramid, with the greatest and most fundamental levels of needs at the bottom, and the need for self-actualization at the top.
- The order of needs as categorized by Maslow are physiological; safety; love and belonging; esteem; and self-actualization.
- Maslow acknowledged that many different levels of motivation are likely to be present in a human all at once. His focus in discussing the hierarchy was to identify the basic types of motivation and the order that they generally progress as lower needs are reasonably well met.
Key Terms
- esteem
-
to regard someone with respect.
- security
-
The condition of not being threatened, especially physically, psychologically, emotionally, or financially.
- potential
-
currently unrealized ability.
Examples
- For the most part, physiological needs are obvious – they are the literal requirements for human survival. If these requirements are not met, the human body simply cannot continue to function. Air, water, and food are metabolic requirements for survival in all animals, including humans. Clothing and shelter provide necessary protection from the elements. The intensity of the human sexual instinct is shaped more by sexual competition than maintaining a birth rate adequate to survival of the species.
- With their physical needs relatively satisfied, the individual’s safety needs take precedence and dominate behavior. In the absence of physical safety – due to war, natural disaster, or, in cases of family violence, childhood abuse, etc. – people (re-)experience post-traumatic stress disorder and trans-generational trauma transfer. In the absence of economic safety – due to economic crisis and lack of work opportunities – these safety needs manifest themselves in such things as a preference for job security, grievance procedures for protecting the individual from unilateral authority, savings accounts, insurance policies, reasonable disability accommodations, and the like. This level is more likely to be found in children because they have a greater need to feel safe.
- After physiological and safety needs are fulfilled, the third layer of human needs are interpersonal and involve feelings of belongingness. The need is especially strong in childhood and can over-ride the need for safety as witnessed in children who cling to abusive parents. Deficiencies with respect to this aspect of Maslow’s hierarchy – due to hospitalism, neglect, shunning, ostracism etc. – can impact individual’s ability to form and maintain emotionally significant relationships in general.
- All humans have a need to be respected and to have self-esteem and self-respect. Esteem presents the normal human desire to be accepted and valued by others. People need to engage themselves to gain recognition and have an activity or activities that give the person a sense of contribution, to feel self-valued, be it in a profession or hobby. Imbalances at this level can result in low self-esteem or an inferiority complex.
- The perceived need for self-actualization pertains to what a person’s full potential is and realizing that potential. Maslow describes this desire as the desire to become more and more what one is, to become everything that one is capable of becoming. For example one individual may have the strong desire to become an ideal parent, in another it may be expressed athletically, and in another it may be expressed in painting, pictures, or inventions.
The most fundamental and basic needs are what Maslow called “deficiency needs” or “d-needs”:
- Esteem
- Friendship and love
- Security
- Physical needs
If these “deficiency needs” are not met, the body gives no physical indication but the individual feels anxious and tense. Maslow’s theory suggests that the most basic level of needs must be met before the individual will focus on higher level needs.
Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs
Maslow’s hierarchy captures the varying degree of needs by which humans are motivated. According to the psychological perspective, decision makers are motivated by these needs and decisions are influenced accordingly.
The human mind is so complex that separate motivations from different levels of Maslow’s pyramid usually occur at the same time. Maslow referred to these levels and their satisfaction in terms such as “relative,” “general,” and “primarily.” His focus in establishing the hierarchy of needs was to identify the basic types of motivations and the order in which that they generally progress as lower needs are reasonably well met.
Physiological Needs
Physiological needs are generally obvious because they are requiremed for survival. If requirements are not met, the body cannot continue to function. People lacking food, love, esteem, or safety would consider food to be their greatest need. Air, water, food, clothing, and shelter are the basic physiological needs.
Safety Needs
Once physical needs are satisfied, individual safety takes precedence. Safety and Security needs include:
- Personal security
- Financial security
- Health and well-being
- Safety net against accidents/illness and their adverse impacts
- Love and belonging
Interpersonal Needs
After physiological and safety needs are fulfilled, the third layer of human needs are interpersonal. This involves feelings of belongingness. Deficiencies in interpersonal needs, due to neglect, shunning, ostracism, etc., can impact an individual’s ability to form and maintain emotionally significant relationships in general, such as:
- Friendship
- Intimacy
- Family
Humans need to feel a sense of belonging and acceptance, whether it comes from a large social group, such as clubs, religious groups, professional organizations, gangs, family, or mentors. Humans need to love and be loved (sexually and non-sexually) by others. Without these connections, many people become susceptible to loneliness, social anxiety, and clinical depression. This need for belonging can sometimes overcome physiological and security needs. For example, an anorexic may ignore the need to eat and the security of health for a feeling of control and belonging.
Esteem
Esteem represents the normal human desire to be accepted and valued by others. People need to engage themselves to gain recognition and have an activity or activities that give the person a sense of contribution, to feel self-valued, be it in a profession or hobby. Imbalances at this level can result in low self-esteem or an inferiority complex. Many people with low self-esteem will not be able to improve their view of themselves simply by receiving fame, respect, and glory externally, but must first accept themselves internally. Psychological imbalances, such as depression, can prevent one from obtaining self-esteem on both levels.
Maslow noted two versions of esteem needs: a “lower” version and a “higher” version. The “lower” version of esteem is the need for respect from others. This may include a need for status, recognition, fame, prestige, and attention. The “higher” version manifests itself as the need for self-respect. For example, the person may have a need for strength, competence, mastery, self-confidence , independence, and freedom. This “higher” version takes precedence over the “lower” version because it relies on an inner competence established through experience. Deprivation of these needs may lead to an inferiority complex, weakness, and helplessness.
Maslow also states that even though these are examples of how the quest for knowledge is separate from basic needs, he warns that these “two hierarchies are interrelated rather than sharply separated. ” This means that this level of need, as well as the next and highest level, are not strict, separate levels but closely related to others, and this is possibly the reason that these two levels of need are left out of most textbooks.
Self-actualization
“What a man can be, he must be. ” This quotation forms the basis of the perceived need for self-actualization. This level of need refers to what a person’s full potential is and the realization of that potential. Maslow describes this level as the desire to accomplish everything that one can, to become the most that one can be. Individuals may perceive or focus on this need very specifically. For example, one individual may have the strong desire to become an ideal parent. In another, the desire may be expressed athletically. For others, it may be expressed in paintings, pictures, or inventions. As previously mentioned, Maslow believed that to understand this level of need, the person must not only achieve the previous needs, but master them.
11.2.2: Herzberg’s Two-Factor Theory
The Two-factor theory indicates that one set of factors at work cause job satisfaction, while another set of factors cause dissatisfaction.
Learning Objective
Explain Herzberg’s two factor theory
Key Points
- Factor 1: Motivators such as challenging work and recognition give positive satisfaction created by the job’s intrinsic conditions. Factor 2: Hygiene factors such as status, job security and salary do not themselves create positive satisfaction, but their absence can cause dissatisfaction.
- Individuals look for the gratification of higher-level psychological needs associated with achievement, recognition, responsibility, and advancement, rather than the satisfaction of lower-order needs such as minimum salary levels or safe and pleasant working conditions.
- If management wants to increase satisfaction on the job, it should be concerned with the nature of the work itself. On the other hand, if management wishes to reduce dissatisfaction, then it must focus on improving the job environment.
Key Terms
- productivity
-
Productivity is a measure of the efficiency of production and is defined as total output per one unit of a total input.
- Need Hierarchy
-
Abraham Maslow’s theory created in 1943 that postulates that needs can be categorized into the following 5 categories which are the basis for human motivations: Physiological, Safety, Belongingness and Love, Esteem, and Self-Actualization
- motivate
-
To provide someone with an incentive to do something; to encourage.
Example
- To motivate employees management must enrich the content of the actual work they ask them to do. For example, building into tasks set a greater level of responsibility, and the opportunity to learn new skills. In advocating making work more interesting, and improving the quality of the work experience for the individual, Herzberg coined the phrase ‘Quality of Working Life’.
The Two-factor theory (also known as Herzberg’s motivation-hygiene theory and Dual-Factor Theory) states that certain factors in the workplace cause job satisfaction, while a separate set of factors cause dissatisfaction. It was developed by Frederick Herzberg, a psychologist, who theorized that job satisfaction and job dissatisfaction act independently of each other.
Fundamentals of the Theory
Attitudes and their connection with industrial mental health are related to Maslow’s theory of motivation. According to Herzberg, individuals are not content with the satisfaction of lower-order needs at work such as minimum salary levels or safe and pleasant working conditions. Rather, individuals look for the gratification of higher-level psychological needs having to do with achievement, recognition, responsibility, advancement, and the nature of the work itself. This appears to parallel Maslow’s theory of a need hierarchy.
Maslow’s hierarchy
Maslow’s hierarchy captures the varying degree of needs by which humans are motivated. According to the psychological perspective, decision makers are motivated by these needs and decisions are influenced accordingly.
However, Herzberg added a new dimension to this theory by proposing a two-factor model of motivation, based on the notion that the presence of one set of job characteristics or incentives leads to worker satisfaction at work, while another and separate set of job characteristics leads to dissatisfaction at work. Thus, satisfaction and dissatisfaction are not on a continuum with one increasing as the other diminishes, but are independent phenomena.
This theory suggests that to improve job attitudes and productivity, administrators must recognize and attend to both sets of characteristics and not assume that an increase in satisfaction leads to decrease in unpleasurable dissatisfaction.
Herzberg found that the job characteristics related to what an individual does (the nature of the work he performs) apparently have the capacity to gratify such needs as achievement, competency, status, personal worth, and self-realization, thus making him happy and satisfied. However, the absence of such gratifying job characteristics does not appear to lead to unhappiness and dissatisfaction. Instead, dissatisfaction results from unfavorable assessments of such job-related factors as company policies, supervision, technical problems, salary, interpersonal relations on the job, and working conditions.
Thus, if management wishes to increase satisfaction on the job, it should be concerned with the nature of the work itself—the opportunities it presents for gaining status, assuming responsibility, and for achieving self-realization. If, on the other hand, management wishes to reduce dissatisfaction, then it must focus on the job environment—policies, procedures, supervision, and working conditions. If management is equally concerned with both satisfaction and dissatisfaction, then managers must give attention to both sets of job factors.
Theory Development
The two-factor theory was developed from data collected by Herzberg from interviews with 203 American accountants and engineers in Pittsburgh, chosen because of their professions’ growing importance in the business world. The subjects were asked to relate times when they felt exceptionally good or bad about their present job or any previous job, and to provide reasons, and a description of the sequence of events giving rise to that positive or negative feeling.
The two-factor theory distinguishes between:
- Motivators (e.g. challenging work, recognition, responsibility) that give positive satisfaction, arising from intrinsic conditions of the job itself, such as recognition, achievement, or personal growth .
- Hygiene factors (e.g. status, job security, salary, fringe benefits, work conditions) that do not give positive satisfaction, though dissatisfaction results from their absence. These are extrinsic to the work itself, and include aspects such as company policies, supervisory practices, or wages/salary.
Essentially, motivation factors are needed to motivate an employee to higher performance. Hygiene factors are needed to ensure an employee is not dissatisfied. Herzberg also further classified our actions and how and why we do them. For example, if you perform a work related action because you have to, then that is classed as movement, but if you perform a work related action because you want to, then that is classed as motivation.
Implications of Herzberg’s Theory
Herzberg’s theory attempts to uncover psychological needs of employees and enhance employee satisfaction. In order to apply this theory, employers are encouraged to design jobs that enhance and motivate employees beyond simply meeting a daily or weekly quota. This theory highlights the importance of rewards systems and monitoring when and how employees are rewarded. Herzberg’s theory implies that simple recognition is often enough to motivate employees and increase job satisfaction.
Herzberg argues that both motivation and hygiene are equally important, but that good hygiene will only lead to average performance, preventing dissatisfaction, but not, by itself, create a positive attitude or motivation to work. To motivate the employee, management must enrich the content of the actual work they ask them to do.
11.2.3: MacGregor’s Theory X and Theory Y
Theory X and Theory Y describe two contrasting models of workforce motivation applied by managers in human resource management, organizational behavior, organizational communication, and organizational development.
Learning Objective
Differentiate between the motivators in Theory X and the motivators in Theory Y
Key Points
- Theory X and Theory Y, put forward by Douglas McGregor, describe two contrasting models of workforce motivation and management.
- Theory X is a much more traditional management style, predicated on the assumption that external rewards, punishments, and supervision are effective ways to manage employees.
- Theory Y focuses on the internal mechanisms of motivation (relative to the employee), assuming that employees have a natural drive to contribute, take ownership of their work, and pursue organizational objectives on their own.
- While Theory Y may seem optimal, it does have some drawbacks. Through empowering everyone towards autonomy, it can be easy to lose organizational alignment. Strong organizational objectives and processes are necessary in order for it to work.
- There is some balance to be achieved between these two perspectives, though Theory Y motivators tend to be the preferably approach to building strong collaborative cultures.
Among the many theories of motivation is Douglas McGregor’s concept of Theory X and Theory Y. His initial work focused on demonstrating two contrasting motivators in the workplace: external motivators such as supervision, rewards, penalties, and rules (X) versus internal motivators such as passion, job satisfaction, accountability, and feelings of self-worth (Y).
The true value in creating this contrast is understanding the situations where X or Y may work better, and recognizing that motivation is both internally and externally complex. To draw something of a parallel here, Maslow’s hierarchy has some loose alignment with McGregor’s theories, wherein the lower levels of the hierarchy are more along ‘X’ lines while the higher levels have more of a ‘Y’ feel to them.
Theory X
The core assumption here is that, in a given workplace environment, employees won’t have the intrinsic motivations required to accomplish objectives. Instead, a system should be in place where external motivators create desired behavioral outcomes. This is considered more of a firm managerial approach, where management will set objectives, supervise execution, and provide corresponding returns.
This can be implemented in two ways. Employees can be externally motivated by the existence of supervision or punishment or externally motivated by the absence of supervision or punishment.
In the first scenario, supervision is tight, and rewards are positive for strong performance and negative for bad performance. In this method, authoritarian management pushes employees toward desired outcomes. Workplaces like this focus on shaping their employees into what they want them to be. The latter scenario represents a softer approach that reduces animosity and anxiety.
Theory Y
Theory Y is a bit more complex, as the manager is not entirely in control (and thus, feels less like a management style). However, properly understanding Theory Y concepts can help managers manage and hire better.
Theory Y assumes that employees enjoy a challenge, and strive to add value for the sake of self-worth and a desire to contribute to a community. The focal point here is on building strong, friendly relationships between management and employees, and removing most (if not all) authority from the arrangement. In such a situation, there is no push and no push back, simply unclouded business objectives.
This, in theory, sounds ideal. However, managers and employees who work in this framework do eventually encounter some challenges. Through a hands off management approach, it can be easy to lose alignment, as different individuals go in slightly different tactical directions. It can also result in enabling less motivated employees to take advantage of a relaxed work environment. There are various ways to address these concerns, though, such as building organizational processes to create alignment and through hiring carefully.
Theory X and Theory Y
This image demonstrates where the true source of motivation is derived in each theory. Under Theory X, management uses control to direct behavior. Under Theory Y, behavior is dictated by the employees themselves through communication with management and an understanding of the agreed upon broader strategy and objectives.
Using Both
No model is perfect, and every circumstance requires some individual thought. Most often, experienced managers will find the need to use both at some point, though Theory Y usually leads to preferable outcomes and company culture. Some employees require different sources of motivations depending on where they are in their own personal development, not to mention some tasks seems to work out better when externally driven, while others work better when internally driven. Having comfort with both concepts is the ideal tool set for a motivational manager.
11.2.4: Ouchi’s Theory Z
Ouchi’s theory focuses on increasing employee loyalty to the company by providing a job for life and focusing on the employee’s well-being.
Learning Objective
Explain how the Ouchi Theory promotes a strong work force
Key Points
- Theory Z is a name applied to three distinctly different psychological theories, one of which was was developed by Dr. William Ouchi.
- According to Ouchi, Theory Z management tends to promote stable employment, high productivity, and high employee morale and satisfaction.
- William Ouchi takes Japanese business techniques and adapts them to the American corporate environment.
- One of the most important pieces of this theory is that management must have a high degree of confidence in its workers in order for this type of participative management to work.
Key Terms
- turnover
-
In a human resources context, turnover or staff turnover or labor turnover is the rate at which an employer gains and loses employees.
- morale
-
The capacity of people to maintain belief in an institution or a goal, or even in oneself and others.
Introduction
Theory Z is a name applied to three distinct psychological theories. One was developed by Abraham H. Maslow in his paper Theory Z and the other is Dr. William Ouchi’s so-called “Japanese Management” style popularized during the Asian economic boom of the 1980s. The third was developed by W. J. Reddin in Managerial Effectiveness.
For Ouchi, Theory Z focused on increasing employee loyalty to the company by providing a job for life with a strong focus on the well-being of the employee, both on and off the job. According to Ouchi, Theory Z management tends to promote:
- Stable employment
- High productivity
- High employee morale and satisfaction
History of Ouchi’s Theory
Professor Ouchi spent years researching Japanese companies and examining American companies using the Theory Z management styles .
Toyota: A Product of Japanese Productivity
Professor Ouchi spent years researching Japanese companies using the Theory Z management styes.
By the 1980s, Japan was known for the highest productivity anywhere in the world, while America’s productivity had fallen drastically. The word “Wa” in Japanese can be applied to Theory Z because they both deal with promoting partnerships and group work.
The word “Wa” means a perfect circle or harmony, which influences Japanese society to always come to a solution via teamwork. Promoting Theory Z and the Japanese word “Wa” is how the Japanese economy became so powerful. Because the Japanese show a high level enthusiasm to work, some of the researchers also claim that the “Z” in the Theory Z stands for “Zeal. “
Ouchi’s Conclusions
Ouchi wrote a book called Theory Z: How American Business Can Meet the Japanese Challenge (1981). In this book, Ouchi shows how American corporations can meet the Japanese challenges with a highly effective management style that promises to transform business in the 1980s.
The secret to Japanese success, according to Ouchi, is not technology, but a special way of managing people. “This is a managing style that focuses on a strong company philosophy, a distinct corporate culture, long-range staff development, and consensus decision-making” (Ouchi, 1981). Ouchi claims that the results show:
- Lower turnover
- Increased job commitment
- Dramatically higher productivity
William Ouchi doesn’t say that the Japanese culture for business is necessarily the best strategy for the American companies. Instead, he takes Japanese business techniques and adapts them to the American corporate environment.
Much like McGregor’s theories, Ouchi’s Theory Z makes certain assumptions about workers. Some of the assumptions about workers under this theory include:
- Workers tend to want to build happy and intimate working relationships with those that they work for and with, as well as the people that work for them.
- Workers have a high need to be supported by the company, and highly value a working environment in which such things as family, cultures and traditions, and social institutions are regarded as equally important as the work itself. These types of workers have a very well developed sense of order, discipline, a moral obligation to work hard, and a sense of cohesion with their fellow workers.
- Workers can be trusted to do their jobs to their utmost ability, so long as management can be trusted to support them and look out for their well-being (Massie & Douglas, 1992).
One of the most important pieces of this theory is that management must have a high degree of confidence in its workers in order for this type of participative management to work. This theory assumes that workers will be participating in the decisions of the company to a great degree.
Ouchi explains that the employees must be very knowledgeable about the various issues of the company, as well as possess the competence to make those decisions. He also points out, however, that management sometimes has a tendency to underestimate the ability of the workers to effectively contribute to the decision-making process (Bittel, 1989). For this reason, Theory Z stresses the need for the workers to become generalists, rather than specialists, and to increase their knowledge of the company and its processes through job rotations and constant training.
Promotions tend to be slower in this type of setting, as workers are given a much longer opportunity to receive training and more time to learn the ins and outs of the company’s operations.
The desire, under this theory, is to develop a work force, which has more loyalty toward staying with the company for an entire career. It is expected that once employees do rise to a position of high level management, they will know a great deal more about the company and how it operates, and will be able to use Theory Z management theories effectively on the newer employees.
11.3: Modern Views on Motivation
11.3.1: Equity Theory
Equity theory states that perceptions of equality in the input/outcome ratio of employees determines their relative job satisfaction.
Learning Objective
Explain equity theory
Key Points
- Equity theory was developed in 1963 by John Stacey Adams, who stated that an employee will consider himself to be fairly treated if the ratio of his inputs to outcomes is equivalent to those around him (by his perception).
- Inputs include effort, time, loyalty, seniority, commitment, personal sacrifice, etc. Outcomes, on the other hand, include salary, benefits, job security, reputation, sense of achievement, gratitude, etc.
- According to equity theory, the person who gets “too much” and the person who gets “too little” both feel distressed. The person who gets too much may feel guilt or shame. The person who gets too little may feel angry or humiliated.
- (1) Individuals try to maximize outcomes
- (2) [a] Groups will evolve systems of equity, and induce members to adhere to these systems
- [b] Groups will reward those who treat others equitably, and punish those who don’t.
- (3) Individuals in an inequitable relationship feel ‘distressed’. Those who get too little feel angry/humiliated, while those with too much feel guilt or shame.
- (4) Those in distress will attempt to eliminate the inequity, in order to eliminate the distress.
- 3 Primary assumptions:
- (1) Employees except a fair return for their contribution
- (2) Employees can and do determine what an equitable return should be by comparing themselves to coworkers
- (3) Distressed employees attempt to fix an inequitable situation by distorting inputs and outcomes in their own minds, by actually changing inputs/outcomes, or by leaving the organization.
- Implications of Equity Theory:
- – The value of inputs and outcomes will vary from person to person
- – Employees may adjust outcomes according to purchasing power and local market conditions
- – An overcompensated employee may adjust their efforts, or may inflate the value of their inputs in their mind, adopting a sense of superiority and thus decrease their efforts.
- Criticisms:
- – Some say the model is too simple; there are other variables that affect people’s perceptions of fairness which vary from person to person
- – Much theory related to Equity Theory has been conducted in laboratories and not real world settings
Key Terms
- equity theory
-
an attempt to explain relational satisfaction in terms of perceptions of fair or unfair distributions of resources within interpersonal relationships
- Inputs
-
Each participant’s contributions that are viewed as entitling him/her to rewards or costs. Examples include time, effort, and loyalty.
- outcomes
-
The positive and negative consequences that an individual perceives to be a result of his/her actions. Examples include praise, bonuses, and promotions.
- ratio
-
The relative magnitudes of two quantities (usually expressed as a quotient).
Example
- Consider two employees doing the same job, and putting in the same inputs (say, time and effort). If employee X gets a raise and employee Y does not, then the latter may feel unfairly treated, diminishing his job satisfaction and possibly quality of work.
Equity theory was first developed in 1963 by John Stacey Adams, a workplace and behavioral psychologist, who asserted that employees seek to maintain equity between the inputs that they bring to a job and the outcomes that they receive from it, against the perceived inputs and outcomes of others.
For example, if an employee was given a salary increase but a peer was given a larger salary increase for the same amount of work, the first employee would evaluate this change, perceive an inequality, and be distressed. However, if the first employee perceived the other employee being given more responsibility and therefore relatively more work along with the salary increase, then the first employee may evaluate the change, conclude that there was no loss in equality status, and not resist the change.
An individual will consider that he is treated fairly if he perceives the ratio of his inputs to his outcomes to be equivalent to those around him .
Formula expressing equal equity theory
Ratio of one individual’s outputs to inputs is perceived as equal to that of another individual in comparison.
Defining Inputs & Outcomes
Inputs are defined as each participant’s contributions to the relational exchange and are viewed as entitling him/her to rewards or costs. The inputs that a participant contributes to a relationship can be either assets (entitling him/her to rewards) or liabilities(entitling him/her to costs). Individual traits such as boorishness and cruelty are seen as liabilities entitling the possessor to costs. Inputs typically include:
- Time
- Effort
- Loyalty
- Commitment
- Adaptability
- Flexibility
- Tolerance
- Determination
- Enthusiasm
- Personal sacrifice
- Support from coworkers and colleagues
- Skill
Outcomes are defined as the positive and negative consequences that an individual perceives a participant has incurred as a consequence of his/her relationship with another. When the ratio of inputs to outcomes is close, then the employee should be very satisfied with their job. Outcomes can be both tangible and intangible.
Typical outcomes include:
- Job security
- Salary
- Expenses
- Recognition
- Responsibility
- Sense of achievement
- Praise
Four Propositions of Equity Theory
- Individuals will try to maximize their outcomes.
- A) Individuals can maximize collective rewards by evolving accepted systems for equitably apportioning resources among members. Thus, groups will evolve such systems of equity, and will attempt to induce members to accept and adhere to these systems. B) Groups will generally reward members who treat others equitably and generally punish members who treat each other inequitably.
- When individuals find themselves participating in inequitable relationships, they will become distressed. The more inequitable the relationship, the more distress they will feel. According to equity theory, the person who gets “too much” and the person who gets “too little” both feel distressed. The person who gets too much may feel guilt or shame. The person who gets too little may feel angry or humiliated.
- Individuals who discover they are in inequitable relationships will attempt to eliminate their distress by restoring equity.
Three Primary Equity Theory Assumptions Applied to Most Businesses
- Employees expect a fair return for what they contribute to their jobs, a concept referred to as the “equity norm.”
- Employees determine what their equitable return should be after comparing their inputs and outcomes with those of their coworkers, a concept referred to as “social comparison.”
- Employees who perceive themselves as being in an inequitable situation will seek to reduce the inequity either by distorting inputs and/or outcomes in their own minds, by directly altering inputs and/or outcomes, or by leaving the organization.
Implications for Managers
Equity theory has several implications for business managers:
- People measure the totals of their inputs and outcomes. This means a working mother may accept lower monetary compensation in return for more flexible working hours.
- Different employees ascribe personal values to inputs and outcomes. Thus, two employees of equal experience and qualification performing the same work for the same pay may have quite different perceptions of the fairness of the deal.
- Employees are able to adjust for purchasing power and local market conditions. Thus a teacher from Alberta may accept lower compensation than his colleague in Toronto if his cost of living is different, while a teacher in a remote African village may accept a totally different pay structure.
- Although it may be acceptable for more senior staff to receive higher compensation, there are limits to the balance of the scales of equity and employees can find excessive executive pay demotivating.
- Staff perceptions of inputs and outcomes of themselves and others may be incorrect, and perceptions need to be managed effectively.
11.3.2: Expectancy Theory
Expectancy Theory postulates that an individual’s motivation can be derived through identifying an appropriate expectation.
Learning Objective
Understand the three relationships and four variables that result in Expectancy Theory
Key Points
- Victor Vroom at the Yale School of Management put forward a concept called Expectancy Theory, which suggests behavior is motivated by an anticipated outcome.
- There are three interactions: expectancy (effort → performance), instrumentality (performance → outcome), and valence (outcome → reward).
- Expectancy allows an individual to move from effort to performance, and is predicated upon the belief that one can accomplish a given goal.
- Instrumentality is confidence that a given performance will result in the desired reward. This is best enabled through an established relationship or contract that guarantees the reward.
- Valence is the degree to which this reward matters to the individual being motivated, which could be pictured as a spectrum. The higher the valence, the higher the motivation.
Key Terms
- self-efficacy
-
One’s belief that he or she can accomplish a given objective.
- valence
-
A value assigned to an object, behavior, or other consequence that has relative scale.
Expectancy Theory, initially put forward by Victor Vroom at the Yale School of Management, suggests that behavior is motivated by the anticipated result or consequences expected. The concept of choice is central to this theory, as there are a variety of behaviors that an individual could potentially choose. To anticipate what choice will be made , identify what consequences would be expected as an outcome, and select the motivation which will result in the optimal outcome.
The Building Blocks
Expectancy Theory boils down to a few simple variables, which in conjunction produce the projected outcome based upon the motivational inputs. This is described as three relationships using four inputs:
- Expectancy: effort → performance (E→P)
- Instrumentality: performance → outcome (P→O)
- Valence: V(R) outcome → reward
What you’ll notice is a full equation, where each variable leads to the next:
Effort (E) → Performance (P) → Outcome (O) → Reward (R)
Expectancy Theory
This illustration visually expresses the three relationships that ultimately equate to a given motivation.
Expectancy
Moving from effort to performance requires three things. First is self-efficacy, or the belief that one can accomplish the goal. Second is the appropriate goal difficulty. Third is the perception of control, the concept that accomplishing the objectives is within one’s influence.
Instrumentality
To move from performance to outcome, the individual must trust that the delivery of a given output will result in the desired reward. An example of this could be a commission on a sale. Established policies in place, preferably via a contract, will guarantee the reward will be delivered based upon an agreed upon performance.
Valence
This is simply the valuation of a given reward from the individual being motivated. This can be intrinsically positive or negative, which is to say the pursuit of OR avoidance of an outcome. This is why it is called a valence. Based upon the values, desires, and objectives of an individual, the individual will have a certain valued reaction to the reward. If one reward has a more extreme valence than another, it will consequently result in a higher level of motivation.
Expectancy Theory combines these three concepts into the conclusion that these three interactions will ultimately create a desired motivational response.
11.3.3: Goal-Setting Theory
If done correctly, having more specific and well-enumerated goals lead to higher performance and a greater chance of achieving those goals.
Learning Objective
Explain the procedures and outcomes of goal setting
Key Points
- According to the theory, goal setting affects outcomes in four ways: choice (focus on goal-relevant activities); effort (an enumerated target can raise effort); persistence (goals focus employees to work through setbacks); and cognition (change inefficient behaviors).
- Goal-setting helps managers: since managers cannot consistently drive motivation and monitor employee activities, goal setting can work as a self-regulatory mechanism for employees to work with less guidance and oversight.
- Do not encourage employees to “do their best. ” Instead, specific goals should be set, that are both challenging as well as realistic. It is best if these goals are set after deliberation with the employee in question.
- For employees to care about goals that are set, six interdependent factors need to be considered: importance of the expected outcomes to the employee; self efficacy; commitment to others; goal feedback; task complexity; and goal motivation.
- Feedback is particularly important, in order to sustain motivation and commitment, as well as to ensure that efforts are correctly guided.
- It is important that the goals of a manager align with the goals of the organization as a whole. Another limitation is that rigorous goal setting may hamper complex and creative tasks, as individuals become preoccupied with meeting the goals rather than performing tasks.
- Locke and Latham (2002) urge managers not to encourage employees to “do their best”. They state that this attitude is useless in eliciting specific behavior. Instead, specific goals should be set, which are both challenging as well as realistic. It is best if these goals are set after deliberation with the employee in question.
- For employees to care about goals that are set, 6 interdependent factors need to be considered: Importance of the expected outcomes to the employee, Self Efficacy, Commitment to others, Goal feedback, Task complexity, Goal Motivation.
- Feedback is particularly important, in order to sustain motivation and commitment, as well as to ensure that efforts are correctly guided.
- Goal setting has limitations. It is important that the goals of a manager – and of specific individuals – align with the goals of the organization as a whole. If goals are not aligned, performance may suffer. Another limitation is that rigorous goal setting may hamper complex tasks, as individuals become preoccupied with meeting the goals rather than performing tasks. This may also be true with particularly creative work, where setting rigorous goals may hamper the creative process.
Key Terms
- goal
-
a result that one is attempting to achieve
- self-efficacy
-
the measure of the belief in one’s own ability to complete tasks and reach goals
- cognitive
-
the part of mental function that deals with logic, as opposed to affective which deals with emotions
Example
- Goals are often set at the start of a period, with evaluation at the end of that period. For example, sales personnel may be tasked with selling a certain number of units per quarter (e.g. a car salesman may have a goal to sell one car a week).
Goal Setting Theory
Setting goals affects outcomes in four ways:
- Choice: Goals direct efforts towards goal-relevant activities and away from distractions.
- Effort: Goals can lead to more effort; for example, if one typically produces four widgets an hour, and has the goal of producing six, one may work more efficiently as a result.
- Persistence: People become more likely to work through setbacks if pursuing a goal.
- Cognition: Goals can lead individuals to develop and change their behavior.
Goals that are difficult to achieve and specific tend to increase performance more than goals that are not. A goal can become more specific through quantification or enumeration (should be measurable), such as by demanding “…increase productivity by 50%,” or by defining certain tasks that must be completed.
Goal-Setting Theory
Goals lead to higher performance in an organization.
Psychologists have examined the behavioral effects of goal-setting, concluding in 90% of laboratory and field studies that specific and challenging goals led to higher performance than when the goals were easy or did not exists.
While some managers believe it is sufficient to urge employees to “do their best,” psychologists have disagreed on this style’s effectiveness. Some psychologists have found that people who are told to “do their best” don’t. To elicit some specific form of behavior from others, it is important that all employees have a clear understanding what is expected. “Doing their best” does not provide that clear measure. A goal is important because it establishes a specified direction and measure of performance.
However, when goals are established at a management level and thereafter solely laid down, employee motivation with regard to achieving these goals is rather suppressed. To increase motivation, employees must be involved in the goal setting process and the goals must be challenging as well.
People perform better when they are committed to achieve certain goals. Goal commitment is dependent on:
- Importance of the expected outcomes of goal attainment
- Self-efficacy – one’s belief that he is able to achieve the goals
- Commitment to others – promises or engagements to others can strongly improve commitment
- Feedback – keep track of performance to allow employees to see how effective they have been in attaining the goals to ensure that any deficiencies are quickly corrected.
- Task complexity – more difficult goals require more cognitive strategies and well-developed skills. The more difficult the tasks, the smaller the group of people who possess the necessary skills and strategies. From an organizational perspective it is thereby more difficult to successfully attain more difficult goals since resources become more scarce.
- Employee motivation – the more employees are motivated, the more they are stimulated and interested in accepting goals.
These success factors are interdependent. For example the expected outcomes of goals are positively influenced when employees are involved in the goal setting process. Not only does participation increase commitment in attaining the goals that are set, participation influences self-efficacy as well.
Goal-commitment, the most influential moderator, becomes especially important when dealing with difficult or complex goals. If people lack commitment to goals, they lack motivation to reach them. To commit to a goal, one must believe in its importance or significance.
The enhancement of performance through goals requires feedback. Goal setting and feedback go hand in hand. Without feedback, goal setting is unlikely to work. Providing feedback on short-term objectives helps to sustain motivation and commitment to a goal. Besides, feedback should be provided on the strategies followed to achieve the goals and the final outcomes achieved as well. Feedback on strategies to obtain goals is very important, especially for complex work, because challenging goals put focus on outcomes rather than on performance strategies, so they impair performance.
Proper feedback is also very essential, and the following hints may help for providing a good feedback:
- Create a positive context for feedback.
- Use constructive and positive language.
- Focus on behaviors and strategies.
- Tailor feedback to the needs of the individual worker.
- Make feedback a two-way communication process.
Goal-setting may have little effect if individuals can’t see the state of their performance in relation to the goal. By gauging their performance, individuals can determine whether they need to work harder or changing their methods.
Goal-setting theory has limitations. In an organization, a goal of a manager may not align with the goals of the organization as a whole. In such cases, the goals of an individual may come into direct conflict with the employing organization. Without aligning goals between the organization and the individual, performance may suffer. Moreover, for complex or creative tasks, goal-setting may actual impair performance because the individual may become preoccupied with meeting goals and not performing tasks.
11.3.4: Reinforcement Theory
Reinforcement theory, or operant conditioning, is a implementation of cause and effect thinking into workplace motivation.
Learning Objective
Recognize the role of cause and effect via reinforcement in motivating good performance
Key Points
- B.F. Skinner originally founded the basic premise behind Reinforcement Theory, which is best described as cause and effect. When a behavior occurs, individuals associate the consequences with the behavior.
- Reinforcement, be it positive or negative, increases a behavior. This is best done through rewards or the removal of frustrations.
- Punishment, be it positive or negative, is designed to decrease a behavior. This is best done through providing an adverse response.
- Various factors can influence the efficacy of reinforcement. Most notably, the size, immediacy, and need for a given reward (or level of avoidance for a given punishment).
Key Term
- reinforcement
-
The process of repeating a behavior with desirable consequences.
The basic premise behind B.F. Skinner’s Theory of Reinforcement is both simple and intuitive: an individual’s behavior is a function of its consequences. Think of it as a simple cause and effect graph. Every behavior will be a cause that creates some sort of consequence as an effect. If I work hard today, I’ll make more money. If I make more money, I’m more likely to want to work hard. This creates behavioral reinforcement, where the desired behavior is enabled and promoted by the desired outcome from a behavior.
The Primary Inputs
This theory relies on four primary inputs or aspects of operant conditioning, generated from the external environment. These four inputs are positive reinforcement, negative reinforcement, positive punishment, and negative punishment. A fifth input could be described as extinction, which is a lack of reinforcement for a behavior that had previously been reinforced.
Operant Conditioning
This chart demonstrates the various facets of operant conditioning, which can be framed via reinforcement and punishment (both positive and negative for each).
Reinforcement
Positive reinforcement: When a behavior (and subsequent response) is rewarding, the frequency of that behavior will be increased. For example, if an employee identifies a new market opportunity that creates profit, an organization may give her a bonus. This will positively reinforce the desired behavior.
Negative reinforcement: When a desired behavior is responded to with the removal of something the individual doesn’t like, the behavior is reinforced. For example, an employee demonstrates a strong sense of work ethic and wraps up a few projects faster than expected. This employee happens to have a long commute. The manager tells the employee to go ahead and work from home for a few days, considering how much progress she has made. This is an example of removing a negative stimuli for reinforcing a behavior.
Punishment
Positive punishment: Conditioning at it’s simplest, punishment is simply identifying a negative behavior and providing an adverse stimuli to dissuade future instances. A simple example would be suspending an employee for inappropriate behavior.
Negative punishment: Similar to negative reinforcement, negative punishment revolves around removing something to condition a response. To use our previous example for negative reinforcement, an employee prefers to work at home. However, his performance has been suffering lately. A negative punishment would be to revoke the right to work at home until performance improves.
Factors Impacting Success
Reinforcement can be impacted by various factors:
Satiation – In short, the degree of need. If an employee is quite wealthy, for example, it may not be particularly helpful to offer a bonus.
Immediacy – The time between the desired behavior and the potential reinforcement will have impact on how significantly the reinforcement will be correlated with the behavior. To use the bonus example, if an employee does something great, don’t wait around to provide a bonus. Make sure it’s fresh in their minds; this helps associate the outcome cause with the effect.
Size – Of course, the scale of the reward or punishment has a big impact on the scale of the response. A bigger bonus means a bigger impact (to a degree, see the satiation aspect above).
11.4: Motivation Techniques in Practice
11.4.1: Behavior Modification
Modifying behavior through reinforcement and environmental stimuli can increase positive actions and decrease negative actions in the workplace.
Learning Objective
Differentiate between the various stimuli managers use to create or reinforce certain types of behavior
Key Points
- Behavior modification is a central concept in organizational behavior, pulling from a wide variety of multidisciplinary perspectives such as psychology and sociology.
- An important concern for creating a business is the environment, which will actively modify behavior in a variety of ways. Being able to proactively predict how a given environment may impact behavior is a great opportunity.
- Reinforcement, both positive and negative, can be created via incentives or the removal and avoidance of negative stimuli.
- Punishments, such as demotions, are also used to avoid repeating undesirable past behaviors.
Key Terms
- reinforcement
-
The process which enables behavior with desirable consequences to be repeated.
- stimuli
-
An external force which generates a response or a reaction from something else
Identifying how to keep employees interested and motivated in their work is a substantial aspect of organizational behavior. This area of business is uniquely combined with psychology and sociology to create an understanding of how people behave at work, and why. As an overview, there are a few key concepts which will help to frame motivational theory, and how it is commonly applied in the workplace.
Environment Matters
How people behave is largely impacted by how they interact with the world around them. As an organization, it’s useful to consider how the structure of an office, and the availability of certain resources, may impact overall behavior of all employees. External forces that impact behavior are referred to as stimuli, and understanding what type of stimuli may modify behavior is useful in leading organizations.
Take an example of an open office environment, as compared to an environment of cubicles and individual offices. With easy access to privacy and walls between employees, tendencies toward individual work and decision-making via small groups and small meetings may be more likely compared to an office with long tables, no offices, and no walls. This is just a simple example of a cultural decision that will result in modified behavior.
Reinforcement (Positive and Negative)
Behavior modification in organizational management is often linked with B.F. Skinner’s contributions to the study of behavior. Reinforcement, both positive and negative, can be created via incentives or the removal and avoidance of negative stimuli. These influences on behavior are different than environmental influences because they are deliberately reactive to employee behaviors (as opposed to proactive or incidental). Hence the idea of reinforcing something deliberately, after it occurs.
Concepts like this tend to look much simpler in action than in theory. A simple example can be seen in the restaurant industry. A server might be motivated to perform better after receiving higher tips for exceptional service. This is positive reinforcement. On the other hand, a server might be motivated to perform better after his or her boss received negative feedback from an unhappy customer. This is negative reinforcement.
Punishment
Punishments, such as demotions, are also used to avoid repeating undesirable past behaviors. For example, a restaurant manager might require the server who makes the most mistakes (such as mixing up orders) to pick up the least desirable shifts.
Operant Conditioning
Behavior can be promoted or demoted through strategic use of positive and negative reinforcements, as well as positive and negative punishments.
11.4.2: Job Design
Designing jobs and job characteristics strategically to empower employee satisfaction and motivation is a central responsibility of management.
Learning Objective
List the various core dimensions of strategic job design, along with the psychological states which accompany them
Key Points
- Job design is the process of specifying the contents, objectives, responsibilities, and relationships the job will fulfill or interact with.
- Clever job design can be a highly motivating aspect of an employee’s day-to-day operations. Effectively building motivation and satisfaction into the job design itself empowers positive employee behaviors.
- Skill variety, task identity, task significance, autonomy, and feedback are core components of effective job design.
- If effectively designed, a job should induce the psychological states of meaningfulness, responsibility, and ownership of the results.
- Managers can also leverage intrinsic and extrinsic rewards, job rotation, job enrichment and job enlargement to better motivate employee’s via job design.
Key Term
- Autonomy
-
The ability to determine and enact one’s own objectives and processes in the workplace.
Job Design
Job design is an important prerequisite to effective workplace motivation, as designing a job effectively can empower positive behaviors and create a strong infrastructure for employee success. Job design is specifying the contents, responsibilities, objectives, and relationships required to satisfy the expectations of the role. Understanding how to effectively design a job is a key managerial skill, with various models and theories to assist in pursuing this tactfully.
Job Characteristic Theory
Proposed by Hackman & Oldman in 1976, this theory underlines five critical characteristics job design should keep in mind, which satisfy three critical psychological states of the employee filling the role. The objective of this model is to generate intrinsic motivation, satisfaction, and performance while minimizing turnover.
Core Job Dimensions
- Skill variety — Doing the same thing day in and day out gets tedious. The natural solution is designing jobs with enough variety to stimulate ongoing interest, growth, and satisfaction.
- Task identity — Being part of a team is motivating, but so too is having ownership of a facet of the process. Having a clear understanding of what one is responsible for, and some degree of control over said task, is motivating.
- Task significance — Being relevant to organizational success provides key motivation to completing the tasks at hand. Knowing one’s importance tends to lead to satisfaction.
- Autonomy — No one likes being micro-managed, and having some freedom to be the expert is critical to job satisfaction. Generally speaking, we hire individuals for their specialized knowledge. Giving specialists autonomy to make the right decisions is a win win.
- Feedback — Finally, everyone needs objective feedback as to how they are doing and how they can do better. Providing well-constructed feedback with tangible outcomes is a key component of job design.
Psychological States
- Experienced Meaningfulness – Through accomplishing the first three dimensions above, employees feel what they do is meaningful. This is a positive psychological state.
- Experienced Responsibility – Dimension four brings about a sense of accountability, which is motivating.
- Knowledge of Results – Dimension five provides a sense of progress, growth, and personal assessment. Understanding one’s accomplishments is a healthy state of mind for motivation and satisfaction.
Job Design Techniques
As a motivational force in the organization, managers must consider how they can design jobs tactfully to create empowered, motivated, and satisfied employees. Here are a few established methods to accomplish this objective:
- Job Rotation – As noted in the above model, it’s not particularly motivating to do the exact same thing every day. As a result, rotating jobs and expanding the skill sets of employees accomplishes two objectives: increased employee satisfaction will and broader employee skill sets.
- Job Enlargement (horizontal) – Zooming out a little, and granting employees the autonomy to assess the quality of their work, improve efficiency of their processes, and address mistakes often empowers satisfaction in the workplace.
- Intrinsic and Extrinsic Rewards – Having autonomy is motivating, but particularly motivating when rewards are granted on the performance level. Consider a salesman. Receiving a commission on every sale motivates both performance and job satisfaction.
- Job Enrichment (vertical) – As a manager, it is your responsibility to dedicate some (if not all) of your managerial planning to experienced employees as they grow into their roles. By giving over control of the employee’s work task planning to the employees themselves, they feel a strong sense of progress in their career and ownership of their outcomes.
11.4.3: Flextime
Under flextime, workers are allowed to determine their work schedule instead of working during the standard hours of 9 a.m. to 5 p.m.
Learning Objective
Evaluate flextime as an alternative work schedule
Key Points
- Even with flextime, employees are usually expected to work during a core period of time during the working day depending on the needs of the business (from 11 a.m. to 3 p.m. for example).
- Some companies have a flexplace policy which allows employees to decide where they do their work.
- Flextime benefits for employees include: a better work-life balance, less commute, less fatigue, more days off, and lower sickness.
- Flextime benefits for the company include: better motivated workers; more efficient and effective operation; less fatigued workers, so less errors; people work overtime hours without receiving overtime rates; fewer facilities required; and lower sickness.
Key Terms
- work-life balance
-
The relative importance of work and personal life to a particular individual.
- telecommuting
-
Telecommuting or telework are terms often used interchangeably to refer to a work arrangement in which employees enjoy flexibility in work location and hours. A person who telecommutes is known as a “telecommuter” and a person who teleworks is known as a “teleworker. ” Telecommute generally refers to the elimination of the daily commute to a central place of work. Many telecommuters work from home, while others, occasionally also referred to as “nomad workers” or “web commuters” utilize mobile telecommunications technology to work from coffee shops or other locations.
- flexitime
-
An arrangement that allows employees to set their own working hours within agreed limits; normally must include certain periods (core time) when they must be at work.
Example
- Flextime works well for parents when both parents work. A working mother might choose to work from Monday to Friday from 7 a.m. to 3 p.m. so that she can be home when the children return from school (or pick them up). Her husband may go to work later, to see the children off to school, and thus stay at work later.
Flextime
Flexitime is a variable work schedule, in contrast to traditional work arrangements requiring employees to work a standard 9 a.m. to 5 p.m. day. Its invention is usually credited to William Henning. Under flextime, there is typically a core period (of approximately 50% of total working time / working day) of the day, when employees are expected to be at work (for example, between 11 a.m. and 3 p.m.). The rest of the working day is “flexitime”, in which employees can choose when they work, subject to achieving total daily, weekly, or monthly hours in the region of what the employer expects, and subject to the necessary work being done .
Telecommuting
This man is telecommuting from a restaurant. As a result of improvement in technology and Internet connectivity, one can telecommute from almost anywhere now.
A flextime policy allows staff to determine when they will work, while a flexplace policy allows staff to determine where they will work. Its practical realization can mainly be attributed to the entrepreneur Wilhelm Haller who founded Hengstler Gleitzeit, and later “Interflex Datensysteme GmbH” in Southern Germany, where today a number of companies offer Flexitime (Gleitzeit) solutions which have grown out of his initiative.
Advantages of Flextime
The advantages of flexitime for the individual include: better work-life balance, less commute, less fatigue, more days off, and lower sickness. The benefits for the company include: better motivated workers; more efficient and effective operation; less fatigued workers, so less errors; people work overtime hours without receiving overtime rates; fewer facilities required; and lower sickness.
For employers, flexitime can aid the recruitment and retention of staff. It has been a particularly popular option in 2009 for employers trying to reduce staff costs without having to make redundancies during the recession. It can also help provide staff cover outside normal working hours and reduce the need for overtime. Flexitime can also improve the provision of equal opportunities to staff unable to work standard hours. Flexitime can give employees greater freedom to organize their working lives to suit personal needs. In addition, travelling can be cheaper and easier if it is out of peak time.
A recent review by the Cochrane Collaboration has found that flexible working arrangements, such as flextime and telecommuting can have positive effects on health, but the effects are primarily seen when employees have some control over their new schedules. Additionally, individuals who telecommute to work most of the work week are more satisfied with their jobs than are traditional employees who commute into a physical office location.
11.4.4: Cross-Training and Job Sharing
Cross training involves workers being trained in tangent job functions, while job sharing involves two people working together on the same job.
Learning Objective
Explain cross-training and job training
Key Points
- Cross training involves workers being trained in tangent job functions to increase oversight in ways that are impossible through management interactions with workers alone; it also empowers them to be more effective.
- Job sharing is an employment arrangement where typically two people are retained on a part time or reduced time basis to perform a job normally fulfilled by one person working full time.
- There are challenges associated with making job sharing work, but studies show that net productivity increases when two people share the same 40-hour job.
Key Terms
- Cross-training
-
Cross-training in business operations involves training employees to engage in quality control measures. Employees are trained in tangent job functions to increase oversight in ways that are impossible through management interactions with workers alone.
- job sharing
-
Job sharing is an employment arrangement where typically two people are retained on a part-time or reduced-time basis to perform a job normally fulfilled by one person working full-time.
- featherbedding
-
The employment of more workers than is necessary because of union rules, especially upon the introduction of new technology
- job specification
-
the criteria required to be filled by an employee
Example
- Mary and Susan job share. Mary works on Monday and Tuesday, and Susan occupies the same position on Thursday and Friday. Mary and Susan both work on Wednesday. This is when they update each other on the current status of the projects on which they collaborate.
Cross-Training and Job Sharing
What is Cross-training?
Cross-training in business operations involves training employees to engage in quality control measures. Employees are trained in tangent job functions to increase oversight in ways that are impossible through management interactions with workers alone .
Workers working together on an assembly line
Workers on an assembly line, who normally do a single task, benefit from cross-training to develop their skills and be able to work on a variety of areas.
Advantages
The advantages of cross-training employees include the following:
- Helps customers and clients by empowering employees to answer questions about the entire organization
- Illuminates inefficient methods, outdated techniques, and bureaucratic drift, which allows staff to re-evaluate the work methods
- Raises awareness of how other departments operate
- Enhances routine scheduling and enables staff to move around the tasks of the operation
- Better coverage, increased flexibility, and the ability to cope with unexpected absences, emergencies, and illnesses
- Increases the employability of staff who have the opportunity to train in areas outside of their original responsibilities
There are other, more general advantages as well:
- Increased flexibility and versatility
- Appreciated intellectual capital
- Improved individual efficiency
- Increased standardization of jobs
- Heightened morale
Job Sharing
Job sharing is an employment arrangement where typically two people are retained on a part time or reduced time basis to perform a job normally fulfilled by one person working full time. Compensation is apportioned between the workers, thus leading to a net reduction in per employee income. Job sharing should not be confused with the more pejorative term featherbedding, which describes the deliberate retention of excess workers on a payroll. For employees seeking more free time, job sharing may be a way to take back more control of their personal lives. Employees who job share frequently attribute their decision to quality of life issues. Studies have shown that net productivity increases when two people share the same 40-hour job.
However, there is an inherent challenge in making job sharing work for the rest of the company’s stakeholders. The hand-off or handover communication between those sharing the job is essential, and co workers must adapt to working with each other. For example, one person is responsible for a task on Monday, but another performs it on Tuesday.
11.4.5: Working from Home
Innovations in technology have allowed for telecommuting, a practice in which employees work from home or on the go.
Learning Objective
Evaluate the advantages and disadvantages to telecommuting
Key Points
- The terms “telecommuting” and “telework” are both used to describe a work arrangement in which employees have the flexibility to choose their work location and hours.
- Communities, employers, employees, and the environment receive benefits from telecommuting.
- The disadvantages of telecommuting include a possible negative impact on career advancement and workplace communication issues.
- Entrepreneurs can choose to run a business from home for a variety of reasons, such as lower business expenses, personal health limitations, and a more flexible schedule due to the lack of a commute.
- Work-at-home parents may have decided to start a home-based business due ot the incompatibility of a 9-5 work day with school hours or sick days.
Key Terms
- virtual office
-
A virtual office is a combination of off-site live communication and address services that allow users to reduce traditional office costs while maintaining business professionalism. Frequently the term is confused with “office business centers” or “executive suites” which demand a conventional lease whereas a true virtual office does not require that expense.
- telecommute
-
To work from home, sometimes for part of a working day or week, using a computer connected to one’s employer’s network or via the Internet.
Example
- Examples of large companies which began as a home-based business include Apple Computer, Hewlett-Packard, and Amazon.com.
Advantages of Telecommuting
Telecommuting refers to a work arrangement in which employees enjoy flexibility in work location and hours. With modern telecommunication technology, no longer is it necessary for employees to undergo a daily commute to a central place of work. Many telecommuters work from home, while others, who are occasionally referred to as “nomad workers” or “web commuters”, work from coffee shops or other locations.
To be successful, telecommuting should incorporate training and development that includes evaluation, simulation programs, team meetings, written materials, and forums. Information sharing should be considered synchronous in a virtual office and building processes to handle conflicts should be developed. Operational and administrative support should be redesigned to support the virtual office environment. Facilities need to be coordinated properly in order to support the virtual office and technical support should be coordinated properly.
Telecommuting offers benefits to communities, employers, and employees. For communities, telecommuting can offer fuller employment by increasing the employability of circumstantially marginalized groups, such as work at home parents and caregivers, the disabled, retirees, and people living in remote areas. Furthermore, working from home reduces traffic congestion and traffic accidents, relieves the strain on transportation infrastructures, reduces greenhouse gases, saves fuel, and reduces energy use.
For companies, telecommuting and work-from-home arrangements may:
- Expand the talent pool
- Reduce the spread of illness
- Reduce costs
- Increase productivity
- Reduce their carbon footprint and energy usage
- Reduce turnover and absenteeism
- Improve employee morale
- Offer a continuity of operations strategy
- And improve their ability to handle business across multiple timezones
For individuals, telecommuting improves work-life balance. Working from home can free up the equivalent of 15 to 25 workdays a year from time that would have otherwise been spent commuting, and save between $4,000 and $21,000 per year in travel and work-related costs.
Environmental Benefits and Government Regulation
Telecommuting gained more ground in the United States in 1996 after the Clean Air Act amendments were adopted. The act required companies with over 100 employees to encourage car pools, public transportation, shortened workweeks, and telecommuting. In 2004, an appropriations bill was enacted by Congress to encourage telecommuting for certain Federal agencies. The bill threatened to withhold money from agencies that failed to provide telecommuting options to all eligible employees. The energy-saving potential of telecommuting from gas savings alone would total more than twice what the U.S. currently produces from all renewable energy sources combined.
Employee Motivation and Satisfaction
Work-from-home flexibility is a desirable asset for employees. A meta-analysis of 46 studies on telecommuting by Ravi Gajendran and David A. Harrison found that telecommuting has largely positive benefits for employees and employers, mainly relating to job satisfaction, autonomy, stress, manager-rated job performance, and work-family conflict. The meta-analysis found generally no detrimental effects on the quality of workplace relationships and career outcomes. Only high-intensity telecommuting (where employees work from home for more than 2.5 days a week) was found to harm employee relationships with coworkers, but this was found to be offset by beneficial effects on work-family conflict.
Potential Drawbacks and Concerns
Telecommuting has come to be viewed by some as more a complement rather than a substitute for work in the workplace. Barriers to continued growth of telecommuting include distrust from employers and personal disconnectedness for employees. Traditional line managers are accustomed to managing by observation and not necessarily by results. This causes a serious obstacle in organizations attempting to adopt telecommuting. The main concern about telecommuting is the fear of loss of control. While 75% of managers say they trust their employees, a third say they’d like to be able to see them, just to be sure.
Managers may view the teleworker as experiencing a drop in productivity during the first few months. This drop occurs as the employee, his peers, and the manager adjust to the new work regimen. The drop could also be accountable to an inadequate office setup. Managers should be patient and give the teleworker time to adapt. Eventually, productivity of the teleworker should climb, as over two-thirds of employers report increased productivity among telecommuters.
From an employee perspective, some believe that telecommuting can negatively affect one’s career. A recent survey of 1,300 executives from 71 countries indicated a belief that people who work from home are less likely to get promoted. The reasoning is that companies rarely promote people into leadership roles who haven’t been consistently seen and measured.
Home-Based Business
Another category of people who work from home are those who have a home-based business. Entrepreneurs choose to run businesses from home for a variety of reasons, including lower business expenses, personal health limitations, and a more flexible schedule due to the lack of a commute. This flexibility can give an entrepreneur more options when planning tasks, especially parenting duties.
11.4.6: Employee Responsibility
Employees are often empowered and motivated by responsibility, autonomy, and participation in setting their own objectives.
Learning Objective
Realize the intrinsic motivational value of collaborating with employees to set objectives and delegate responsibility
Key Points
- Accountability and responsibility in the workplace are positively correlated with higher levels of employee motivation.
- Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs supports this premise, identifying the intrinsic value of self-fulfillment and self-esteem derived from autonomy and responsibility.
- Edwin Locke’s goal theory identifies value in shared goal-setting, and suggests increased responsibility and employee involvement results in higher levels of motivation.
- When deriving shared goals, it is critical to recognize why a given task is relevant to the big picture, how it can be accomplished, and what the objectives themselves will be.
Key Term
- accountability
-
Responsible or answerable for; ownership of the consequences.
Employee motivation is a complex concept, and what is effective for one employee may or may not be effective for another. However, it has been observed that many employees respond positively to increases in responsibility and accountability from a motivational perspective. Employee participation, intrinsic rewards, Locke’s goal theory, and Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs are all useful perspectives in understanding why employee responsibility correlates positively with motivation.
Why Responsibility Motivates
As the concept of responsibility and its application to motivation is qualitative, it is useful to explore a variety of motivational theories relevant to the impact of responsibility.
Employee Participation
Employees recognize that responsibility and accountability are displays of trust, and an increase in employee participation in strategic decision-making and tactical thinking builds confidence and enables buy-in when decisions are made. Various studies of employee participation in process improvement discussions demonstrate that when employees are consulted and involved in making important operational decisions, they feel shared responsibility for the outcomes of those decisions. This shared responsibility drives positive performance, as they are now accountable not only for the execution but for the concept itself.
Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs
A commonly cited example of motivational theory, Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs essentially stipulates that fulfilling lower levels needs (such as food, hygiene, shelter, safety, etc.) is generally accomplished through salary and benefits. However, these hygiene factors don’t result in higher level motivation and higher level thinking. Social affiliation, belonging, a sense of self-respect, a feeling that what one does is meaningful, accountability, and finally self-actualization are identified as the more powerful and higher level motivators. From this perspective, empowering employee responsibility fulfills critical needs in terms of self-esteem (the fourth level of the hierarchy) and, to some degree, self actualization (the fifth level).
Maslow’s Hierarchy Of Needs
Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs underlines the importance of upper level motivators and the fulfillment of intrinsic needs as employees develop into roles of responsibility.
Locke’s Goal Theory
Edwin A. Locke put forward the relatively simple concept that setting specific goals at the appropriate difficultly level will empower higher degrees of performance. What’s interesting here is that when employees themselves are involved in the goal-setting process, when they feel responsibility for the objectives they themselves helped to determine, the level of motivation is higher. This implies that shared responsibility in goal-setting has a positive impact on overall motivation.
How to Delegate Responsibility
With this motivational theory in mind, it is a relatively safe assumption that many employees will be more motivated when given responsibility of their tasks. Managers must understand how much responsibility can be delegated to a given employee, and how that responsibility should be handed over. Making an employee accountable for a task or tactic they don’t agree with, for example, could have disastrous results (as the intrinsic motivators may not be present). Managers must know how to hand off responsibility responsibly.
- What are the objectives? When providing an employee with responsibility over a project, task, or process, managers and/or leaders should clearly underline what the objectives are and how success will be determined. The employee must know not only what it is they will be working on, but what the expectations and end goals of that task will be. This should be an open discussion, where agreement and alignment is created before moving forward.
- How will the objectives be accomplished? Following this, the employee must be given a say in how this process will be approached. Employees are functional experts in the fields they are hired for, and thus will almost always have strong opinions on best practices and overall process. Managers should actively listen to how the employee suggests pursuing a given task, and provide suggestions and feedback to ensure the employee is moving in the right direction relative to the long term strategy of the organization. Agreement on “the how” is important before moving forward.
- Why this is relevant? Finally, being accountable for a process requires time and energy. Understanding why the task is critical for organizational success is critical for employee empowerment and motivation.
Once all of these concepts are agreed upon, the employee is ready to take on the responsibility for the task at hand. This managerial strategy empowers employees to grow and take responsibility for their actions, ultimately developing more leaders at the organization.
11.4.7: Employee Ownership
Various business and compensation models focus on empowering employee ownership in pursuit of a higher level of commitment and motivation.
Learning Objective
Understand the ways to enable employee ownership
Key Points
- Organizations have a variety of methods, from cooperative structures to stock options, to empower employee motivation by providing employees with ownership of the organization or its processes.
- Ownership motivates both intrinsically and extrinsically. Intrinsically, ownership creates a sense of shared vision and accountability. Extrinsically, ownership provides employees with a share of the profits.
- Stock options, coops, franchises, and commission are common examples of compensation and/or structural strategies that enable employees to have some ownership of the company.
- Vroom’s expectancy theory and social cognitive theory both support the concept of employee ownership as a potential source of motivation.
Key Terms
- autonomy
-
The ability to function independently; the freedom to make independent decisions.
- Commission
-
A percentage fee for the salesman on the sale of a product or service.
Why Ownership Motivates
Various business models and compensation models cater to the concept that employee ownership is a highly valuable approach to generate employee motivation. Through providing employees a stake in the company, be it through shares of stock, variable income models, or through partnerships or coops, each employee will have a direct stake in the financial and operational success of the organization.
As an extrinsic motivator, the simple capital returns of ownership will play a role in empowering employee commitment. As a direct recipient of some share of the profit, the employee will recognize a direct correlation between their efforts and their returns. From an intrinsic point of view, employees who feel a sense of ownership of the organization will similarly feel the accountability, pride, and fulfillment that comes from growing that business into a successful venture. Considering the strong sense of intrinsic and extrinsic incentives attainable through employee ownership, it functions as an excellent motivator.
How to Empower Ownership
As mentioned above, there are a number of models and reward mechanisms that can create a sense of ownership. Some of the more common methods include:
- Commission – Consider a car salesman. The employee contract stipulates that any sale of a vehicle will result in a total bonus of 20% of the overall profit on that vehicle or 2% of the sales price (whichever is higher). This salesman now has a direct stake in the organization’s revenues, and is motivated to contribute to the bottom line due to an extrinsic reward (the commission).
- Coop – A more extreme example would be a coop. Coops function off of the basic principles of shared ownership, which makes them an ideal example for this discussion. In a coop, every employee has an equal stake in the company, assuming both equal risk and equal reward. In a way, every single individual within the coop is an owner of the organization itself, and intrinsically and extrinsically motivated to optimize performance and achieve the best results.
- Franchise – Another interesting form of ownership is a franchise. Franchising is essentially the process of a parent organization selling the rights to a given brand and product line to an external owner (usually in another region or country). The frachisee will have complete ownership of their own branch of the organization, and thus will have a strong incentive to succeed.
- Stock Options – Perhaps the simplest and most common example of shared ownership would be stock options. Many publicly traded organizations offer stock options to some or all of their employees. All this means is that some employees get a small percentage of financial ownership of the company (usually quite small). When the company performs well, it is likely that the stock price will increase and the shares each employee holds will appreciate in value. This can be seen a motivator.
Theoretical Support
Vroom’s Expectancy Theory
One useful motivational model from psychology is Vroom’s expectancy theory. Under this perspective, motivation is derived through the pursuit of expected and desired outcomes. At its simplest, this theory assumes that there is a certain amount of effort an employee will exert. This expression of effort will anticipate a certain degree of performance. That degree of performance will result in a desired outcome. The value of that desired outcome for the employee must be relevant. Combining all of this, employees exert energy to perform under the assumption that they will achievement objectives which result in a desirable outcome.
Social Cognitive Theory
Bandura’s social cognitive theory functions on the premise of self-efficacy. This simply means that there is a strong correlation between an employee’s feeling of autonomy and capacity to achieve results, and their overall level of motivation and performance. Employees who feel both capable of a task, and who have ownership of the outcomes of that task (i.e. rewards, be they intrinsic or extrinsic), will be more likely to perform well.
Chapter 10: Operations Management
10.1: Introduction to Operations Management
10.1.1: Operations Management
Operations management is the management of processes that transform inputs into goods and services that add value for the customer.
Learning Objective
Explain the role of operations management
Key Points
- The goal of operations management is to maximize efficiency while producing goods and services that effectively fulfill customer needs.
- Operations is one of the three strategic functions of any organization.
- Operations decisions include decisions that are strategic in nature, meaning that they have long-term consequences and often involve a great deal of expense and resource commitments.
Key Terms
- Operations management
-
Management of processes that transform inputs into goods and services that add value for the customer.
- tactic
-
A maneuver or action calculated to achieve some end.
- strategy
-
A plan of action intended to accomplish a specific goal.
Examples
- JetBlue airlines is a successful airline that has an organization strategy of providing high-value air transportation service to travelers. JetBlue strives to provide fun, comfortable, and safe air service to popular destinations at a price that middle-income passengers can afford. Given JetBlue’s organization strategy, the airline features an operations strategy that focuses on low costs, competent and service-oriented employees, and reliable aircraft.
- JetBlue locates (“location” is an operations decision area) its main transportation hub in New York City, a city of 19 million people that helps ensure that JetBlue’s planes fly at full capacity. In the area of equipment decisions, JetBlue operates only one type of aircraft, the Airbus 320, which has high passenger carrying capacity (to maximize revenue), provides good fuel economy and requires only two pilots (versus three) to operate. Having one type of aircraft reduces training costs for pilots and mechanics, reduces investments in parts inventories, and enables JetBlue to negotiate greater discounts on high-volume purchases from Airbus.
What is Operations Management?
Operations management is the management of processes that transform inputs into goods and services that add value for the customer.
The Goal of Operations Management
The goal of operations management is to maximize efficiency while producing goods and services that effectively fulfill customer needs.
Countless operating decisions must be made that have both long- and short-term impacts on the organization’s ability to produce goods and services that provide added value to customers. If the organization has made mostly good operating decisions in designing and executing its transformation system to meet the needs of customers, its prospects for long-term survival are greatly enhanced.
For example, if an organization makes furniture, some of the operations management decisions involve the following:
- purchasing wood and fabric,
- hiring and training workers,
- location and layout of the furniture factory,
- purchase cutting tools and other fabrication equipment.
If the organization makes good operations decisions, it will be able to produce affordable, functional, and attractive furniture that customers will purchase at a price that will earn profits for the company.
The Role of Operations Management in the Organization
Operations is one of the three strategic functions of any organization. This means that it is a vital part of accomplishing the organization’s strategy and ensuring its long-term survival. The other two areas of strategic importance to the organization are marketing and finance. The operations strategy should support the overall organization strategy. Many companies prepare a 5-year pro-forma to assist in their operation planning. The pro forma uses information from past and current financial statements in an effort to predict future events such as sales, and capital investments.
Strategic Versus Tactical Operations Decisions
Operations decisions include decisions that are strategic in nature, meaning that they have long-term consequences and often involve a great deal of expense and resource commitments.
Strategic operations decisions include the following:
- facility location decisions,
- the type of technologies that the organization will use,
- determining how labor and equipment are organized,
- how much long-term capacity the organization will provide to meet customer demand.
Tactical operations decisions have short to medium term impact on the organization, often involve less commitment of resources, and can be changed more easily than strategic decisions. The following are some tactical decisions:
- workforce scheduling,
- establishing quality assurance procedures,
- contracting with vendors,
- managing inventory.
Strategic and tactical operations decisions determine how well the organization can accomplish its goals. They also provide opportunities for the organization to achieve unique competitive advantages that attract and keep customers.
For example, United Parcel Service (UPS), an international package delivery service, formed a partnership with its customer, Toshiba computers. Toshiba needs to provide a repair service to its laptop computer customers. The old approach of providing this service was cumbersome and time-consuming:
- UPS picked up the customer computers.
- UPS delivered the computers to Toshiba.
- Toshiba repaired the computers.
- UPS picked up the repaired computers and delivered them back to the customers.
Under this traditional approach, the total time to get a laptop computer repaired was two weeks—a long time for people to be without their laptop! Then they came up with an innovative idea for Toshiba to provide better service to its customers.
UPS hired, trained, and certified its own employees to repair Toshiba laptop computers. The new repair process is much more efficient:
- UPS picks up computers from Toshiba owners.
- UPS repairs the computers.
- UPS delivers the computers back to their owners.
The total time to get a computer repaired is now about two days.
Most Toshiba customers think that Toshiba is doing a great job of repairing their computers, when in fact Toshiba never touches the computers! The result of this operations innovation is better service to Toshiba customers and a strong and profitable strategic partnership between UPS and its customer, Toshiba.
Operations Management
Blueprint for a commercial operations management solution.
10.1.2: A Study of Process
Operations management transforms inputs (labor, capital) into outputs (goods and services) that provide added value to customers.
Learning Objective
Analyze the importance of operations management in protecting an organization’s competitive advantage
Key Points
- Operations management transforms inputs (labor, capital, equipment, land, buildings, materials, and information) into outputs (goods and services) that provide added value to customers.
- All organizations must strive to maximize the quality of their transformation processes to meet customer needs.
- Controlling the transformation process makes it difficult for competitors to manufacture products of the same quality as the original producer.
Key Terms
- process
-
A series of events to produce a result, especially as contrasted to product.
- input
-
Something fed into a process with the intention of it shaping or affecting the outputs of that process.
- output
-
Production; quantity produced, created, or completed.
Examples
- The 3M Company is a good example of the strategic importance of transforming inputs into outputs that provide competitive advantage in the marketplace. This company manufactures a top-quality adhesive tape called “Magic Tape. ” Magic Tape is used for everyday taping applications, but it offers attractive features that most other tapes do not, including smooth removal from the tape roll, an adhesive that is sticky enough to hold items in place (but not too sticky that it can not be removed and readjusted, if necessary! ), and a non-reflective surface. For several decades, 3M has enjoyed a substantial profit margin on its Magic Tape product, because 3M engineers make the manufacturing equipment and design the manufacturing processes that produce Magic Tape. In other words, 3M enjoys a commanding competitive advantage by controlling the transformation processes that turn raw material inputs into the high value-added Magic Tape product. Controlling the transformation process makes it extremely difficult for competitors to produce tape of the same quality as Magic Tape, allowing 3M to reap significant profits from this superior product.
- An opposite example of the strategic implications of the input/output transformation process is 3M’s decision in the 1980s to stop manufacturing VHS tape for video players and recorders. In the VHS tape market, 3M had no proprietary manufacturing advantage, as there were many Asian competitors that could produce high-quality, VHS tape at lower cost. Since 3M had no proprietary control over the transformation process for VHS tape that would allow the company to protect its profit margins for this product, it dropped VHS tape from its offerings. The two 3M examples of Magic Tape and VHS tape show how important the transformation process and operations management can be to providing and protecting an organization’s competitive advantage.
Operations Management and the Transformation Process
Operations management transforms inputs (labor, capital, equipment, land, buildings, materials and information) into outputs (goods and services) that provide added value to customers.
Figure 1 summarizes the transformation process. The arrow labeled “Transformation System” is the critical element in the model that will determine how well the organization produces goods and services that meet customer needs. It does not matter whether the organization is a for-profit company, a non-profit organization (religious organizations, hospitals, etc.), or a government agency; all organizations must strive to maximize the quality of their transformation processes to meet customer needs.
Example: Strategic Importance of Operations Management
The 3M Company is a good example of the strategic importance of transforming inputs into outputs that provide competitive advantage in the marketplace.
3M manufactures a top-quality adhesive tape called “Magic Tape”. Magic Tape is used for everyday taping applications, but it offers attractive features that most other tapes do not, including:
- Smooth removal from the tape roll
- An adhesive that is sticky enough to hold items in place (but not too sticky that it can not be removed and readjusted if necessary! )
- A non-reflective surface
For several decades, 3M has enjoyed a substantial profit margin on its Magic Tape product because 3M engineers make the manufacturing equipment and design the manufacturing processes that produce Magic Tape. In other words, 3M enjoys a commanding competitive advantage by controlling the transformation processes that turn raw material inputs into the high value-added Magic Tape product.
Controlling the transformation process makes it extremely difficult for competitors to produce tape of the same quality as Magic Tape, allowing 3M to reap significant profits from this superior product.
An opposite example of the strategic implications of the input/output transformation process is 3M’s decision in the 1980s to stop manufacturing VHS tape for video players and recorders.
In the VHS tape market 3M had no proprietary manufacturing advantage, as there were many Asian competitors that could produce high-quality VHS tape at lower cost. Since 3M had no proprietary control over the transformation process for VHS tape that would allow the company to protect its profit margins for this product, it dropped VHS tape from its offerings.
The two 3M examples of Magic Tape and VHS tape show how important the transformation process and operations management can be to providing and protecting an organization’s competitive advantage.
Example of a typical transformation process
10.1.3: Service Operations
Services operations often encounter different opportunities and challenges than tangible goods, and thus require unique operational considerations.
Learning Objective
Identify the key differences between services and other types of goods, and recognize the operational implications of these differences
Key Points
- Service operations are the operational strategies and tactics which go into delivering an intangible good to prospective consumers.
- Understanding this field of work requires an understanding of what a service constitutes. One useful perspective in differentiating services from other goods is the ‘5 I’s of services’ perspective.
- As services behave somewhat differently than tangible products, operations managers must take into account different considerations when optimizing their operational strategy.
- Improving overall quality through measuring consumer satisfaction, planning facilities for optimal use of space, and effective scheduling are a few examples of considerations service operators consider.
Key Terms
- NPS surveys
-
Management tools that can be used to gauge the loyalty of a firm’s customer relationships. It serves as an alternative to traditional customer satisfaction research and claims to be correlated with revenue growth.
- opportunity costs
-
The overall cost of something missed; through deciding to do ‘A’, an individual or organization incurs the opportunity cost of doing ‘B’.
- Intangibility
-
The state of not being touchable. For example, an idea is real, but not tangible.
Service operations are simply the application of operations management to an intangible good (i.e. a service). To understand how service operations function, let’s first take a look at what is considered a service.
Service-Goods Continuum
This simple line graph shows industries that are nearly 100% service-related at the top and industries that are nearly 100% product-related at the bottom. It is an illustration of how the service-product continuum is more of a spectrum than a black and white rule.
Services Defined
An easy way to remember what a service is (compared to a product) is through using the ‘5 I’s of Services’:
- Intangibility – Services cannot be touched, shipped, handled, or looked at. They are an occurrence, not a tangible good.
- Inventory – Services cannot be stored for later use. They occur, or they do not occur.
- Inseparability – Services cannot be pulled into different parts or separated (as many tangible goods can be—which makes operations management quite different for products).
- Inconsistency – Services tend to be unique. A teacher may teach you a topic, and another teacher may teach you the same topic in another course. Each teacher will deliver this topic somewhat differently. This is a good example of service inconsistency.
- Involvement – Consumers are often directly involved in the service delivery. A therapist is a good example of this. The consumer is the center of the service, and thus each instance of the service is unique based on the individual involved.
Managing Service Operations
This definition offers a great deal of insight when applied to the concept of operational management. Without a tangible good to ship, handle and produce, operational managers are instead focused on the execution of an activity to fill a consumer need. This management of an instance is rather different than the management of a product.
Managing operations is just as critical on the service side as it is on the product side. While there are countless considerations to be made, many of which are unique to specific organizations or industries, these core operational decisions are strong indications of the mentality service management specialists consider:
Location
Choosing where to open a facility, how to lay out the facility, what size is appropriate, and overall how efficiently a given space can be used relative to the cost are key considerations. Consider a car mechanic opening a garage. Depending upon how many jobs she anticipates having within a given period of time, and how many employees she expects to be able to manage simultaneously, she may want to open a facility with three garages or five garages. It really depends on how much output she expects she can accomplish, and how much input demand will provide.
Scheduling
Just as a product manufacturing facility will know when a product will be where, so too do service operators need to know when a given service should start and what duration of time is required to complete it. Maximizing output through planning properly can minimize opportunity costs and maximize revenue, and plays an integral role in operational management of services. Take a doctor’s office. If they simply had everyone come in whenever they wanted, there would be times when the staff would have nothing to do (but be obligated to be there, and be paid), and other times when there would be too much to do and capital and customers would be lost.
Quality
As the ‘5 I’s of Services’ indicate, most services tend to be completely unique. A hair dresser rarely gives the same haircut twice and, even if they do, it would be cut to fit a different individual. As a result, managing for high quality output is rather complex. Each execution is measured relative to the specific instance and that specific consumer, making tools like NPS surveys and other measures of individual satisfaction highly useful in optimizing. Following these ratings, operational specialists must consider the comments received and work to find a way to integrate this feedback into future services.
10.2: Quality Management
10.2.1: Philosophies
Quality management adopts a number of management principles that can be used to guide organizations towards improved performance.
Learning Objective
Recognize how top management can improve quality performance
Key Points
- There are eight primary quality management principles.
- The principles are the basis of the ISO 9001:2008 quality management system standard.
- One of the permanent quality objectives of an organization should be the continual improvement of its overall performance.
Key Terms
- Quality Management
-
Process of ensuring that an organization or product is consistent. It can be considered to have four main components: quality planning, quality control, quality assurance, and quality improvement. Quality management is focused not only on product/service quality, but also the means to achieve it.
- value
-
The degree of importance you give to something.
- ISO 9001:2008
-
The ISO 9000 family of standards are related to quality management systems and designed to help organizations ensure that they meet the needs of customers and other stakeholders while meeting statutory and regulatory requirements related to the product.
Example
- In the 1950s and 1960s, Japanese goods were synonymous with cheapness and low quality but over time, their quality initiatives began to be successful, with Japan achieving very high levels of quality in products from the 1970s onward. For example, Japanese cars regularly top the J.D. Power customer satisfaction ratings. In the 1980s, Deming was asked by Ford Motor Company to start a quality initiative after they realized that they were falling behind Japanese manufacturers. A number of highly successful quality initiatives have been invented by the Japanese (see for example, on this page: Genichi Taguchi, QFD, Toyota Production System. Many of the methods not only provide techniques but also have associated quality culture (i.e., people factors). These methods are now adopted by the same western countries that decades earlier derided Japanese methods.
The Principles of Quality Management
Quality management adopts a number of management principles that can be used by top management to guide their organizations towards improved performance. The principles include:
- Customer focus: Since the organizations depend on their customers, they should understand current and future customer needs, should meet customer requirements, and try to exceed the expectations of customers. An organization attains customer focus when all people in the organization know both the internal and external customers and also what customer requirements must be met to ensure that both the internal and external customers are satisfied.
- Leadership: Leaders of an organization establish unity of purpose and direction of it. They should go for creation and maintenance of such an internal environment, in which people can become fully involved in achieving the organization’s quality objective.
- Involvement of people: People at all levels of an organization are the essence of it. Their complete involvement enables their abilities to be used for the benefit of the organization.
- Process approach: The desired result can be achieved when activities and related resources are managed in an organization as process.
- System approach to management: An organization’s effectiveness and efficiency in achieving its quality objectives are contributed by identifying, understanding, and managing all interrelated processes as a system.
- Continual improvement: One of the permanent quality objectives of an organization should be the continual improvement of its overall performance.
- Factual approach to decision making: Effective decisions are always based on the data analysis and information.
- Mutually beneficial supplier relationships: Since an organization and its suppliers are interdependent, therefore, a mutually beneficial relationship between them increases the ability of both to add value.
These eight principles form the basis for the quality management system standard ISO 9001:2008.
10.2.2: TQM
Total quality management (TQM) is an integrative philosophy of management for continuously improving the quality of products and processes.
Learning Objective
Explain the principles of Total Quality Management (TQM)
Key Points
- TQM functions on the premise that the quality of products and processes is the responsibility of everyone who is involved with the creation or consumption of the goods or services offered by an organization.
- Satisfying the customer involves making sure both internal and external customers are happy.
- The internal suppliers are the subordinates who answer to a particular supervisor. Satisfying them involves giving them the tools and motivation they need to do their jobs.
- It is important to go beyond satisfaction, making the customer – and supplier – feel important and valued, and part of the process.
- “Lean” focuses on eliminating the wasteful use of time, energy or resources, and instead focusing activities completely on the creation of value.
- The focus of the Six Sigma management strategy is to reduce defect by minimizing variation in processes.
Key Terms
- poka-yoke
-
A methodology of using low-cost techniques to error-proof production processes.
- Total Quality Management (TQM)
-
A strategic approach to management aimed at embedding awareness of quality in all organizational processes.
Example
- ‘Lean’ is based on the Toyota Production System, which aimed to minimize overburden, inconsistency and waste. It was developed between 1948-1975, and was a precursor to lean manufacturing.
Total Quality Management (TQM) is an integrative philosophy of management for continuously improving the quality of products and processes .
TQM Practices Are Used in Many Industries
Here, two aviation structural mechanics are collaborating on the wing of a F/A-18C Hornet, performing routine maintenance in the hangar bay. TQM practices ensure each person involved with a product is responsible for its quality.
Overview
TQM functions on the premise that the quality of products and processes is the responsibility of everyone involved in the creation or consumption of the goods or services the organization offers. TQM capitalizes on the involvement of management, the workforce, suppliers, and even customers in order to meet or exceed customer expectations.
Considering the practices of TQM as discussed in six empirical studies, Cua, McKone, and Schroeder (2001) identified nine common TQM practices:
- Cross-functional product design;
- Process management;
- Supplier quality management;
- Customer involvement;
- Information and feedback;
- Committed leadership;
- Strategic planning;
- Cross-functional training; and
- Employee involvement.
Basic Principles of Total Quality Management
The basic principles for the Total Quality Management philosophy of doing business are to satisfy the customer, satisfy the supplier, and continuously improve the business processes.
Satisfy the Customer
The first, and major, TQM principle is to satisfy the customer–the person who pays for the product or service. Customers want to get their money’s worth from a product or service they purchase.
Satisfy the Users: If the user of the product is different than the purchaser, then both the user and customer must be satisfied, although the person who pays gets priority.
Company Philosophy: A company that seeks to satisfy the customer by providing them value for what they buy and the quality they expect will get more repeat business, referral business, and reduced complaints and service expenses. Some top companies not only provide quality products but also give extra service to make their customers feel important and valued.
Internal Customers: Within a company, a worker provides a product or service to his or her supervisors. If the person has any influence on the wages the worker receives, that person can be thought of as an internal customer. A worker should have the mindset of satisfying internal customers in order to keep his or her job and to get a raise or promotion.
Chain of Customers:Often in a company, there is a chain of customers–each improving a product and passing it along until it is finally sold to the external customer. Each worker must not only seek to satisfy the immediate internal customer, but must also look up the chain to try to satisfy the ultimate customer.
Satisfy the Supplier
A second TQM principle is to satisfy the supplier, which is the person or organization from whom you are purchasing goods or services.
External Suppliers: A company must look to satisfy their external suppliers by providing them with clear instructions and requirements and then paying them fairly and on time. It is in the company’s best interest that its suppliers provide quality goods or services if the company hopes to provide quality goods or services to its external customers.
Internal Suppliers: A supervisor must try to keep workers happy and productive by providing good task instructions, the tools they need to do their job, and good working conditions. The supervisor must also reward the workers with praise and good pay.
Get Better Work: The reason to do this is to get more productivity out of the workers, as well as to keep the good workers. An effective supervisor with a good team of workers will certainly satisfy his or her internal customers.
Empower Workers: One area of satisfying the internal suppler is by empowering the workers. This means allowing them to make decisions on things that they can control. This not only takes the burden off the supervisor, but it also motivates these internal suppliers to do better work.
Continuous Improvement
The third principle of TQM is continuous improvement. You can never be satisfied with the method used, because there always can be improvements. The competition is always improving, so it is necessary to strive to keep ahead of the game.
Work Smarter, Not Harder: Some companies have tried to improve by making employees work harder. This may be counterproductive, especially if the process itself is flawed. For example, trying to increase worker output on a defective machine may result in more defective parts. Examining the source of problems and delays and then solving those problems is what works best. Often, the process has bottlenecks that are the real cause of the problem. Those are what should be removed.
Worker Suggestions: Workers are often a source of continuous improvements. They can provide suggestions on how to improve a process and eliminate waste or unnecessary work.
Quality Methods: There are also many quality methods, such as just-in-time production, variability reduction, and poka-yoke, that can improve processes and reduce waste.
10.2.3: Quality Inspections and Standards
Companies ensure the quality of products and services by adhering to ISO standards and performing quality audits to ensure compliance.
Learning Objective
Recognize the ISO’s role in ensuring quality standards
Key Points
- The Quality Management System (QMS) standards were created by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) in 1987, and are reviewed and updated every few years. These standards are used to certify the processes and systems of an organization, but not the product or service itself.
- In 1994 three major standards were released as part of the ISO 9000:1994 series. Major revisions were made in 2008.
- A quality audit is the systematic examination of a quality system, and is carried out by internal or external auditors. It is a key element in ISO 9001 standards.
- Since 2008, the focus of quality audits has shifted from simply procedural adherence to measuring the effectiveness of actual QMS’s.
Key Terms
- ISO 9000
-
a set of standards related to quality management systems and designed to help organizations ensure that they meet the needs of customers and other stakeholders while meeting statutory and regulatory requirements related to the product
- Quality Management System (QMS)
-
The organizational structure, procedures, processes, and resources needed to implement quality management.
- Quality Audit
-
The process of systematic examination of a quality system carried out by an internal or external quality auditor or audit team. It is an important part of an organization’s quality management system and is a key element in the ISO quality system standard, ISO 9001.
- International Organization for Standardization (ISO)
-
An international standard-setting body composed of representatives from various national standards organizations. Founded on February 23, 1947, the organization promulgates worldwide proprietary, industrial, and commercial standards.
- ISO 14000
-
a set of standards related to environmental management designed to help organizations reduce the negative environmental effect of their operations, meet legal requirements, and continually improve
Example
- Quality audits and adherence to ISO standards are not just for private corporations; the US Food and Drug Administration requires that medical devices undergo quality auditing, and several countries require quality audits of their educational systems.
Quality Standards
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) created the Quality Management System (QMS) standards in 1987. They were the ISO 9000:1987 series of standards, comprising ISO 9001:1987, ISO 9002:1987, and ISO 9003:1987; which were applicable in different types of industries, based on the type of activity or process (designing, production, or service delivery).
The standards are reviewed every few years by the ISO. The version in 1994 was called the ISO 9000:1994 series; consisting of the ISO 9001:1994, 9002:1994 and 9003:1994 versions.
A major revision occurred in 2008, and the series was called ISO 9000:2000 series. The ISO 9002 and 9003 standards were integrated into one single certifiable standard: ISO 9001:2008. After December 2003, organizations holding ISO 9002 or 9003 standards had to complete a transition to the new standard.
The ISO 9004:2009 document gives guidelines for performance improvement over and above the basic standard (ISO 9001:2000). This standard provides a measurement framework for improved quality management, similar to and based upon the measurement framework for process assessment.
The Quality Management System standards created by ISO are meant to certify the processes and the system of an organization, not the product or service itself. ISO 9000 standards do not certify the quality of the product or service.
In 2005 the International Organization for Standardization released a standard, ISO 22000, meant for the food industry. This standard covers the values and principles of ISO 9000 and the HACCP standards. It gives one single integrated standard for the food industry and is expected to become more popular in the coming years in the industry.
ISO has also released standards for other industries. For example, Technical Standard TS 16949 defines requirements in addition to those in ISO 9001:2008 specifically for the automotive industry.
ISO has a number of standards that support quality management. One group describes processes (including ISO/IEC 12207 & ISO/IEC 15288), and another describes process assessment and improvement (ISO 15504).
Quality Audits
A quality audit is the process of systematic examination of a quality system carried out by an internal or external quality auditor or audit team. It is an important part of organization’s quality management system and is a key element in the ISO quality system standard, ISO 9001.
Quality audits are typically performed at predefined time intervals and ensure that the institution has clearly defined internal system monitoring procedures linked to effective action. This can help determine if the organization complies with the defined quality system processes and can involve procedural or results-based assessment criteria.
Quality Check
Quality assurance inspectors regularly perform audits.
With the upgrade of the ISO 9000 series of standards from the 1994 to 2008 series, the focus of the audits has shifted from purely procedural adherence towards measurement of the actual effectiveness of the Quality Management System (QMS) and the results that have been achieved through the implementation of a QMS.
Audits are an essential management tool to be used for verifying objective evidence of processes, to assess how successfully processes have been implemented, for judging the effectiveness of achieving any defined target levels, to provide evidence concerning reduction and elimination of problem areas.
For the benefit of the organisation, quality auditing should not only report non-conformance and corrective actions, but also highlight areas of good practice. In this way, other departments may share information and amend their working practices, which contributes to continual improvement.
Quality audits can be an integral part of compliance or regulatory requirements. One example is the US Food and Drug Administration, which requires quality auditing to be performed as part of its Quality System Regulation (QSR) for medical devices (Title 21 of the US Code of Federal Regulations part 820).
Several countries have adopted quality audits in their higher education system (including New Zealand, Australia, Sweden, Finland, Norway, and the USA). Initiated in the UK, the process is focused primarily on procedural issues rather than on the results or the efficiency of a quality system implementation.
Audits can also be used for safety purposes. Evans and Parker (2008) describe auditing as one of the most powerful safety monitoring techniques and “an effective way to avoid complacency and highlight slowly deteriorating conditions,” especially when the auditing focuses not just on compliance but effectiveness.
The processes and tasks that a quality audit involves can be managed using a wide variety of software and self-assessment tools. Some of these relate specifically to quality in terms of fitness for purpose and conformance to standards, while others relate to quality costs or (more accurately) to the cost of poor quality. In analyzing quality costs, a cost of quality audit can be applied across any organization rather than just to conventional production or assembly processes.
10.2.4: Reducing Waste and Environmental Impacts
Reducing waste by more efficient manufacturing is a key goal of management, with supply chain sustainability seen as a key component.
Learning Objective
Explain the benefits of reducing waste
Key Points
- Waste minimization is often achieved through more efficient manufacturing processes and the usage of better materials, but often requires some initial investment.
- Governments often provide incentives to companies for waste minimization, including subsidies and reduced taxes for companies that take steps to reduce waste.
- A more sustainable supply chain is increasingly seen as leading to a more profitable supply chain, and, thus, managers are increasingly looking for ways to make their supply chains more sustainable.
- Collaboration is seen as a way of achieving the goal of supply chain sustainability.
- Many companies avoid collaboration due to a fear of a loss of commercial control.
Key Terms
- Supply Chain Sustainability
-
An essential component to delivering long-term profitability. It has replaced monetary cost, value, and speed as the dominant topic of discussion among purchasing and supply professionals.
- Collaboration
-
Working together to achieve a common goal.
Example
- Wal-Mart asked suppliers to be more efficient in their deliveries through it’s Supplier Energy Efficiency Project (SEEP). As a result, suppliers reduced GHG emissions by 3,300 metric tons and saved $200,000 in energy costs.
Reducing Waste: The Incentives
In industrial production, using more efficient manufacturing processes and better materials will generally reduce the production of waste. The application of waste minimization techniques has led to the development of innovative and commercially successful replacement products. Waste minimization has proven benefits to industry and the wider environment.
Waste minimization often requires investment, which is, at least in theory, usually compensated by the savings. However, waste reduction in one part of the production process may create waste production in another part.
There are government incentives for waste minimization, which focus on the environmental benefits of adopting waste minimization strategies.
In the United Kingdom, several pilot schemes, such as The Catalyst Project and the Dee Waste Minimisation Project, have shown the efficacy of such policies. Fourteen companies in Merseyside took part in the Catalyst Project; the project generated overall savings of £9 million and landfill waste was reduced by 12,000 tonnes per year. ).
Colorful recycling containers
By producing using materials that are recyclable, landfill waste can be minimized.
Supply Chain Sustainability
Supply chain sustainability is a business issue affecting an organization’s supply chain or logistics network in terms of environmental, risk, and waste costs.
Sustainability in the supply chain is increasingly seen among high-level executives as essential to delivering long-term profitability and has replaced monetary cost, value, and speed as the dominant topic of discussion among purchasing and supply professionals.
One of the key requirements of successful sustainable supply chains is collaboration. The practice of collaboration, such as sharing distribution to reduce waste by ensuring that half-empty vehicles do not get sent out and that deliveries to the same address are on the same truck, is not widespread because many companies fear a loss of commercial control by working with others.
Investment in alternative modes of transportation, such as use of canals and airships, can play an important role in helping companies reduce the cost and environmental impact of their deliveries.
Sustainability has been found to be a major component of supplier relationship management as an efficient way to cut costs among retailer giants such as Wal-Mart. In fact, under Wal-Mart’s Supplier Energy Efficiency Project (SEEP), which is aimed at eliminating emissions from the company’s supply chain, suppliers reduced GHG emissions by 3,300 metric tons and saved $200,000 in energy costs.
Realizing the efficiency that effective supplier relationship management creates, Wal-Mart has asked suppliers to be more efficient in managing their environmental footprint.
Looking to the supply chain to maximize efficiency and cut costs is a key cost-cutting measure; using the same suppliers in a tight-knit relationship saves time and energy. As industry leaders continue to add in cost-cutting measures, we are likely to see this trend continue in supply chain sustainability for sustained improvement in relationship building and cost reduction.
10.3: Productivity
10.3.1: Impacts of Productivity on Output
Productivity, or the efficiency of production, is important because it can drive increases in output and improvements in living standards.
Learning Objective
Develop a model to measure productivity
Key Points
- Productivity is generally measured as the ratio of the total output to total input.
- In an economy, higher productivity leads to higher real income, the ability to enjoy more leisure time, and better social services, such as health and education–all leading to higher living standards.
- Surplus value refers to the difference between returns and costs. The higher is surplus value; the more productive is the process.
- Small differences in productivity between countries can compound, leading to large differences in prosperity in the long run.
Key Terms
- Surplus value
-
The part of the new value made by production that is taken by enterprises as generic gross profit.
- productivity
-
The state of being productive, fertile, or efficient; the rate at which goods or services are produced by a standard population of workers.
Example
- From 1964-65 to 1999-2000, labor productivity in Australia’s market sector grew at a compound annual rate of 2.4%. The contribution of growing capital intensity of IT to growth in labor productivity has been generally rising over time. Indeed, during the latter part of the 1990s, it accounted for the bulk of the contribution of rising capital intensity and has clearly played a major role in the growth of Australia’s labor productivity. Thus, the growth in labor productivity, and the role of IT in this, has clearly been a factor in Australia’s continued competitiveness in the global economy.
Defining Productivity
Productivity is a measure of the efficiency of production. Productivity is a ratio of production output to what is required to produce it (inputs). The measure of productivity is defined as a total output per one unit of a total input.
Productivity
Productivity is a measure of the efficiency of production.
In order to obtain a measurable form of productivity, operationalization of the concept is necessary. In explaining and operationalizing, a set of production models are used. A production model is a numerical expression of the production process that is based on production data (i.e., measured data in the form of prices and quantities of inputs and outputs0.
Production Income Model
There are no criteria that might be universally applicable to success. Nevertheless, there is one criterion by which we can generalize the rate of success in production. This criterion is the ability to produce surplus value.
As a criterion of profitability, surplus value refers to the difference between returns and costs, taking into consideration the costs of equity in addition to the costs included in the profit and loss statement as usual. Surplus value indicates that the output has more value than the sacrifice made for it; in other words, the output value is higher than the value (production costs) of the used inputs. If the surplus value is positive, the owner’s profit expectation has been surpassed.
Impact on Output
When there is productivity growth, even the existing commitment of resources generates more output and income. Income generated per unit of input increases. Additional resources are also attracted into production and can be profitably employed.
At the national level, productivity growth raises living standards because more real income improves people’s ability to purchase goods and services (whether they are necessities or luxuries), enjoy leisure, improve housing and education and contribute to social and environmental programs.
Over long periods of time, small differences in rates of productivity growth compound, such as interest in a bank account, and can make an enormous difference to a society’s prosperity. Nothing contributes more to the reduction of poverty, increases in leisure, and to the country’s ability to finance education, public health, environment, and the arts.
10.3.2: Productivity Gains from Software
New ways of developing and using software have led to higher efficiency and productivity through greater interaction between users.
Learning Objective
Explain how collaborative software increases productivity
Key Points
- Collaborative software, or groupware, puts computers in the center of communications between groups of workers, managers, and technicians. This way of working has produced major gains in productivity since it was first introduced.
- Examples of collaborative software include document sharing, shared calendars, instant messaging, and web conferencing.
- In agile software development, solutions arise through collaboration between self-organizing, cross-functional teams. It involves adaptive planning and flexbile responses: tasks are broken into small increments with minimal longer-term planning, and responses evolve to problems as they arise.
- The values espoused in the Agile Manifesto focus on people and functionality, rather than rigidity, documentation, and planning. It is thought that better, more useful software can be developed with these values.
Key Terms
- Agile software development
-
A group of software development methods based on iterative and incremental development, where requirements and solutions evolve through collaboration between self-organizing, cross-functional teams. The basic idea behind the agile method is to develop a system through repeated cycles (iterative) and in smaller portions at a time (incremental), allowing software developers to take advantage of what was learned during development of earlier parts or versions of the system.
- Collaborative software
-
Computer software designed to help people involved in a common task achieve goals.
Example
- Google Docs are a particularly popular and easy to use set of collaborative softwares. Users can link their calendars, and work on documents, spreadsheets, or presentations simultaneously and in real time. The simplicity and availability of Google Docs make them particularly popular.
Collaborative Software
Collaborative software was originally designated as groupware and this term can be traced as far back as the late 1980s, when Richman and Slovak said, “Like an electronic sinew that binds teams together, the new groupware aims to place the computer squarely in the middle of communications among managers, technicians, and anyone else who interacts in groups, revolutionizing the way they work. “
Collaborative software has produced major gains in productivity. The definition of an office has dramatically changed as an individual is able to work efficiently as a member of a group wherever there is a computer (or an iPad, or iPhone, or Blackberry) .
Software
Collaborative software has produced major gains in productivity.
Examples of the major gains include:
- Document sharing (including group editing)
- Group calendars
- Instant messaging
- Web conferencing
Agile Software Development
Agile software development is a group of software development methods based on iterative and incremental development, where requirements and solutions evolve through collaboration between self-organizing, cross-functional teams.
It promotes adaptive planning, evolutionary development and delivery, a time-boxed iterative approach, and encourages rapid and flexible response to change. It is a conceptual framework that promotes foreseen interactions throughout the development cycle.
Agile methods break tasks into small increments with minimal planning and do not directly involve long-term planning.
Iterations are short time frames (timeboxes) that typically last from one to four weeks. Each iteration involves a team working through a full software development cycle when a working product is demonstrated to stakeholders. The development cycle includes:
- Planning
- Requirements analysis
- Design
- Coding
- Unit testing
- Acceptance testing
This approach minimizes overall risk and allows the project to adapt to changes quickly. Stakeholders produce documentation as required.
An iteration might not add enough functionality to warrant a market release, but the goal is to have an available release (with minimal bugs) at the end of each iteration. Multiple iterations might be required to release a product or new features.
According to the Agile Manifesto:
Through this work we have come to value: individuals and interactions over
processes
and tools; working software over comprehensive documentation; customer collaboration over contract negotiation; responding to change over following a plan. That is, while there is value in the items on the
right
, we value the items on the left more.
10.3.3: Productivity Gains from Hardware
Productivity improving technologies lower traditional factors of production of land, labor capital, materials, and energy.
Learning Objective
Outline the progression of productivity improving technologies in the 20th century
Key Points
- Productivity gains were not just the result of inventions, but also of continuous improvements to those inventions which greatly increased output in relation to both capital and labor compared to the original inventions.
- The technology of building mills and mechanical clocks was important to the development of the machines of the Industrial Revolution.
- Machine tools–which cut, grind, and shape metal parts–were another important mechanical innovation of the Industrial Revolution.
- The evolution of hardware has allowed computing to become widespread due to its low cost and effectiveness. Microchips are now used in everything from greeting cards to missile defense systems.
Key Terms
- Industrial Revolution
-
The major technological, socioeconomic, and cultural change in the late 18th and early 19th century, resulting from the replacement of an economy based on manual labor to one dominated by industry and machine manufacture.
- cloud
-
Regarded as an amorphous omnipresent space for processing and storage on the Internet; the focus of cloud computing.
Example
- In the 1990s, one could buy an IBM desktop computer with a 486 processor, 4 megabytes of RAM, 250 megabytes HDD, and a 3.5″ floppy disk for more than you would pay today for a top-of-the-range ultra lightweight laptop with an Intel Core i7 processor, 8GB of RAM, 1TB HDD, and a Blu-Ray player. This progression in hardware technology, coupled with huge drops in cost, has allowed almost anyone to have access to these technologies. Even in the developing world, ultra low-cost laptops have been designed to allow children in poor communities to learn about and use modern technologies.
Productivity Improving Technologies
Productivity improving technologies are technologies that lower the traditional factors of production of land, labor capital, materials, and energy that go into production of economic output. Increases in productivity are responsible for increases in per capita living standards. Since the beginning of the Industrial Revolution, some major contributors to productivity have been:
- The spinning jenny and spinning mule greatly increased the productivity of thread manufacturing compared to the spinning wheel.
- Replacing human and animal power with water power, wind power, steam, electricity, and internal combustion greatly increased the use of energy.
- Energy efficiency in the conversion of energy to useful work.
- Infrastructures: canals, railroads, highways, and pipelines.
- Mechanization of both production machinery and agricultural machines.
- Work practices and processes: the American system of manufacturing, Taylorism or scientific management, mass production, assembly line, modern business enterprise.
- Materials handling: bulk materials, palletization, and containerization.
- Scientific agriculture: fertilizers and the green revolution, livestock and poultry management.
- New materials, new processes for production and dematerialization.
- Communications: telegraph, telephone, radio, satellites, fiber optic network, and the Internet.
- Home economics: public water supply, household gas, appliances.
- Automation and process control.
- Computers and software, data processing.
Productivity gains were not just the result of inventions, but also of continuous improvements to those inventions which greatly increased output in relation to both capital and labor compared to the original inventions. Productivity also arises from developing economies of scale, despite that not actually being a technology in its own right.
Industrial Machinery
The most important mechanical devices before the Industrial Revolution were water and windmills. Just before the Industrial Revolution, water power was applied to bellows for iron smelting. Wind and water power were also used in sawmills. The technology of building mills and mechanical clocks was important to the development of the machines of the Industrial Revolution.
The spinning wheel was a medieval invention that increased thread making productivity by a factor greater than ten. Later in the Industrial Revolution came the flying shuttle, a simple device that doubled the productivity of weaving. Spinning thread had been a limiting factor in cloth making, requiring 10 spinners using the spinning wheel to supply one weaver. With the spinning jenny, a spinner could spin eight threads at once. The spinning mule allowed a large number of threads to be spun by a single machine using water power. A change in consumer preference for cotton at the time of increased cloth production resulted in the invention of the cotton gin. Steam power eventually was used as a supplement to water during the Industrial Revolution, and both were used until electrification.
Machine Tools
Machine tools, which cut, grind, and shape metal parts, were another important mechanical innovation of the Industrial Revolution. Before machine tools, it was prohibitively expensive to make precision parts, an essential requirement for many machines and interchangeable parts. Perhaps the best early example of a productivity increase by machine tools and special purpose machines is the Portsmouth Block Mills. With these machines, 10 men could produce as many blocks as 110 skilled craftsmen.
Historically important machine tools are the screw-cutting lathe, milling machine, and metal planer (metalworking), which all came into use between 1800 and 1840. However, around 1900, it was the combination of small electric motors, specialty steels, and new cutting and grinding materials that allowed machine tools to mass produce steel parts.
Productivity Gains From Computer Hardware
Computer hardware is the collection of physical elements that comprise a computer system. Computer hardware refers to the physical parts or components of computer (objects you can touch), such as a:
- Monitor;
- Keyboard;
- Printer;
- Chip;
- Hard disk; and
- Mouse.
The history of computing hardware is the record of the ongoing effort to make hardware faster, cheaper, and capable of storing more data.
The Rapid Increase in Productivity
Early electric data processing was done by running punched cards through tabulating machines, the holes in the cards allowing electrical contact to incremental electronic counters. Tabulating machines were in a category called “unit record equipment,” through which the flow of punched cards was arranged in a program-like sequence to allow sophisticated data processing. They were widely used before the introduction of computers.
The first digital computers were more productive than tabulating machines, but not by a great amount. Early computers used thousands of vacuum tubes (thermionic valves), which used a lot of electricity and constantly needed replacing. By the 1950s, the vacuum tubes were replaced by transistors which were much more reliable and used relatively little electricity. By the 1960s, thousands of transistors and other electronic components were being manufactured on silicon semiconductor wafers as integrated circuits, which are universally used in today’s computers.
In 1973, IBM introduced point of sale (POS) terminals in which electronic cash registers were networked to the store’s mainframe computer. By the 1980s, bar code readers were added. These technologies automated inventory management. The Bureau of Labor Statistics estimated that bar code scanners at checkout increased ringing speed by 30% and reduced the labor requirements of cashiers and baggers by 10-15%.
Computers did not revolutionize manufacturing because automation, in the form of control systems, had already been in existence for decades. Although they did allow more sophisticated control, which led to improved product quality and process optimization. Today’s servers and mainframes are capable of processing enormous amounts of data. Moreover, this type of processing power has become much easier to obtain through cloud computing services .
Intel CPU
Hardware advancements, such as the CPU, greatly increased productivity for many areas of society.
Productivity Technology
The introduction of the spinning mule into cotton production processes helped to drastically increase industry consumption of cotton. This example is the only one in existence made by the inventor Samuel Crompton. It can be found in the collection of Bolton Museum and Archive Service.
10.4: Controlling the Supply Chain
10.4.1: Purchasing
Purchasing is the formal process of buying goods and services.
Learning Objective
Explain the purchasing process
Key Points
- Purchasing directors and procurement directors guide and define the organization’s acquisition procedures and standards.
- Most organizations use a three-way check as the foundation of their purchasing programs. This involves three departments in the organization completing separate parts of the acquisition process.
- The purchasing process usually starts with a demand for a physical part (inventory) or a service. A requisition detailing the requirements is generated (and in some cases provides a requirements speciation) and passed to the procurement department.
- Purchase orders can be of various types: standard, one-time buy, planned (agreement with a specific item at an approximate date), and blanket (an agreement with non-specific date, quantity, and amount).
- Purchase orders are normally accompanied by terms and conditions, which form the contractual agreement of the transaction.
Key Term
- Purchasing
-
Purchasing refers to a business or organization attempting to acquiring goods or services to accomplish the goals of its enterprise.
Example
- Successful supply chain management requires a shift from the management of individual functions to the integration of activities, such as purchasing, into key supply chain processes. For example, a purchasing department will place orders as requirements become known.
Purchasing is the formal process of buying goods and services. Purchasing managers/directors, and procurement managers/directors, guide the organization’s acquisition procedures and standards. The purchasing process can vary from one organization to another but usually involves certain key elements.
Most organizations use a three-way check as the foundation of their purchasing programs. This involves three departments in the organization, each of which completes a different part of the acquisition process. The three departments do not report to the same senior manager, which prevents unethical practices and lends credibility to the process. These departments may be designated as any of the following: purchasing, receiving, accounts payable or engineering, purchasing and accounts payable, or plant management. Combinations vary significantly, but a purchasing department and accounts payable are usually two of the three departments involved.
The purchasing process typically starts with a demand or specific requirements for a physical part (inventory) or a service. A requisition detailing the requirements is generated (and in some cases provides a requirements speciation) and passed to the procurement department. A Request for Proposal (RFP) or Request for Quotation (RFQ) is then produced. Suppliers respond to the RFQ with quotes, and a review is undertaken in order to determine the best offer (a judgment based on price, availability, and quality) and issue the purchase order.
Purchase orders (POs) can be of various types:
- Standard: a one time buy
- Planned: an agreement on a specific item at an approximate date
- Blanket: an agreement on specific terms and conditions (date and quantity and amount are not specified)
POs are normally accompanied by terms and conditions, which represent the contractual agreement of the transaction. The supplier delivers the product and/or service and the customer records the delivery (in some cases, the delivery is accompanied by a goods inspection process). The supplier then issues an invoice that is cross-checked with the purchase order and the record of the product and/or service received. Finally, payment is made.
Successful supply chain management requires an effective shift from the management of individual functions to the integration of activities, such as purchasing, into key supply chain processes. For instance, a purchasing department will place orders as requirements become known.
Acquisition Process
Model of the acquisition process for major systems in industry and defense: The process is defined by a series of phases, during which technology is defined and matured into viable concepts, which are subsequently developed and prepared for production.
10.4.2: Inventory Management
Inventory management is primarily concerned with specifying the shape and percentage of stocked goods to reduce costs and improve sales.
Learning Objective
Recognize the applications and benefits of inventory management
Key Points
- Inventory refers to a list compiled for some formal purpose, such as the details of an estate or the contents of a rented house.
- Inventory management is required at different locations within a facility or within many locations of a supply network in order to plan for the production and stock of materials.
- Inventory management addresses issues including: replenishment lead time; carrying costs of inventory; asset management; inventory forecasting; inventory valuation; inventory visibility; and future inventory price forecasting.
- Supply chain activities can be grouped into strategic, tactical, and operational categories.
- Supply chain activities can be grouped into strategic, tactical, and operational levels.
Key Terms
- tactical planning
-
an organization’s process of determining how to optimize current resources and operations
- supply chain
-
A supply chain is a system of organizations, people, technology, activities, information and resources involved in moving a product or service from supplier to customer.
In the United Kingdom, inventory typically refers to a list compiled for some formal purpose, such as one that itemizes an estate going to probate or the contents of a furnished house to be rented. In the U.S. and Canada, inventory has become the equivalent of the British term stock; that is, it refers to material that is available from and stocked by a business. In the context of accounting, inventory or stock is considered an asset.
Inventory Management
Inventory management tracks the shape and percentage of stocked goods. At different locations within a facility, or within many locations of a supply network, inventory management must precede the regular and planned course of production and stocking of materials .
Inventory Management
Inventory management is primarily concerned with specifying the shape and percentage of stocked goods.
Inventory management addresses a number of concerns, including: replenishment lead time; carrying costs of inventory; asset management; inventory forecasting; inventory valuation; inventory visibility; future inventory price forecasting; physical inventory; available physical space for inventory; quality management; replenishment; returns and defective goods; and demand forecasting. By effectively managing these issues, a business can achieve optimal inventory levels. However, the management process is on-going as a business and its needs shift and respond to the wider environment.
Inventory management often involves a retailer seeking to acquire and maintain a proper merchandise assortment while ordering, shipping, handling, and related costs are kept in check. It requires systems and processes that identify inventory requirements, set targets, provide replenishment techniques, report actual and projected inventory status, and handle all functions related to the tracking and management of material. These include the monitoring of material moved into and out of stockroom locations, as well as the reconciling of inventory balances. Processes may also include ABC analysis, lot tracking, and cycle counting support.
Management of inventories, aimed primarily at determining and controlling stock levels within the physical distribution system, serves to balance the need for product availability against the need for minimizing stock holding and handling costs. Reasons for keeping an inventory include:
- Time: The time lag in the supply chain from supplier to user requires the availability of a certain amount of inventory for use during this lead time. In practice, inventory is maintained for consumption during variations in lead time, and lead time itself can be addressed by ordering a specified number of days in advance.
- Uncertainty: Inventories are maintained as buffers to meet uncertainties in demand, supply, and movement of goods.
- Economies of scale: To deliver one unit of product at a time, and in response to the specific need and location of a given user, would be costly and logistically difficult. In contrast, bulk buying, movement, and storage translate into economies of scale and inventory.
Inventory and the Supply Chain
Supply chain activities can be grouped into strategic, tactical, and operational levels. Inventory considerations present at each level include:
Strategic: Network optimization, including the number, location, and size of warehousing, distribution centers, and facilities.
Tactical: Inventory decisions, including quantity, location, and quality of inventory.
Operational: Sourcing planning, including current inventory and forecast demand, done in collaboration with all suppliers; inbound operations, including transportation from suppliers and receiving inventory; outbound operations, including all fulfillment activities, warehousing, and transportation to customers; management of non-moving, short-dated inventory and avoidance of short-dated products.
10.4.3: Scheduling
The purpose of scheduling is to minimize production time and costs.
Learning Objective
Explain the benefits of using modern scheduling tools
Key Points
- Production scheduling aims to maximize the efficiency of operations and reduce costs.
- Benefits of production scheduling include process change-over reduction; inventory reduction; leveling; reduced scheduling effort; increased production efficiency; labor load leveling; accurate delivery date quotes; and real time information.
- Minute-by-minute production scheduling for each manufacturing facility in the supply chain occurs at the operational level of supply chain activities.
- Benefits of production scheduling include process change-over reduction, inventory reduction, leveling, reduced scheduling effort, increased production efficiency, labor load leveling, accurate delivery date quotes and real time information.
- Production scheduling for each manufacturing facility in the supply chain (minute by minute) takes place at the operational level of supply chain activities.
Key Terms
- Backward scheduling
-
Backward scheduling is planning the tasks from the due date or required-by date to determine the start date and/or any changes in capacity required.
- Forward scheduling
-
Forward scheduling is planning the tasks from the date resources become available to determine the shipping date or the due date.
- maturity date
-
the time of the final payment of a loan or other financial instrument, at which point the principal (and all remaining interest) is due to be paid
Example
- In order to reduce costs, an airline may want to minimize the number of airport gates required for its aircraft. Scheduling software allows planners to determine how this might be done, enabling them to analyze time tables, aircraft usage, or the flow of passengers.
Scheduling is an important tool in the manufacturing and engineering industries, where it can significantly impact the productivity of a particular process. In manufacturing, the purpose of scheduling is to minimize production time and cost by telling a production facility when to make a product and with which staff and equipment.
Production scheduling aims to maximize the efficiency of an operation and reduce its costs . Modern scheduling tools greatly outperform older, manual scheduling methods. Today’s tools provide the production scheduler with powerful graphical interfaces, which can be used to visually optimize real time work loads in various stages of production. Further, pattern recognition software reveals scheduling opportunities that might not be apparent without this view into the data.
Scheduling Visualization
This Gantt chart aids in scheduling by visualizing and relating phases of production.
For example, in order to reduce costs, an airline may want to minimize the number of airport gates required for its aircraft. Scheduling software allows planners to see how this might be done, enabling them to analyze time tables, aircraft usage, or the flow of passengers.
Companies use backward and forward scheduling to allocate plant and machinery resources, determine human resources and production processes, and purchase materials. Forward scheduling involves planning tasks from the date that resources become available in order to determine the shipping date or the due date. Backward scheduling involves planning tasks from the due date or required-by date in order to determine the start date and/or necessary changes in capacity.
Production scheduling has a number of benefits:
- Process change-over reduction
- Inventory reduction and leveling
- Reduced scheduling effort
- Increased production efficiency
- Labor load leveling
- Accurate delivery date quotes
- Real time information
Finally, minute-by-minute production scheduling occurs for each manufacturing facility in the supply chain at the operational level of supply chain activities.
10.4.4: Routing
Routing is the process of selecting paths in a network along which to send network traffic.
Learning Objective
Explain the process of routing
Key Points
- Routing is performed for many kinds of networks, including the telephone network (circuit switching), electronic data networks (such as the Internet), and transportation networks.
- A transport network, (or transportation network in American English), is typically a network of roads, streets, pipes, aqueducts, power lines, or nearly any structure which permits either vehicular movement or flow of some commodity.
- Transport engineers use mathematical graph theory to analyze a transport network to determine the flow of vehicles (or people) through it.
- At the tactical level of supply chain activities, the transportation strategy of goods must be considered. This includes frequency, routes, and contracting.
Key Terms
- transport network
-
A transport network, or transportation network in American English, is typically a network of roads, streets, pipes, aqueducts, power lines, or nearly any structure which permits either vehicular movement or flow of somecommodity.
- routing
-
a method of finding paths from origins to destinations in a network such as the Internet, along which information can be passed
Routing is the process of selecting paths in a network along which to send network traffic. Routing is performed for many kinds of networks, including the telephone network (circuit switching), electronic data networks (such as the internet), and transportation networks. This chapter focuses on the role of routing in transportation networks.
Transport Networks
A transport network, (or transportation network in American English), is typically a network of roads, streets, pipes, aqueducts, power lines, or nearly any structure which permits either vehicular movement or flow of some commodity. Transport engineers use mathematical graph theory to analyze a transport network to determine the flow of vehicles (or people) through it. A transport network may combine different modes of transport.
Tactical Level
At the tactical level of supply chain activities, the transportation strategy of goods must be considered. This includes frequency, routes, and contracting of goods. A goal of a company when transporting goods is to ensure efficiency. Wear and tear of vehicles and the cost of gas can make some routes more expensive than others. In order to reduce costs, companies often look for ways to streamline routes and supply chain activities. GPS, or global positioning system, is a technological advancement that has helped companies determine which routes are the most expensive to maintain. These routes can be analyzed to determine if they can be eliminated, divided, and/or merged with other routes, or if finding a new route can help make the route more efficient. Sometimes transport is subcontracted to specialists or logistics partners.
Anycast Routing
A visual display of Anycast routing.
10.4.5: Outsourcing
Outsourcing is the contracting of an existing business process to an external, independent organization.
Learning Objective
Analyze the effects of outsourcing on the supply chain
Key Points
- The specialization model creates manufacturing and distribution networks composed of multiple, individual supply chains specific to products, suppliers, and customers who work together to design, manufacture, distribute, market, sell, and service a product.
- Outsourcing involves not only the procurement of materials and components, but also the outsourcing of services that traditionally have been provided in-house.
- Managing and controlling a network of partners and suppliers requires a blend of both central and local involvement.
- Managing and controlling a network of partners and suppliers requires a blend of both central and local involvement. Hence, strategic decisions need to be taken centrally, with the monitoring and control of supplier performance and day-to-day liaison with logistics partners being best managed at a local level.
Key Term
- supply chain
-
A supply chain is a system of organizations, people, technology, activities, information and resources involved in moving a product or service from supplier to customer.
Example
- In the early 21st century, businesses increasingly outsourced to suppliers outside their own country, sometimes referred to as offshoring or offshore outsourcing.
Outsourcing is the process of contracting an existing business process which an organization previously performed internally to an independent organization, where the process is purchased as a service.
Outsourcing
Outsourcing is the process of contracting an existing business process which an organization previously performed internally to an independent organization, where the process is purchased as a service.
The Rise of Outsourcing
In the 1990s, industries began to focus on “core competencies,” and adopted a specialization model. Companies abandoned vertical integration, sold off non-core operations, and outsourced those functions to other companies. This changed management requirements by extending the supply chain well beyond company walls and distributing management across specialized supply chain partnerships.
This transition also re-focused the fundamental perspectives of each respective organization. OEMs became brand owners that needed deep visibility into their supply base. They had to control the entire supply chain from above instead of from within. Contract manufacturers had to manage bills of material with different part numbering schemes from multiple OEMs and support customer requests for work -in-process visibility and vendor-managed inventory (VMI).
Outsourcing and the Supply Chain
The specialization model creates manufacturing and distribution networks composed of multiple, individual supply chains specific to products, suppliers, and customers who work together to design, manufacture, distribute, market, sell, and service a product. The set of partners may change according to a given market, region, or channel, resulting in a proliferation of trading partner environments, each with its own unique characteristics and demands.
Outsourcing involves not only the procurement of materials and components, but also the outsourcing of services that traditionally have been provided in-house. The logic of this trend is that the company will increasingly focus on those activities in the value chain where it has a distinctive advantage, and outsource everything else. This movement has been particularly evident in logistics, where the provision of transport, warehousing, and inventory control is increasingly subcontracted to specialists or logistics partners. Also, managing and controlling this network of partners and suppliers requires a blend of both central and local involvement. Hence, strategic decisions need to be taken centrally, with the monitoring and control of supplier performance and day-to-day liaison with logistics partners being best managed at a local level.
10.4.6: Logistics
Logistics plans, implements, and controls the forward and reverse flow and storage of goods between the point of origin and consumption.
Learning Objective
Differentiate between supply chain and logistics
Key Points
- Logistics involves the integration of information, transportation, inventory, warehousing, material handling, and packaging, and often security. Today, the complexity of production logistics can be modeled, analyzed, visualized, and optimized by plant simulation software but is constantly changing.
- Logistics applies to activities within one company involving distribution of the product, whereas the term “supply chain” also encompasses manufacturing and procurement and, therefore, has a much broader focus.
- Logistics as a business concept evolved in the 1950s due to the increasing complexity of supplying businesses with materials and shipping out products in an increasingly globalized supply chain, leading to a call for experts called “supply chain logisticians”.
- In business, logistics may have either internal focus (inbound logistics) or external focus (outbound logistics), covering the flow and storage of materials from point of origin to point of consumption (see supply chain management).
- There are two fundamentally different forms of logistics. One optimizes a steady flow of material through a network of transport links and storage nodes, and the other coordinates a sequence of resources to carry out some project.
- There are two fundamentally different forms of logistics: one optimizes a steady flow of material through a network of transport links and storage nodes; the other coordinates a sequence of resources to carry out some project.
Key Terms
- inventory
-
The stock of an item on hand at a particular location or business.
- supply chain
-
A system of organizations, people, technology, activities, information. and resources involved in moving a product or service from supplier to customer.
- logistics
-
The process of planning, implementing, and controlling the efficient, effective flow and storage of goods, services, and related information from their point of origin to point of consumption for the purpose of satisfying customer requirements.
Logistics
The term Logistics Management or Supply Chain Management is the part of Supply Chain Management that plans, implements, and controls the efficient, effective, forward, and reverse flow and storage of goods, services, and related information between the point of origin and the point of consumption in order to meet customer’s requirements.
Distribution chain
Example of how companies may be supplied by the same distributor.
Logistics involves the integration of information, transportation, inventory, warehousing, material handling, and packaging, and often security. Today, the complexity of production logistics can be modeled, analyzed, visualized, and optimized by plant simulation software but is constantly changing. This can involve anything from consumer goods, such as food to IT materials, and aerospace and defense equipment.
There is often confusion over the terms “supply chain” and “logistics. ” It is now generally accepted that the logistics applies to activities within one company/organization involving distribution of product, whereas supply chain also encompasses manufacturing and procurement and, therefore, has a much broader focus as it involves multiple enterprises, including suppliers, manufacturers, and retailers, working together to meet a customer’s need for a product or service.
The Evolution of Logistics
Logistics as a business concept evolved in the 1950s due to the increasing complexity of supplying businesses with materials and shipping out products in an increasingly globalized supply chain, leading to a call for experts or supply chain logisticians. Business logistics can be defined as “having the right item in the right quantity at the right time at the right place for the right price in the right condition to the right customer,” and is the science of process and incorporates all industry sectors. The goal of logistics work is to manage the fruition of project life cycles, supply chains, and resultant efficiencies.
Starting in the 1990s, several companies chose to outsource the logistics aspect of supply chain management by partnering with a 3PL, third-party logistics provider. Companies also outsource production to contract manufacturers. Technology companies have risen to meet the demand to help manage these complex systems.
Logistic Focus
In business, logistics may have either an internal focus (inbound logistics) or external focus (outbound logistics).
Inbound logistics is one of the primary processes of logistics, concentrating on purchasing and arranging the inbound movement of materials, parts, and/or finished inventory from suppliers to manufacturing or assembly plants, warehouses, or retail stores.
Outbound logistics is the process related to the storage and movement of the final product and the related information flows from the end of the production line to the end user.
10.4.7: Quality Control
Quality control is a process that evaluates output against a standard and takes corrective action when output doesn’t meet that standard.
Learning Objective
Discuss the role of quality control in business
Key Points
- The purpose of quality control is to make sure that certain processes perform to a company’s set standards.
- Quality control in relation to customers involves the continuous act of making sure products, designed and manufactured, are produced to meet and exceed customer needs.
- Quality should be measured differently for products and services and judged by their own set of dimensions.
- Controls include product inspection, where every product is visually examined, often with a stereo microscope to perceive fine detail before the product is sold into the external market.
- Responsibility for overall quality lies with top management. Top management must establish strategies, institute programs for quality, and motivate managers and workers.
Key Terms
- quality control
-
A control, such as inspection or testing, introduced into an industrial or business process to ensure quality.
- organizational culture
-
Organizational culture is the collective behavior of humans who are part of an organization and the meanings that the people attach to their actions.
- total quality management
-
A strategic approach to management aimed at embedding awareness of quality in all organizational processes.
Example
- Controls include product inspection, where every product is examined visually. Inspectors will be provided with lists and descriptions of unacceptable product defects such as cracks or surface blemishes.
Quality can be thought of as the degree to which performance of a product or service meets or exceeds expectations. Quality control is a process that evaluates output against a standard and takes corrective action when output doesn’t meet these predetermined standards. Therefore, quality control in relation to customers would be the continuous act of making sure products, designed and manufactured, are produced to meet and exceed the needs of customers. For contract work, particularly work awarded by government agencies, quality control issues are among the top reasons for not renewing a contract .
quality control
The purpose of quality control is to make sure that certain processes are performing up to a company’s set standards.
This approach places an emphasis on three aspects:
- Elements such as controls, job management, defined and well-managed processes, performance and integrity criteria, and identification of records
- Competence, such as knowledge, skills, experience, and qualifications
- Soft elements, such as personnel integrity, confidence, organizational culture, motivation, team spirit, and quality relationships
Controls include product inspection, where every product is examined visually, often using a stereo microscope for fine detail before the product is sold on the external market. Inspectors will be provided with lists and descriptions of unacceptable product defects such as cracks or surface blemishes.
An emphasis on quality control heightened during World War II. At that time quality control evolved to quality assurance and is now better known as a Strategic Approach, a tool for improving not only products but also processes and services. Quality should be measured differently for products and services, and judged by their own set of dimensions. Responsibility for overall quality lies with top management. Top management must establish strategies, institute programs for quality, and motivate managers and workers. Most of the time, managers aim to improve or maintain the quality of an organization as a whole; this is referred to as Total Quality Management (TQM). TQM involves a continual effort for quality improvement by everyone in an organization. The entire supply chain must be involved for an organization to meet and exceed goals of quality control.
10.4.8: Investment in Operations
Investment in information technology has made supply chains faster, cheaper, and more reliable.
Learning Objective
Examine the effect of technological advances on supply chain optimization
Key Points
- Supply chain optimization applies processes and tools that ensure the optimal operation of a manufacturing and distribution supply chain.
- Supply chain managers try to maximize the profitable operation of their manufacturing and distribution supply chain.
- Supply chain optimization may include refinements at various stages of the product lifecycle, and new, ongoing, and obsolete items are optimized in different ways.
- Optimization solutions are typically part of, or linked to, the company’s replenishment systems distribution requirements planning, so that orders can be automatically generated to maintain the model stock profile. The algorithms used are similar to those used in making financial investment decisions; the analogy is quite precise, as inventory can be considered to be an investment in prospective return on sales.
- Supply chain optimization may include refinements at various stages of the product lifecycle, so that new, ongoing and obsolete items are optimized in different ways: and adaptations for different classes of products, for example seasonal merchandise.
Key Term
- supply chains
-
A supply chain is a system of organizations, people, technology, activities, information and resources involved in moving a product or service from supplier to customer.
Example
- Because the movement of product (called the stock transfer) needs to be in economic shipping units (i.e., complete unit loads or full truckloads), a series of decisions must be made. Many existing distribution planning systems round quantities up to the nearest full shipping unit. The creation of truckloads, for example, as economic shipping units requires optimization systems that ensure that axle constraints and space constraints are met, and that loading can be achieved in a damage-free way. These goals are generally achieved by adding time-phased requirements until loads meet a specified minimum weight or cube.
Supply chains have become faster, cheaper, and more reliable through investment in information technology, cost-analysis, and process-analysis.
Supply chain optimization applies processes and tools that ensure optimal operation of a manufacturing and distribution supply chain. These include the optimal placement of inventory within the supply chain and the minimizing of operating costs associated with manufacturing, transportation, and distribution. Optimization may also incorporate computer-based mathematical modelling techniques .
Supply Chain
Supply chain optimization applies processes and tools that ensure the optimal operation of a manufacturing and distribution supply chain.
Ongoing investment in a company’s operations is necessary in order for supply chain optimization to be achieved. Supply chain managers may employ optimization such as maximizing gross margin return on inventory invested (GMROII); balancing the cost of inventory at all points in the supply chain with availability to the customer; minimizing total operating expenses (e.g., transportation, inventory, and manufacturing); and maximizing gross profit of products distributed through the supply chain.
Supply chain optimization addresses the general supply chain problem of delivering products to customers at low cost and high profit. This involves balancing the costs of inventory, transportation, distribution, and manufacturing, and supply chain optimization has applications in all industries that manufacture and/or distribute goods (retail, industrial, and/or consumer packaged goods [CPG]).
The classic supply chain approach has been to forecast future inventory demand using statistical trending and “best fit” techniques, which are based on historic demand and predicted future events. The advantage of this approach is that it can be applied to data aggregated at a fairly high level (e.g., category of merchandise; weekly, by customer category), thus requiring modest database sizes and small amounts of manipulation. Unpredictability in demand is subsequently managed by setting safety stock levels; for example, a distributor might hold two weeks of supply for a steadily in-demand article but twice that supply for an article whose demand is more erratic.
Using this forecast demand, a supply chain manufacturing and distribution plan is created to manufacture and distribute products to meet the demand at low cost and/or high profit. This plan typically addresses several questions:
- How much of each product should be manufactured each day?
- How much of each product should be made at each manufacturing plant?
- Which manufacturing plants should re-stock which warehouses with which products?
- What transportation modes should be used for warehouse replenishment and customer deliveries?
The technical ability to record and quickly manipulate large databases has allowed for the emergence of a new breed of supply chain optimization solutions, which are capable of forecasting at a granular level (for example, per article per customer per day). Some vendors are applying “best fit” models to this data, to which safety stock rules are applied, while other vendors have started to apply stochastic techniques to the optimization problem.
Supply chain optimization may include additional refinements at various stages of the product lifecycle, and new, ongoing, and obsolete items are optimized in different ways. Finally, while most software vendors are offering supply chain optimization as a packaged solution and integrated in ERP software, some vendors are running the software on behalf of clients as application service providers.
10.5: Planning for Operations
10.5.1: New Product Development
Organizations put a lot of time and money into new products and thus deploy various methods in an attempt to mitigate the risks.
Learning Objective
Distinguish between minimum viable product, continuous deployment, split testing, vanity metrics, laboratory tests, expert evaluations and customer evaluations
Key Points
- Organizations use formal systems to evaluate new products.
- Product testing and sales forecasts are used to help diminish the risk of introducing a new product.
- It’s possible to eliminate some of the risks associated with introducing a new product by launching the smallest amount of the product possible to test demand.
- Several methods can be used to evaluate new products before they are launched.
Key Terms
- product differentiation
-
perceived differences between the product of one firm and that of its rivals so that some customers value it more
- product
-
Any tangible or intangible good or service that is a result of a process and that is intended for delivery to a customer or end user.
- minimum viable product
-
The minimum viable product is a product stripped down to it’s most basic, necessary features in order to get that product into the consumer’s hands in the quickest, most affordable way.
- product placement
-
a form of advertising where a brand, good, or service is placed in the media, for money
Example
- The birth of Zappos provides an example of how an organization can release the smallest amount of the product possible to collect the maximum amount of validated learning about customers with the least amount of effort (a minimum valuable product). Zappos founder Nick Swinmurn wanted to test the hypothesis that customers were ready and willing to buy shoes online. Instead of building a website and a large database of footwear, Swinmurn approached local shoe stores, took pictures of their inventory, posted the pictures online, bought the shoes from the stores at full price, and sold them directly to customers if they purchased the shoe through his website. Swinmurn deduced that customer demand was present, and Zappos would eventually grow into a billion dollar business based on the model of selling shoes online.
Introduction
Organizations invest a lot of money to create new products that perform effectively. Nonetheless, firms often struggle to convince people to incorporate these new products into their routines (Arts 2008). For example, it took 18 years for microwave ovens to gain acceptance in Greece (Tellis, Stremersch, and Yin 2003). The ultimate success of new products depends on consumers accepting them (Arts 2008). .
New product
Organizations invest a lot of money to create new products that perform effectively.
Product Evaluation
The term “product” refers to both goods and services. A product is anything that can be offered to a market to satisfy a want or need. When an organization adds a new product, there is both potential benefit and risk. As a result, organizations implement formal systems for evaluating new products. In particular, there is a concerted effort to forecast projected sales and thus reduce some of the financial risk.
While evaluating new products, there is also the possibility of generating innovative ideas that can later go through the testing process. Idea generation is an essential part of marketing strategy and is critical to the success of a company. When such product ideas move further along, a key step is to create a prototype or working version of the new offering. Again, market testing is crucial at every stage in the development process.
Minimum Viable Product
A minimum viable product (MVP) is the “version of a new product which allows a team to collect the maximum amount of validated learning about customers with the least effort. ” The goal of an MVP is to test fundamental business hypotheses (or leap-of-faith assumptions) and to help entrepreneurs begin the learning process as quickly as possible.
For example, Ries notes that Zappos founder Nick Swinmurn wanted to test the hypothesis that customers were ready and willing to buy shoes online. Instead of building a website and a large database of footwear, Swinmurn approached local shoe stores, took pictures of their inventory, posted the pictures online, bought the shoes from the stores at full price, and sold them directly to customers if they purchased the shoe through his website. Swinmurn deduced that customer demand was present, and Zappos would eventually grow into a billion-dollar business based on the model of selling shoes online.
Continuous Deployment
Continuous deployment is a process “whereby all code that is written for an application is immediately deployed into production,” resulting in a reduction of cycle times. Ries states that some of the companies he’s worked with deploy new code into production as often as 50 times a day. The phrase was coined by Timothy Fitz, one of Ries’s colleagues and an early engineer at IMVU.
Split Testing
A split test or A/B test is an experiment in which “different versions of a product are offered to customers at the same time. ” The goal of a split test is to observe changes in behavior between the two groups and to measure the impact of each version on an actionable metric. A/B testing can also be performed in serial fashion where a group of users one week may see one version of the product while the next week users see another.
Vanity Metrics
Vanity metrics are measurements which give “the rosiest picture possible” but do not accurately reflect the key drivers of a business. This is in contrast to actionable metrics, the measurement of which can lead to a business decision and subsequent action.
Laboratory Tests
Laboratory tests provide information regarding the performance of new products in extreme settings. For example, a new copy machine can be tested at various work loads, like numbers of copies and speed per minute to test the relationship between workload and paper jam.
Expert Evaluations
Expert evaluators can be used at all phases of the new product development process. For instance, experts can be used to estimate whether or not a new product idea will be accepted in the marketplace before a prototype even exists.
Customer Evaluations
In later stages of development, customers can be recruited to evaluate prototypes. There is an attempt to test new products under conditions that are relatively close to actual use.
10.5.2: Designing the Operation
Designing effective operations is critical, and can have both short-term and long-term impacts on an organization’s longevity.
Learning Objective
Explain the importance of operations management on the success of a business
Key Points
- Operations management is a strategic function within an organization.
- Operations decisions include elements needed to produce goods and services, and make them available to customers.
- Operations management touches upon multiple areas of a business, from engineering and research & development, to human resources and accounting.
Key Terms
- operation
-
The method or practice by which actions are done.
- Operations management
-
An area of management concerned with overseeing, designing, controlling the process of production, and redesigning business operations in the production of goods and/or services.
Designing the Operation
Operations management is a strategic function in organizations that adds value to customers and allows businesses to successfully produce goods and deliver services. Operational decisions determine how well these goods and services meet the needs of the organization’s target market, and consequently, whether the organization will be able to survive over the long-term .
Smooth Landing
Operations management plays a key role in the success in airline companies.
If the organization has made mostly good operational decisions in designing and executing its transformation system to meet the needs of customers, its prospects for long-term survival are greatly enhanced.
Operations management and planning are common in industries such as the airlines, manufacturing companies, service provider organizations, the military, and government. Some examples of management and planning include:
- Scheduling airlines, including both planes and crew
- Deciding the appropriate place to site new facilities such as a warehouse, factory, or fire station
- Managing the flow of water from reservoirs; identifying possible future development paths for parts of the telecommunications industry
- Establishing the information needs and appropriate systems to supply them within the health service
- Identifying and understanding the strategies adopted by companies for their information systems
Operational Decisions
As mentioned, operations decisions have both long-term and short-term impacts on the organization’s ability to produce goods and services, and can provide added value to customers and employees. Operations management touches upon multiple areas of a business, from engineering and research & development, to human resources and accounting. Likewise, the decisions management makes when parceling technological, monetary, and people resources across the organization typically falls under the following areas:
- Inventory decisions
- Capacity decisions
- Quality decisions
- Scheduling decisions
- Process decisions
- Technology decisions
- Location decisions
Most often when a company sets operational goals and objectives, they are considered relatively short term.
10.5.3: Capacity Planning
Capacity planning revolves around answering the question “How much? ” in both long-term and short-term situations.
Learning Objective
Compare and contrast long-term and short-term capacity decisions
Key Points
- Capacity planning takes place on a daily basis in some industries.
- Organizations must closely examine the services and the cost of services offered to their customers when making capacity decisions.
- In a grocery store or supermarket, managers must ensure that sufficient cash registers and employees are on-hand to meet check-out demand and provide good customer service.
Key Term
- capacity
-
The maximum that can be produced on a machine or in a facility or group.
Introduction
When making capacity decisions, managers must answer the simple question, “How much?” Determining the organization’s capacity to produce goods and services involves both long-term and short-term decisions. Long-term capacity decisions involve facilities and major equipment investments .
capacity
The question managers must answer for capacity decisions is simply “How much?”
Long-term decisions
In 2007, Airbus introduced its Super Jumbo Jet that carries up to 850 passengers and costs USD 3 billion. The Super Jumbo Jet provides huge amounts of passenger carrying capacity, but before an airline purchases this jet, it needs to decide if it has enough passengers to generate the revenue to pay for the plane and earn profits for the airline. Buying a large single airplane like the Super Jumbo Jet may not be the right capacity decision for an airline that serves numerous medium-sized cities. On the other hand, an airline that serves passengers traveling between large cities like New York City, USA, and Shanghai, China might find the Super Jumbo Jet to be a perfect choice for meeting consumer demand.
Short-term decisions
Capacity decisions are also required in short-term situations. In a grocery store, the number of customers that need to pay for their groceries at any one point during the day will vary significantly. To provide good customer service, managers must make sure that sufficient cash registers and employees are on-hand to meet check-out demand at any given time.
Similarly, hotels must make sure that they have enough employees to register arriving guests, clean hotel rooms, and provide food and beverages to customers. These decisions must be made carefully to avoid excessive labor costs that result from having an excess of employees available for the number of customers being served.
10.5.4: Facilities Layout
Facility layout decisions are based on criteria aimed at creating an effective and efficient workflow and high standard production.
Learning Objective
Outline the key considerations in facility design
Key Points
- There are three types of workflow layouts that managers can choose from.
- Office and factory facilities are approached differently.
- A facility manager’s industry can also influence the facilities layout design.
Key Term
- facilities layout
-
Facility layout is simply the way a facility is arranged in order to maximize processes that are not only efficient but effective towards the overall organizational goal.
Examples
- A paper mill is a good example of a repetitive process. The manufacturing requirements are well-understood, capital investment in automation is high, and production volume is extremely high to keep unit production costs as low as possible.
- Health care clinics provide a good example of an intermittent process. X-ray equipment and technicians are organized into an “X-ray Department”. Other departments are created for pediatrics, lab, gynecology, pharmacy, physical therapy, and many more. Patients are routed only to the departments that are needed for their particular treatment requirements.
Introduction
Facilities is defined as the workspace and equipment needed to carry out the operations of the organization. This includes offices, factories, computers, and trucks.
The location, design, and layout of an organizations’ facilities are central to maximising the efficiency of the overall operations system.
In this unit, we’re going to focus on facility design and layout.
Facilities Design and Layout
After choosing the facility’s location, the next stage in operations planning is to design the best physical layout for the facility. The avaliable space needs to be assessed with workstations, equipment, storage, and other amenities need to be arranged. The aim is to allow for the most efficient workflow without disruption. A workplace that has carefully arranged its layout will allow for a more effictive and efficient workflow and produce its good or services to a high standard.
There are three types of workflow layouts that managers can choose from:
- Process layout: arranged in departments (e.g., hospitals).
- Product layout: production line (e.g., a car assembly plant).
- Fixed-position layout: building a large item (e.g., jumbo jet).
Facility Layout Considerations
Facility managers should consider several factors when designing the layout of a facility to achieve maximum effectiveness.
- Does the design and layout allow for growth or change? Is there a chance that your company will experience significant growth? Could some other change come about that could influence the layout of your facility? In business, anything is possible. Make sure that same is true of your facilities layout. While making changes is a costly and undertaking them shouldn’t be taken lightly, your layout should be flexible enough to allow a redesign if the situation calls for it.
- Is the process flow smooth? If you are running a factory, for example, the flow should be such that the raw materials enter at one end and the finished product exits at the other. The flow doesn’t have to form a straight line, but there should be no backtracking. Backtracking creates confusion. Employees get confused (“Has that been done yet? “), parts get lost, and coordination is very difficult. You need to have a smooth process to be efficient.
- Are materials being handled efficiently? Here simplicity is best.
- Does the facility layout aid the business in meeting its production needs? Is there enough space and is it used efficiently? Have you allowed enough space for shipping and receiving? Can different areas of the business communicate effectively? Does the layout lend itself to promotional activities? (e.g., showing the facilites to potential customers)
- Does the layout contribute to employee satisfaction and moral? Numerous studies have linked employee moral to productivity. So managers should take this point into consideration when designing the layout of their facilities. How can this be done? Paint the walls light colors, allow for windows and space, include a cafeteria and a gym. Some of the options may cost lots of money, but if it increases productivity in the long run, it is probably worth making the investment.
Are the Facilities for an Office or a Factory?
Office Space
An office will have different layout requirements than a factory.
Office and factory facilities are approached differently.
Factories move materials from point A to point B to produce a final products. The process uses equipment and utilities. Minimizing transportation costs may be one of the criteria of planning the layout of a factory. Another important consideration for factories in the necessity for maintenance of machinery. As such, careful consideration of enabling access to technicians is critical to ensuring minimal workflow disruptions in a scenario of updating, repairing or replacing machinery.
Offices, on the other hand, produces information. The form may be physical, electronic, or oral, but the the final result is still information. Office facility layout is harder to quantify than factory facilities layout, but the goal should be to minimize communication costs and maximize productivity.
Your industry can also influence the facilities layout design. The facility layout for service industries will differ from that of retailers and manufacturers. It all depends on organization’s needs.
10.5.5: Location Choice and Site Planning
An organization’s location choice impacts its efficiency and effectiveness, so it is important for it to properly weigh the various factors.
Learning Objective
Outline the key considerations for deciding the location of facilities
Key Points
- There are many factors that can determine where an organization will locate its facilities. For any given situation, some factors become more important than others in how facility location affects an organization’s efficiency and effectiveness.
- The factors determining where a company chooses to locate its facilites include supply, customer, community, and labor considerations.
- An essential part of choosing a location is doing proper research to verity that the location matches an organization’s strategic requirements.
Key Term
- facility
-
The physical means or contrivances to make something (especially a service) possible; the required equipment, infrastructure, location etc.
Example
- The following shows the importance of researching a location choice to make sure it is in line with strategic requirements. In the 1990s, MCI, a major US telecommunications company, decided to relocate its engineering services division from MCI’s headquarters in Washington DC to Colorado Springs, Colorado to reduce labor and facility costs. The decision was largely unsuccessful due to the high costs of employee relocation and the fact that much of the ethnically diverse engineering workforce did not want to live in Colorado Springs. Unlike Washington DC, Colorado Springs did not have cultural diversity to match with its diverse and highly educated workforce, it lacked employment options for spouses, and the work ethic was more relaxed due to the beautiful natural setting that provided unlimited options for outdoor recreation. In short, if MCI had put more effort into researching how well the Colorado Springs location matched its strategic requirements, it probably could have saved itself millions of dollars and a great deal of internal disruption to the organization.
Introduction
There are many factors that can determine where an organization will locate its facilities. For any given situation, some factors become more important than others in how facility location affects an organization’s efficiency and effectiveness.
Key Factors
- Proximity to sources of supply: Firms that process bulk raw materials usually locate close to the source of supply to reduce transportation costs. Paper mills locate close to forests, canneries are built close to farming areas, and fish processing plants are located close to the harbors where the fishing vessels dock.
- Proximity to customers: There are several reasons why an organization would locate close to end customers. Service firms need to be close to customers to be convenient, as is the case for grocery stores, gas stations, fast food restaurants, and hospitals. Transportation costs can also require proximity to customers, as in the case of concrete manufacturing. Perishable products often require that they be produced close to the final market, as is the case for bakeries and fresh flowers.
- Community factors: Communities may offer a number of incentives to entice companies, including waiving or reducing taxes, and providing access roads, water and sewer connections, and utilities. Community attitudes can also play a role in an organization’s location decision. Some communities may actively discourage companies that might bring more pollution, noise, and traffic to the area. Some communities may not want a prison to be located in their community. Other communities may welcome such firms because of the jobs, tax revenues, and economic diversity they promise.
- Labor factors: Research shows that the majority of location decisions are largely based on labor factors, since labor is a critical variable for many firms. Labor factors include the prevailing wage rate in a community for similar jobs, the supply of qualified workers, and the average education level of the local population (percentage of high school graduates, etc.). Other labor factors can include the degree of union organizing and the general work ethic of a community, as well as other measures of absenteeism, and worker longevity in a job can play a strong role when a firm makes a location decision.
- Other factors: Many other factors can play a role in the location decision, including quality of life (crime rates, good schools, climate, and recreation options), access to major transportation arteries, construction costs, proximity of the competition, and opportunities for future expansion.
As mentioned earlier, the importance of any location factor can vary greatly, depending on the circumstances of the decision.
Colorado river
Colorado is beautiful, but it might not be the best location for all organizations.
In the 1990s, MCI, a major US telecommunications company, decided to relocate its engineering services division from MCI’s headquarters in Washington DC to Colorado Springs, Colorado to reduce labor and facility costs. The decision was largely unsuccessful due to the high costs of employee relocation and the fact that much of the ethnically diverse engineering workforce did not want to live in Colorado Springs.
Unlike Washington DC, Colorado Springs did not have cultural diversity to match with its diverse and highly educated workforce, it lacked employment options for spouses, and the work ethic was more relaxed due to the beautiful natural setting that provided unlimited options for outdoor recreation.
In short, if MCI had put more effort into researching how well the Colorado Springs location matched its strategic requirements, it probably could have saved itself millions of dollars and a great deal of internal disruption to the organization.
10.5.6: Sustainability Initiatives
Sustainability initiatives consider every dimension of how a business operates in the social, cultural, and economic environment.
Learning Objective
Explain the principles of corporate sustainability
Key Points
- Transparency deals with the idea that having an engaging and open environment within the company, as well as the community, will improve performance and increase profits.
- Employee development involves the idea that people are the most important renewable resource and, therefore, are the strongest asset to any organization.
- Resource efficiency refers to that fact that companies must adapt to a rapidly changing environment by being prepared to change and implement new creative ideas related to sustainability.
- Essential principles of a sustainability initiative include triple top-line value production, nature-based knowledge and technology, products of service and products of consumption, renewable energy, local economies, and continuous improvement.
Key Terms
- sustainability
-
The capacity to support, maintain, or endure.
- stewardship
-
The act of caring for or improving with time.
- geothermal
-
Pertaining to heat energy extracted from reservoirs in the earth’s interior.
Example
- The following shows the importance of researching a location choice to make sure it is in line with strategic requirements. In the 1990s, MCI, a major US telecommunications company, decided to relocate its engineering services division from MCI’s headquarters in Washington DC to Colorado Springs, Colorado to reduce labor and facility costs. The decision was largely unsuccessful due to the high costs of employee relocation and the fact that much of the ethnically diverse engineering workforce did not want to live in Colorado Springs. Unlike Washington DC, Colorado Springs did not have cultural diversity to match with its diverse and highly educated workforce, it lacked employment options for spouses, and the work ethic was more relaxed due to the beautiful natural setting that provided unlimited options for outdoor recreation. In short, if MCI had put more effort into researching how well the Colorado Springs location matched its strategic requirements, it probably could have saved itself millions of dollars and a great deal of internal disruption to the organization.
Sustainability, in a general sense, is the capacity to support, maintain, or endure. Since the 1980s, human sustainability has been related to the integration of environmental, economic, and social dimensions towards global stewardship and responsible management of resources .
Sustainability
Sustainability is related to the integration of environmental, economic, and social dimensions towards global stewardship and responsible management of resources.
Corporate sustainability is a business approach that creates long-term consumer and employee value by not only creating a “green” strategy aimed towards the natural environment, but taking into consideration every dimension of how a business operates in the social, cultural, and economic environment. It also involves formulating strategies to build a company that fosters longevity through transparency and proper employee development. Three key principles that should form the foundation of a corporate sustainability initiative are: transparency, employee development, and resource efficiency.
Transparency deals with the idea that having an engaging and open environment within the company, as well as the community, will improve performance and increase profits. An open culture promotes employee involvement in regards to the innovation and creative processes. Reaching out to the community creates a much bigger team and provides evaluation from all angles. Companies are looking inward and realizing changes must be made to fulfill environment needs such as energy efficiency, limiting product waste and toxicity, and designing innovative products.
Employee development involves the idea that people are the most important renewable resource and, therefore, are the strongest asset to any organization. A strong development program could be the underlying factor for a company’s success or failure. Employees are the concrete foundation for the company and must be thoroughly analyzed and evaluated to tap into their true motivations and desires. For a company that wants to reach its greatest potential, employees must work towards improvement rather than perfection. Programs should be implemented that reward star performers, foster the creative learning process, and provide comprehensive training and evaluating.
Resource efficiency refers to that fact that companies must adapt to a rapidly changing environment by being prepared to change and implement new creative ideas related to sustainability. Companies should not throw away old products and materials, but rather be prepared with upgraded technology that can transform the product. New solutions that improve recycling and waste redirecting can ultimately reduce costs and increase profits. For example, Wal-Mart Stores Inc. has redirected more than 64% of the waste generated by stores and Sam’s Club facilities. In 2009 alone, they recycled more than 1.3 million pounds of aluminum, 120 million pounds of plastics, 11.6 million pounds of mixed paper, and 4.6 billion pounds of cardboard. On an annual basis, they expect to save around $20 million and prevent 38 million pounds of waste being sent to landfills.
Essential Principles of a Sustainability Initiative
- Triple top-line value production: This establishes three simultaneous requirements of sustainable business activities: 1) financial benefits for the company, 2) natural world betterment, and 3) social advantages for employees and members of the local community—with each of these three components recognized as equal in status.
- Nature-based knowledge and technology: This biomimicry-based principal involves the conscious emulation of natural-world genius in terms of growing our food, harnessing our energy, construction, conducting business, healing ourselves, processing information, and designing our communities.
- Products of service and products of consumption: Products of service are durable goods routinely leased by the customer that are made of technical materials and are returned to the manufacturer and re-processed into a new generation of products when they are worn out. Products of consumption are shorter lived items made only of biodegradable materials. This principal requires that we manufacture only these two types of products and necessitates the gradual but continual reductions of products of service and their replacement with products of consumption as technological advancements allow.
- Solar, wind, geothermal, and ocean energy: This principal advocates employing only sustainable energy technology—solar, wind, ocean, and geothermal—that can meet our energy needs indefinitely without negative effects for life on Earth.
- Local-based organizations and economies: This principle calls for durable, beautiful, and healthy communities with locally-owned and operated businesses and locally-managed non-profit organizations, along with regional corporations and shareholders working together in a dense web of partnerships and collaborations.
- Continuous improvement process: This principle suggests that operational processes inside successful organizations include provisions for constant advancements and upgrade as the company does its business.
Chapter 9: Organizational Structure
9.1: Defining an Organization
9.1.1: The Role of Management in an Organization
Management is tasked with generating an organizational system and integrating operations for high efficiency.
Learning Objective
Categorize the three primary managerial levels in an organization
Key Points
- Management may be described as the the people who design an organization’s structure and determine how different aspects of the organization will interact.
- Management entails six basic functions: planning, organizing, staffing, leading, controlling, and motivating.
- Different levels of management will participate in different components of this design process, with upper management creating the initial organizational architecture and structure.
- Organizational design is largely a function based on systems thinking: identifying the moving parts within an organization that add value and ensuring that these parts function together as an effective and efficient whole.
- Organizational design is less static in modern organizations; therefore, management must actively adapt organizational design to various challenges, opportunities, and technological improvements to maintain competitive output.
Key Terms
- organization chart
-
A graphic display of reporting relationships, which sometimes displays position titles and position holders.
- systems thinking
-
The process of understanding how parts influence one another within a whole.
Management and Organizational Design
Management can be described as the people who design an organization’s structure and determine how different aspects of the organization will interact. When designing an organization, managers must consider characteristics such as simplicity, flexibility, reliability, economy, and acceptability. Different levels of management will participate in different components of this design process, with upper management creating the initial organizational architecture and structure.
Organizational design is largely a function based on systems thinking. Systems thinking involves identifying the moving parts within an organization that add value and ensuring that these parts function together as an effective and efficient whole. Perspective is essential in systems thinking: a manager’s role in organizational design is to refrain from thinking of departments, individuals, processes, and problems as separate from the system and instead think of them as indivisible components of the broader organizational process.
Modern organizations exist within a framework of globalization and constant technological disruptions; as a result their organizational design is less static than in the past. Management must actively adapt organizations to meet various challenges, opportunities, and technological improvements to maintain competitive output. Because the organization is always changing, the problems of process and design are essentially limitless. Using a systems approach, managers view their objectives as moving targets and actively engage in expanding the organization day by day.
Management Processes
Organizations can be viewed as systems in which management creates the architecture for the system of production. Managers’ role in organizational design is central but must be understood in the context of their overall responsibilities within the organization.
Management operates through functions such as planning, organizing, staffing, leading/directing, controlling/monitoring, and motivation. These functions enable management to create strategies and compile resources to lead operations and monitor outputs.
The functions of management
Management operates through four main functions: planning, organizing, directing (i.e., leading), and controlling (i.e., monitoring and assessing).
Management Hierarchy
All levels of management perform these functions. However, the amount of time a manager spends on each function depends on the level of management and the needs of the organization—factors which play a role in organizational design.
- Top-level managers include the board of directors, president, vice-president, CEO, and other similar positions. They are responsible for planning and directing the entire organization.
- Middle-level managers include general managers, branch managers, and department managers, all of whom are accountable to the top-level management for the functions of their departments. They devote more time to organizing and directing.
- First-level managers include supervisors, section leads, foremen, and similar positions. They focus on controlling and directing.
As a result of this hierarchy, upper management will view the organizational design from a macro-level and consider all moving parts of the organization. Middle-management will generally focus on operations within functional or geographic areas. Lower-level managers will look at specific processes within functions or regions. From an organizational-design perspective, the higher managers are in the organization, the broader the view they will take and the greater number of moving parts they will consider.
9.1.2: Basic Types of Organizations
Most organizations fall into one of four types: pyramids/hierarchies, committees/juries, matrix organizations, and ecologies.
Learning Objective
Describe the basic types of organizations using four common structures
Key Points
- Organizations fall into one of four basic types: pyramids/hierarchies, committees/juries, matrix organizations, and ecologies.
- From a business perspective, the choice of organizational design has substantial implications for strategy, authority distribution, resource allocation, and functional approaches.
- A pyramid/hierarchy has a leader who is responsible for making all decisions that affect the organization. This leader manages other organizational members.
- Committees/juries consist of groups of peers who decide collectively, sometimes by casting votes, on the appropriate courses of action within the organization.
- Matrix organizations assign workers to more than one reporting line in an attempt to maximize the benefits of both functional and decentralized organizational forms.
- In ecologies, each business unit represents an individual profit center that holds employees accountable for the unit’s profitability.
Key Terms
- decentralized
-
A structure where business units operate autonomously and have greater decision-making power.
- functional
-
A structure that consists of activities such as coordination, supervision, and task allocation.
- common law
-
A precedent or policy developed by judges through decisions of courts and similar tribunals.
Basic Organizational Structures
An organization is a social entity with collective goals that is linked to an external environment. Most organizational structures fall into one of four types: pyramids/hierarchies, committees/juries, matrix organizations, and ecologies. From a business perspective, the choice of organizational design has substantial implications for strategy, authority distribution, resource allocation, and functional approaches.
Pyramid/Hierarchy
An organization using a pyramid or hierarchy structure has a leader who is responsible for and makes all the decisions affecting the organization. This leader manages other organizational members. Pyramids and hierarchies often rely on bureaucratic practices, such as clearly defined roles and responsibilities and rigid command and control structures. Like a physical pyramid, these organizations need a sturdy base with sufficient members to support various levels of management within the overall structure so that the organization does not fall short of its goals.
From a business perspective, a hierarchy will often be divided according to function or geography. For example, a global retailer may utilize a geographic hierarchy at the upper level, with each geographic branch creating a functional hierarchy beneath it. A smaller organization operating in a single region may simply have a functional hierarchy.
The Iraqi Special Security Organization
This organizational chart of the Iraqi Special Security Organization illustrates a hierarchy. Note the multiple separate layers to the organization’s hierarchy; the lowest layer includes individual branches, the next layer involves supervisory directorates, which report to the director’s office, who is accountable to the scientific branch.
Committee/Jury
Committees or juries consist of groups of peers who decide collectively, sometimes by casting votes, on the appropriate courses of action within an organization. Committees and juries have a basic distinction: members of a committee usually perform additional actions after the group reaches a decision, while a jury’s work concludes once the group has reached a decision. In countries with common-law practices, for example, a jury of peers render innocent or guilty verdicts in the court system. Juries are often used to determine athletic contests, book awards, and similar contests.
In the business world, a committee structure is more commonly found in smaller institutions. A start-up company with three people, for example, may easily function as a committee in which decisions are made via discussion. Committees represent a decentralized approach to organizational design and tend to have a collaborative, often unstructured workplace. The more people involved, the more disparate and less effective committee structures become.
Matrix
Matrix organizations assign employees to two reporting lines, each with a boss representing a different hierarchy. One hierarchy is functional and assures that experts in the organization are well-trained and assessed by bosses who are highly qualified in the same areas of expertise. The other hierarchy is executive and works to ensure the experts bring specific projects to completion. Matrix organizations are by far the most complex and are more common in large corporations.
Projects can be organized by product, region, customer type, or other organizational need. The matrix structure combines the best parts of both separate structures. In a matrix organization, teams of employees perform work to take advantage of the strengths and compensate for the weaknesses of both the functional and decentralized forms of organizational structure. Matrix organizations may be further categorized as one of the following types:
- Weak/Functional Matrix: A project manager with limited authority is assigned to oversee cross-functional aspects of the project. Functional managers maintain control over their resources and project areas.
- Balanced/Functional Matrix: A project manager is assigned to oversee the project. Power is shared equally between the project manager and functional managers, combining the best aspects of functional and project-oriented organizations. This system is the most difficult to maintain because of difficulties in power-sharing.
- Strong/Project Matrix: A project manager is primarily responsible for the project. Functional managers provide technical expertise and assign resources as needed.
Ecology
In ecologies, each business unit represents an individual profit center that holds employees accountable for the unit’s profitability. These kinds of organizations foster intense competition, as all members are paid for the actual work they perform. Ineffective parts of the organization are left to fail and thriving parts are rewarded with more work. Companies that use this organizational structure define roles and responsibilities strictly, and each business unit tends to operate autonomously. In an ecology organization, clearly defined, measurable objectives that reflect the business’s goals are critical.
9.1.3: The Organizational Chart
An organization chart is a diagram that illustrates the structure of an organization.
Learning Objective
Compare the various types of organization charts that describe company structures
Key Points
- Organization charts are a vital tool of management and can be classified into three broad categories: hierarchical, matrix, and flat (or horizontal).
- Organization charts illustrate the structure of an organization, the relationships and relative ranks of its business units/divisions, and the positions or roles assigned to each unit/division.
- Before working with an organization, employees should procure a copy of its organizational chart. A new employee or manager can then understand how authority is distributed within the organization and with whom to consult about various concerns.
Key Term
- decentralized
-
Dispersed rather than concentrated in a single, central location or authority.
The Purpose of Organization Charts
An organization chart (sometimes called an organizational chart, an org chart, or an organogram) is a diagram that illustrates the structure of an organization, the relationships and relative ranks of its business units/divisions, and the positions or roles assigned to each unit/division.
Examples of such roles include managers of various departments, subordinates within these departments, directors, and chief executive officers. When an organization chart grows too large, it can be split into smaller charts that show only individual departments within the organization.
Prior to applying for a job or beginning work with an organization, a prospective employee should procure a copy of the organization chart. New employees or managers can then know with whom to consult about particular issues, as well as understand the distribution of authority within the company. The org chart can also provide insight into the broader strategy of the company—such as the degree of innovation versus process control being pursued, the flexibility of project management, the degree of autonomy, and the broader company culture.
The different types of organization charts include hierarchical, matrix, and flat (also known as horizontal). These are described briefly below.
Hierarchical Organization Charts
A hierarchical organization is an organizational structure with several reporting layers. Every entity within the organization—except for the owners—is subordinate and reports to a higher level entity.
Matrix Organization Charts
A matrix organizational chart displays how people with similar skills are pooled together for work assignments.
Matrix organizational chart
In a matrix structure, the organization is grouped by both product and function. Product lines are managed horizontally and functions are managed vertically. This means that each function—e.g., research, production, sales, and finance—has separate internal divisions for each product.
Flat or Horizontal Organization Charts
A flat organization chart shows few or no levels of intervening management between staff and managers. A flat chart will simply look like a line of boxes with no overt authority implied.
9.2: Components of an Organization
9.2.1: Schein’s Common Elements of an Organization
The four common elements of an organization include common purpose, coordinated effort, division of labor, and hierarchy of authority.
Learning Objective
Describe the common elements that define an organizational structure, according to Edgar Schein
Key Points
- Organizational psychologist Edgar Schein proposed four common elements of an organization’s structure: common purpose, coordinated effort, division of labor, and hierarchy of authority.
- Common purpose unifies employees or members by giving everyone an understanding of the organization’s mission, strategy, and values.
- Coordinated effort is the organization of individual efforts into a group or collective effort.
- Division of labor is an arrangement in which different people perform discrete parts of a task for greater efficiency.
- Hierarchy of authority is the control mechanism for making sure the right people do the right things at the right time. This control enables organization members to make decisions quickly when necessary.
Key Term
- organizational psychologist
-
A person who conducts scientific study of employees and workplaces.
Common Elements of Organizations
Organizational psychologist Edgar Schein proposes four common elements of an organization’s structure:
- Common purpose
- Coordinated effort
- Division of labor
- Hierarchy of authority
From a manager’s point of view, operations are made successful by instilling a common purpose to create a coordinated effort across the organization and organizing resources based on tasks and decision making. Each of the four elements is relatively straightforward in theory but represents a critical component of an effective structure.
Common Purpose
An organization without a clear purpose or mission soon begins to drift and become disorganized. A common purpose unifies employees or members and gives everyone an understanding of the organization’s direction. Ensuring that the common purpose is effectively communicated across organizations (particularly large organizations with many moving parts) is a central task for managers. Managers communicate this purpose by educating all employees on the general strategy, mission statement, values, and short- and long-term objectives of the organization.
Coordinated Effort
Coordinating effort involves working together in a way that maximizes resources. The common purpose is achieved through the coordinated effort of all individuals and groups within an organization. The broader group’s diverse skill sets and personalities must be leveraged in a way that adds value. The act of coordinating organizational effort is perhaps the most important responsibility of managers because it motivates and distributes human resources to capture value.
Division of Labor
Division of labor is also known as work specification for greater efficiency. It involves delegating specific parts of a broader task to different people within the organization based upon their particular abilities and skills. Using division of labor, an organization can parcel out a complex work effort for specialists to perform. By systematically dividing complex tasks into specialized jobs, an organization uses its human resources more efficiently.
Hierarchy of Authority
Hierarchy of authority is essentially the chain of command—a control mechanism for making sure the right people do the right things at the right time. While there are a wide variety of organizational structures—some with more centralization of authority than others—hierarchy in decision making is a critical factor for success. Knowing who will make decisions under what circumstances enables organizations to be agile, while ambiguity of authority can often slow the decision-making process. Authority enables organizations to set directions and select strategies, which can in turn enable a common purpose.
9.2.2: Characteristics of Organizational Structures
Important characteristics of an organization’s structure include span of control, departmentalization, centralization, and decentralization.
Learning Objective
Outline the departmentalization options available to corporations from an organizational structure perspective and differentiate between centralized and decentralized decision-making, and the resulting structural implications
Key Points
- Organizational structures provide basic frameworks to help operations proceed smoothly and functionally.
- Span of control refers to the number of subordinates a supervisor has; it is used as a means of ensuring proper coordination and a sense of accountability among employees.
- Departmentalization is the basis by which an organization groups tasks together. There are five common approaches: functional, divisional, matrix, team, and network.
- Centralization occurs when decision-making authority is located in the upper organizational levels. Centralization increases consistency in the processes and procedures that employees use in performing tasks.
- Decentralization occurs when decision-making authority is located in the lower organizational levels. With decentralized authority, important decisions are made by middle-level and supervisory-level managers, thereby increasing adaptability.
Key Term
- span of control
-
The number of subordinates a supervisor has.
Organizational structures provide basic frameworks to help operations proceed smoothly and functionally. Types of organizational structures include functional, divisional, matrix, team, network, and horizontal structures. Each of these structures provides different degrees of four common organizational elements: span of control, departmentalization, centralization, and decentralization.
Span of Control
Span of control—or the number of subordinates a supervisor has—is used as a means of ensuring proper coordination and a sense of accountability among employees. It determines the number of levels of management an organization has as well as the number of employees a manager can efficiently and effectively manage. In the execution of a task, hierarchical organizations usually have different levels of task processes. Workers at various levels send reports on their progress to the next levels until the work is completed.
In the past it was not uncommon to see average spans of one to four (one manager supervising four employees). With the development of inexpensive information technology in the 1980s, corporate leaders flattened many organizational structures and caused average spans to move closer to one to ten. As this technology developed further and eased many middle-managerial tasks (such as collecting, manipulating, and presenting operational information), upper management found they could save money by hiring fewer middle managers.
Departmentalization
Departmentalization is the process of grouping individuals into departments and grouping departments into total organizations. Different approaches include:
- Functional – departmentalization by common skills and work tasks
- Divisional – departmentalization by common product, program, or geographical location
- Matrix – a complex combination of functional and divisional
- Team – departmentalization by teams of people brought together to accomplish specific tasks
- Network – independent departments providing functions for a central core breaker
Centralization
Centralization occurs when decision-making authority is located in the upper organizational levels. Centralization increases consistency in the processes and procedures that employees use in performing tasks. In this way, it promotes workplace harmony among workers and reduces the cost of production. Centralization is usually helpful when an organization is in crisis and/or faces the risk of failure.
Centralization allows for rapid, department-wide decision-making; there is also less duplication of work because fewer employees perform the same task. However, it can limit flexibility and natural synergies. Autonomy in decision-making is reserved for only a small number of individuals within the workforce, potentially limiting creativity.
Centralization vs. decentralization
This diagram compares visual representations of a centralized vs. decentralized organizational structure. Notice how the representation of the centralized organization looks like one large asterisk with many spokes, whereas the representation of the decentralized organization looks like many small interconnected asterisks.
Decentralization
Decentralization occurs when decision-making authority is dispersed among the lower organizational levels. With decentralized authority, important decisions are made by middle-level and supervisory-level managers. Because there are fewer hierarchical layers to navigate, this kind of structure helps to enable adaptability, quick reactions to lower level issues, and more empowered employees. However, making organization-wide changes that are implemented homogeneously can become quite difficult in this system.
9.3: Common Organizational Structures
9.3.1: Functional Structure
An organization with a functional structure is divided based on functional areas, such as IT, finance, or marketing.
Learning Objective
Explain the functional structure within the larger context of organizational structures in general
Key Points
- A functional organization is a common type of organizational structure in which the organization is divided into smaller groups based on specialized functional areas, such as IT, finance, or marketing.
- Functional departmentalization arguably allows for greater operational efficiency because employees with shared skills and knowledge are grouped together by function.
- A disadvantage of this type of structure is that the different functional groups may not communicate with one another, potentially decreasing flexibility and innovation. A recent trend aimed at combating this disadvantage is the use of teams that cross traditional departmental lines.
Key Terms
- departmentalization
-
The organization of something into groups according to function, geographic location, etc.
- silo
-
In business, a unit or department within which communication and collaboration occurs vertically, with limited cooperation outside the unit.
Overview of the Functional Structure
An organization can be arranged according to a variety of structures, which determine how the organization will operate and perform. In a functional structure, a common configuration, an organization is divided into smaller groups by areas of specialty (such as IT, finance, operations, and marketing). Some refer to these functional areas as “silos”—entities that are vertical and disconnected from each other. Correspondingly, the company’s top management team typically consists of several functional heads (such as the chief financial officer and the chief operating officer). Communication generally occurs within each functional department and is transmitted across departments through the department heads.
Functional structure at FedEx
This organizational chart shows a broad functional structure at FedEx. Each different functions (e.g., HR, finance, marketing) is managed from the top down via functional heads (the CFO, the CIO, various VPs, etc.).
Advantages of a Functional Structure
Functional departments arguably permit greater operational efficiency because employees with shared skills and knowledge are grouped together by functions performed. Each group of specialists can therefore operate independently with management acting as the point of cross-communication between functional areas. This arrangement allows for increased specialization.
Disadvantages of a Functional Structure
A disadvantage of this structure is that the different functional groups may not communicate with one another, potentially decreasing flexibility and innovation. Functional structures may also be susceptible to tunnel vision, with each function perceiving the organization only from within the frame of its own operation. Recent trends that aim to combat these disadvantages include the use of teams that cross traditional departmental lines and the promotion of cross-functional communication.
Functional structures appear in a variety of organizations across many industries. They may be most effective within large corporations that produce relatively homogeneous goods. Smaller companies that require more adaptability and creativity may feel confined by the communicative and creative silos functional structures tend to produce.
9.3.2: Divisional Structure
Divisional structures group various organizational functions into product or regional divisions.
Learning Objective
Describe the basic premise behind divisional structures within the general framework of organizational structure
Key Points
- The divisional structure is a type of organizational structure that groups each organizational function into a division. These divisions can correspond to either products or geographies.
- Each division contains all the necessary resources and functions within it to support that product line or geography (for example, its own finance, IT, and marketing departments).
- A multidivisional form (or “M-form”) is a legal structure in which one parent company owns subsidiary companies, each of which uses the parent company’s brand and name.
- The divisional structure is useful because failure of one division doesn’t directly threaten the other divisions. In the multidivisional structure, the subsidiaries benefit from the use of the brand and capital of the parent company.
- Disadvantages of divisional structure can include operational inefficiencies from separating specialized function. For the multidivisional structure, disadvantages can include increased accounting and taxes.
Key Terms
- subsidiary
-
A company owned by a parent company or holding company.
- division
-
A section of a large company.
- parent company
-
An entity that owns or controls another entity.
Divisional Structure Overview
Organizations can be structured in various ways, with each structure determining the manner in which the organization operates and performs. A divisional organization groups each organizational function into a division.
U.S. Department of Energy organization chart
The DOE organization chart shows a divisional structure with different divisions under each of three under-secretaries for energy. Each of the three division is in charge of a different set of tasks: environmental responsibilities, nuclear-energy responsibilities, or research responsibilities.
Divisional Strategies
Each division within this structure can correspond to either products or geographies of the organization. Each division contains all the necessary resources and functions within it to support that particular product line or geography (for example, its own finance, IT, and marketing departments). Product and geographic divisional structures may be characterized as follows:
- Product departmentalization: A divisional structure organized by product departmentalization means that the various activities related to the product or service are under the authority of one manager. If the division builds luxury sedans or SUVs, for example, the SUV division will have its own sales, engineering, and marketing departments distinct from those departments within the luxury sedan division.
- Geographic departmentalization: Geographic departmentalization involves grouping activities based on geography, such as an Asia/Pacific or Latin American division. Geographic departmentalization is particularly important if tastes and brand responses differ across regions, as it allows for flexibility in product offerings and marketing strategies (an approach known as localization).
A common legal structure known as the multidivisional form (or “M-form”) also uses the divisional structure. In this form, one parent company owns subsidiary companies, each of which uses its brand and name. The whole organization is ultimately controlled by central management; however, most decisions are left to autonomous divisions. This business structure is typically found in companies that operate worldwide—for example, Virgin Group is the parent company of Virgin Mobile and Virgin Records.
Advantages of a Divisional Structure
As with all organizational structure types, the divisional structure offers distinct advantages and disadvantages. Generally speaking, divisions work best for companies with wide variance in product offerings or regions of geographic operation. The divisional structure can be useful because it affords the company greater operational flexibility. In addition, the failure of one division does not directly threaten the other divisions. In the multidivisional structure, subsidiaries benefit from the use of the brand and capital of the parent company.
Disadvantages of a Divisional Structure
Some disadvantages of this structure include operational inefficiencies from separating specialized functions—for example, finance personnel in one division do not communicate with those in another division. Disadvantages of the multidivisional structure can include increased accounting and tax implications.
9.3.3: Matrix Structure
The matrix structure is a type of organizational structure in which individuals are grouped via two operational frames.
Learning Objective
Illustrate the way two different operational perspectives can be crossed in a matrix structure to organize a company
Key Points
- The matrix structure is a type of organizational structure in which individuals are grouped simultaneously by two different operational perspectives.
- Matrix structures are inherently complex and versatile, making them more appropriate for large companies operating across different industries or geographic regions.
- Proponents suggest that matrix management is more dynamic than functional management in that it allows team members to share information more readily across task boundaries; it also allows for specialization that can increase depth of knowledge.
- A disadvantage of the matrix structure is the increased complexity in the chain of command, which can lead to a higher manager-to-worker ratio and contribute to conflicting loyalties among employees.
Key Term
- matrix
-
A two-dimensional array.
Overview of the Matrix Structure
Organizations can be structured in various ways, and the structure of an organization determines how it operates and performs. The matrix structure is a type of organizational structure in which individuals are grouped by two different operational perspectives simultaneously; this structure has both advantages and disadvantages but is generally best employed by companies large enough to justify the increased complexity.
Matrix organizational structure
In a matrix structure, the organization is grouped by both product and function. Product lines are managed horizontally and functions are managed vertically. This means that each function—e.g., research, production, sales, and finance—has separate internal divisions for each product.
In matrix management, the organization is grouped by any two perspectives the company deems most appropriate. Common organizational perspectives include function and product, function and region, or region and product. In an organization grouped by function and product, for example, each product line will have management that corresponds to each function. If the organization has three functions and three products, the matrix structure will have nine (
) potential managerial interactions. This example illustrates how inherently complex matrix structures are in comparison to other, more linear structures.
Advantages of a Matrix Structure
Proponents of matrix management suggest that this structure allows team members to share information more readily across task boundaries, countering the “silo” critique of functional management. Matrix structures also allow for specialization that can both increase depth of knowledge and assign individuals according to project needs.
Disadvantages of a Matrix Structure
A disadvantage of the matrix structure is the increased complexity in the chain of command when employees are assigned to both functional and project managers. This increase in complexity can result in a higher manager-to-worker ratio, which can in turn increase costs or lead to conflicting employee loyalties. It can also create a gridlock in decision making if a manager on one end of the matrix disagrees with another manager. Blurred authority in a matrix structure can result in reduced agility in decision making and conflict resolution.
Matrix structures should generally only be used when the operational complexity of the organization demands it. A company that operates in various regions with various products may require interaction between product development teams and geographic marketing specialists—suggesting a matrix may be applicable. Generally speaking, larger companies with a need for a great deal of cross-departmental communication benefit most from this model.
9.3.4: Team-Based Structure
The team structure is a newer, less hierarchical organizational structure in which individuals are grouped into teams.
Learning Objective
Classify team-based structures within the larger context of the most common organizational structures
Key Points
- The team structure in large organizations is a newer type of organizational structure. A team should be a group of workers, with complementary skills and synergistic efforts, all working toward a common goal.
- An organization may have several teams that can change over time. Teams that include members from different functions are known as cross-functional teams.
- Although teams are characterized as less hierarchical, they typically still include a management structure (or management team).
- Critics argue that the use of the word “team” to describe modern organizational structures is a fad—that some teams are not really teams at all but merely groups of staff.
- One aspect of team-based structures likely to persist indefinitely is the integration of team cultures within an broader structure (such as a functional structure with interspersed teams).
Key Terms
- hierarchical
-
Classified or arranged according to various criteria into successive ranks or grades.
- synergistic
-
Cooperative, working together, interacting, mutually stimulating.
Overview of the Team-Based Structure
Organizations can be structured in various ways, and the structure of an organization determines how it operates and performs. The team structure in large organizations is considered a newer type of organization that is less hierarchical, less structured, and more fluid than traditional structures (such as functional or divisional). A team is a group of employees—ideally with complementary skills and synergistic efforts—working toward a common goal. Teams are created by grouping employees in a way that generates a variety of expertise and addresses a specific operational component of an organization. These teams can change and adapt to fulfill group and organizational objectives.
Some teams endure over time, while others—such as project teams—are disbanded at the project’s end. Teams that include members from different functions are known as cross-functional teams. Although teams are described as less hierarchical, they typically still include a management structure.
Critics argue that the use of the word “team” to describe modern organizational structures is a fad; according to them, some teams are not really teams at all but rather groups of staff. That said, team-building is now a frequent practice of many organizations and can include activities such as bonding exercises and even overnight retreats to foster team cohesion. To the extent that these exercises are meaningful to employees, they can be effective in improving employee motivation and company productivity.
Integration with Other Structures
One aspect of team-based structures that will likely persist indefinitely is the integration of team cultures within an broader structure (e.g., a functional structure with teams interspersed). Such integration allows for the authority and organization of a more concrete structure while at the same time capturing the cross-functional and projected-oriented advantages of teams.
For example, imagine Proctor and Gamble brings together a group of employees from finance, marketing, and research and development—all representing different geographic regions. This newly created team is tasked with the project of creating a laundry detergent that is convenient, economic, and aligned with the company’s manufacturing capabilities. The project team might be allocated a certain number of hours a month to devote to team objectives; however, members of the team are still expected to work within their respective functional departments.
9.3.5: Network Structure
In the network structure, managers coordinate and control relationships with the firm that are both internal and external.
Learning Objective
Identify the structural implications of a network-based organizational design
Key Points
- The network structure is a newer type of organizational structure viewed as less hierarchical (i.e., more “flat”), more decentralized, and more flexible than other structures.
- In a network structure, managers coordinate and control relationships that are both internal and external to the firm.
- The concept underlying the network structure is the social network—a social structure of interactions. Open communication and reliable partners (both internally and externally) are key components of social networks.
- Proponents argue that the network structure is more agile than other structures. Because it is decentralized, a network organization has fewer tiers, a wider span of control, and a bottom-up flow of decision making and ideas.
- A disadvantage of the network structure is that this more fluid structure can lead to more complex relations in the organization.
Key Terms
- agile
-
Apt or ready to move; nimble; active.
- decentralized
-
Diffuse; having no center or several centers.
- network
-
Any interconnected group or system.
Overview of the Network Structure
An organization can be structured in various ways that determine how it operates and performs. The network structure is a newer type of organizational structure often viewed as less hierarchical (i.e., more flat), more decentralized, and more flexible than other structures. In this structure, managers coordinate and control relations that are both internal and external to the firm.
The concept underlying the network structure is the social network—a social structure of interactions. At the organizational level, social networks can include intra-organizational or inter-organizational ties representing either formal or informal relationships. At the industry level, complex networks can include technological and innovation networks that may span several geographic areas and organizations. From a management perspective, the network structure is unique among other organizational structures that focus on the internal dynamics within the firm.
A network organization sounds complex, but it is at its core a simple concept. Take, for example, a T-shirt design company. Because the company leaders are mainly interested in design, they may not want to get too heavily involved in either manufacturing or retail; however, both aspects of the business are necessary to complete their operations. To maintain control of their product, they may rent retail space through their network and purchase production capabilities from a variety of partner organizations that have their own manufacturing facilities. While the core company focuses mainly on designing products and tracking finances, this network of partnerships enables it to be much more than just a design operation.
Like other organizational structures, the network structure has its advantages and its disadvantages.
Advantages of a Network Structure
Proponents argue that the network structure is more agile compared to other structures (such as functional areas, divisions, or even some teams). Communication is less siloed and flows freely, possibly opening up more opportunities for innovation. Because the network structure is decentralized, it has fewer tiers in its organizational makeup, a wider span of control, and a bottom-up flow of decision making and ideas.
Disadvantages of a Network Structure
On the other hand, this more fluid structure can lead to a more complex set of relationships in the organization. For example, lines of accountability may be less clear, and reliance on external vendors can be quite high. These potentially unpredictable variables essentially reduce the core company’s control over its operational success.
9.3.6: Modular Structure
In the modular structure, an organization focuses on developing specialized and relatively autonomous strategic business units.
Learning Objective
Define the nature and value of a modular structure in an organizational framework
Key Points
- The modular structure divides the business into small, tightly knit strategic business units (SBUs),which focus on specific elements of the organizational process.
- Interdependencies between modules tends to be weak; however, flexibility is extremely high.
- An advantage of the modular structure is that loosely coupled structures enable organizations to be more flexible and restructure more easily. For example, a firm can switch between different providers and thus respond more quickly to different market needs.
- Increased internalization and more tightly coupled structures can produce better communication and intellectual property gains. As a result, some argue that the modularity of a firm should be limited to the extent the flexibility it affords results in gains.
- Various degrees of modularity are possible; however, a business must be consistent in the degree of modularity it employs.
Key Terms
- modular
-
Consisting of separate units, especially where each unit performs a specified function and could be replaced by a similar unit for the same function, independently of other units.
- disaggregation
-
A division or breaking up into constituent parts, particularly categories which have been lumped together.
Overview of the Modular Structure
Organizations can be structured in various ways that determine how the organization operates and performs. The modular structure focuses on dividing the business into small, tightly knit strategic business units (SBUs), which focus on specific elements of the organizational process. Interdependence among the units is limited because the focus of many SBUs is more inward than outward and because loyalty within SBUs tends to be very strong.
The term modularity is widely used in studies of technological and organizational systems. Product systems are deemed modular when they can be broken down into a number of components that can then be mixed and matched to connect, interact, or exchange resources. Modularization within organizations leads to the disaggregation of the traditional form of hierarchical governance into relatively small, autonomous organizational units (modules). Although modules are not generally interdependent, the modular organization is extremely flexible.
For example, a firm that employs contract manufacturing rather than in-house manufacturing is using an organizational component that is more independent. The firm can switch between different contract manufacturers that perform different functions; the contract manufacturer can similarly work for different firms. Another (more internally focused) modular model involves the existence of various consumer services which cater to dramatically different needs or demographics. At GNU Health, for example, the surgery unit may interact with different departments at different times for different reasons.
Modular organizations
A modular organization involves several largely independent bodies that can rearrange and work with different other departments as needed. This image shows the GNU health module interacting with many different departments, such as oncology, radiology, surgery and pediatrics, across many contexts, such as location and socioeconomic status.
Advantages of a Modular Structure
One advantage of the modular structure is that loosely coupled structures can enable organizations to be more flexible and restructure more easily. For example, a firm can switch between different providers and thus respond more quickly to different market needs. An organization can also fill its own corporate needs internally by creating a new modular department, which can operate interdependently with the whole.
Disadvantages of a Modular Structure
On the other hand, more internalization and more tightly coupled structures can produce better communication and intellectual property gains. As a result, critics of the modular organization argue that a firm’s modularity should be limited to the extent that its flexible nature affords gains. Various degrees of modularity are possible but not necessarily useful if the pros do not outweigh the cons. Managers must carefully consider whether or not a modular structure would be useful, either entirely or partially, for a given organization.
9.4: Factors to Consider in Organizational Design
9.4.1: Considering the Environment
Considerations of the external environment—including uncertainty, competition, and resources—are key in determining organizational design.
Learning Objective
Identify the inherent complexities in the external environment that influence the design of an organization’s structure
Key Points
- Organizational design is dictated by a variety of factors, including the size of the company, the diversity of the organization’s operations, and the environment in which it operates.
- According to several theories, considerations of the external environment are a key aspect of organizational design. These considerations include how organizations cope with conditions of uncertainty, procure external resources, and compete with other organizations.
- A company in a highly uncertain environment must prioritize adaptability over a more rigid and functional strategy. In contrast, a company in a mature market with limited variability and uncertainty should pursue more structure.
- A company with a low-cost strategy relative to its competition may benefit from a more simplistic and fixed structural approach to operations, while a company pursuing differentiation must prioritize flexibility and a more diversified structure.
Key Terms
- differentiation
-
A strategy focused on creating a unique product for a particular population.
- strategy
-
A plan of action intended to accomplish a specific goal.
Overview
Organizational design is dictated by a variety of factors, including the size of the company, the diversity of the organization’s operations, and the environment in which it operates. Considerations of the external environment are a key aspect of organizational design. The environment in which an organization operates can be defined from a number of different angles, each of which generates different structural and design strategies to remain competitive.
Complexity
Complexity theory postulates that organizations must adapt to uncertainty in their environments. The complexity theory treats organizations and firms as collections of strategies and structures that interact to achieve the highest efficiency within a given environment. Therefore, companies in a highly uncertain environment must prioritize adaptability over a more rigid and functional strategy. Alternatively, a fixed and specific approach to organizational design will capture more value in a mature market, where variability and uncertainty are limited.
Resource Dependence
Another perspective on organizational design is resource dependence theory—the study of how external resources affect the behavior of the organization. Procuring external resources is important in both the strategic and tactical management of any company. Resource-dependence theory explores the implications regarding the optimal divisional structure of organizations, recruitment of board members and employees, production strategies, contract structure, external organizational links, and many other aspects of organizational strategy.
Competition
Another environmental factor that shapes organization design is competition. Higher levels of competition require different organizational structures to offset competitors’ advantages while emphasizing the company’s own strengths. A company that demonstrates strength in differentiation relative to the competition benefits from implementing a divisional or matrix strategy, which in turn allows the company to manage a wide variety of demographic-specific products or services. Alternatively, a company that demonstrates a low-cost strength (producing products cheaper than the competition) benefits from employing a structural or bureaucratic strategy to streamline operations.
Identifying External Factors
In considering organizational design relative to the environment, managers may find it helpful to employ two specific frameworks to identify external factors and internal strengths and weaknesses:
- SWOT analysis: In this particular model, a company’s strengths and weaknesses are assessed in the context of the opportunities and threats in the business environment. A SWOT analysis enables a company to identify the ideal structure to maximize its internal strengths while capturing external opportunities and avoiding threats.
- Porter’s five-forces analysis: This analysis identifies factors of the industry’s competitive environment that may substantially influence a company’s strategic design. The five forces include power of buyers, power of suppliers, rivalry (competition), substitutes, and barriers to entry (how difficult it is for new firms to enter the industry). Understanding these varying forces gives the company an idea of how adaptable or fixed the organizational structure should be to capture value.
Porter’s five-forces model
Porter’s five-forces analysis identifies five environmental factors that can influence a company’s strategic design: power of buyers, power of suppliers, competition, substitutes, and barriers to entry.
Smaller, more agile companies tend to thrive better in uncertain or constantly changing markets, while larger, more structured companies function best in consistent, predictable environments. Understanding these tools and frameworks alongside the varying external forces that act upon a business will allow companies to make strategic organizational decisions that optimize their competitive strength.
9.4.2: Considering Company Size
The size and operational scale of a company is important to consider when identifying the ideal organization structure.
Learning Objective
Explain how the size of a company helps determine the organizational structure that optimizes operational efficiency and managerial capacity
Key Points
- Company size plays a substantial role in determining the ideal structure of the company: the larger the company, the greater need for increased complexity and divisions to achieve synergy.
- Companies may adopt any of six organizational structures based on company size and diversity in scope of operations: pre-bureaucratic, bureaucratic, post-bureaucratic, functional, divisional, and matrix.
- Smaller companies function best with pre-bureaucratic or post-bureaucratic structures. Pre-bureaucratic structures are inherently adaptable and flexible and therefore particularly effective for small companies aspiring to expand.
- Larger companies usually achieve higher efficiency through functional, bureaucratic, divisional, and matrix structures (depending on the scale, scope, and complexity of operations).
- Understanding the varying pros and cons of each structure will help companies to plan their organization design and structure in a way that optimizes resources and allows for growth.
Key Terms
- economies of scope
-
Strategies of incorporating a wider variety of products or services to capture value through the ways in which they interact or overlap.
- Homogeneous
-
Having a uniform makeup; having the same composition throughout.
- economies of scale
-
Processes in which an increase in quantity will result in a decrease in average cost of production (per unit).
Company Size and Organizational Structure
Organizational design can be defined narrowly as the strategic process of shaping the organization’s structure and roles to create or optimize competitive capabilities in a given market. This definition underscores why it is important for companies to identify the factors of the organization that determine its ideal structure—most specifically the size, scope, and operational initiatives of the company.
Company size plays a particularly important role in determining an organization’s ideal structure: the larger the company, the greater the need for increased complexity and divisions to achieve synergy. The organizational structure should be designed in ways that specifically optimize the effort and input compared to output. Larger companies with a wider range of operational initiatives require careful structural considerations to achieve this optimization.
Types of Organizational Structure
Companies may adopt one of six organizational structures based upon company size and diversity of scope of operations.
Pre-bureaucratic
Ideal for smaller companies, the pre-bureaucratic structure deliberately lacks standardized tasks and strategic division of responsibility. Instead, this is an agile framework aimed at leveraging employees in any and all roles to optimize competitiveness.
Bureaucratic
A bureaucratic framework functions well in large corporations with relatively complex operational initiatives. This structure is rigid and mechanical, with strict subordination to ensure consistency across varying business units.
Post-bureaucratic
This structure is a combination of bureaucratic and pre-bureaucratic, where individual contribution and control are coupled with authority and structure. In this structure, consensus is the driving force behind decision making and authority. Post-bureaucratic structure is better suited to smaller or medium-sized organizations (such as nonprofits or community organizations) where the importance of the decisions made outweighs the importance of efficiency.
Functional
A functional structure focuses on developing highly efficient and specific divisions which perform specialized tasks. This structure works well for large organizations pursuing economies of scale, usually through production of a large quantity of homogeneous goods at the lowest possible cost and highest possible speed. The downside of this structure is that each division is generally autonomous, with limited communication across business functions.
Divisional
A divisional structure is also a framework best leveraged by larger companies; instead of economies of scale, however, they are in pursuit of economies of scope. Economies of scope simply means a high variance in product or service. As a result, different divisions will handle different products or geographic locations/markets. For example, Disney may have a division for TV shows, a division for movies, a division for theme parks, and a division for merchandise.
Matrix
A matrix structure is used by the largest companies with the highest level of complexity. This structure combines functional and divisional concepts to create a product-specific and division-specific organization. In the Disney example, the theme park division would also contain a functional structure within it (i.e., theme park accounting, theme park sales, theme park customer service, etc.).
Strategic Organizational Design
Structure becomes more difficult to change as companies evolve; for this reason, understanding which specific structure will function best within a given company environment is an important early step for the management team. Smaller companies function best as pre-bureaucratic or post-bureaucratic; the inherent adaptability and flexibility of the pre-bureaucratic structure is particularly effective for small companies aspiring to expand. Larger companies, on the other hand, achieve higher efficiency through functional, bureaucratic, divisional, and matrix structures (depending on the scale, scope, and complexity of operations).
McDonald’s fast-food restaurants departmentalize varying elements of their operation to optimize efficiency. This structure is divisional, meaning each specific company operation is segmented (for example, operations, finance/accounting, marketing, etc.).
9.4.3: Considering Technology
Technology impacts organizational design and productivity by enhancing the efficiency of communication and resource flow.
Learning Objective
Recognize the intrinsic structural value of the ever-evolving technological environment
Key Points
- Organizations use technological tools to enhance productivity and to initiate new and more efficient structural designs for the organization. These uses of technology become potential sources of economic value and competitive advantage.
- An example of an organizational structure emerging from newer technological trends is what some have called the “virtual organization,” which connects a network of organizations via the internet.
- A network structure is another kind of organizational structure that is heavily reliant upon technology for communication.
- More traditional organizational structures also benefit greatly from the advance of technology. Managers can communicate and delegate much more effectively through using technologies such as email, calendars, online presentations, and other virtual tools.
Key Terms
- supply chain
-
A system of organizations, people, technology, activities, information, and resources involved in moving a product or service from the supplier to the customer.
- network
-
Any interconnected group or system.
Organizational design can be defined narrowly as the strategic process of shaping an organization’s structure and roles to create or optimize capabilities for competition in a given market.
Technology is an important factor to consider in organizational design. Modern organizations can be treated as complex and adaptive systems that include a mix of human and technological interactions. Organizations can utilize technological tools to enhance productivity and to initiate new and more efficient structural designs for the organization, thereby adding potential sources of economic value and competitive advantage.
Technology
Technology has opened doors to incorporating new and advanced forms of organizational design. This is most notably seen through rapid global communications and the ability to constantly and economically be in contact.
Technological Organizational Structures
An example of an organizational structure that has emerged from newer technological trends is what some have called the “virtual organization,” which connects a network of organizations via the internet. Over the internet, an organization with a small core can still operate globally as a market leader in its niche. This can dramatically reduce costs and overhead, remove the necessity for an expensive office building, and enable small, dynamic teams to travel and conduct work wherever they are needed.
A similar organizational design that is heavily reliant upon technological capabilities is the network structure. While the network structure existed prior to recent technologies (i.e., affordable communications via internet, cell phones, etc.), the existence of complex telecommunications networks and logistics technologies has greatly increased the viability of this structure.
Technology and Traditional Structures
Technology can also affect other longstanding elements of an organization. For example, information systems allow managers to take a much more analytic view of their businesses than before the advent of such systems. Managers can communicate and delegate much more effectively through using technologies such as email, calendars, online presentations, and other virtual tools.
Technology has also impacted supply chain management—the management of a network of interconnected businesses involved in the provision of product and service packages required by the end customers in a supply chain. Supply chain management now has the capacity to track, forecast, predict, and refine the outbound logistics, contributing to a wide variety of logistical advantages (such as minimizing costs from warehousing, fuel, negative environmental impacts, or packaging).
Technology simplifies the process of managing reports, collecting communications, and keeping in touch, enabling management in more formal structures to take on more workers. Increases in technology have essentially allowed organizations to scale up their companies through more effective and efficient teams.
9.4.4: Considering the Organizational Life Cycle
The life cycle of an organization is important to consider when determining its overall design and structure.
Learning Objective
Describe the way in which life cycles influence an organization’s overall design and structure
Key Points
- From an organizational perspective, the “life cycle” can refer to various factors such as the age of the organization, the maturation of a particular product or process, or the maturation of the broader industry.
- In organizational ecology, the idea of age dependence is used to examine how an organization’s risk of mortality relates to its age. Richard L. Daft outlines different patterns of age dependence in his four stages model.
- The idea of the Enterprise Life Cycle in enterprise architecture argues for a life cycle concept as an overarching design strategy—a dynamic, iterative process of changing the enterprise over time by incorporating, maintaining, and disposing of new and existing elements of the enterprise.
- Companies must understand clearly where they are in their life cycle and what influence this will have on their optimal organizational structure.
Key Terms
- life cycle
-
The useful life of a product or system; the developmental history of an individual, group or entity.
- assessment
-
An appraisal or evaluation.
- strategy
-
A plan of action intended to accomplish a specific goal.
Organization design can be defined narrowly as the strategic process of shaping organizational structure and roles to create or optimize capabilities for competition in a given market. The life cycle of an organization, industry, and/or product can be an important factor in organization design.
The life cycle of a business
Organizations must always be striving to sustain their position in a given competitive environment. This often requires structural evolution and rapid iterations in the feedback loop of disruption, growth, refinement, and renewal.
Overview of the Life Cycle
From an organizational perspective, “life cycle” can refer to various factors such as the age of the organization itself, the maturation of a particular product or process, or the maturation of the broader industry. In organizational ecology, the idea of age dependence is used to examine how an organization’s risk of mortality relates to the age of that organization. Generally speaking, organizations go through the following stages:
- Birth
- Growth
- Maturity
- Decline
- Death
The Enterprise Life Cycle
The Enterprise Life Cycle is a model that underlines the way in which organizations remain relevant. The Enterprise Life Cycle is the dynamic, iterative process of changing an enterprise over time by incorporating new business processes, technologies, and capabilities, as well as maintaining, using, and disposing of existing elements of the enterprise.
Richard L. Daft’s Four Stages
Richard L. Daft theorized four stages of the organizational life cycle, each with critical transitions:
- Entrepreneurial stage → Crisis: Need for leadership
- Collectivity stage → Crisis: Need for delegation
- Formalization stage → Crisis: Too much red tape
- Elaboration stage → Crisis: Need for revitalization
Structural Implications of the Life Cycle
The life cycle of an organization is important to consider when making decisions about the organization’s structure and design. Richard L. Daft’s model underlines critical problems within each stage of an organization’s life cycle that can often be solved through intelligent structural design.
Daft first notes that the entrepreneurial (or startup) stage of an organization requires leadership. In this situation, decision-making must be enabled and bureaucracy should be minimized. This lends itself well to pre-bureaucratic stuctures in which everyone involved is empowered to take the reins and employ their creativity and innovation.
In the collectivity stage, momentum has been created and expansion is required. This is where functional or divisional strategies may begin to emerge, enabling managers to build teams and delegate tasks.
Companies continue to expand in the formalization stage, requiring increased bureaucracy and more levels of authority to approve a given decision. In this stage they grow large enough to accommodate functional, divisional, or even matrix structures in order to produce at scale. Organizations in this stage must be careful not to fall too strongly into rigid structures that inhibit or disrupt efficiency, communication, or decision-making.
The Enterprise Life Cycle comes strongly into play in the elaboration stage. During this stage the organization must retain its relevance in the industry through reinforcing competitive advantages and/or creating new products to fill changing consumer needs. This requires a great deal of organized creativity and exploration of new markets, which may justify team or divisional structures within the broader organizational structure. Such structures allow small teams to experiment and react quickly as they try new entrepreneurial strategies while the larger organization maintains operative efficiency in established markets.
9.5: Trends in Organization
9.5.1: Flattening Hierarchies
Flattening hierarchies can benefit smaller organizations by increasing employee empowerment, participation, and efficiency.
Learning Objective
Define a flattened hierarchy, specifically in which situations where the utilization of this model is appropriate and beneficial for an organization
Key Points
- A hierarchy can link entities either directly or indirectly; it can also link entities either vertically or horizontally. The only direct links in a hierarchy are to a person’s immediate superior or subordinates.
- The flat organization model essentially “flattens” the hierarchy and promotes employee involvement through a decentralized decision-making process.
- According to the logic behind this model, well-trained workers will be more productive when they are directly involved in the decision-making process rather than closely supervised by many layers of management.
- Flat organizations are most relevant in specific scenarios—most notably small organizations that are dependent upon creativity, freedom of action, and high-powered employees.
Key Term
- hierarchy
-
An arrangement of items in which each item is represented as being above, below, or at the same level as other items.
Links within Hierarchies
Hierarchies can be linked in several different ways. A hierarchy can link entities either directly or indirectly; it can also link entities either vertically or horizontally. The only direct links in a hierarchy are to a person’s immediate superior or subordinates. Parts of the hierarchy that are not linked vertically to one another can be horizontally linked through a path by traveling up the hierarchy; this path eventually reaches a common direct or indirect superior and then travels down the hierarchy again. An example of this would be two colleagues who each report to a common superior but have the same relative amount of authority in the organization.
Flat Hierarchies
Flat (or horizontal) organizational structures have few or no levels of intervening management between staff and managers. This “flattened” hierarchy promotes employee involvement through a decentralized decision-making process. The idea is that well-trained workers will be more productive when they are directly involved in the decision-making process rather than closely supervised by many layers of management.
Flat organization chart
This diagram illustrates the structure of a flat organization: there is no low- or mid-level management—just one manager and the rest of the staff.
Advantages of Flattened Hierarchies
Flat structures empower each individual within the company to be involved in decision-making processes. This allows for a great deal of creative discussion and operational diversity and tends to create great variance in new ideas. By elevating the level of responsibility of baseline employees and eliminating layers of middle management, comments and feedback can quickly reach all personnel involved in decisions. Response to customer feedback can be carried out more rapidly.
This type of structure generally works best in smaller organizations or individual units within larger organizations. Start-up companies, “mom and pop shops,” and other small independent businesses are the most common examples of a flat structure.
Disadvantages of Flattened Hierarchies
Flat organizations are difficult to maintain as companies grow larger and more complex. When organizations reach a critical size, they can retain a streamlined structure; however, they cannot keep a completely flat manager-to-staff hierarchy without impacting productivity. Certain financial responsibilities may also require a traditional hierarchical structure. While the flat structure can foster employee empowerment, involvement, and creativity, it can also create inefficiency in decision-making processes. Some theorize that flat organizations become more traditionally hierarchical when they gear themselves more toward productivity.
Because the interaction between workers is more frequent, this organizational structure generally depends on a more personal relationship between workers and managers. As a result, the structure can be more time-consuming to build than a traditional hierarchical model.
9.5.2: Decentralizing Responsibility
In decentralized structures, responsibility for decision making is broadly dispersed down to the lower levels of an organization.
Learning Objective
Compare and contrast centralization and decentralization of responsibility within the organizational hierarchy
Key Points
- Decentralization is the process of dispersing decision making authority among the people, citizens, employees, or other elements of an organization or sector.
- A decentralized organization shows fewer tiers in the organizational structure, a wider span of control, and a bottom-to-top flow of ideas and decision making.
- The bottom-to-top flow of information allows lower-level employees to better inform the officials of the organization during any decision making processes.
- When companies decentralize authority, however, there can be confusion as to how final decisions are made.
Key Terms
- governance
-
Accountability for consistent and cohesive policies, processes, and decision rights.
- authority
-
The power to enforce rules or give orders.
- mechanistic organization
-
A bureaucratic structure.
Decentralization is the process of dispersing decision making authority among the people, citizens, employees, or other elements of an organization or sector. In decentralized structures, responsibility for decision making and accountability are broadly dispersed down to the lower levels of an organization. This dispersion can be intentional or unintentional. A decentralized organization tends to show fewer tiers in its organizational structure (less hierarchy), a wider span of control, and a bottom-to-top or horizontal flow of decision making and ideas.
Decentralization
The management structure in a decentralized organization changes from a top-down approach to more of a peer-to-peer approach.
Contrasting Centralized and Decentralized Structures
In a centralized organization, decisions are made by top executives on the basis of current policies. These decisions or policies are then enforced through several tiers of hierarchy within the organization, gradually broadening the span of control until they reach the bottom tier.
In a decentralized organization, the top executives delegate much of their decision making authority to lower tiers of the organizational structure. This type of structure tends to be seen in organizations that run on less rigid policies and wider spans of control among each officer of the organization. The wider spans of control also reduce the number of tiers within the organization, giving its structure a flat appearance .
Decentralized organizational chart
This image illustrates a decentralized (often referred to as a “flat”) organizational chart. Note that there are not multiple layers of management; there is one manager and then the rest of the staff. This means that each staff-person necessarily has more responsibility and therefore more autonomy.
Advantages of Decentralization
One advantage of this structure—if the correct controls are in place—is the bottom-up flow of information. This flow allows lower-level employees to better inform the officials of the organization during any decision making processes. For example, if an experienced technician at the lowest tier of an organization knows how to increase the efficiency of the production, the bottom-to-top flow of information can allow this knowledge to pass up to the executive officers.
Disadvantages of Decentralization
On the other side of the argument, when companies decentralize authority there can be confusion as to how final decisions are made. It can be difficult to empower multiple people without certain decisions negatively interacting with other decisions. Decentralized organizations must be mindful of the possibility of running in too many different directions at once. Because of this, decentralization is most effective in organizations that have transparent strategies, a strong mission, and a clear vision.
9.5.3: Increasing Empowerment
Modern organizations are more aware of the value of empowered employees and actively strive to structurally increase empowerment.
Learning Objective
Discuss the advantages of empowerment in an organization, and how organizational structure can improve upon the promotion of empowered employees
Key Points
- Empowerment is a process that enables individuals and groups to fully access their personal and collective power, authority, and influence, and to employ this power when engaging with other people, other institutions, or society.
- Leaders within an organization can play a strong role in encouraging employees to put empowerment into practice.
- To enable empowerment, managers can share information, provide employees with autonomy, and migrate to self-managed teams when possible.
- Though the idea of empowerment can produce successful results, it is important to understand the risks. More decision-makers means more discussion about how a process should be accomplished and more moving parts within the organization, increasing complexity.
Key Term
- empowerment
-
The accessing and employing of political, social, or economic power by an individual or group.
Defining Empowerment
Empowerment is a process that enables individuals and groups to fully access personal and collective power and employ this power when engaging with other people, other institutions, or society. Empowerment does not give people power; rather, it helps to release and express the power that people already have.
Empowerment encourages people to gain the skills and knowledge that allows them to overcome obstacles in life and work. This will ultimately enable personal development and a deeper sense of professional fulfillment. Empowering people in organizations can encourage more confident, capable, and motivated employees. Organizations are increasingly aware that empowerment often leads to better performance and higher operational efficiency, and there is a general trend toward structuring organizations for empowerment.
Empowerment within the Organization
Empowering employees in the workplace means providing them with opportunities to make their own decisions related to their tasks. This can be a powerful and positive aspect within an organization that promotes shared power and enables checks and balances in decision-making processes.
Empowerment in organizations includes:
- Making decisions about personal and collective circumstances;
- Accessing information and resources for decision-making;
- Considering a range of options from which to choose (and understanding the options rather than just deciding yes or no);
- Exercising assertiveness in collective decision-making;
- Employing positive thoughts toward the ability to make change;
- Learning and accessing skills for improving personal and collective circumstances; and
- Informing others’ perceptions though exchange, education, and engagement.
Though the idea of empowerment can produce very successful results, there are certain risks are involved. When turning responsibility over to others, it is important to keep in mind that diversifying power creates more voices and therefore potentially more conflict and discussion. All of these elements can slow down the decision-making process. As organizations move toward higher levels of empowerment, protocols should be put in place to mitigate failure and improve decision-making efficiency across the board.
Decentralization
One key technique of empowering employees and providing autonomy is decentralizing the organizational structure. Notice how the diagram of the centralized organization looks like one large asterisk with many spokes, whereas the diagram of the decentralized organization looks like many small interconnected asterisks.
Increasing Empowerment
Leaders within an organization can encourage employees to put empowerment into practice in several ways. If leaders want to tap into the possibilities of an empowerment-based company, they need to have confidence in employees. Employees should also be given opportunities to make their own decisions and succeed. For an empowerment-based organization, rules and policies that interfere with self-management should be made more lenient. Leaders should also set goals that can inspire people.
The following are three key concepts that leaders can use to empower employees throughout an organization:
- Share information with everyone. By sharing information with everyone, leaders gain a clear picture of the company and its current situation. Allowing all employees to view company information helps to build trust between employers and employees. This also provides decision-makers with important perspectives to assess prior to deciding.
- Create autonomy through boundaries. By opening communication through information sharing, space can be created for feedback and dialogue about what holds people back from being empowered. It is critical that leaders minimize micro-management so that employees, who are specialists at the function they are assigned, can set the tone for how a particular task is accomplished.
- Replace the old hierarchy with self-managed teams. By replacing the old hierarchy with self-managed teams, more responsibility is placed upon unique and self-managed teams; this can lead to better communication, diversity of strategies, and higher performance.
The success of the modern organization relies heavily on understanding the complexity of a diverse global market. Leveraging employee knowledge and enabling autonomy is increasingly important in capturing value and attaining competitive advantages in this complex business environment.
9.5.4: Increasing Adaptation
In order to succeed, modern organizations must constantly adapt to evolving technologies and expanding global markets.
Learning Objective
Identify the importance and inherent value of increasing adaptation within company structures and performance
Key Points
- Technological advances, global market expansions, and the potential for constant (sometimes disruptive) innovation all point to the need for organizations to be adaptive.
- Blockbuster and Netflix provide a classic example: in this case, Blockbuster was simply too slow to adapt to the demand for live-streaming videos.
- If an organization takes on the identity of a growing, adapting, and learning organization, these qualities become part of the fabric of how it operates.
- Implementing an adaptable strategy may have effects that ripple across an organization. Minimizing disruption can reduce costs and save time.
- Resistance to change is considered a major obstacle to creating effective adaptability in an organization. Integrating changes step by step while utilizing focus groups and training sessions can improve the efficacy of adaptation.
Key Term
- adaptation
-
Adjustment to extant conditions; modification of a thing or its parts in a way that makes it more fit for existence under the conditions of its current environment.
The Importance of Adaptation
Organizational adaption is becoming increasingly relevant to both strategy and structure as the business environment changes more quickly each year. Technological innovations, global market expansions, and the potential for constant (sometimes disruptive) innovation all point to the need for organizations to be adaptive.
There are a number of examples in which some organizations have adapted to new technologies or global competition, while others have failed to adapt and subsequently gone under. Blockbuster and Netflix provide a classic example: in this case, Blockbuster was simply too slow to adapt to the demand for live-streaming videos. Netflix, on the other hand, embraced this technological evolution and pioneered a user-friendly interface, gaining the company enormous value.
Increasing Adaptation
Strategic management largely pertains to adapting an organization to its business environment. The greatest agent for organizational change is the socialization aspect of culture, which can be empowered structurally. If an organization takes on the identity of a growing, adapting, and learning organization, these qualities become part of the fabric of how it operates. Knowing how and being able to increase this adaptability is important to organizational success.
Implementing a strategy of adaptation may have effects that ripple across an organization. Increasing an organization’s ability to adapt to change and minimize disruption can reduce costs and save time. One approach for increasing adaptation is to appoint an individual to champion the changes, address and eventually enlist opponents, and proactively identify and mitigate problems.
Challenges in Adaptation
Resistance to change is considered a major obstacle to creating effective adaptability in an organization. Organizational change can lead to loss of stability and—if this instability becomes great enough—loss of organizational effectiveness.
Organizational loss of effectiveness (LOE)
Organizational change can cause a loss of stability and results in the development of a predictable and measurable set of symptoms within an organization. When a significant number of these symptoms are present simultaneously, an organizational loss of effectiveness (LOE) will occur (Grady, 2005).
The following are methods that can be employed to help an organization and its staff to cope with change:
- Form focus groups. Staff from different departments can be selected to form focus groups, where quality data can be collected. In focus group discussions, staff should be given the chance to freely express their opinions and share their experiences.
- Provide training. Providing training courses to staff on new processes or structures can help to increase staff competence and reduce their resistance to change.
- Implement changes step by step. This involves first implementing the system in small groups—such as several departments or sections—and then widening the scope of implementation. This step-by-step approach can help by exposing problems raised simultaneously across the small groups and providing management with sufficient time to solve these problems before implementing the system across the organization.
9.5.5: Moving to Flexible Work Schedules
Employers can offer flexible working arrangements in the form of flextime and telecommuting work.
Learning Objective
Identify critical factors of success in creating a “telework” organization
Key Points
- Companies have begun to recognize how important a healthy work-life balance is to the productivity and creativity of their employees. Integrating new technologies for flexible schedules is a great opportunity to capture this value.
- Flextime and telecommuting (telework) are popular strategies that enable employees to set their own schedules and work from wherever is most convenient for them.
- In addition to supporting the required incremental technologies, a well-functioning telework organization needs a management system that is at least as effective as that of a traditional organization.
- Management teams face additional issues such as how to supervise employees who are often out of the office, how to monitor staff productivity with less personal interaction, how to build a strong virtual team, and how to maintain relationships between remote employees.
Key Term
- telecommute
-
To work from home, sometimes for part of a working day or week, using a computer connected to the employer’s network or via the internet.
Companies have begun to recognize how important a healthy work-life balance is to the productivity and creativity of their employees. Research by Kenexa Research Institute in 2007 showed that employees who were more favorable toward their organization’s efforts to support work-life balance also indicated a lower intent to leave the organization, greater pride in their organization, a willingness to recommend the organization as a place to work, and higher overall job satisfaction.
Employers can offer a range of different programs and initiatives that support such a work-life balance. Flexible working arrangements such as flextime and telecommuting work are becoming increasingly popular. More proactive employers can also provide compulsory leave, implement strict maximum hours, or foster an environment that encourages employees not to continue working after hours.
Telecommuting
Telecommuting (or telework) is a work arrangement in which employees do not commute to a central place of work. A person who telecommutes is known as a “telecommuter,” “teleworker,” or “home-sourced employee.” Many telecommuters work from home while others—sometimes called “nomad workers”—use mobile telecommunications technology to work from coffee shops or other locations. This allows employees the flexibility of adapting their work schedule to their living situation.
This arrangement is also quite popular in circumstances of sick leave, pregnancy, parenting, and other important life events. In the past these events could have resulted in temporary loss of employment. Being able to work from anywhere with an internet connection is a modern luxury that adaptable companies should be well aware of.
Home office
This small office is designed for telecommuting.
Flextime
Flextime (also called flexitime or flexi-time) is a variable work schedule, unlike traditional work arrangements in which employees work a standard 9 a.m. to 5 p.m. shift. In this arrangement, there is typically a core period of approximately 50% of the total working day when employees are expected to be at work (for example, between 11 a.m. and 3 p.m.). The rest of the working day is “flextime” in which employees can choose when they work. Employees are still required to complete the necessary work and achieve total daily, weekly, or monthly hours in the region of what the employer expects.
A flextime policy allows staff to determine when they will work, and a flexplace policy allows staff to determine where they will work. These strategies allow employees to adapt their work hours based on public transport schedules, child-care responsibilities, rush-hour traffic, and other elements.
Establishing a Telework Organization
In addition to supporting the required incremental technologies, a well-functioning telework organization needs a management system that is at least as effective as that of a traditional organization. Management teams face additional issues such as how to supervise employees who are often out of the office, how to monitor staff productivity with less personal interaction, how to build a strong virtual team, and how to maintain relationships between remote employees.
Some suggested best practices for maintaining a successful telework organization include:
- Develop a daily schedule. Setting a standardized daily schedule can help remote teleworkers feel as though they are really at work. It can also make it easier for supervisors to monitor staff activities and can lead to increased productivity.
- Establish milestone dates. Milestone dates help keep projects on track and make it easier to spot problems while there is still time to effectively deal with them.
- Encourage social networking. Employee surveys show that being able to keep in touch and communicate with colleagues despite physical distance can boost employee satisfaction and encourage top talent to stick around.
- Address problems right away. Respond to problems immediately even if they are reported by email or text message. This will prevent teleworkers from feeling isolated.
- Design key performance indicators (KPIs) for remote workers. These KPIs can also be used to measure the effectiveness of in-office staff and maintain an equivalence among the distinct employee categories.
- Start workdays by holding a five-minute team video-conference. This helps supervisors to maintain a regular check-in routine; it also enables employees to catch up on team work progress and feel connected to the whole organization.
- Manage by observation. A successful telework or telecommuting program requires a management style that is results-oriented (as opposed to task-oriented). This is referred to as management by objectives as opposed to management by observation.
9.5.6: Increasing Coordination
Increasing coordination helps organizations to maintain efficient operations through communication and control.
Learning Objective
Identify the way in which effective coordination across an organization can be increased through effective structure and good management
Key Points
- Coordination is a managerial function in which different activities of the business are properly adjusted and interlinked.
- The management team must pay special attention to issues related to coordination and governance and be able to improve upon coordination through effective management.
- Managers should strengthen communication across all facets of the organization to increase the level of integration between each moving part.
- If there is a lack of coordination, there is a risk that responsibility will become dispersed and tasks will be left unclaimed. Organizing accountability for every task helps to ensure that efforts are tangibly coordinated.
Key Terms
- division
-
A section of a large company.
- margin
-
A permissible difference; allowing some freedom to move within limits.
- centralization
-
The act or process of combining or reducing several parts into a whole.
Defining Coordination
Coordination is the act of organizing and enabling different people to work together to achieve an organization’s goals. It is a managerial function in which different activities of the business are properly adjusted and interlinked.
Employees within the functional divisions of an organization tend to perform a specialized set of tasks, such as engineering. This leads to operational efficiency within that group. However, it can also lead to a lack of communication between various functional groups within an organization, rendering the organization slow and inflexible .
Organizational structure
This is an example of an organizational structure. At a high level are multiple functional groups, or “modules”—technical, marketing, and intellectual property. The linked working groups (e.g., data coding workgroup, security workgroup, and audio and video compression workgroup) within the technical functional group likely have coordinated functions.
Increasing Coordination
Coordination is simply the managerial ability to maintain operations and ensure they are properly integrated with one another; therefore, increasing coordination is closely related to improving managerial skills. The management team must pay special attention to issues related to coordination and governance and be able to improve upon coordination through effective management.
Increasing coordination internally can be accomplished by keeping all moving parts of the organization on the same page. There are a number of ways to improve upon the coordination of different departments, work groups, teams, or functional specialists. These include creating a well-communicated and accurate mission statement; clearly defining strategic objectives; monitoring and evaluating each functional group; providing company-wide updates and communications from each department; and, wherever possible, promoting cross-departmental meetings and projects. While this list is long and complex, the underlying concept is relatively simple: managers should strengthen communication across all facets of the organization to increase the level of integration between each moving part.
Structural Implications
In practice, coordination involves a delicate balance between centralization and decentralization. However, maintaining coordination does not necessarily imply that decision-making processes are centralized or that actions are carried out without the support of employees. Put simply, it is important to ensure that there is a person or team in place that takes responsibility for general tasks.
If there is a lack of coordination, there is a risk that responsibility will become dispersed and tasks will be left unclaimed. Organizing accountability for every task helps to ensure that efforts are tangibly coordinated and provides structure to operational expectations. Structure is a central determinant of effective coordination across an organization as it enables communications, underlines responsibilities, and provides concrete authority in decision-making.
Chapter 8: Management
8.1: An Introduction to Management
8.1.1: Definition of Management
Management’s primary function is to get people to work together for the attainment of an organization’s goals and objectives.
Learning Objective
Recognize the difference between traditional, team, and servant management.
Key Points
- Management processes include planning, organizing, directing and controlling.
- An important aspect of management’s function is the allocation of finite resources.
- Resources can be human, financial, technological or natural.
- There are different management styles: Traditional, team, and servant.
Key Terms
- resource
-
Something that one uses to achieve an objective. An examples of a resource could be a raw material or an employee.
- system
-
A whole composed of relationships among the members.
Example
- A manager who is in charge of developing a new product, for example, must coordinate the efforts of his team (human resources) and make sure they get the tools needed to get the job done. If the goal is not met, it is the manager who is held responsible.
Management: An Overview
Management is the act of getting people together to accomplish desired goals and objectives using available resources efficiently and effectively. Since organizations can be viewed as systems, management can also be defined as human action, including design, to facilitate the production of useful outcomes from a system. This view opens the opportunity to manage oneself, a pre-requisite to attempting to manage others.
Definition of Management
The Management Process
Management functions include: Planning, organizing, staffing, leading or directing, and controlling an organization (a group of one or more people or entities) or effort for the purpose of accomplishing a goal.
There are several different resource types within management. Resourcing encompasses the deployment and manipulation of:
- Human resources
- Financial resources
- Technological resources
- Natural resources
Different type of Management Styles
There are different types of management styles, and the management process has changed over recent years. The addition of work teams and servant leadership has changed what is expected from managers, and what managers expect from their employees.
Traditional Management
There is a hierarchy of employees, low level management, mid-level management, and senior management. In traditional management systems, the manager sets out expectations for the employees who need to meet goals, but the manager receives the reward of meeting those goals.
Team Managment
In a team management arrangement the manager is a guiding hand to help the members of the team work together to solve problems but doesn’t dictate policy and the entire team receives the reward of meeting those goals.
Servant Management
With this approach, the manager helps supply resources the employees need to meet company goals. In servant leadership, the organization recognizes employees as experts in their field and work to help them work efficiently.
No matter which type of management style is used by an organization, the main objective of managers is to help employees reach company goals and maintain company standards and policies.
8.1.2: The Need for Management
Management is needed in order to facilitate a coordinated effort toward the accomplishment of an organization’s goals.
Learning Objective
Explain the purpose of management
Key Points
- Management in all business and organizational activities is the act of getting people together to accomplish desired goals and objectives using available resources efficiently and effectively.
- Good managers are needed to keep their organizations on track by ensuring that everything that’s being done is ethically geared toward providing what customers want.
- Good management is needed to inject motivation, creativity, discipline, and enthusiasm into areas in which they either don’t exist or they’re not necessarily wanted.
- People who work for managers must realize that it is their job to make their managers value them.
Key Term
- entrepreneurship
-
The art or science of innovation and risk-taking for profit in business.
Example
- IBM is still in business today due to the management skills of Louis V. Gerstner, Jr. When he arrived at IBM in April 1993, an active plan was in place to dis-aggregate the company. The prevailing wisdom of the time held that IBM’s core mainframe business was headed for obsolescence. The company’s own management was in the process of allowing its various divisions to rebrand and manage themselves — the so-called “Baby Blues. ” Gerstner reversed this plan, realizing from his previous experiences at RJR and American Express that there remained a vital need for a broad-based information technology integrator. His decision to keep the company together was the defining decision of his tenure, as this gave IBM the capabilities to deliver complete IT solutions to customers. Services could be sold as an add-on to companies that had already bought IBM computers, while barely profitable pieces of hardware were used to open the door to more profitable deals.
The Purpose of Management
The purpose of management is to serve customers. Yet, if one looks through most management books for a definition of management, 99.9 percent of the time the word customer will not be mentioned. This is astonishing because serving customers in order to obtain a profit is the crux of every business organization. Equally remiss is the fact that most definitions of management neatly filter out service in their descriptions of management.
Good managers constantly streamline their organizations toward making a sale. In other words, good managers are needed to keep their organizations on track by ensuring that everything that’s being done is ethically geared toward providing what customers want . In this regard, a good manager is responsible for reducing waste and ambiguity, keeping costs down, and motivating others to do the same. In the same vein, good managers regularly take educated risks and exercise good judgement (the basis of entrepreneurship). These risks include:
The Need for Management
Management is needed in order to coordinate the activities of a business and make sure all employees are working together toward the accomplishment of the organization’s goals.
- Trying new things;
- Successfully adjusting to constant change;
- Developing subordinates (good managers aren’t afraid of letting other people shine and, in fact, they encourage it);
- Improving their own skills.
The Need for Management
Management in all business and organizational activities is the act of getting people together to accomplish desired goals and objectives using available resources efficiently and effectively. Since organizations can be viewed as systems, management can also be defined as human action (including design) to facilitate the production of useful outcomes from a system. Therefore, management is needed in order to facilitate a coordinated effort toward the accomplishment of the organization’s goals.
Since most managers are responsible for more work than one person can normally perform, a good manager delegates and integrates his or her work (or the work of others). A manager does this by acting as a clear channel of communication within the business that he or she serves. Good management is needed to inject motivation, creativity, discipline, and enthusiasm into areas in which they either don’t exist or they’re not necessarily wanted.
The various functions of management are classified as:
- Planning
- Organizing
- Staffing
- Leading/Directing
- Controlling/Monitoring
- Motivation
Management is also responsible for the formation and implementation of business policies and strategies.
8.1.3: Trends in Management
Modern trends in management favor agile, iterative processes that focus on innovation, software development, and social impacts.
Learning Objective
Understand the evolving nature of management perspectives and strategies
Key Points
- Management is a constantly evolving field, with a wide variety of formal and informal approaches and perspectives.
- While new management perspectives are emerging everyday in manufacturing, technology, software, and social entrepreneurship, some of the most notable new perspectives are in software development.
- Scrum and agile management styles focus primarily on iteration and the capacity to build non-hierarchical work structures that empower growth and innovation without the rigidity of traditional management.
- Social entrepreneurship is a recent emergence in management, in which entrepreneurial management styles are being taken to the non-profit and community development sectors.
Key Terms
- iteration
-
The process of repeating a process in pursuit of incremental improvement.
- Scrum
-
A management philosophy predicated upon a feedback-driven iterative evolution of process.
Management is a rapidly evolving field. Even now startups all over the world are trying out new, innovative ways of looking at how to align their resources, how to make decisions, and what managerial approaches (or lack of managerial approaches) might yield the best culture for growth. It’s an intriguing time for management, and experimentation is constant.
When looking at new management approaches, it’s useful to consider the area in which these organizations operate. Software, non-profit, and entrepreneurship are all seeing substantial deviations from standard corporate management approaches.
Software
The two big words in software management over the past decade or two have been Scrum and Agile. Each of these approaches is a management philosophy equipped for rapid construction, iteration, and implementation.
Iterative Development
The agile management philosophy is an adaptation of iterative management. The concept is fairly simple. All production of new and innovative products and services will require constant refinement and improvement through iterative experimentation.
Scrum has been around since the late 1980s, but not particularly prevalent until the early 21st century. Scrum is defined as a feedback-driven empirical approach that highlights transparency, inspection, and adaptation. In terms of values, scrum discards traditional hierarchy and promotes commitment, courage, focus, openness, and respect in a team-oriented, objectives-driven environment. In terms of structure, you’ll find three groups:
Development Team – This will be your functional specialists, all collaborating on a daily basis to construct a facet (or perhaps the entirety) of a new piece of software. In scrum, this is quite often cross-functional.
Scrum Master – A facilitator, this individual focuses on removing impediments and acting as a buffer between the team and external distractions (usually integration with other teams). The scrum master will also assess progress holistically, and ensure alignment with the scrum mentality.
Product Owner (PO) – The PO focuses on being a voice of the customer and the representation of stakeholders in the team environment. Stakeholders, in this context, represent anyone with an interest in the output of that team (primarily organizational owners and other teams). The PO is not a manager, but instead a bridge between the team and the external environment they operate in.
Scrum Framework
This is an excellent illustration of how scrum mentality works. It is intrinsically a horizontal management style, meaning there is no particular managerial presence. The idea is the that the process itself is self-sustaining in pursuit of agreed upon objectives via an iterative cycle of production.
Social Entrepreneurship
Utilizing the ever-evolving perspectives of start up companies and entrepreneurs, non-profit organizations and other community-oriented groups have begun replacing traditional management approaches with a more grassroots perspective. A key metric to a social entrepreneur isn’t profit but community impact, usually in areas such as poverty alleviation, health care, education, and community development. This management style is small, focused, innovation-driven, and non-hierarchical.
8.2: Functions of Managers
8.2.1: Planning and Decisions
Planning is the most fundamental of the five management functions; without it, none of the other functions can be carried out effectively.
Learning Objective
Identify planning as the most fundamental role of management
Key Points
- Planning is a way to project expectations, anticipate problems, and guide decision making.
- The planning process includes the selection of objectives, programs, or projects, and the policies and procedures needed to accomplish them.
- Plans exist at the strategic level, the program level, and the project level.
- It is important to review plans as conditions and circumstances change over time.
Key Terms
- vision
-
An ideal or a goal toward which one aspires.
- mission
-
A set of tasks that fulfills a purpose or duty; an assignment set by an employer.
- tactic
-
A maneuver or action calculated to achieve some end.
Example
- Revlon’s vision and mission statement are examples of how companies focus their attention on a common purpose to help make decisions. Its mission is to emerge as the leader in cosmetic and personal care throughout the world. Its vision is to satisfy the needs of their customers with glamour and excitement that they provide at an affordable price.
What Does Planning Have to Do with Management?
Management operates through various functions, often classified as:
- Planning
- Organizing
- Staffing
- Leading/Directing
- Controlling/Monitoring
Of the five functions, planning is the most fundamental; it is the management form from which the other four stem. To wit:
- A manager is ready to organize and staff only after goals and plans to reach the goals are in place.
- Likewise, the leading function (that is, influencing the behavior of people in the organization) depends on the goals to be achieved.
- Finally, in the controlling function, the determination of whether or not goals are being accomplished and standards are being met is based on the planning function. The planning function provides the goals and standards that drive the controlling function.
Therefore, plans are the seeds from which the organization functions. Even so, the need for planning is often apparent only after the fact. In the short run, planning is easy to postpone. The postponement of planning especially plagues labor-oriented, hands-on managers.
The Master Plan
Planning takes time, but its importance should not be overlooked.
What is Planning?
Planning is concerned with the future impact of today’s decisions. It is a technique of projecting expectations, anticipating problems, and guiding decision making.
The major purpose of planning is to focus the attention of all involved on a common purpose and to inform the decisions that needs to be made along the way. A plan helps to, and serves as a way to, measure the efficiency and effectiveness of an organization in accomplishing its strategic plans.
Companies often use SWOT analysis when planning. SWOT is a structured planning method used to evaluate the Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities, and Threats involved in a project or in a business venture. Of these four items, it is hardest for companies to control threats.
Some important planning terms, from most general to most specific, are:
- Vision: Nonspecific directional and motivational guidance for the entire organization. Top managers normally provide a vision for the business. It is the most emotional of the four.
- Mission: An organization’s reason for being. It is concerned with scope of the business and what distinguishes this business from similar businesses. Mission reflects the culture and values of top management.
- Objectives: Ideas that refine the mission and address key issues within the organization such as market standing, innovation, productivity, physical and financial resources, profitability, management, and worker performance and efficiency. They are expected to be general, observable, challenging, and untimed.
- Goals: Specific statements of anticipated results that further define the organization’s objectives. They are expected to be SMART: Specific, Measurable, Attainable, Rewarding, and Timed.
- Tactics: Who, what, when, where and how activities will take place to accomplish a goal.
The Anatomy of Plans
Plans can be created for projects, programs, or strategies. During the planning process, decision makers deliberately select objectives, programs, or projects, as well as the policies and procedures for accomplishing them within organizations. The creation of plans inevitably involves decision-making, because the planner must select from among considered alternatives.
Plans can one of the following forms:
- Prospectus
- Blueprint
- Proclamation
- Budget
- Campaign
Strategy Level, Program Level, and Project Plans
At the strategy level, plans articulate longer-term objectives and executive management’s vision of how the organization intends to achieve those objectives. In the process of determining a company’s strategic plan, three basic questions are answered:
- Where are we now?
- Where do we want to be?
- How do we get there?
Program level plans translate strategic plans within functional areas to coordinate activity across functions and up and down the layers of an organization. A budget is an example of a financial plan that formalizes strategic plans in monetary terms.
On the other hand, project plans are more granular and lay out the specific tactics that need to be followed by members of the organization in order to execute the strategy.
The courses of action in a project plan include:
- A calendar of events
- The division of tasks
- The required resources and scheduling
- Expectations for quality and completion of the work
Can Plans Change?
Regardless of the level of planning, plans must be re-examined regularly in the light of changing conditions and circumstances.
8.2.2: Organizing Tasks
Managers must organize to see their plans to fruition, thus assigning tasks to individuals and arranging them in an framework that allows decision making.
Learning Objective
Explain the nature of organization
Key Points
- Organization deals with issues like human resources, finance, and the establishment of priorities.
- Some of the characteristics associated with organization include: specialization and division of work; goal achievement; the grouping of individuals into departments; differentiated functions; and continuity.
- Organization helps companies achieve goals, make the best use of resources; grow; and focus on the betterment of their employees.
- Organizational design is a process that helps managers organize and align the structure, process, rewards, metrics, and talent with the business’ strategy.
Key Terms
- organizing
-
the management function of forming patterns of relationships among workers, and making optimum use of the resources required to enable the successful carrying out of plans
- matrix
-
Matrix management is a type of organizational management in which people with similar skills are pooled for work assignments.
- diversification
-
A corporate strategy in which a company acquires or establishes a business other than that of its current product
- resource
-
Something that one uses to achieve an objective. An examples of a resource could be a raw material or an employee.
Example
- A company might decide that a functional structure is best for them. In such a structure, the engineering department would be staffed only with software engineers. If a company decides that a matrix structure is best for it. An example would be a company that produces two products, “product a” and “product b”. Using the matrix structure, this company would organize functions within the company as follows: “product a” sales department, “product a” customer service department, “product a” accounting, “product b” sales department, “product b” customer service department, “product b” accounting department.
Organizing: An Overview
Once a plan has been created, a manager can begin to organize.
Organizing, in a company’s point of view, is the management function that usually follows planning. It involves the assignment of tasks, the grouping of tasks into departments, and the assignment of authority and allocation of resources across the organization. During the organizing process, managers co-coordinate employees, resources, policies and procedures to facilitate the goals set out in the plan.
Organizing is highly complex and can involve:
- Human resources
- Finance
- The establishment of priorities
The synchronization of all of these elements is important if results are to be obtained.
The Nature of Organization
The following are the important characteristics of organization.
Specialization and Division of Work
- The entire philosophy of organization is centered on the concepts of specialization and division of work.
- The division of work is assigning responsibility for each organizational component to a specific individual or group thereof. It becomes specialization when the responsibility for a specific task lies with a designated expert in that field.
- The efforts of the operatives are coordinated to allow the process at hand to function correctly. Certain operatives occupy positions of management at various points in the process to ensure coordination.
Orientation Towards Goals
Every organization has its own purposes and objectives. Organizing is the function employed to achieve the overall goals of the organization. Organization harmonizes the individual goals of the employees with overall objectives of the firm.
Composition of individuals and groups
- Individuals form a group and the groups form an organization. Thus, organization is the composition of individual and groups.
- Individuals are grouped into departments and their work is coordinated and directed towards organizational goals.
Differentiated functions
- The organization divides the entire work and assigns the tasks to individuals in order to achieve the organizational objectives; each one has to perform a different task and tasks of one individual must be coordinated with the tasks of others. Collecting these tasks at the final stage is called integration.
Continuity
- An organization is a group of people with a defined relationship in which they work together to achieve the goals of that organization. This relationship does not come to end after completing each task. Organization is a never ending process.
Benefits of Organization
Together, these characteristics:
Help to achieve organizational goals
- Organization is employed to achieve the overall objectives of business firms. Organization focuses attention of individuals objectives towards overall objectives.
Optimise the use of resources
- To make optimum use of resources such as men, material, money, machine and method, it is necessary to design an organization properly.
- Work should be divided and right people should be given right jobs to reduce the wastage of resources in an organization.
Aid managers in performing other managerial functions
- Additional planning, organizing, staffing, directing and controlling cannot be implemented without proper organization.
Facilitate growth and
diversification
- A good organization structure is essential for expanding business activity. Organization structure determines the input resources needed for expansion of a business activity similarly organization is essential for product diversification such as establishing a new product line.
Facilitate human treatment of employees
- Organization has to operate for the betterment of employees and must not encourage monotony of work due to higher degree of specialization.
- These days, organization has adapted the modern concept of systems approach based on human relations and it discards the traditional productivity and specialization approach.
Organizational Design: Helping Managers Organize
Organization design can be defined narrowly, as the process of reshaping organization structure and roles, or it can more effectively be defined as the alignment of structure, process, rewards, metrics and talent with the strategy of the business.
Organizational Design
This is one type of matrix organizational structure.
Organization design may involve strategic decisions, but is properly viewed as a path to effective strategy execution. The design process nearly always entails making trade-offs of one set of structural benefits against another.
Many companies fall into the trap of making repeated changes in organization structure, with little benefit to the business. This often occurs because changes in structure are relatively easy to execute while creating the impression that something substantial is happening. This often leads to cynicism and confusion within the organization.
More powerful change happens when there are clear design objectives driven by a new business strategy or forces in the market that require a different approach to organizing resources.
8.2.3: Staffing Roles
The managerial responsibility of staffing is an involved process of hiring, training, compensating, positioning, and assessing team members to enable operational success.
Learning Objective
List the various functions involved in staffing for managers
Key Points
- Building a team can make or break an operational process, and the manager is tasked with the majority of the responsibility in accomplishing this.
- The complexity of the modern job market, and the huge volume of qualified talent, makes the hiring process both an incredible opportunity and a complex filtering process.
- Once an employee is selected, training them for success and determining optimal compensation is key to getting the employee satisfied and up to speed.
- On the more strategic side of staffing, managers must appraise performance and identify gaps in the overall team’s execution.
- Staffing is only one of many responsibilities managers must attend to, giving some idea of the scope of responsibilities often shouldered by modern management.
Key Term
- performance appraisals
-
Employees have set objectives and milestones, and performance can be assessed via comparing actual outcomes to desired outcomes.
Managerial Staffing Responsibilities
One of the core functions of a manager is building and maintaining a team, which is accomplished through staffing responsibilities. Simply put, staffing is the managerial process of hiring, positioning, and overseeing employees. Often enough, human resources are both the most expensive and the most valuable assets a business has. Having internal talent can be a core competitive advantage, and bringing in the right people and positioning them for success is a core managerial responsibility.
Managers perform job analyses for each of the roles they intend to manage. This analysis includes hiring, training, compensation, performance appraisals, identification of gaps, and various compliance considerations.
Hiring
Finding talent is an enormous challenge and opportunity in today’s economy. With the diversity of skill sets, the high volume of applicants, and the growing complexity of organizational needs, managers are busier than ever when it comes to the hiring process. Many job postings will receive hundreds or even thousands of applicants, and filtering through this large applicant pool can be expedited by software solutions and the hiring of third parties to manage the hiring process.
Once a few key candidates are selected, there are a variety of important considerations prior to hiring. Managers often conduct one-on-one interviews, team interviews, personality tests, skill assessments, reference checks, and a variety of other alignment tests to ensure fit. Hiring is an expensive process, with expensive repercussions for mistakes. It is a core managerial function with substantial consequences, both positive and negative.
Training
Once a new employee is selected, it can take anywhere from a week to 6 months to truly get them up to speed. Every job is different, and every job has different training requisites. Investing both time and capital in preparing employees for success can create significant increases in value and return on investment, as well as empowering employees to grow and improve. Hiring employees without proper on-boarding can result in costly mistakes, role uncertainty, and ultimately job dissatisfaction.
Compensation
Compensation as a managerial responsibility isn’t just about salary (though certainly that’s an important component). Managers must understand what their employees need, and help to provide it via benefits, bonuses, training, and opportunities for professional growth. From health care to helping with a university degree, organizations have the opportunity to create employee loyalty as well as develop talent via strong staffing skills on behalf of management.
Performance Appraisals
Whether management does it on an ongoing basis, an annual basis, or a quarterly basis, most managers must consider the performance of their employees at one point or another. This can be done formally (and often is at larger firms) or informally, and must include both past performance and the expectations set at the beginning of the appraisal period. The employee must know before hand what it is they will be assessed on, and what the objectives and expectations are. It is also relatively common to attach incentives to performance appraisals, to provide value when value is provided.
Identifying Gaps
From a more strategic frame, managers must consider the overall process and objectives their work group is aiming to accomplish alongside what resources and skills must be present to do so. That means identifying where there are functional or skill gaps in a given team, and solving that problem. There are more solutions than just hiring full-time employees too. Managers may notice a skill gap that only requires 10 hours per week to fill. In this case, hiring a contractor on an hourly basis is lower risk and lower cost than hiring a new employee.
Compliance
Finally, managers must comply with a variety of legal aspects in collaboration with the HR department. Employee rights, unions, and other legal requirements from the governing bodies must be built into contracts and operations.
Conclusion
When combining all of these responsibilities, you have one facet of a manager’s overall responsibilities. This provides some scope to not only how much is involved in staffing, but how much can be involved in the role of management in general. Managers must also plan, organize, direct, and control.
Management Process
Other managerial functions are highlighted in this diagram, in addition to the tasks involved in staffing.
8.2.4: Leading Teams
Certain leadership competencies help people become effective leaders; successful team leaders follow planning and implementation processes.
Learning Objective
Evaluate effective team leadership
Key Points
- Team leaders provide guidance, instruction, direction, and leadership to their respective teams. They must build teams and ensure that they work well together.
- A team leader reports to a project manager who oversees several teams.
- Effective team leaders possess six leadership competencies that translate to the success of their teams.
- Team leaders must be able to balance being a member of the team and a leader who manages the progress of the team.
Key Terms
- leading
-
the management function of determining what must be done in a situation and getting others to do it
- goal
-
a result that one is attempting to achieve
- leadership
-
The capacity of someone to lead.
- project manager
-
one who manages projects.
Example
- Here are examples of what employees view as good and bad team leaders. The members of Bob’s team think that he is a great team leader. All of them are impressed by his knowledge. But it is not his knowledge alone that makes him a good team leader. He also has the ability to “facilitate” discussion without imposing their own opinions. During the discussions je engages his team members with thought provoking “what if” scenarios. In the end, he is able to take multiple ideas and combine them into one concise statement reflective of all input. In contrast, John frustrates his team members. He sits in meetings and simply takes notes without doing anything to inspire creative thinking. He is only wants to make sure that the end results express his ideas. His team members feel dejected and useless.
Leading Teams
The Team Leader: an Overview
A team leader or team lead is someone (or in certain cases there may be multiple team leaders) who provides guidance, instruction, direction, and leadership to a group of other individuals (the team) for the purpose of achieving a key result or group of aligned results.
There are many elements that create, and are essential to be an effective leader who has the power to motivate a team and drive success. There is often a balancing act that the leader must manage between being a leader and a member while ensuring the goal is clear and obtainable.
A good team leader listens constructively to the membership and to the customer(s) of the results that the team is charged with delivering.
The Team Leader: Reporting Structure
The team lead reports to a project manager (overseeing several teams). The team leader monitors the quantitative and qualitative result that is to be achieved. The leader works with the team membership.
The team membership may not directly report or answer to the team leader (who is very often a senior member of the organization but may or may not be a manager), but would be expected to provide support to the team leader and other team members in achieving the team’s goals.
The Team Leader: Responsibilities
The responsibilities of a team lead vary greatly between organizations, but usually include some responsibility for team building and ensuring teamwork.
The term is used to emphasize the cooperative nature of a team, in contrast to a typical command structure, where the head of a team would be its commander.
The Team Leader: Leadership Competencies
There are six leadership competencies that are the building blocks to becoming an effective leader:
- Focus on the goal,
- Ensure a collaborative climate,
- Build confidence,
- Demonstrate sufficient technical know-how,
- Set priorities,
- Manage performance as described When Teams Work Best by LaFasto and Larson.
Does an effective team leader both merge into the group as a member of the team and also maintain a leadership role? And if so, how?
A leader is the key player in the game that is comprised of challenge and risk. Therefore, an effective team leader must be both a component to the team and also a leader to manage the team’s progress.
The leader cannot possibly be competent in every area without being engaged in the team. The leader must know each member and the team as a whole in order to bring them all together and create a process that is open, productive, and promotes confidence.
An effective leader uses each member’s contributions and energy to focus on a common goal.
Essentially, a leader’s job is to add importance to the team’s effort, which cannot be done without being a member.
It is very common for a team leader to be in the dark about their team and the everyday operations. This is a consequence of a leader’s disengagement and lack of membership with the team.
Moreover, the team’s contention usually gives birth at this point and lends itself to decreased productivity and satisfaction. An effective leader needs to be able to pinpoint problems and praise excellence within the group, which cannot be done from the sidelines.
The leader is a part of the overall process; therefore, a relationship naturally exists. However, it is up to the leader whether to nurture that relationship or minimize its importance.
The team leader must understand the team’s vision and clearly define the goal to guarantee success and member loyalty. One cannot lead a team without knowing the purpose and goal of the team. The team leader creates a collaborative climate to ensure that the best thinking and ideas of the team are represented. Again, a wholesome climate cannot be established without knowing the members and becoming engaged in the team.
The foundation of a highly motivated and successful team is the members’ understanding and relevance of their goal. An effective leader’s trust in the team goal is vital to the member’s commitment.
The members become isolated and discouraged when the leader’s investment is minimal. Team members want the opportunity to prove their value and worth to the goal and the leader. The leader must be involved and a member of the team to effectively influence the members’ productivity and function in the grand scheme of things.
Leading Teams
Team Leadership
8.2.5: Knowledge Management
Organizations use knowledge management to identify, create, represent, distribute, and enable strategy and process.
Learning Objective
Explain the importance and recent developments in Knowledge Management (KM)
Key Points
- Knowledge management typically focuses on specific organizational objectives.
- Criteria have been developed that help organizations measure the benefits they receive from knowledge management.
- Technology plays a large role in the development of knowledge management tools.
- Knowledge management efforts tend to overlap those of organizational learning and are, in fact, seen as an enabler of organizational learning.
Key Terms
- management development
-
the process by which company employees responsible for overseeing departments or the whole company learn and improve their skills not only to benefit themselves but also their employing organizations
- artificial intelligence
-
The branch of computer science dealing with the reproduction or mimicking of human-level intelligence, self-awareness, knowledge, conscience, thought in computer programs.
- groupware
-
software designed to be used collaboratively by multiple users on a network
- organizational learning
-
In Organizational development (OD), learning is a characteristic of an adaptive organization, i.e., an organization that is able to sense changes in signals from its environment (both internal and external) and adapt accordingly.
Example
- Here are examples of the knowledge management tools various companies use: At Xerox and World Bank, groups meet regularly to share knowledge and learn from each other. Accenture and Ernst & Young use databases of codified knowledge assets (known as knowledge repositories). Hewlett-Packard and Microsoft use expertise directories.
Knowledge Management
Knowledge management (KM) comprises a range of strategies and practices used in an organization to identify, create, represent, distribute, and enable the adoption of insights and experiences. Such insights and experiences comprise of knowledge, either embodied in individuals or embedded in organizations, such as processes or practices. Once an organization has the framework in place that knowledge management provides, it can design its strategy, structure and processes in such a way that it uses what it knows to. This, in turn, creates value for its customers and the community as a whole.
Organizational Functions of Knowledge Management and Their Benefit
Knowledge management efforts typically focus on organizational objectives such as:
- Improved performance
- Competitive advantage
- Innovation
- The sharing of lessons learned
- Integration
- Continuous improvement of the organization
As a result, companies benefit as they are able to:
- Develop new products and services that add value to their customers (innovation, competitive advantage)
- Improve the value of their existing products (the sharing of lessons learned, improved performance, competitive advantage)
- Control costs and promote reuse (integration, continuous improvement of the organization, the sharing of lessons learned);
- Respond to environmental changes faster and experience less uncertainty (the sharing of lessons learned which can provide general knowledge about the environment)
How does an Organization Know it is Receiving these Benefits?
Here are a few of the criteria for measuring the efficacy of a knowledge management strategy:
- How long it takes to respond: This metric includes the speed in which the organization responds to customer needs, requests, or problems; brings a new product or service to market; and enters new markets.
- How much knowledge is reused: This metric measures how often employees access and use knowledge assets and avoid “re-inventing the wheel”.
- How much is made from new products: This metric loos at the revenue from products that have been developed recently or are a certain number of years old.
- How satisfied and empowered employees are and feel: This metric measure the ability of the organization to hire talented staff, the ability of the organization to keep talented staff, and the amount of influence these knowledgeable staff members have.
Facets of Knowledge Management
Early KM technologies included online corporate yellow pages as expertise locators and document management systems. Combined with the early development of collaborative technologies (in particular Lotus Notes), KM technologies expanded in the mid-1990s. Subsequent KM efforts leveraged semantic technologies for search and retrieval and the development of e-learning tools for communities of practices (Capozzi 2007). Knowledge management systems can thus be categorized as falling into one or more of the following groups:
- Groupware
- Document management systems
- Expert systems
- Semantic networks
- Relational and object oriented databases
- Simulation tools
- Artificial intelligence (Gupta & Sharma 2004)
More recently, the development of social computing tools (such as bookmarks, blogs, and wikis) have allowed more unstructured, self-governing or ecosystem approaches to the transfer, capture and creation of knowledge, including the development of new forms of communities, networks.
Software tools in knowledge management are a collection of technologies and are not necessarily acquired as a single software solution. Furthermore, these knowledge management software tools have the advantage of using the organization’s existing information technology infrastructure.
Organizations and business decision makers spend a great deal of resources and make significant investments in the latest technology, systems and infrastructure to support knowledge management. It is imperative that these investments are validated properly, made wisely, and that the most appropriate technologies and software tools are selected or combined to facilitate knowledge management.
Knowledge Management in Education and in Corporations
An established discipline since 1991 (see Nonaka 1991), KM includes courses taught in the fields of business administration, information systems, management, and library and information sciences (Alavi & Leidner 1999). More recently, other fields have started contributing to KM research, such as information and media, computer science, public health, and public policy. Many large companies and non-profit organizations have resources dedicated to internal KM efforts, often as a part of their business strategy, information technology, or human resource management departments (Addicott, McGivern & Ferlie 2006). Several consulting companies also exist that provide strategy and advice regarding KM to these organizations.
Knowledge Management
The Knowledge Spiral
8.2.6: Controlling Activities
Controlling is a core managerial function defined by observing and optimizing operational processes.
Learning Objective
Understand the managerial process of control
Key Points
- Organizations are essentially a combination of processes, each of which benefits from managerial control.
- Control is simply the activity of observing a given organizational process, measuring the performance compared to a previously established metric, and improving it where possible.
- At the upper-managerial level, control revolves around setting strategic objectives in the short and long term, as well as measuring success.
Key Term
- iterate
-
Repeating processes in order to identify and incorporate improvements.
Controlling
One facet of management is called controlling, and it is an important piece of the management puzzle. Control is observing current (and projecting future) processes and operational systems in order to avoid mistakes, identify improvements, ensure objectives are accomplished, and consider the big picture. Organizations are made up of operational systems, each of which can be iterated upon and optimized for improved performance.
The Four Elements of Control
The process of control can usually be divided into the following four components:
- The process to be controlled – This is simply the aspect (or entirety) of a process being measured. For example, let’s say getting customers to a website via online ads.
- The sensor – The sensor is the component that measures the condition being controlled. In this case, Google analytics will provide the information of how many individuals see the ad and how many come to the website as a result.
- The comparator – The comparator is the expectation the actual results will be compared to. In our example, let’s say we’re looking for 5% of people who see the ad to come to the website.
- The activator – The activator is what will intervene to improve the process, if necessary. Let’s say overall only 2% of people clicked the ad and came to the website. The activator will be the tactical changes management will take to get the current operational efficiency improved to the desired level.
Production Control
This chart demonstrates the control process chronologically over time, and the way in which management can actively impact the execution of a given operation.
Strategic Control
The above example relates primarily to an operational process. Optimizing operational processes is often done at the mid-managerial level. At the upper managerial level, strategic control is a similar process in a broader context. Strategic control pertains to four elements as well:
- Mission statements/vision statements/operational plans – the identification and communication of the strategic outcomes desired by the organization
- Short and long-term objectives – the description of the strategic activities to be carried out (attached to specific managed resources) in pursuit of the above statements
- Measurement and Tracking – the creation and implementation of a reporting system to track the progress and success of the objectives identified
- Enabling Iteration – Once the operations are in place, the organization will begin pursuing the noted objectives. At this point, the organization needs systems to change and evolve the process for improvement.
Management Control Systems
This chart demonstrates the relationship between various work groups in the controlling process.
8.2.7: Customer Experience Management
Customer experience management focuses the operations and processes of a business around the need of the individual customer.
Learning Objective
Explain the difference between Customer Experience Management (CEM) and Customer Relationship Management (CRM)
Key Points
- The goal of customer experience management (CEM) is to move customers from satisfied to loyal and then from loyal to advocates.
- Customer experience solutions optimize the end-to-end customer experience.
- Customer experience management differs from customer relationship management is that the former focuses on customer need and desire.
Key Terms
- business model
-
The particular way in which a business organization ensures that it generates income, one that includes the choice of offerings, strategies, infrastructure, organizational structures, trading practices, and operational processes and policies.
- customer relationship management
-
Customer relationship management (CRM) is a widely implemented model for managing a company’s interactions with customers, clients, and sales prospects. It involves using technology to organize, automate, and synchronize business processes—principally sales activities, but also those for marketing, customer service, and technical support.
Example
- The customer experience has emerged as the single most important aspect in achieving success for companies across all industries (Peppers & Rogers, 2005). For example, Starbucks spent less than $10MM on advertising from 1987 to 1998, yet added over 2,000 new stores to accommodate growing sales. Starbucks’ popularity is based on the experience that drove its customers to highly recommend their store to friends and family.
What Is Customer Experience Management (CEM)?
Customer experience management (CEM) is a strategy that focuses the operations and processes of a business around the needs of the individual customer. Companies are focusing on the importance of the experience. Jeananne Rae says that companies are realizing that “building great consumer experiences is a complex enterprise, involving strategy, integration of technology, orchestrating business models, brand management and CEO commitment.”
According to Bernd Schmitt, “the term ‘customer experience management’ represents the discipline, methodology and/or process used to comprehensively manage a customer’s cross-channel exposure, interaction and transaction with a company, product, brand or service.”
The goal of customer experience management is to move customers from satisfied to loyal and then from loyal to advocate.
In-N-Out Burger
University Tower in Irvine, next to the University of California. This office building is home to the corporate headquarters of In-N-Out Burger. The In-N-Out restaurant chain has developed a highly loyal customer base and has been rated as one of the top fast food restaurants in several customer satisfaction surveys.
Customer experience solutions provide strategies, process models, and information technology to design, manage, and optimize the end-to-end customer experience process.
Why Isn’t Customer Relationship Management Enough?
Traditionally, managing the customer relationship has been the domain of customer relationship management (CRM). However, CRM strategies and solutions are designed to focus on product, price, and enterprise process, with minimal or no focus on customer need and desire.
The result is a sharp mismatch between the organization’s approach to customer expectations and what customers actually want, resulting in the failure of many CRM implementations.
Where CRM is enterprise-focused and designed to manage customers for maximum efficiency, CEM is a strategy that focuses the operations and processes of a business around the needs of the individual customer.
Companies are focusing on the importance of the experience and, as Jeananne Rae notes, realizing that “building great consumer experiences is a complex enterprise, involving strategy, integration of technology, orchestrating business models, brand management and CEO commitment” (2006).
8.3: Types of Management
8.3.1: Management Levels: A Hierarchical View
An organization can have many different managers, across many different titles, authority levels, and levels of the management hierarchy.
Learning Objective
Recognize the difference between low-level, middle-level and top-level management
Key Points
- The three levels of management typically found in an organization are low-level management, middle-level management, and top-level management.
- Top-level managers are responsible for controlling and overseeing the entire organization.
- Middle-level managers are responsible for executing organizational plans which comply with the company’s policies. These managers act at an intermediary between top-level management and low-level management.
- Low-level managers focus on controlling and directing. They serve as role models for the employees they supervise.
Key Terms
- middle management
-
company employees that are accountable for controlling and overseeing a department
- top management
-
company employees responsible for controlling and overseeing the entire organization
- board of directors
-
A group of people, elected by stockholders, to establish corporate policies, and make management decisions.
- manager
-
A person whose job is to manage something, such as a business, a restaurant, or a sports team.
- hierarchy
-
Any group of objects ranked so that every one but the topmost is subordinate to a specified one above it.
Example
- Examples of top-level managers include a company’s board of directors, president, vice-president and CEO; examples of middle-level managers include general managers, branch managers, and department managers; examples of low-level managers include supervisors, section leads, and foremen.
Management Levels: An Overview
Most organizations have three management levels:
- Low-level managers;
- Middle-level managers; and
- Top-level managers.
These managers are classified in a hierarchy of authority, and perform different tasks. In many organizations, the number of managers in every level resembles a pyramid.
Below, you’ll find the specifications of each level’s different responsibilities and their likely job titles.
Top-level managers
The board of directors, president, vice-president, and CEO are all examples of top-level managers.
These managers are responsible for controlling and overseeing the entire organization. They develop goals, strategic plans, company policies, and make decisions on the direction of the business.
In addition, top-level managers play a significant role in the mobilization of outside resources.
Top-level managers are accountable to the shareholders and general public.
Middle-level managers
General managers, branch managers, and department managers are all examples of middle-level managers. They are accountable to the top management for their department’s function.
Middle-level managers devote more time to organizational and directional functions than top-level managers. Their roles can be emphasized as:
- Executing organizational plans in conformance with the company’s policies and the objectives of the top management;
- Defining and discussing information and policies from top management to lower management; and most importantly
- Inspiring and providing guidance to low-level managers towards better performance.
Some of their functions are as follows:
- Designing and implementing effective group and intergroup work and information systems;
- Defining and monitoring group-level performance indicators;
- Diagnosing and resolving problems within and among work groups;
- Designing and implementing reward systems supporting cooperative behavior.
Low-level managers
Supervisors, section leads, and foremen are examples of low-level management titles. These managers focus on controlling and directing.
Low-level managers usually have the responsibility of:
- Assigning employees tasks;
- Guiding and supervising employees on day-to-day activities;
- Ensuring the quality and quantity of production;
- Making recommendations and suggestions; and
- Upchanneling employee problems.
Also referred to as first-level managers, low-level managers are role models for employees. These managers provide:
- Basic supervision;
- Motivation;
- Career planning;
- Performance feedback; and
- Staff supervision.
Management Levels
Hierarchical view of management in organizations
8.3.2: Management Areas: A Functional View
Organizational management is often approached by identifying business functions and assigning leadership to those functions.
Learning Objective
Understand management areas and why they are often viewed from a functional perspective
Key Points
- Organizations are essentially a group of different functions, aligned to create a specific product or service. Assigning managers to different functional areas is a popular approach to business management.
- Viewing organizational management from this perspective is useful in ensuring each function has a specialist in place with the knowledge and expertise to make sound decisions.
- Some common management areas include marketing, finance, IT, sales, human resources, and legal.
- Taking a look at an organizational chart is useful in understanding how management areas are commonly identified from a functional view.
Key Terms
- organizational chart
-
A chart outlining the structure of an organization and the way in which the different roles, functions, and departments interact with one another.
- best practices
-
The specific professional activities that produce near optimal results.
Understanding Functional Management Areas
Businesses are comprised of a variety of different tasks which, when coordinated properly, create value through producing products and/or services. Each of these different tasks, or functions, require management and alignment. One approach to management is assigning leadership roles with authority and accountability over these different tasks, or management areas.
This view creates management positions with authority over a given functional department. These management areas can span a wide variety of skills and functions, but the most recognizable and common include marketing, finance, human resources, operations, software development, and IT.
This functional view emphasizes managers who are specialists in their fields who are also capable of leading teams, balancing budgets, and thinking tactically (and sometimes strategically, at the upper levels).
The Role of a Functional Management
Functional management is focused on the execution of a specific organizational task within functional areas, through organizing and leading an organization’s talent in a given field. Functional managers have a high level of technical knowledge and skills relative to the area they manage and focus their efforts on achieving best practices.
Let’s quickly explore an example of a functional manager to clarify the role and responsibilities. A human resources manager in an organization would be expected to oversee all operations within the scope of human resources. At a medium or larger sized organization, this could include managing specialists in payroll, recruitment, talent development, legal, and a variety of other specializations within the scope of a human resources team.
The manager shouldn’t execute each specific task, but instead understand what is required to complete these tasks. The manager must have the broad technical knowledge required to ensure each individual within that functional team has the skills, resources, and alignment necessary to effectively carry out these functions.
Illustrating Functional Management
A simple way to understand how this all plays out in an organization is a simple organizational chart (org chart, as they are commonly referred to). By taking a look at how the departments are divided, it becomes fairly easy to assume what types of management areas exist from a functional view. As a result, it’s fairly common to receive an org chart when you start a job (particularly at larger companies), to understand who reports to whom, and regarding what tasks.
Organizational Chart
This is a simple example of an organizational chart, in this case at an advertising agency. By looking at each functional area, and considering how it relates to broader functional areas, it becomes clear how management areas are divided from a functional perspective.
8.4: Decision Making
8.4.1: Observation: Framing the Problem
A frame in social theory consists of a schema of interpretation that individuals rely on to understand and respond to events.
Learning Objective
Apply the framing problem to decision making
Key Points
- People do not look at an event and then “apply” a frame to it; people constantly project into the world around them the interpretive frames that allow them to make sense of it.
- The basis of framing is the selective influence of information on a person’s decision- making process based on internal heuristics.
- Framing can affect the outcome (i.e., the choices one makes) of choice problems, to the extent that several of the classic axioms of rational choice do not hold. This led to the development of the prospect theory as an alternative to rational choice theory.
- Depending on how the information is presented, framing can lead to entirely rational individuals making completely different decisions based on the way information is presented. Numerous experiments have shown this to be the case.
- Generally, people prefer absolute certainty in situations where information is positively framed, while they prefer risk-seeking behavior when decisions are framed in negative terms.
Key Terms
- Rational choice theory
-
Rational choice theory, also known as choice theory or rational action theory, is a framework for understanding and often formally modelling social and economic behavior. Rationality, interpreted as “wanting more rather than less of a good,” is widely used as an assumption of the behavior of individuals in microeconomic models and analysis and appears in almost all economics textbook treatments of human decision making.
- schema
-
An outline or image universally applicable to a general conception, under which it is likely to be presented to the mind.
- heuristics
-
A mental shortcut that may not always yield desired results.
Example
- Tversky and Kahneman’s (1981) Asian disease experiment demonstrated the problem with framing. Two groups of subjects were given a fictional scenario with the same information, presented in different ways. An unusual disease from Asia was going to hit the United States and kill 600 people. Group A were given two alternatives: either save 200 people for certain; or save 600 with a 1/3 probably, with a 2/3 chance that all will die. Group B was given the following choices: 400 die for certain; or nobody dies with a 1/3 probability, and a 2/3 chance and all die. Group A overwhelmingly selected the first option, while Group B chose the latter option in their case. This experiment demonstrated the huge effect that framing can have on otherwise rational decision making.
A frame in social theory consists of a schema of interpretation that individuals rely on to understand and respond to events. In other words, people build a series of mental filters through biological and cultural influences and use those filters to understand the world. Their choices are influenced by their frames.
Explanation
When one seeks to explain an event, the understanding often depends on the individual’s frame. If a friend rapidly closes and opens an eye, we will respond very differently depending on whether we attribute this to a purely “physical” frame (s/he blinked) or to a social frame (s/he winked).
Though the former might result from a speck of dust (resulting in an involuntary and not particularly meaningful reaction), the latter would imply a voluntary and meaningful action (e.g., to convey humor to an accomplice).
People do not look at an event and then “apply” a frame to it; people constantly project into the world around them the interpretive frames that allow them to make sense of it. People only shift frames when incongruity calls for a frame shift. In other words, people only become aware of the frames that they already use when something forces them to replace one frame with another.
Framing is so effective because it is a heuristic, or a mental shortcut that may not always yield desired results and is seen as a “rule of thumb.” According to Susan T. Fiske and Shelley E. Taylor, human beings are by nature “cognitive misers,” meaning they prefer to do as little thinking as possible. Frames provide people a quick and easy way to process information. Hence, people will use the previously mentioned mental filters (a series of which is called a “schema”) to make sense of incoming messages. This gives the sender and framer of the information enormous power to use these schemas to influence how the receivers will interpret the message.
The Brain’s Heuristics for Emotions
Emotions appear to aid the decision-making process.
The Framing of Problems
Amos Tversky and Daniel Kahneman have shown that framing can affect the outcome (i.e., the choices one makes) of choice problems, to the extent that several of the classic axioms of rational choice do not hold. This led to the development of the prospect theory as an alternative to rational choice theory.
The context or framing of problems adopted by decision makers results in part from extrinsic manipulation of the decision options offered, as well as from forces intrinsic to decision makers (e.g., their norms, habits, and unique temperament).
Experimental Demonstration
Tversky and Kahneman (1981) demonstrated systematic reversals of preference when the same problem is presented in different ways, for example, in the Asian disease problem. Participants were asked to “imagine that the U.S. is preparing for the outbreak of an unusual Asian disease, which is expected to kill 600 people. Two alternative programs to combat the disease have been proposed. Assume the exact scientific estimate of the consequences of the programs are as follows. “
The first group of participants was presented with a choice between programs: In a group of 600 people, Program A: “200 people will be saved;” Program B: “there is a one-thirds probability that 600 people will be saved, and a two-thirds probability that no people will be saved. ” Of participants, 72% preferred program A (the remainder, 28%, opted for program B).
The second group of participants was presented with the choice between the following: In a group of 600 people, Program C: “400 people will die” Program D: “there is a one-third probability that nobody will die, and a two-thirds probability that 600 people will die”
In this decision frame, 78% preferred program D, with the remaining 22% opting for program C.
Programs A and C are identical, as are programs B and D. The change in the decision frame between the two groups of participants produced a preference reversal: When the programs were presented in terms of lives saved, the participants preferred the secure program, A (= C). When the programs were presented in terms of expected deaths, participants chose the gamble D (= B).
Absolute and Relative Influences
Framing effects arise because one can frequently frame a decision using multiple scenarios, wherein one may express benefits either as a relative risk reduction (RRR), or as absolute risk reduction (ARR). Extrinsic control over the cognitive distinctions (between risk tolerance and reward anticipation), adopted by decision makers, can occur through altering the presentation of relative risks and absolute benefits.
People generally prefer the absolute certainty inherent in a positive framing-effect, which offers an assurance of gains. When decision options appear framed as a likely gain, risk-averse choices predominate.
A shift toward risk-seeking behavior occurs when a decision maker frames decisions in negative terms or adopts a negative framing effect.
8.4.2: Developing Alternate Plans of Action
It is important to develop and consider alternatives for dealing with any given situation.
Learning Objective
Explain the benefits of decision planning
Key Points
- After defining a problem, decision makers must take steps to identify alternative actions to respond to it.
- Developing alternatives requires decision makers to gather data, interpret that data, and brainstorm to come up with multiple solutions that can be compared and ranked.
- Creative thinking, and thinking out of the box, are key to coming up with a full range of alternatives.
Key Term
- brainstorming
-
A method of problem solving in which members of a group contribute ideas spontaneously.
Example
- If a company has an opportunity to enter a new geographical market, managers must choose the best way to do so. Should they enter in a licensing agreement? Or make a franchise agreement with a local franchisee? Or enter the market directly by acquiring existing operations within that target market? Managers must collect data on the market, analyze this data, and consider the advantages and disadvantages of each possible alternative.
Decision Planning
Making a decision without planning is fairly common, but does not often end well. Planning allows for decisions to be made comfortably and in a smart way. Planning also makes decision making much simpler . Any decision will get four benefits out of planning:
Flowchart Diagram
Simplistic decision diagram of when to create Wikipedia articles
- Planning establishes independent goals. It is a conscious and directed series of choices.
- Planning provides a standard of measurement. It is a measurement of whether you are going toward or further away from your goal.
- Planning converts values to action. You think twice about the plan and decide what will help advance your plan best.
- Planning allows for limited resources to be committed in an orderly way. Always govern the use of what is limited to you (e.g., money, time, and so on).
Developing Alternatives
The need to make a decision arises because there are many available alternatives. Hence, the next step after defining the main problem would be to identify the alternatives available for that particular situation.
Gathering data helps decision makers have actual evidence that will aid them in coming up with a solution. Brainstorming helps them develop alternatives. Coming up with more than one solution enables decision makers to see which one can actually work.
While brainstorming, individuals do not have to restrict themselves to thinking about the very obvious options. Instead, they can use their creative skills and come up with alternatives that may look a little irrelevant. This is important because sometimes solutions can come from these out-of-the-box ideas.
8.4.3: Analyzing the Options
Evaluating alternatives is an important and difficult step of the decision-making process.
Learning Objective
Analyze the misleading effects of evaluating alternatives
Key Points
- The normative approach to analyzing decision-making assumes rational decision-makers with well-defined preferences. On the other hand, the descriptive approach is based on empirical observations and experiments. Finally, the prescriptive enterprise develops methods to improve decision making.
- Whichever approach is taken, there is always the problem that misleading effects can lead to a bad decision. These effects can take the form of heuristics, which help in some situations and not in others.
- Decision making often includes the need to assign a reason to justify the decision.
- – Subjective models – people create misleading and incorrect decision making models
- – Focusing illusion – people neglect important outcomes because they are focused on other, more obvious aspects
- – Selective search for evidence – focusing on facts that support certain conclusions
- – Premature termination of search for evidence
- – Selective perception – screening out of information not thought to be important
- – Wishful thinking – our desire to see things in a positive light may distort our perception
- – Recency – placing more emphasis on more recent events
- Repetition bias – believing that which we hear most often
- – Group think – pressure to conform to the opinions of a group
- – Source credibility bias
- – Anchoring – accepting initial information as factual and basing subsequent opinions around that
- – Over confidence
- – Recallability trap – a distorted ability to recall life events objectively
- – Outguessing randomness trap – imagination of patterns where none exist
Key Term
- Prescriptive
-
Prescriptive analytics automatically synthesizes big data, mathematical sciences, business rules, and machine learning to make predictions and then suggest decision options to take advantage of the predictions.
Example
- Evaluating alternatives is an important and difficult step of the decision-making process, and involves discerning the advantages and disadvantages of each option, and ultimately ranking them.
Evaluating the alternatives can be said to be one of the most important stages of the decision-making process . This is the stage where you have to analyze each alternative that you have come up with. You have to find out the advantages and disadvantages of each option. This can be done with the research you have done on that particular alternative. At this stage, you can also filter out the options that you think are impossible or do not serve your purpose. Rating each option with a numerical digit would also help in the filtration process.
Money and Decision Making
Relation between (monetary) gains and losses and their subjective value.
Misleading Effects
But even respecting the considerations above, there still might be problems in making the “right” decision because of different misleading effects, which mainly arise because of the constraints of inductive reasoning. This generally means that our model of a situation or problem might not be ideal to solve it in an optimal way. Biases can creep into our decision-making processes. Many different people have made a decision about the same question (e.g., “Should I have a doctor look at this troubling breast cancer symptom I’ve discovered? ” “Why did I ignore the evidence that the project was going over budget? “) and then craft potential cognitive interventions aimed at improving decision-making outcomes.
At every step of decision making, misperceptions based on incorrect input, biases, lack of information, and other traps can corrupt the choices we make. We are particularly vulnerable to traps involving uncertainty because most of us are not good at judging chances. Complex and important decisions are the most prone to distortion because they tend to have many assumptions and estimates, as well as influence by misaligned parties.
Research has shown that over time we develop unconscious routines to cope with the inherent intricacy in most decision making. These thinking patterns, known as heuristics, can help us in many situations. We are nimble at judging distance, time, weight, and volume. For example, in judging distance our minds rely on a heuristic that associate clearness with closeness. The better the visibility of an object, the closer it must be.
But some heuristics can muddle our thinking with biases and irrational preferences. The danger with these traps is that they are invisible to most of us.
Justification in Decision Making
Decision making often includes the need to assign a reason to justify the decision. This factor is illustrated by an experiment by A. Tversky and E. Shafir in 1992. For this experiment, a very attractive vacation package was offered to a group of students who had just passed an exam. It was also offered to another group of students who had just failed the exam and had the chance to rewrite it over their vacation. All students had the option to buy the ticket straight away, to stay at home, or to pay and keep the option open until they would get their results. Even though the actual exam result did not influence the decision, it was required in order to provide a rationale.
8.4.4: Putting the Plan to Work
After analyzing the options, the next step is the implementation of a solution.
Learning Objective
Outline the key steps in the decision making process
Key Points
- Implementation is a difficult and important step, as decisions made need to be carried out.
- It is important that all the people involved in implementation know about the implications.
- The decisive actions are taken, and additional actions are taken to prevent any adverse consequences from becoming problems and starting both systems (problem analysis and decision making) all over again.
Key Terms
- planning
-
The act of formulating a course of action, or of drawing up plans.
- contingency planning
-
the process of forming an alternative set of actions in case the original set of intended actions fails
Decision Making
Steps in the decision making process include:
- Objectives must first be established.
- Objectives must be classified and placed in order of importance.
- Alternative actions must be developed.
- The alternatives must be evaluated against all the objectives.
- The alternative that is able to achieve all the objectives is the tentative decision.
- The tentative decision is evaluated for more possible consequences.
The decisive actions are taken, and additional actions are taken to prevent any adverse consequences from becoming problems and starting both systems (problem analysis and decision making) all over again . There are steps that are generally followed that result in a decision model that can be used to determine an optimal production plan. In a situation featuring conflict, role-playing is helpful for predicting decisions to be made by the parties involved.
SYSTEM
The SYSTEM pyramid explains the key leadership attributes for strategic thinking.
Decision Planning
Making a decision without planning is fairly common, but does not often end well. Planning allows for decisions to be made comfortably and in an intelligent way. Planning also simplifies the decision-making process. Any decision will get four benefits out of planning:
- Planning establishes independent goals. It is a conscious and directed series of choices.
- Planning provides a standard of measurement. It is a measurement of whether you are going toward or further away from your goal.
- Planning converts values to action. You think twice about the plan and decide what will help advance your plan best.
- Planning allows for limited resources to be committed in an orderly way. Always govern the use of what is limited to you (e.g., money, time, and so on).
8.4.5: Closing the Feedback Loop
Feedback is the process where past information influences the a similar phenomenon in the present or future.
Learning Objective
Explain the role of the feedback loop in decision making and the different types of feedback associated with it
Key Points
- It is important to note that information by itself is not feedback unless it is translated into action.
- Feedback is also a synonym for feedback signals, feedback mechanisms, and feedback loops.
- The making and implementation of a decision is not the end of the decision-making process. Regular monitoring, and measuring the results of implementation against expected standards from an early stage will help close the feedback loop by altering decisions, if necessary.
Key Terms
- Feedback mechanism
-
the action or means used to subsequently modify the gap in a feedback loop
- Feedback loop
-
Feedback is a process in which information about the past or the present influences the same phenomenon in the present or future. As part of a chain of cause-and-effect that forms a circuit or loop, the event is said to “feed back” into itself. The feedback loop is the complete causal path that leads from the initial detection of the gap to the subsequent modification of the gap.
- Feedback signal
-
the measurement of the actual level of the parameter of interest in a feedback loop
Example
- Suppose a company decides to produce 200 widgets a day based on the expected demand. Once this plan is put into action, the company undertakes regular monitoring and discovers that only 150 widgets are being sold. The company can then alter their production process to ensure that they are not overproducing. If done early, this feedback loop ensures that a correct decision is ultimately made.
Feedback is a process in which information about the past or the present influences the same phenomenon in the present or future. As part of a chain of cause-and-effect that forms a circuit or loop, the event is said to “feed back” into itself.
Ramaprasad (1983) defines feedback generally as “information about the gap between the actual level and the reference level of a system parameter which is used to alter the gap in some way,” emphasising that the information by itself is not feedback unless translated into action. “…’feedback’ exists between two parts when each affects the other…”
Feedback is also a synonym for:
- Feedback signal: The measurement of the actual level of the parameter of interest.
- Feedback mechanism: The action or means used to subsequently modify the gap.
- Feedback loop: The complete causal path that leads from the initial detection of the gap to the subsequent modification of the gap.
The Feedback Loop in Decision Making
Just making a decision, and implementing it is not the end of the decision-making process. It is crucial to monitor your decision regularly once it is implemented. At this stage, you have to keep a close eye on the progress made by implementing the solution. You may need to measure the results of implementation against your expected standards. Monitoring of solutions early on will help you close the feedback loop by altering your decisions, if you notice a deviation of results from your expectations.
In the end, you will be able to see what you did right and wrong when coming up and putting the decision to use and you may choose to revisit the past decision or take a different tact when faced with similar problems in the future.
8.5: Characteristics of Good Managers
8.5.1: Leadership
Leadership is organizing a group of people to achieve a common goal.
Learning Objective
Differentiate between a leader and a manager
Key Points
- While people can manage many things, including their time, money, fuel consumption, and people, one can only lead people.
- Even though leadership is a subset of management, the term “leader” seems to have a halo attached to it, while the term “manager” comes with a bit of a stigma.
- The search for the qualities that make a good leader has been going on for centuries and continues today.
Key Terms
- manage
-
To handle or control a situation or job.
- lead
-
To provide direction and influence.
Management and Leadership
In today’s business world, there seems to be a halo affixed to the term “leader,” while the label of “manager” has a more negative connotation. “Leader” brings to mind heroic figures rallying people together to give their all for a cause, while “manager” brings to mind less-charismatic individuals trying to make people into more efficient cogs in the corporate machine.
When one considers this definition of management, it becomes apparent that leadership is actually a sub-category of management. Management (from Old French ménagement, “the art of conducting, directing,” from Latin “manu agere” or “to lead by the hand”) characterizes the process of leading and directing all or part of an organization, often a business, through the deployment and manipulation of resources (human, financial, material, intellectual, or intangible).
People can manage their time, their budget, their fuel, and yes, their people, but one can only lead people (or to be more inclusive, one can only lead intelligent living things, since shepherds and dog trainers may object to a homo sapiens-centric definition).
Perhaps the perception of a cog-manipulating manager is rooted in this difference between animate and inanimate objects. When people feel used, manipulated, or led against their will by a person in authority, they feel as if they are being treated like inanimate objects. They say the person in authority is a “lousy manager. ” But when the person in authority increases their autonomy, makes them feel at liberty to accept or reject his or her vision, and fills them with a real personal desire to bring this vision to life, they say he/she is a great leader.
Great leaders are often described as having charisma. Charisma is defined as a compelling attractiveness or charm that can inspire devotion in others. Also, many great leaders have referent power, which is the ability to inspire their followers with a high level of identification with, admiration of, or respect for the powerholder/ leader.
Leadership in a Team Setting
When applying these concepts for “manager” and “leader” in a team setting, one finds interesting results. If there is a team leader that is perceived to be unconcerned with the team members’ needs or has a personal agenda more important than the team’s goals, then the leader is perceived to be more of a “manager” and becomes estranged from the team members. Conversely, the team leaders who are admired and followed loyally are those who show concern for the team members as individuals with real needs, and who put “the cause” of the team above their own persona agenda.
Realistically, most organizations do need leaders who sometimes look at their teams with cold, analytical eyes, evaluating inefficiencies and making unpopular choices. But it would be a mistake to think that one has to be an “estranged, unliked manager” in order to execute these responsibilities. If a team leader’s tasks, such as efficiency analysis, were done hand-in-hand with sincerely seeking to know team members’ individual needs, then the team leader would be perceived to have a genuine desire to make the team more successful. Additionally, ineffective leaders may hide an unwillingness to make tough decisions by faking the “touchy-feely” attitudes associated with great leaders with high emotional-intelligence.
Leadership Research
Leadership is “organizing a group of people to achieve a common goal”. The leader may or may not have any formal authority. Scholars of leadership have produced theories involving traits, situational interaction, function, behavior, power, vision and values, charisma, and intelligence, among others.
US Army leadership
Commander of the International Security Assistance Force Gen. David H. Petraeus (center), U.S. Army, talks with U.S. soldiers of the 2nd Battalion, 327th Infantry Regiment, 1st Brigade Combat Team, 101st Airborne Division at Combat Outpost Monti in eastern Afghanistan on Aug. 5, 2010.
New methods and measurements were developed after these influential reviews that would ultimately re-establish the trait theory as a viable approach to the study of leadership. For example, improvements in researchers’ use of the round robin research design methodology allowed researchers to see that individuals can and do emerge as leaders across a variety of situations and tasks.
Additionally, during the 1980s, statistical advances allowed researchers to conduct meta-analyses, in which they could quantitatively analyze and summarize the findings from a wide array of studies. This advent allowed trait theorists to create a comprehensive picture of previous leadership research rather than rely on the qualitative reviews of the past. Equipped with new methods, leadership researchers revealed that individuals can and do emerge as leaders across a variety of situations and tasks. They found significant relationships between leadership and individual traits such as the following:
- Intelligence
- Adjustment
- Extraversion
- Conscientiousness
- Openness to experience
- General self-efficacy
While the trait theory of leadership has certainly regained popularity, its re-emergence has not been accompanied by a corresponding increase in sophisticated conceptual frameworks.
8.5.2: Styles of Leadership
A leadership style is the manner and approach of providing direction, implementing plans, and motivating people.
Learning Objective
Recognize the differences between different leadership styles and attitudes
Key Points
- Leadership styles can be categorized as being authoritarian, democratic, laissez-faire, transactional, or narcissistic.
- Authoritarian leaders keep strict control over their subordinates and keep a distinct professional relationship with their followers.
- Leaders who embrace a democratic style of leadership guide and control and make key decisions when necessary, but otherwise share decision making with their followers, promote the interests of the group, and practice social equality.
- Laissez-faire leadership is a “hands off” approach.
- Narcissistic leadership is a common form of leadership and can be either healthy or destructive.
- Transactional leaders motivate their subordinates by using rewards and punishments.
Key Term
- narcissistic
-
Obsessed with one’s own self-image and ego.
Example
- Examples of authoritarian communicative behavior include a police officer directing traffic, a teacher ordering a student to do his or her assignment, and a supervisor instructing a subordinate to clean a work station. All of these positions require a distinct set of characteristics that give the leader the position to get things in order or get a point across.
A leadership style is the manner and approach of providing direction, implementing plans, and motivating people. There are many different leadership styles that can be exhibited by leaders in politics, business, or other fields .
Leadership
A leadership style is the manner and approach of providing direction, implementing plans, and motivating people.
Authoritarian
An authoritarian or autocratic leader keeps strict, close control over followers by closely regulating the policies and procedures given to followers. To maintain emphasis on the distinction between authoritarian leaders and their followers, these types of leaders make sure to only create a distinct professional relationship. They believe direct supervision to be key in maintaining a successful environment and followership. Due to fear of followers being unproductive, authoritarian leaders keep close supervision and feel this is necessary in order for anything to be done.
Democratic
The democratic leadership style consists of the leader sharing the decision-making abilities with group members by promoting the interests of the group members and by practicing social equality. This style of leadership encompasses discussion, debate and sharing of ideas, and encouragement of people to feel good about their involvement. The boundaries of democratic participation tend to be circumscribed by the organization or group needs and the instrumental value of people’s attributes (skills, attitudes, etc.). The democratic style encompasses the notion that everyone, by virtue of their human status, should play a part in the group’s decisions. However, the democratic style of leadership still requires guidance and control by a specific leader. The democratic style demands the leader make decisions on who should be called upon within the group and who is given the right to participate in, make, and vote on decisions.
Laissez-Faire
The laissez-faire leadership style was first described by Lewin, Lippitt, and White in 1938, along with the autocratic leadership and the democratic leadership styles. The laissez-faire style is sometimes described as a “hands off” leadership style because the leader delegates the tasks to the followers while providing little or no direction. If the leader withdraws too much, it can sometimes result in a lack of productivity, cohesiveness, and satisfaction. Lassiez-faire leaders allow followers to have complete freedom to make decisions concerning the completion of their work. It allows followers a high degree of autonomy and self-rule, while at the same time offering guidance and support when requested. The lassiez-faire leader using guided freedom provides the followers with all materials necessary to accomplish their goals, but does not directly participate in decision making unless the followers requests the leader’s assistance. This is an effective style to use when:
- The followers are highly skilled, experienced, and educated;
- The followers have pride in their work and the drive to do it successfully on their own;
- Outside experts, such as staff specialists or consultants, are being used; and
- Followers are trustworthy and experienced.
This style should not be used when:
- Followers feel insecure at the unavailability of a leader.
- The leader cannot or will not provide regular feedback to their followers.
Transactional
The transactional style of leadership was first described by Max Weber in 1947, and then later described by Bernard Bass in 1981. Mainly used by management, transactional leaders focus their leadership on motivating followers through a system of rewards and punishments. There are two factors which form the basis for this system: contingent reward and management by exception. Contingent reward provides rewards (materialistic or psychological) for effort and recognizes good performance. Management by exception allows the leader to maintain the status quo; the leader intervenes when subordinates do not meet acceptable performance levels and initiates corrective action to improve performance.
Narcissistic
Narcissistic leadership is a common form of leadership. The narcissism may be healthy or destructive, although there is a continuum between the two. To critics, narcissistic leadership (especially destructive) is driven by unyielding arrogance, self-absorption, and a personal egotistic need for power and admiration. A study published in the journal, Personality and Social PsychologyBulletin, suggests that when a group is without a leader, a narcissist often takes charge; researchers found that people who score high in narcissism tend to take control of leaderless groups. Freud considered “the narcissistic type… especially suited to act as a support for others, to take on the role of leaders and to… impress others as being ‘personalities’. “
8.5.3: Technical Skills
Technical skills involve the process or technique knowledge, as well as proficiency, that may be needed in order to be a successful manager.
Learning Objective
Identify the managerial need for technical skills
Key Points
- The three managerial skills Robert Katz identified as being necessary to be a successful manager are technical, human, and conceptual.
- Technical skills are easier to learn than human and conceptual skills.
- Technical skills become less important at the top management levels of large firms as chief executives can use the technical abilities of their employees. However, high-level managers may still need these skills in smaller firms.
Key Terms
- conceptual
-
Of, or relating to concepts or mental conception; existing in the imagination.
- technical skill
-
the learned capacity or ability to carry out pre-determined results through tools, machines, techniques, crafts, systems, and methods of organization
- conceptual skill
-
the ability to formulate ideas
Example
- Examples of technical skills include project management skills for engineers building bridges, aircraft, and ships.
To perform management functions and assume multiple roles, managers must be skilled. Robert Katz identified three managerial skills essential to successful management: technical, human, and conceptual. Technical skill involves process or technique knowledge and proficiency. Managers use the processes, techniques, and tools of a specific area. These are the specific skills and knowledge related to the individual’s profession or specialization. Examples include project management skills for engineers building bridges, aircraft, and ships. Technical skills include the ability to properly operate a computer, efficiently use the various software programs that are required in a particular environment, and the utilization of other electronic devices that pertain to the job function. These skills are especially important for lower level managers, as they are often responsible for training their subordinates.
Training surgical technical skills with simulation at Valdecilla
Technical skills are especially important for lower level managers, as they are often responsible for training their subordinates.
Katz pointed out that training programs tend to focus on skills in this area. These skills are easier to learn than those in the other two groups. Managers use the processes, techniques, and tools of a specific area. A manager’s level in the organization determines the relative importance of possessing technical skills. For instance, supervisors need technical skills to manage their area of specialty. As the pace of change accelerates and diverse technologies converge, new global industries are being created (e.g., telecommunications). Technological change alters the fundamental structure of firms and calls for new organizational leadership approaches and management skills.
At the top management level, conceptual and design abilities and human skills are especially valuable, but there is relatively little need for technical abilities. The assumption, especially in large companies, is that chief executives can utilize the technical abilities of their subordinates. In smaller firms, however, technical experience may still be quite important.
8.5.4: Conceptual Thought
Conceptual thought involves seeing the important elements in any situation and, according to Robert Katz, is the key management skills.
Learning Objective
Explain the managerial need for conceptual skills
Key Points
- People who are able to see the key elements in any situation can see the enterprise as a whole, see the relationship between the various parts, understand their dependence on each other, and recognize that changes in one part will influence the others.
- Conceptual skills are likened to a “helicopter mind,” meaning that one is able to rise above a problem and see it in context.
- These skills are not critical for lower-level mangers, gain importance for middle-management and are essential for the success of higher-level managers.
Key Terms
- design
-
To plan and carry out (a picture, work of art, construction etc. ).
- conceptual
-
Of, or relating to concepts or mental conception; existing in the imagination.
Example
- Using their conceptual skills, manager are able to study a situation and figure out how to break it down into manageable pieces. When a project just begins, for example, it is easy to become overwhelmed by the work and decisions associated with getting it done. A manager using their conceptual skills will be able to resist getting tangled in the tasks and information associated with the project and instead tackle it in a clear and organized manner.
A scheme of management skills was suggested by Robert L. Katz (1986) in the Harvard Business Review. Katz, who was interested in the selection and training of managers, suggested that effective administration rested on three groups of basic skills, each of which could be developed. Katz saw conceptual skills as being the ability to see the significant elements in any situation.
Conceptual skills of a manager
Conceptual skills are probably some of the most important management skills.
Conceptual skills are probably some of the most important management skills. There are some very basic principles behind conceptual skills. The inputs by people who are hired especially for their exceptional conceptual skills often influence the decision-making process in an organization, be it about a simple thing like a change in the employees dress code, to something as big as a revamped advertising campaign for a product.
Seeing the elements involves being able to:
- See the enterprise as a whole
- See the relationships between the various parts
- Understand their dependence on one another
- Recognize that changes in one part affect all the others
This ability also extends to recognizing the relationship of the individual organizations to the political, social, and economic forces of the nation as a whole. This has since been called the “helicopter mind,” that is, being able to rise above a problem and see it in context. These conceptual skills are likely to be demonstrated by a manager or executive higher in the organization. Indeed, at these higher levels of management, organizations require these skills.
Conceptual skills are not critical for lower-level supervisors but gain in importance at the middle-management level. At the top management level, conceptual and design abilities are especially valuable
8.5.5: Analytical Mindset
Deriving, interpreting, and communicating patterns within data allows managers to make informed strategic and tactical decisions.
Learning Objective
Understand the value of analytical thinking as it pertains to management, and recall the various perspectives of analysis
Key Points
- A strong sense of analytical understanding is a highly useful skill set in both business and science.
- Pursuing objective information to drive data-driven decisions requires a highly developed analytical skill set, and is a critical component of managerial decision-making.
- Analytics can be used to assess and visualize decisions, describe the implications of historical data, predict and model future expectations, and optimize internal processes.
- In the age of big data, the importance of analytics has never been higher. The ability to navigate and derive value from big data is critical to successful organizational management.
Key Terms
- cherry-picking
-
To pick only a part of the whole truth, often in order to support an opinion or personal agenda. In analysis, it is seeing what one wants to see in the data (as opposed to what’s there).
- analytics
-
The derivation, interpretation, and expression of patterns within data sets.
Defining Analytics
The derivation, interpretation, and expression of patterns within data sets is referred to as analytics. This broad definition can fit numerous contexts, and is highly relevant in virtually every modern field of business and science. There are many instances in a business environment where analytical thinking skills are applied to produce meaningful observations. In fields from marketing to operations to finance to strategic decision-making, managers must both understand and employ analytical skills to succeed in the modern business environment.
Analyzing the Operational Environment
This image shows how information from the operational environment translates into meaningful data, information and ultimately intelligence for decision-making.
How to be Analytical
Strong analytical skills are as much a developed competency as they are a perspective. Pursuing objective, fact-based decision-making and data-driven conclusions requires a commitment to an analytical mentality. Pushing gut feelings and intuition into the background in favor of framing issues through analysis is a constant struggle in nearly every organization. It is a critical role of management to ask the right questions and align employee behavior with analytical thinking.
Depending on the particular role, industry, organization and objectives, a manager may use one or more of the following analytical models to frame tactical and strategic questions:
- Decision analytics – Using data-driven models and visualizing outcomes of specific organizational behaviors can enable managers to visualize the various outcomes of different strategic approaches.
- Descriptive analytics – Collecting historical data from reporting, scorecards, clustering and various other sources of information, managers can underline trends and identify opportunities and/or risks.
- Predictive analytics – Leveraging statistical models and machine learning, managers can predict future outcomes with varying degrees of statistical confidence.
- Prescriptive analytics – Using optimization and simulation, managers can produce recommended decisions through analytical modeling.
Domains of Analytics
- Behavioral analytics
- Cohort Analysis
- Contextual data modeling
- Enterprise Optimization
- Financial services analytics
- Marketing analytics
- Pricing analytics
- Retail sales analytics
- Risk & Credit analytics
- Supply Chain analytics
- Talent analytics
- Transportation analytics
- Customer Analytics
More Important Now Than Ever
In the current technological environment of big data, analytics has never been more relevant and central to the organization. With endless data available, it is easier than ever to derive advantage or make substantial mistakes in digesting this data. Indeed, utilizing analytics incorrectly can be just as disastrous as not using it at all! In a world with this much data, maintaining objectivity and refraining from cherry-picking to prove one’s opinion is a very important skill.
Managers must be owners not only of the decisions they make, but the validity of the process in which they make them. Analytics is the core skill set required for success in this domain, arguably the most important facet of management.
8.5.6: Sensitivity to Human Relations
Good managers have an innate sensitivity to the needs of the people they manage, and a highly developed emotional intelligence.
Learning Objective
Integrate emotional intelligence and human resource needs into the broader field of management
Key Points
- Management is primarily the task of aligning internal resources to create efficient production processes. These resources are often human resources with complex emotional needs.
- Strong managers have an innate sensitivity to human resource needs, which is enabled by a high level of emotional intelligence (EQ).
- EQ can be defined in a variety of ways. Central to EQ is communication, courtesy, interpersonal skills, positive attitude, and a strong sense of teamwork.
- To create a comfortable working environment for employees, managers should focus on motivating, setting goals, delegating and communicating effectively.
Key Term
- Interpersonal skills
-
The competencies related to human interaction, such as social skills, communication, and emotional intelligence.
Management is a functional discipline that requires a wide variety of skill sets, including organizational skills, technical skills, and people skills (or ‘soft skills’). Effective management is often centered around people skills, as the resource being managed is primary the effort of human resources.
As a result, managers who are sensitive to human resources are much more likely to be successful in a leadership role.
Soft Skills and Emotional Intelligence
The skills required to lead from a human sensitivity perspective are often referred to as soft skills or EQ (emotional intelligence). According to a research done at Eastern Kentucky University, soft skills can be summarized as the following ten attributes:
- Communication – Speaking, writing, presenting, and listening
- Courtesy – Showing appropriate respect and pleasantries when dealing with others
- Flexibility – Both adaptable and teachable, good managers can fill the unique needs of each employee they manage through changing their own habits
- Integrity – Understanding the ethical implications of decisions is integral to success
- Interpersonal skills – This is an extensive list of characteristics involving social ability, friendliness, sense of humor, patience, etc.
- Positive attitude – A confident and upbeat personality tends to trickle down through work groups
- Professionalism – Reliability and professionalism go hand and hand, and showing a strong sense of professionalism can emotionally reassure employees
- Responsibility – A willingess to take credit for the team’s mistakes and a willingness to give the team credit for their successes is a key component of responsible management
- Teamwork – Mangers must be collaborators, capable of filling the many roles required in a team
- Work ethic – Finally, management is hard work, and strong work ethic sets a good example.
As you can see here, the vast majority of these skills involve integrating with human resources. High performing managers are sensitive to the needs, emotions, perspectives ,and well-being of the individuals they are managing.
How to Manage Sensitively
With the above core skills in mind, managers with a strong sense of human resource sensitivity focus on managing people via the following four phases:
- Motivating – Understand what your employees are good at, and what they enjoy. Let them know they are appreciated for their skills and attitude and ensure they have everything they need to succeed in their role.
- Setting Goals – Create agreement among the team regarding direction, and identify practical objectives that won’t overburden or intimidate team members. Offer feedback, and receive feedback in turn. Ensure that feedback maintains a positive note.
- Delegating – Managers must take on the functional role of delegation. This simply means dividing tasks among the work group, and letting each individual know what is expected of them and how they will contribute. Give employees credit for their successes, and as a manager it is on you to take responsibility for any failures.
- Focus on Communication – Communicating well and avoiding misunderstandings will save time and stress. Make sure tasks are clear and feedback channels are open. Listen carefully and clarify what you’re hearing. Take an active interest in your employees.
Through focusing on these core human relations activities while managing, employees are likely to have the clarity, confidence, and commitment required to succeed in the workplace.
The Three Levels of Leadership
Much of a leader’s responsibilities lie in managing and motivating externally. This is to say that leaders are not only defined by their internal competencies, but more importantly by their ability to translate these competencies externally.
Chapter 7: Small Business and Entrepreneurship
7.1: The Small Business
7.1.1: Small Businesses and U.S. Jobs
Half of the U.S. private sector is populated by small businesses and the other half by large businesses.
Learning Objective
Discuss the growth of small businesses in relation to the U.S. economy
Key Points
- The U.S. government often defines small and medium-sized businesses (SMBs, also referred to as small and medium-sized enterprises, or SMEs) as firms with fewer than 500 employees.
- While business has seen great consolidation in recent years, the share of employment in small firms has been relatively stable over the past few decades. Just over half of U.S. employees work for SMBs.
- Small businesses often serve as seeds for new industries, such as Apple and Google did in their early stages. By addressing a need left unmet or innovating more rapidly than large multinational corporations, small businesses are able to carve out new niches for themselves.
- Recent advancements in technology can reduce the amount of capital needed to start a small business and increase opportunities to scale up rapidly and cost efficiently.
- The primary hurdle for most SMBs, particularly when they are starting out, is acquiring funding.
Key Term
- employment
-
The work or occupation for which one is used, and often paid.
The private sector consists of a wide variance in business size, grouped into small, medium, and large organizations. The U.S. government often defines small and medium-sized businesses (SMBs, also referred to as small and medium-sized enterprises, or SMEs) as firms with fewer than 500 employees. Using this definition, just over one-half of the private sector is populated by small businesses and the other half by large businesses.
Employment
While business has seen great consolidation in recent years, the share of employment in small firms has been relatively stable over the past few decades. It has fluctuated slightly in response to economic conditions, declining slightly when the economy is doing well and increasing when the economy struggles. This tracks with the slight decline in the small-business share of employment during the late 1990s and the leveling off in the 2000s.
Entrepreneurship
Small businesses often serve as seeds for new industries, such as Apple and Google did in their early stages. By addressing a need left unmet or innovating more rapidly than large multinational corporations, small businesses are able to carve out new niches for themselves. Recent advancements in technology can reduce the amount of capital needed to start a small business and increase opportunities to scale up rapidly and cost efficiently.
Small businesses’ share of employment, 1988–2006
The small-business share of employment is relatively stable, as shown in the graph above: the bold red line representing all small businesses stays at around 50 to 55% of the total share of employment.
Funding
The problem all (or at least most) entrepreneurs face on a daily basis is funding, particularly when first starting up. While different industries display differing degrees of entry barriers, most small businesses must obtain a certain amount of capital to begin operations. This can come from a variety of places, including:
- Self-financing by the owner through cash, equity, etc.
- Loans from friends or relatives
- Grants from private foundations
- Private stock issue
- Forming partnerships
- Angel investors (i.e. venture capital)
- Bank
7.1.2: The Prevalence of Small Businesses
Industries with high concentrations of small and medium businesses generally do not require enormous capital investment up front.
Learning Objective
Describe the characteristics of industries that are represented largely by SMBs (SMEs)
Key Points
- If you’re going to start a business, it’s important to realize that there are specific forces acting upon each industry that affect profit.
- Industries with high concentrations of small and medium-sized businesses (SMBs) generally do not require an enormous amount of up-front capital investment (i.e., they have lower barriers to entry).
- Goods producers make and sell some sort of physical product or material, while service providers don’t make tangible goods. The service industry tends to be more SMB-friendly, as it (generally) requires fewer assets.
- Manufacturing goods competitively involves being able to do so in high volumes in order to remain cost efficient. This requires a large initial investment of capital and access. As a result, manufacturing is more commonly for larger enterprises.
Key Terms
- service provider
-
An organization that operates in areas such as finance, real estate, or buying products from a wholesaler and reselling them to consumers, but does not make tangible goods.
- goods-producers
-
An company that makes and sells some sort of physical product or material.
Barriers to Entry
If you’re going to start a business, it’s important to realize that there are specific forces acting upon each industry that affect profit. Industries with a high concentration of small and medium-sized businesses (SMBs) generally do not require an enormous amount of capital investment up front. The point here is that barriers to entry are central factors in determining the feasibility of the average business owner entering a given industry.
For example, it is not likely that you would start a company to build airplanes, as that would take a large investment of capital for property, plant, equipment, and labor. Many restaurants and bars, however, require simple premises and easy to find, local ingredients. This is a smaller barrier to entry, thus there are more SMBs in the restaurant industry than in the aerospace industry.
Goods or Services?
When thinking about businesses, it can be helpful to divide them into two sections: goods producers and service providers. Goods producers make and sell some sort of physical product or material, while service providers don’t make tangible goods. The service industry tends to be more SMB-friendly, as it (generally) requires fewer assets.
In the United States, roughly 20% of SMBs are concentrated in the goods-producing sector. The 80% of SMBs that reside in the service-providing sector is largely a reflection of the overall U.S. economy (services over goods), as well as the greater feasibility of service industries for small-scale entry.
The high concentration of SMBs in the service-providing sector also reflects a few realities of business. In a global economy, manufacturing goods competitively involves being able to do so in high volumes in order to remain cost efficient. This requires a large initial investment of capital and access to low-cost labor, which are both tough for SMBs to access domestically. Maintaining quality across hundreds of locations in the service-providing sector is also, as you might imagine, not an easy task.
Small-business owner
Small businesses often begin in the services sector due to a number of factors.
7.2: Small Business Owners: A Profile
7.2.1: Key Characteristics of Entrepreneurs
Successful entrepreneurs have a unique set of personal characteristics, including the drive to take risks and embrace failure.
Learning Objective
Discuss the factors that drive entrepreneurs to succeed
Key Points
- Entrepreneurs must be willing to accept risk and failure. The key is that when you fail, you must fail quickly and inexpensively. Test, analyze, figure out why you failed, evolve, and iterate. That is the meaning of drive.
- Focus and energy are two key attributes of drive. Unwavering diligence is required in light of the challenges that the entrepreneur is likely to face, and the ability and desire to work long hours in pursuit of that goal is necessary.
- Entrepreneurs often operate on limited budgets. This requires a great deal of frugality and self-discipline, both useful facets of a strong drive.
- It is also important that drive is directed toward some outcome, and that this outcome has the clarity required to derive perseverance. Vision, passion, and focus enable this.
Key Terms
- entrepreneur
-
A person who organizes and operates a business venture and assumes much of the associated risk.
- creativity
-
The quality or ability to create or invent something.
- perseverance
-
Continuing in a course of action without regard to discouragement, opposition, or previous failure.
Drive and Entrepreneurship
The reasonable man adapts himself to the world; the unreasonable one persists in trying to adapt the world to himself. Therefore all progress depends on the unreasonable man. —George Bernard Shaw
Develop success from failures. Discouragement and failure are two of the surest stepping stones to success. No other element can do so much for a man if he is willing to study them and make capital out of them. —Dale Carnegie
Key Characteristics of Entrepreneurs
Entrepreneurs must be willing to accept risk and failure. The key is that when you fail, you must fail quickly and inexpensively. Test, analyze, figure out why you failed, evolve, and iterate. That is the meaning of drive.
Mark Cuban
Mark Cuban started Broadcast.com and became a billionaire. The most fascinating characteristic about him is that he is not content. He works relentlessly and has invested in hundreds of companies.
Entrepreneurs often possess immense focus and energy. Entrepreneurship requires extensive mental strength and determination because, as opposed to traditional occupations, there is no right or wrong path to achievement. Competition is intense and innovation is required to face the challenges that result from starting your own business.
Entrepreneurial Attributes That Enable Drive
Entrepreneurial drive is something of an umbrella term for the wide variety of characteristics that compel an individual to pursue a unique and untested path relentlessly, regardless of the failures and obstacles. The characteristics below all overlap with drive in some way, shape, or form, to ultimately create a template for the entrepreneurial mentality:
Vision: The entrepreneur must be able to create and communicate an easily understandable vision of what the new venture does in order to successfully launch a new business. This is accomplished while inspiring others to join you in your new enterprise.
Creativity: The entrepreneur must be able to inject imagination and uniqueness into a new business venture. It takes skill and ingenuity to create a new venture equipped with strategies to outsmart the competition.
Focus: The entrepreneur must be able to maintain the vision of the company with unwavering diligence. It’s very easy to get sidetracked, especially if you find it necessary to adapt the original vision. Ironically, there are many successful entrepreneurs who get bored easily.
Passion: Entrepreneurs must have a desire to succeed in a business venture under their own initiative.
Perseverance: The entrepreneur must be able to keep going even when faced with seemingly insurmountable obstacles.
Opportunistic nature: The entrepreneur must take advantage of an upcoming trend or unite unrelated processes to create a unique business venture. It helps, of course, to see the possibilities before they even exist.
Problem-solving ability:The entrepreneur must thrive on coming up with solutions to complex challenges.
Self-discipline: The entrepreneur must be organized and regimented in pursuit of a successful business venture. This includes frugality, which is knowing how to stretch every cent so that expenditures are as low as possible.
7.2.2: The Demographics of Modern Entrepreneurs
Due to technological aptitude, unemployment, and lack of dependents, a sizable percentage of U.S. entrepreneurs are young.
Learning Objective
Identify the demographic trends in modern entrepreneurs, and the factors which influenced them.
Key Points
- With recent technological developments, starting a business requires far less capital than ever before.
- With new technologies and business infrastructure, businesses can be scaled up and replicated in other places much more easily than ever before.
- As a result of recent economic downturns and technological advances, younger generations have higher unemployment rates and are better equipped technologically, which has led to growth in youth entrepreneurship.
- Women are now a dominant force in small-business ownership, and they are succeeding in industries that were once taboo for women.
Key Term
- Barriers to entry
-
One of Porter’s five forces; these are the financial and nonfinancial obstacles for new entrants to entering a given industry.
Example
- A very simple and small-scale example of how technology has made entrepreneurship potentially simpler is the rise of smartphone technology. Nowadays, anyone with an innovative idea and knowledge of smartphone programming is able to develop an original app and release it commercially.
Entrepreneurs are catalysts for economic change. Research suggests that entrepreneurs are highly creative individuals with a tendency to imagine new solutions by finding opportunities for profit or reward. The ability of entrepreneurs to innovate is thought to relate to innate traits such as extroversion and a proclivity for risk taking.
Enabling Factors
There are entrepreneurs in all demographics and walks of life. There have never been lower barriers to entry when starting a new company. Thanks to developments in technology, less capital than ever before is required to start a business (depending on the industry). Moreover, advancements in engineering have allowed people to build software and Internet businesses from scratch with minimal obstacles.
The venture-capital sector has risen from nothing 40 years ago to investing billions in new businesses today. Technology has allowed for business to be scalable over a variety of countries and continents. Previously, scaling a new business would have taken extensive time, focus, and capital. Now there is infrastructure in place (e.g., the Internet, FedEx and UPS, and smartphones) that allows entrepreneurs to build a business that can be replicated in different cities globally.
Couple this with slow economic growth due to the banking collapse in the U.S. and a high number of over-educated and underemployed people and you get a great deal of people who are drawn to entrepreneurship as a way of creating their future.
Youth
All of these factors contribute to the trend of younger and younger business owners. The tendency of young people to take risks, coupled with the relative ease of starting a business in today’s environment, has driven down the average age of entrepreneurs. Also, the younger generations (i.e., recent graduates) are facing high levels of underemployment as a result of economic factors. The younger entrepreneurs also have an interest in and familiarity with technology that provides some advantage.
Organizations have even risen to service the ever-younger, emerging entrepreneurs. The Young Entrepreneur Council (YEC) is an American nonprofit organization that provides entrepreneurs with access to tools, mentorship, and resources that support each stage of their business’s development and growth. The organization has several hundred members—all successful young entrepreneurs and business owners, ages 17 to 40—including the founders and leaders of LivingSocial, Airbnb, Reddit, College Hunks Hauling Junk, Mint.com, myYearbook, Thrillist, Yodle, Threadless, ModCloth, Grasshopper, Likeable, HootSuite, and Blip.tv.
Trends and Statistics of Women in Business
Female entrepreneurship
Recent years have seen a dramatic rise in the number of businesses owned by female entrepreneurs. As the image shows, women are now founding businesses at a rate 1.5 times the national average; the most prevalent such businesses include healthcare / social assistance (15.8%) and professional / technical services (14.1%).
There are exciting things happening inside the world of female entrepreneurship. Women are now a dominant force in small-business ownership and they are succeeding in industries that were once taboo for women. Women are not only starting businesses, they are staying in business. Between 1997 and 2006, female-owned businesses grew at nearly twice the rate of all U.S. firms (42.3 percent vs. 23.3 percent). During the same time period, employment among female-owned firms grew 0.4 percent and annual sales grew 4.4 percent. In 2006, reports on women-owned (or majority owned by women) businesses in the United States returned the following impressive statistics.
- There were an estimated 10.4 million privately-held firms.
- These firms accounted for two in five (40.2 percent) of all businesses in the country.
- These firms generated $1.9 trillion in annual sales and employed 12.8 million people nationwide.
7.2.3: Trends in Business Owners: Age and Gender
Due to technology, unemployment and lack of dependents – a sizable portion of U.S. entrepreneurs are young risk-takers.
Learning Objective
Explain how new technologies are allowing more young people and women to become entrepreneurs
Key Points
- With recent technological developments, starting a business requires far less capital than ever before.
- With the new technologies and business infrastructure, businesses can be scaled up and replicated in other places much more easily than ever before.
- As a result of recent economic downturns and technological advances, younger generations are better equipped technologically and underemployed professionally. This has led to growth in youth entrepreneurship.
- Women are now a dominant force in small business ownership, and succeeding in industries that were once taboo for women.
Key Term
- entrepreneurs
-
People who organize and operate a business venture and assume much of the associated risk.
Example
- A very simple and small-scale example of how technology has made entrepreneurship potentially simplier is the rise of smartphone technology. Nowadays, anyone with an innovative idea with commercial potential, and the knowledge of smartphone programming, is able to develop an innovative and original app, and release it commercially.
Entrepreneurs are catalysts for economic change. Researchers suggest that entrepreneurs are highly creative individuals with a tendency to imagine new solutions by finding opportunities for profit or reward. The ability of entrepreneurs to innovate is thought to relate to innate traits such as extroversion and a proclivity for risk-taking.
Demographics of Entrepreneurs
Enabling Factors
There are entrepreneurs in all demographics and walks of life. There have never been lower barriers to entry when starting a new company. Thanks to developments in technology, there is less capital required than ever before to start a business (depending on the industry). Moreover, advancements in engineering have allowed people to build software and internet businesses from scratch with minimal obstacles.
The venture capital sector has risen from nothing 40 years ago to investing billions in new businesses today. Technology has allowed for business to be scalable over a variety of countries and continents. Previously, scaling a new business would have taken extensive time, focus, and capital. Now, there is infrastructure in place, such as the Internet, FedEx and UPS, and smartphones, which allow entrepreneurs to build a business that can be replicated in different cities globally.
Couple this with slow economic growth due to the banking collapse in the U.S., and a high degree of the over-educated and underemployed, a great deal of people are drawn to entrepreneurship as a way of creating their future.
Youth
All of these factors contribute to the trend of younger and younger business owners. The tendency of young people to take risks, coupled with the relative ease of starting a business in today’s environment, has driven down the average age of entrepreneurs. Also – the younger generations (i.e. recently graduates) are facing high degrees of underemployment as a result of economic factors. The younger entrepreneurs also have an interest and familiarity with technology that provides some advantage to innovating with those fields.
Organizations have even risen to service the ever-younger sector entrepreneurs. The Young Entrepreneur Council (YEC) is an American non-profit organization that provides entrepreneurs with access to tools, mentor-ship, and resources that support each stage of their business’s development and growth. The organization has several hundred members, all successful young entrepreneurs and business owners, ages 17 to 40—a group that includes the founders and leaders of LivingSocial, Airbnb, Reddit, College Hunks Hauling Junk, Mint.com, myYearbook, Thrillist, Yodle, Threadless, ModCloth, Grasshopper, Likeable, HootSuite, and Blip.tv.
Trends and Statistics for Women in Business
There are exciting things happening inside the world of female entrepreneurship. Women are now a dominant force in small business ownership, and succeeding in industries that were once taboo for women . Women are not only starting businesses, they are staying in business. Between 1997 and 2006, female-owned businesses grew at nearly twice the rate of all U.S. firms (42.3 percent vs. 23.3 percent). During this same time period, employment among female-owned firms grew 0.4 percent, and annual sales grew 4.4 percent. In 2006, reports on women-owned (or majority owned by women) businesses in the United States returned the following impressive statistics.
- There were an estimated 10.4 million privately-held firms;
- These firms accounted for two in five (40.2 percent) of all businesses in the country;
- These firms generated $1.9 trillion in annual sales and employed 12.8 million people nationwide.
Female Entrepreneurship
Recent years have seen a dramatic rise in the number of businesses owned by female entrepreneurs. As the image shows, women are now founding businesses at a rate 1.5 times the national average; the most prevalent such businesses include healthcare / social assistance (15.8%) and professional / technical services (14.1%).
7.2.4: The Impact of Business Owners on Success and Failure Rates
As the creator, organizer, and manager of a business, a business owner is critical to the success or failure of a given venture.
Learning Objective
Recognize the significant impact a business owner has on the success of a small business
Key Points
- As the creator of a small business, and the primary source of strategic direction, business owners have substantial impact on the success or failure of a venture.
- Business owners are often tasked with the ability to build a business plan, hire a team, communicate a vision, and carry out a variety of core operations all on their own.
- Due to the number of hats a business owner is likely to wear when running their own organization, the capabilities of the owner will be closely related to the capabilities of the organization itself.
- Due to the high importance of a business owner’s tasks, and the inability to distribute risk across a high number of employees and work groups, a business owner shoulders a great deal of accountability for both success and failure.
Key Terms
- tactics
-
Operational approaches to pursuing goals.
- strategy
-
A plan of action designed specifically to accomplish a given objective or goal. In business, the foundation of how a business accomplishes its objectives.
Why Business Owners Matter
An entrepreneur or a small business owner is generally defined as an individual who creates, organizes, and manages an enterprise with considerable initiative (and usually shouldering considerable risk alongside it). Whatever the project, the business owner tends to sit firmly at the heart of the strategy, tactics, and structure that defines the organization.
As a result of this, the business owner is a central source of advantage (or potentially disadvantage) when executing the operations of the organization. Simply put, the success or failure of a small organization is inherently tied to the central figure who starts, organizes, and manages it.
What Determines Success or Failure
There are countless factors that determine success or failure when starting and running your own business. Each business is different, operating in a different competitive environment with different demands. Without getting too specific or detailed, there are a few central skills commonly required of owners across most small businesses:
Strategy
The first thing a business owner needs is a plan that lays out the strategy of their organization. This critical piece of guidance lays the foundation for how and why decisions are made. As the business owner is most commonly the author of this document, she will also be the person who determines the broader strategic strokes that guide the business in the short and long term.
Team
Another key consideration of a business owner is who (if anyone) to bring on board alongside them. Talent is an expensive business asset and the financial impact of good (or poor) hires can have an enormous effect on the quality of the organization. Leadership of a team to create synergy and ensure alignment is also of central importance and by default the responsibility of the owner.
Communication
Along similar lines, business owners need the capacity to communicate their vision to stakeholders. This includes customers, investors, potential hires, and partners. The ability to sell the idea itself is therefore another critical success factor for any business owner.
Relevant Skills
Different businesses require different skills. A small business owner involved in building websites will need the core relevant skills to create them from scratch. A small consulting group in a given industry will need extensive experience, contacts, and knowledge uniquely valuable to other incumbents in the industry. In short, most small business owners are the primary source of relevant skills for that particular business model (at least at first).
How This Impacts Success Rates
Combining the core importance of the business owner in the creation of the business and the variety of skills business owners can leverage to achieve success, business owners are often enough the primary influence on a small business’ potential success (and potential failure).
Business owners with a strong strategic ability to plan, highly developed interpersonal skills, key industry skills/knowledge, and the willingness to take risks and be accountable are poised for the highest rates of success in small business ventures.
Going into business for yourself can be highly rewarding financially and fulfilling personally. However, entrepreneurship is notoriously linked with failure, and in such situations the entrepreneur is usually the one left wondering where they may have gone wrong.
7.3: Small Business Owners: The Disadvantages
7.3.1: Stress
Small business owners may encounter significant stress due to the high risk of running a small business and the wide variety of competencies required of the job.
Learning Objective
Understand the distinct trade off in owning a small business, most notably when it comes to stress
Key Points
- While owning a small business is a great way to free yourself from working for somebody else, it comes with a few disadvantages as well.
- Running a small business can easily cause a great deal of stress, primarily due to the fact that the owner is taking all the risk (and thus all of the consequences, be they positive or negative).
- Small business owners are also expected to wear many hats, and fill a wider variety of functions than a regular employee would normally be asked.
- When hiring employees, the small business owner is now also responsible for their well-being. Owners with employees must be leaders, and they must manage complex HR processes (or outsource them at a cost).
- When considering starting a company, one should first assess their comfort with uncertainty and risk, as well as their ability to maintain calm in complex situations.
Key Terms
- ambiguity
-
The state of being unclear or unable to measure.
- risk aversion
-
This is a characteristic of individuals who are not comfortable with uncertainty, particularly when capital is on the line.
Why the Stress?
Being a small business owner creates a great deal of freedom, but that freedom comes with some cost. There are various ways to define the difficulties small business owners confront, but the term stress manages to cover a fair bit of the disadvantages small business owners face.
Risk and Return
As the sole owner and operator, all of the risk and all of the return rests on the shoulders of the small business owner. As a result, the small business owner has greater control of the process, but faces much greater consequences for failure and a higher vulnerability to chance. The upsides are higher, the downsides are lower. This basic principle of risk and return can generate a great deal of stress for people aiming high in their own start up ventures.
To be slightly more specific, Frank Knight and Peter Drucker define entrepreneurship in terms of risk-taking. They point out three types of uncertainty encountered by start up owners:
- Risk – Measured statistically and often planned for, risks are simply the probabilities of unfavorable outcomes compared to the desired objectives.
- Ambiguity – A risk that is not measurable, ambiguity is the scenario in which objectives and relative risks are known, but not the likelihood of an outcome.
- True Uncertainty – The worst of all is true uncertainty. The objective is known, but the context of risk is completely unknown.
Any of these three risk scenarios are stressful for many people, and it it is important to understand your own risk aversion before entering into a small business ownership situation.
Competencies Required
In addition to taking all of the risk, small business owners and entrepreneurs are also often tasked with wearing a lot of hats (i.e. working tons of different roles within the organization). As businesses grow, they often become more complex. As that complexity rises, small business owners rarely have the excess capital to invest in a proper team. As a result, they often end up trying to fill as many roles as possible. This requires both a great deal of energy, and a wide variety of competencies. Developing these skills and applying them every day can be both tiring and stressful.
Starting A Business
This is a simple chart that graphs the six steps a start up owner will go through in order to establish a small business. Ideating, concepting, committing, validating, scaling and establishing all require different competencies and capabilities, which the start up owner may have to accomplish herself (or with a small team).
Employees
Another source of stress is the simple fact that employees will be relying on the business owner (if it is a business with a small team). These employees will have needs the leader must fill, and the success of the organization will have a great impact on their job security. Worrying about oneself and one’s success is one thing, but worrying about the livelihoods of the team is another entirely. This can be a great source of stress, depending on the situation.
Other Factors
While these are a few key contributors to stress, it is also worth noting the likelihood of inconsistent revenue (and therefore salary), personal liability (the risk of losing whatever start up capital the business owner invested), payroll, taxes, managing stakeholders (if applicable) and a wide variety of other responsibilities and tasks which can contribute a stressed mentality.
Small business owners therefore benefit greatly from a naturally calm disposition, comfort with uncertainty, and a natural knack for learning multiple competencies and balancing a wide array of responsibilities.
7.3.2: Low Success Rate
Small Business Administration statistics show that one-third of all new businesses fail after two years, and 56% fail after four years.
Learning Objective
List the 10 most common problems entrepreneurs face when starting a new business
Key Points
- Most businesses fail because they lack enough cash at first and take on excessive debt as a result.
- Cash on hand is king! This needs to be the golden rule for start-ups and small businesses. Many entrepreneurs and small business owners have a fundamental misconception of how business operates.
- When the going gets tough, small businesses fail. In part, that’s because most start-ups and small businesses fail to set aside cash reserves that can be tapped into when the market sours.
- Too many owners grow their business too quickly without really determining whether they should, or even whether they can afford it.
- Too many retail owners are not savvy negotiators and sign what they think are “cheap” leases. Consider all factors before signing on the dotted line.
- Too many times start-ups and small businesses lack any type of work process necessary to ensure that things are done consistently. Poor controls and unclear processes can lead to quick failure.
- 7. Poor or No Business Plan. If you fail to plan, you’re planning to fail. A well drafted business plan is your road map to success. If nothing else, having to write a business plan forces you to think about the what, when, where, how and why of your business.
- 8. Ineffective Marketing and Self-Promotion. People can’t buy what you have to offer if they don’t know it is available. Many small businesses fail to develop an effective marketing strategy, or set aside enough money to implement it.
- 9. What Competition? Loyalty is earned not bought. An existing customer who is willing to purchase your product or service again is your best customer. Establishing relationships with customers is vital.
- 10. Failure to Accept, Nay Encourage, Change. Those who don’t adapt … die. Stay alert. Recognize opportunities and remain flexible to adapt to changing times. Better yet, drive the changes.
Key Terms
- Promotion
-
Promotion represents all of the methods of communication that a marketer may use to provide information to different parties about the product. Promotion comprises elements such as: advertising, public relations, personal selling and sales promotion.
- Competition
-
Competition in biology, ecology, and sociology, is a contest between organisms, animals, individuals, groups, etc., for territory, a niche, or a location of resources, for resources and goods, for prestige, recognition, awards, mates, or group or social status, for leadership; it is the opposite of cooperation.
Example
- Pets.com was a former dot-com enterprise that sold pet supplies to retail customers. It began operations in August 1998 and closed in November 2000. A high profile marketing campaign gave it a widely recognized public presence, including an appearance in the 1999 Macy’s Thanksgiving Day Parade and an advertisement in the 2000 Super Bowl. Its popular sock puppet advertising mascot was interviewed by People magazine and appeared on Good Morning America. Although sales rose dramatically due to the attention, the company was weak on fundamentals and actually lost money on most of its sales. Its high public profile during its brief existence made it one of the more noteworthy failures of the dot-com bubble of the early 2000s. Three hundred million dollars of investment capital vanished with the company’s failure. The company was headquartered in San Francisco, California, U.S.
According to the Small Business Administration (SBA), thirty-three percent of new small businesses fail within the first two years. Fifty-six percent fail within the first four years. You can increase the odds of success by knowing the 10 common problems small business owners face.
Not Enough Cash
Most businesses fail because they lack enough cash at first and take on excessive debt as a result. Before you set off on your adventure, make sure that you have sufficient cash to operate for the next 12 months, using your worst case scenario.
Spending Too Much, Too Early
Cash on hand is king! This needs to be the golden rule for start-ups and small businesses. Many entrepreneurs and small business owners have a fundamental misconception of how business operates. As a result, many spend their seed money, or start-up capital, before revenues start rolling in.
No Rainy Day Cash
When the going gets tough, small businesses fail. In part, that’s because most start-ups and small businesses fail to set aside cash reserves that can be tapped into when the market sours.
Growing Too Big, Too Fast
Too many owners grow their business too quickly without really determining whether they should, or even whether they can afford it.
Location, Location, Location
Too many retail owners are not savvy negotiators and sign what they think are “cheap” leases. Consider all factors before signing on the dotted line.
Inexistent Internal Controls or Poor Execution of Existing Controls
Too many times start-ups and small businesses lack any type of work process necessary to ensure that things are done consistently. Furthermore, small business owners and entrepreneurs generally lack the experience and skills to hire the right people, monitor their performances, and deal with them when they don’t work out.
Poor or No Business Plan
If you fail to plan, you’re planning to fail! A well-drafted business plan is your road map to success. If nothing else, having to write a business plan forces you to think about the what, when, where, how, and why of your business.
Ineffective Marketing and Self-Promotion
People can’t buy what you have to offer if they don’t know it is available! Sounds logical? Yet many small businesses still fail to develop an effective marketing strategy, or set aside enough money to implement it.
Competition
Loyalty is earned, not bought. An existing customer who is willing to purchase your product or service again is your best customer. Don’t lose him or her. Make sure that your customer has a reason, or better yet multiple reasons, to continue doing business with you instead of your competition.
Failure to Accept Change
Recognize opportunities and remain flexible to adapt to changing times. Better yet, drive the changes. This holds especially true for your work processes. Constantly ask yourself and your employees, if you have any, what is working and what is not. Always question how things are done and wonder how they could be improved.
Business Failure
Everything must go
7.4: Starting a Small Business
7.4.1: The Business Plan
A business plan is a formal statement of a set of goals, the reasons they are believed attainable, and the plan for reaching those goals.
Learning Objective
Name the components that make up a business plan
Key Points
- The key elements of a business plan include a comprehensive set of relevant information—from market analysis to company financials.
- If the company is seeking funding the business plan gives potential investors an understanding of your proposed business and the money required.
- The business plan is a critical vehicle for communicating both internally and externally how a company intends to conduct business.
- A business plan establishes goals and objections that allow the leadership to assess how well a company is doing based on its established goals and objections.
Key Terms
- business plan
-
a summary of how a venture owner, manager, or entrepreneur intends to organize an entrepreneurial endeavor and implement activities necessary and sufficient for the venture to succeed
- Executive Summary
-
The executive summary is a snapshot of your business plan as a whole and touches on your company profile and goals.
- Financial Projections
-
The financials provide information on the proposed spending and revenues of the company, typically for the first 3 to 5 years of operation. Again ,if funding is required this section details the expected cash flows and other critical financial projections to allow potential investors to understand the risks and returns they can expect
- market analysis
-
Provides the specific industry, market, and competitive analysis information needed to understand where and how the company is positioned in the overall market.
Example
- Elements of a Business Plan: Cover sheet, Executive summary (statement of the business purpose), Table of contents, Body of the document, Business Description of business, Marketing Competition, Operating procedures, Personnel Business insurance, Financial data, Loan applications, Capital equipment and supply list, Balance sheet Break-even analysis, Profit and loss statements, Three-year summary, Detail by month — first year, Detail by quarters — second and third year, Assumptions upon which projections were based, Pro-forma cash flow, Supporting documents, Tax returns of principals (partners in the business) for last three years, Personal financial statements (all banks have these forms), Copy of franchise contract and all supporting documents provided by the franchisor (for franchise businesses), Copy of proposed lease or purchase agreement for building space, Copy of licenses and other legal documents, Copy of resumes of all principals, Copies of letters of intent from suppliers, etc.
A business plan is a formal statement of a set of business goals, the reasons they are believed attainable, and the plan for reaching those goals. It may also contain background information about the organization or team attempting to reach those goals. Business plans may also target changes in perception and branding by the customer, client, taxpayer, or larger community.
Essential Elements of a Business Plan
The key elements of a business plan include a comprehensive presentation of relevant information, from market analysis to company financials. If the company is seeking funding, the business plan gives potential investors an understanding of your proposed business and the money required. The following categories are important inclusions in any business plan:
- Business Plan Executive Summary: The executive summary is a snapshot of your business plan as a whole and touches on your company profile and goals. This section offers tips on what to include and how to keep it brief and succinct.
- Market Analysis: Provides the specific industry, market, and competitive analysis information needed to understand where and how the company is positioned in the overall market.
- Company Description: Company description answers certain questions. What do you do? What differentiates your business from current providers? Which markets do you serve?
- Marketing & Sales Management: The marketing and sales section explains how the company plans to market your business and what is your sales strategy. It outlines in the broadest sense how your firm will communicate with potential customers and suppliers.
- Service or Product Line: Service and product lines details exactly what your firms sells and how does it deliver value to your customers. Information about the firm’s R&D activities and the product lifecycle should be included in this section.
- Funding Request: If you are seeking funding for your business, find out what information you need to include in your plan to ensure success.
- Financial Projections: The financials provide information on the proposed spending and revenues of the company, typically for the first 3 to 5 years of operation. Again ,if funding is required this section details the expected cash flows and other critical financial projections to allow potential investors to understand the risks and returns they can expect.
- Appendix: An appendix is optional, but a useful place to include resumes of the leadership team, permits, leases, and and any other pertinent information that is material to the operations of the company.
Business Plan
Preparing A Business Plan
7.4.2: Types of Ownership
A company has several options when it comes to the legal structure of ownership.
Learning Objective
Discuss the different types of ownership available to small business owners
Key Points
- A small business is a business that is privately owned and operated, with a small number of employees and a relatively low volume of sales.
- Market factors and other key criteria, such as tax implications, should be considered with regard to the legal structure of a company.
- Each of the types of ownership comes with its own inherent advantages and disadvantages and as a result its own risks and potential rewards.
Key Terms
- limited liability
-
A situation in which the liability of the owners of a business is limited to the full, paid-up value of the share capital. In the United States and some other countries, a limited company is known as either a corporation or a limited liability company (LLC).
- partnership
-
A partnership is a form of business in which two or more people operate for the common goal of making profit. Each partner has total and unlimited personal liability of the debts incurred by the partnership.
- Sole Proprietorship
-
A business owned by one person. The owner of the business has total and unlimited personal liability of the debts incurred by the business.
Example
- A smaller business is more flexible. Larger businesses or those with wider ownership or more formal structures, will usually tend to be organized as partnerships or (more commonly) corporations. Generally speaking, shareholders in a corporation, limited partners in a limited partnership, and members in a limited liability company are shielded from personal liability for the debts and obligations of the entity, which is legally treated as a separate “person. ” This means that if the business does not succeed, the owner’s own possessions are strongly protected under the law unless there is misconduct. Partnerships cannot be taken public.
Types of Ownership
A small business is a business that is privately owned and operated, with a small number of employees and relatively low volume of sales. Small businesses are normally privately-owned corporations, cooperatives, partnerships, or sole proprietorships.
Private Limited Company (Ltd)
A small to medium-sized business that is often run by the family or the small group who owns it. The owners and managers are only liable for the business up to the amount they have invested in the company, and are not liable for the debts incurred by the company unless they have signed a personal guarantee.
Public Limited Company
A business with limited liability, and a wide variety of shareholders. The owners and managers are only liable for the business up to the amount they have invested in the company, and are not liable for the debts incurred by the company (unless they have signed a personal guarantee, which usually is not the case for a large corporation).
Unlimited Liability
A situation in which owners of a business are liable for all the debts that the business may incur.
Limited Liability
A situation in which the liability of the owners of a business is limited to the full, paid-up value of the share capital. In the United States and some other countries, a limited company is known as either a corporation or a limited liability company (LLC) .
Limited Liability Company (LLC)
A situation in which the liability of the owners of a business is limited to the full, paid-up value of the share capital. In the United States and some other countries, a limited company is known as either a corporation or a limited liability company.
Sole Proprietorship
A business owned by one person. The owner may operate on his own or may employ others. The owner of the business has total and unlimited personal liability of the debts incurred by the business.
Partnership
A partnership is a form of business in which two or more people operate for the common goal of making profit. Each partner has total and unlimited personal liability of the debts incurred by the partnership.
Cooperative Business
Cooperative businesses are often referred to as a co-ops. The cooperative business structure is for-profit, with limited liability, but with members of the co-op sharing decision-making authority. Co-ops normally fall into three types: (1) Consumer co-ops, (2) producer co-ops (common in agriculture) and (3) worker-owned companies. Co-ops are fundamental to the ideology of economic democracy.
7.4.3: Financing Company Operations
A company can be self-financed or financed through the solicitation and participation of outside investors.
Learning Objective
List the different financing options for small businesses
Key Points
- Financing the operation of a company can come from within the firm itself or by using external resources.
- How a company is financed has implications for how profits and potential liabilities are distributed.
- The participation of external sources of funding may bring other benefits outside rather than just the funds themselves.
Key Term
- Bootstrapping
-
Financial bootstrapping is a term used to cover different methods when someone wants to avoid using the financial resources of external investors. The use of private credit card debt is the most known form of bootstrapping, but a wide variety of methods are available for entrepreneurs. While bootstrapping involves a risk for the founders, the absence of any other stakeholder gives the founders more freedom to develop the company.
Examples
- Examples of bootstrapping include: Owner financing, sweat equity, minimization of the accounts receivable, joint utilization, delaying payment, minimizing inventory, subsidy finance, and personal debt.
- Many successful companies including Dell Computers and Facebook were founded using financial bootstrapping.
A company can be self-financed or financed through the solicitation and participation of outside investors .
NGO Financing
A non-governmental organization (NGO) is a legally constituted organization created by natural or egal persons that operates independently from any form of government.
Self Funding
Financial bootstrapping is a term used to cover different methods for avoiding the use of financial resources that come from external investors. The use of private credit card debt is the most known form of bootstrapping, but a wide variety of methods are available for entrepreneurs. While bootstrapping involves a risk for the founders, the absence of any other stakeholder gives the founders more freedom to develop the company.
There are different types of bootstrapping:
- Owner financing
- Sweat equity
- Minimization of the accounts receivable
- Joint utilization
- Delaying payment
- Minimizing inventory
- Subsidy finance
- Personal Debt
External Financing
Many businesses need more capital than can be provided by the owners themselves. In this case, a range of options are available including:
- Angel investors
- Venture capital investors
- Crowd funding
- Hedge Funds
- Alternative asset management
Some of these sources provide not only funds, but also financial oversight, accountability for carrying out tasks and meeting milestones, and in some cases, business contacts and experience. In many cases, these services are in return for an equity stake.
In short, financing the operations of a company can come from within the firm itself or by using external resources. How a company is financed has implications for how profits and potential liabilities are distributed
Many successful companies, including Dell Computers and Facebook, were founded using financial bootstrapping.
The participation of external sources of funding may bring other benefits outside of the funds themselves.
7.4.4: The Small Business Administration
The Small Business Administration (SBA) is a United States government agency that provides support to entrepreneurs and small businesses.
Key Points
- The U.S. government actively supports the creation of new business and the expansion of existing companies through the SBA.
- The SBA promotes commerce in the U.S. in a number of ways, from simple advice and information to actual funding.
- Many of the new jobs in the U.S. economy are created by small businesses.
Key Terms
- organigraph
-
Organigraphs expose critical associations and competitive opportunities as opposed to viewing all parties, departments, and business units as separate entities. They also reveal relationships between departments, products, supply chains, and more within an organization that might not otherwise be apparent.
- organization chart
-
A graphic display of reporting relationships in an organization, sometimes displaying position titles and position holders.
The Small Business Administration
The Small Business Administration (SBA) is a United States government agency that provides support to entrepreneurs and small businesses. The mission of the Small Business Administration is “to maintain and strengthen the nation’s economy by enabling the establishment and viability of small businesses and by assisting in the economic recovery of communities after disasters. ” The agency’s activities are summarized as the 3 Cs of capital, contracts, and counseling. Many of the new jobs in the U.S. economy are created by small businesses
The Small Business Administration
Seal of the U.S. Small Business Administration
SBA loans are made through banks, credit unions, and other lenders who partner with the SBA. The SBA provides a government-backed guarantee on part of the loan. Under the Recovery Act and the Small Business Jobs Act, SBA loans were enhanced to provide up to a 90 percent guarantee in order to strengthen access to capital for small businesses after credit froze in 2008. The agency had record lending volumes in late 2010.
The SBA helps lead the federal government’s efforts to deliver 23% of prime federal contracts to small businesses. Small business contracting programs include efforts to ensure that certain federal contracts reach woman-owned and disabled veteran-owned small businesses.
SBA has at least one office in each U.S. state. In addition, the agency provides grants to support counseling partners, including approximately 900 Small Business Development Centers (often located at colleges and universities); 110 Women’s Business Centers; and SCORE, a volunteer mentor corps of retired and experienced business leaders with approximately 350 chapters. These counseling services provide services to over one million entrepreneurs and small business owners annually.
Chapter 6: Types of Business Ownership
6.1: Sole Proprietorships
6.1.1: A Brief Definition of Sole Proprietorships
A sole proprietorship is owned and run by one individual who receives all profits and has unlimited responsibility for all losses and debts.
Learning Objective
Define a sole proprietorship
Key Points
- In a sole proprietorship, there is no legal distinction between the individual and the business. Thus, every asset is owned by the proprietor, and they have unlimited liability.
- Examples include writers and consultants, local restaurants and shops, and home-based businesses.
- A sole proprietor may use a trade name or business name other than his or her legal name.
Key Term
- Sole Proprietorship
-
a business that is wholly owned by a single person, who has unlimited liability
Example
- An example of a sole proprietorship is an individual who runs a local food truck and would be listed as such with the city.
A sole proprietorship, also known as the sole trader or simply a proprietorship, is a type of business entity that is owned and run by one individual and in which there is no legal distinction between the owner and the business. Some formal definitions of a sole proprietorship are “a business owned by one person who is entitled to all of its profits” (Glos & Baker) and “a business owned and controlled by one man even though he may have many other persons working for him” (Reed & Conover).
The individual entrepreneur owns the business and is fully responsible for all its debts and legal liabilities. The owner receives all profits (subject to taxation specific to the business) and has unlimited responsibility for all losses and debts. Every asset of the business is owned by the proprietor, and all debts of the business are the proprietor’s. This means that the owner has no less liability than if they were acting as an individual instead of as a business. It is a “sole” proprietorship in contrast with partnerships. More than 75% of all United States businesses are sole proprietorships. Examples include writers and consultants, local restaurants and shops, and home-based businesses.
Mom and pop store
This is a small proprietor with a small shop.
A sole proprietor may use a trade name or business name other than his or her legal name. In many jurisdictions, there are rules to enable the true owner of a business name to be ascertained. In the United States, there is generally a requirement to file a doing business as statement with the local authorities. In the United Kingdom, the proprietor’s name must be displayed on business stationery, in business emails, and at business premises, and there are other requirements.
6.1.2: Advantages of Sole Proprietorships
The advantages of a sole proprietorship versus other forms of organizations is the relative ease of set-up and the lower start-up costs.
Learning Objective
Discuss the advantages of running a sole proprietorship
Key Points
- Filing taxes as a sole proprietorship is relatively easier than that of a corporation.
- Sole proprietorships typically require less capital to set up and have easier payroll requirements.
- Sole proprietorships are not as heavily regulated as other forms of organizations.
Key Term
- corporate
-
An incorporated entity is a separate legal entity that has been incorporated through a legislative or registration process established through legislation.
Example
- A man starting his own consulting firm as a sole proprietor would require very little capital to set up a home office to operate until sufficient funds are earned to open a larger office.
Advantages of Sole Proprietorship
The sole proprietor form of business ownership is the most common form in the United States and also the simplest. In this form of business ownership, an individual proprietor owns the business, manages the business, and is responsible for all of the business’ transactions and financial liabilities. This means that any debts incurred must be paid by the owner. This form of business has several advantages .
A Writer’s Office
A write enjoying the advantages of being a sole proprietor.
Quicker Tax Preparation
As a sole proprietor, filing your taxes is generally easier than a corporation. Simply file an individual income tax return (IRS Form 1040), including your business losses and profits. Your individual and business income are considered the same and self-employed tax implications will apply.
Lower Start-up Costs
Limited capital is a reality for many start-ups and small businesses. The costs of setting up and operating a corporation involves higher set-up fees and special forms. It’s also not uncommon for a lawyer to be involved in forming a corporation.
Ease of Money Handling
Handling money for the business is easier than other legal business structures. No payroll set-up is required to pay yourself. To make it even easier, set up a separate bank account to keep your business funds separate and avoid co-mingling personal and business activities.
Government Regulation
Sole proprietorships also have the least government rules and regulations affecting it. They do need to comply with licensing requirements within the states in which they do business and they do need to pay attention to local regulations. However, the paperwork required is much less than large corporations. Thus, they can operate quite easily. Sole proprietorships also do not pay corporate taxes.
Sale and Inheritance
The sole proprietor can own the business for as long as he or she decides, and can cash in and sell the business when they decide to get out. The sole proprietor can even pass the business down to their heir, a common practice.
6.1.3: Disadvantages of Sole Proprietorships
Sole proprietorships face a number of difficulties in the longer terms compared to limited liability companies.
Learning Objective
List the disadvantages of sole proprietorships
Key Points
- The owner of a sole proprietorship is solely liable for all debts and actions of the company. All personal wealth is linked to the business.
- Financial statements are not required in a sole proprietorship as are typically required of a corporation, meaning a lack of financial control is very probable.
- It is difficult to find outside investors to fund sole proprietorships, meaning growth potential is very limited beyond a certain point.
Key Term
- unlimited liability
-
The liability of an owner of a small proprietorship for all costs and debts of the business.
Example
- An individual who wishes to open a sandwich shop must put their own money into the business, knowing that, should it fail, they will be responsible for all costs and debts that will be incurred.
Sole proprietorships are the smallest form of business organization, and also the most common in the United States. However, while there are certain advantages (it is easier to set up a sole proprietorship than a limited liability company, for instance), there are a number of big disadvantages, particularly in the long term, that make the sole proprietorship model quite unattractive to business owners.
The main disadvantages to being a sole proprietorship are:
Unlimited liability: Your small business, in the form of a sole proprietorship, is personally liable for all debts and actions of the company. Unlike a corporation or an LLC, your business doesn’t exist as a separate legal entity. Therefore, all of your personal wealth and assets are linked to the business. For instance, if you go bankrupt and owe your debtors $100,000, then that money will have to come out of your own wallet even if there is no money left in the business. If you operate in a higher risk business, such as manufacturing or consumables, the cost to benefit ratio is favorable toward a corporate structure.
Sole proprietorships have unlimited liability
A sole proprietor will be responsible for all the costs and debts of their company.
Lack of financial controls: The looser structure of a proprietorship won’t require financial statements and maintaining company minutes as a corporation. The lack of accounting controls can result in the owner being lax about financial matters, perhaps falling behind in payments or not getting paid on time. It can be a serious issue if financial controls are not strictly managed.
Difficulty in raising capital: Imagine your business in five years. Will it still be a business of one? Growing your small business will require cash to take advantage of new markets and more opportunities. An unrelated investor has less peace of mind concerning the use and security of his or her investment, and the investment is more difficult to formalize; other types of business entities have more documentation. Outside investors will take your company more serious if you are a corporation.
6.2: Partnerships
6.2.1: Types of Partnerships
Various partnership types enable partners to determine the ideal distribution of profits and liabilities among business owners.
Learning Objective
Differentiate between partnership types, and recognize the key role liabilities play in these partnerships
Key Points
- Starting an unincorporated organization, complete with one or more partners, is generally referred to as a partnership. Balancing the risks and returns of this relationship is accomplished through types of partnerships.
- Common types of partnerships include general partnerships, limited partnerships, joint liability partnerships, several liability partnerships, and limited liability partnerships.
- The primary points of differentiation between all of these models revolves around liability, and how it is distributed among partners.
- Having limited liability in a given partnership agreement offers protection from legal and financial claims, while simultaneously resulting in some loss of control and potential returns.
- Coming to complete agreement regarding the type of partnership, and the division of liability and profit, is the first step to building an organization from the ownership point of view.
Key Terms
- stipulate
-
To require something as a condition for a contract or agreement.
- liabilities
-
Obligations, responsibilities, or debts owed to somebody.
Starting an unincorporated company with one or more partners via an agreement is generally referred to as a partnership, in which each of the owners assume personal liability for the legal actions and debts of the entity (unless otherwise stated by law or within the agreement). Under this model, there are a few different formats that new business owners should consider before finalizing the agreement. Each format has implications, primarily revolving around the concept of liability, and choosing the right format for the needs of the partners is a critical starting point.
Types of Partnerships
For the purpose of this discussion, the most important types of partnerships to consider are general partnerships, limited partnerships, joint liability partnerships, several liability partnerships, and limited liability partnerships.
General Partnerships (GP)
This represents a default version of a partnership, which governs the relationships between the individual partners as well as between the partnership and the outside world. Each partner in the organization is considered an agent of the partnership, which means each partner represents the organization when dealing with external parties. Similarly, each partner has equal right to participate in the management, decision-making, and control (unless otherwise stated). Under most formats, adding a new partner requires the complete support and consent of all existing partners.
In terms of risks and returns (or liabilities and profits), the default assumption is that profits are distributed equally, and that liability is shared jointly and severally. Any debt or liability impacting the organization can be distributed equally (or via allocated responsibility) across the partners’ personal assets.
Limited Partnerships (LP)
In a limited partnership, a general partner may collaborate with a limited partner. A limited partner has no managerial authority, nor in most situations would they earn equal returns. However, the limited partner is protected by limited liability in legal situations regarding debt or other costs that may impact the general partner’s personal assets. Along similar lines, limited partners are not considered agents of the organization from a legal perspective. It is also important to understand that this is not the same as a limited liability partnership (LLP), in which all partners have limited liability.
Joint Liability Partnerships
Exactly as it sounds, a joint liability partnerships holds all partners equally liable for any financial and legal issues. As opposed to a several liability concept, in which liability may be distributed based on certain proportionate responsibility, joint liability partnerships are equal across the board. Picture a married couple purchasing a home. A joint liability on that loan would stipulate that both parties are equally responsible for repayment as well as equally in possession of the asset (i.e. the home).
Several Liability Partnerships
Several liability is the converse to joint liability, in which the involved parties will settle liability disputes based on respective obligations. This is easiest to demonstrate via an example. Assume two partners create a business, let’s say exporting wine. Partner A is in charge of sourcing, getting great wine from around the world. Partner B is responsible for the buyer side, and ensuring legality with the countries they are selling too. While selling to a more conservative country, it turns out Partner B accidentally overlooked some legal steps in the importing process.
As alcohol can be legally complex with costly mistakes, and it was partner B’s responsibility, it could be argued in a several liability case that partner B owes 80% of the cost for that mistake. To say 100% would likely be a little unfair, considering Partner A should be aware of the full channel. But how much liability does each party deserve? These are difficult questions, making this type of partnership slightly more complex.
Limited Liability Partnerships
Finally, there are limited liability partnerships (LLPs). In this situation, some or all partners have limited liability, which grants it some similarity with a corporation. LLPs do not hold each partner responsible for the financial and legal mistakes of the other partners. In some countries, LLPs must have a central GP with unlimited liability to put this risk somewhere (see limited partnerships). This format is quite popular among certain high-end services, such as law and accounting. It allows collaborative work while maintaining independence in regards to liability.
Like most legally complex concepts, in the United States in particular, LLP rulings can vary significantly from area to area. Understanding which liabilities are limited and which are not is important information to have before entering into a partnership.
Conclusion
When considering the appropriate type of partnership, liability is the key word. Prior to any formalized arrangement, each party should put forward their expectations concerning profit sharing and liability in clear terms. Aligning on the risk and return is the first step to moving forward in any professional business relationships at the ownership level.
6.2.2: Partnership Agreements
Partnership agreements govern the relationship between the various individuals who are collaborating on a given venture.
Learning Objective
Recall the more common components of partnership agreements, and recognize why these agreements are valuable
Key Points
- Partnerships are not limited liability models, and as a result incur a great deal of individual risk for each partner.
- Partnership agreements are designed to mitigate such risks, and ensure that each partner is in complete agreement as to the terms of the overall business arrangement.
- Common clauses within a partnership agreement revolve around how decisions are made, how compensation is decided, how to mediate disagreements and disputes, and when it may be appropriate to remove a partner.
Key Terms
- partnership
-
An agreement between individuals to collaborate towards mutually determined objectives.
- Expulsion
-
The forced removal of an individual from a group, usually due to poor behavior.
Why Create An Agreement?
Similar to a sole proprietor, a partnership shoulders the majority of the risk when opening a new venture (unlike limited liability models). As a result of this, partners entering an agreement will want to consider creating a partnership agreement, which governs the nature of their relationship relative to the venture they are collaborating on.
For example, let’s assume that a startup company decides to formulate their business as a partnership between four people. They estimate that $100,000 will be required to get the business off the ground over the next two years. They agree to invest equally, and write in the contract that each individual will contribute $25,000. However, after the first two years, one member fails to contribute. This voids the contract with that partner, and the overall ownership of the business now rests with the individuals who fulfilled the contract.
Common Partnership Agreement Components
The above example is fairly simple. However, businesses encounter a wide variety of challenges in which contractual agreements can be useful. Here are a few common components of partnership agreements:
- Majority Management – This indicates that business decisions will be made through the authorization of the majority of partners, protecting partners from one individual partner controlling the entire organization.
- Annual Account – This obligates each partner to collaboratively settle organizational accounts and debts each year.
- Consistent Interest – As partnerships are often side projects, this obligates each partner to a certain amount of interest and/or time commitment in the venture.
- Resolution of Dispute – It is often a good idea to anticipate which types of disputes may arise, and denote standard practices for how these disagreements will be handled.
- Causes Income Losses – If the company is not achieving the expected profitability, this will scale down the compensation received by each partner relative to the business’s overall success.
- Misconduct Expulsion – At times, it may be necessary to remove one partner due to poor behavior. An example of this may be one partner spending far too much on business expenses, such as flying first class and abusing shared resources.
While there may be many more aspects of a partnership agreement depending on the specific type of business, and the needs of each partner, this list is a good tool in understanding the general logic behind such agreements. When entering a collaboration, it is important to consider what could go wrong before it goes wrong, and plan for how to handle that contractually.
6.2.3: Advantages and Disadvantages of Partnerships
Partnerships are easy to establish and carry many advantages, however there are risks due to the concentrated ownership structure.
Learning Objective
Discuss the characteristics and advantages of partnerships
Key Points
- The profits from the business flow directly through to the partners’ personal tax returns.
- The most obvious advantages to a partnership are the ease in which they may be established, the combination of a wider pool of skills and knowledge, and the increased ability to raise more funds with more partners.
- The business usually will benefit from partners who have complementary skills.
Key Term
- tortious
-
Of, pertaining to, or characteristic of torts.
A partnership is formed between two or more professionals where the partners work together to achieve and share profits and losses.
Partnerships have certain default characteristics relating to both the relationship between the individual partners and the relationship between the partnership and the outside world. The former can generally be overridden by agreement between the partners, whereas the latter generally cannot be done. The assets of the business are owned on behalf of the other partners, and they are each personally liable, jointly and severally, for business debts, taxes or tortious liability . For example, if a partnership defaults on a payment to a creditor, the partners’ personal assets are subject to attachment and liquidation to pay the creditor.
General Partnership and Unlimited Liability
As in sole proprietorships, partnerships have unlimited liability. There are different kinds of partnerships, each with its own benefits and shortcomings.
By default, profits are shared equally among the partners. However, a partnership agreement will almost invariably expressly provide for the manner in which profits and losses are to be shared. Each general partner is deemed the agent of the partnership. Therefore, if that partner is apparently carrying on partnership business, all general partners can be held liable for his dealings with third persons. By default, a partnership will terminate upon the death, disability, or even withdrawal of any one partner. However, most partnership agreements provide for these types of events, with the share of the departed partner usually being purchased by the remaining partners. By default, each general partner has an equal right to participate in the management and control of the business. Disagreements in the ordinary course of partnership business are decided by a majority of the partners, and disagreements of extraordinary matters and amendments to the partnership agreement require the consent of all partners. However, in a partnership of any size, the partnership agreement will provide for certain electees to manage the partnership along the lines of a company board. Unless otherwise provided in the partnership agreement, no one can become a member of the partnership without the consent of all partners, though a partner may assign his share of the profits and losses and right to receive distributions. A partner’s judgment creditor may obtain an order charging the partner’s “transferable interest” to satisfy a judgment.
Advantages of Partnerships
- Partnerships are relatively easy to establish; however time should be invested in developing the partnership agreement
- With more than one owner, the ability to raise funds may be increased
- The profits from the business flow directly through to the partners’ personal tax returns
- Prospective employees may be attracted to the business if given the incentive to become a partner
- Usually the business will benefit from partners who have complementary skills
6.2.4: Partnerships and Taxes
Various partnerships need to file different tax forms; it is important to understand the IRS codes before embarking on a partnership.
Learning Objective
Discuss the general tax requirements for subchapter S corporations and limited liability companies
Key Points
- An S corporation, for United States federal income tax purposes, is a corporation that makes a valid election to be taxed under Subchapter S of Chapter 1 of the Internal Revenue Code.
- In general, S corporations do not pay any federal income taxes. Instead, the corporation’s income or losses are divided among, and passed through, to its shareholders.
- The shareholders must report the income or loss from the S-corp on their own individual income tax returns.
Key Term
- limited liability
-
The liability of an owner or a partner of a company for no more capital than they have invested.
Partnerships and Taxes
Different types of partnerships have different tax requirements, and partners will need to fill out different forms depending on the type. Below, we discuss Subchapter S Corporations, and LLCs.
Subchapter S Corporations
Subchapter S Corporations have a tax election only; this election enables the shareholder to treat the earnings and profits as distributions and have them pass through directly to their personal tax return. The catch here is that the shareholder, if working for the company (and if there is a profit), must pay him/herself wages, and must meet standards of “reasonable compensation”. This can vary by geographical region as well as occupation, but the basic rule is to pay yourself what you would have to pay someone else to do your job, as long as there is enough profit. If you do not do this, the IRS can reclassify all of the earnings and profit as wages, and you will be liable for all of the payroll taxes on the total amount.
Limited Liability Company (LLC)
The LLC is a relatively new type of hybrid business structure that is now permissible in most states. It is designed to provide the limited liability features of a corporation and the tax efficiencies and operational flexibility of a partnership. Formation is more complex and formal than that of a general partnership. The owners are members, and the duration of the LLC is usually determined when the organization papers are filed. The time limit can be continued, if desired, by a vote of the members at the time of expiration. LLCs must not have more than two of the four characteristics that define corporations: Limited liability to the extent of assets, continuity of life, centralization of management, and free transferability of ownership interests.
Corporations and Double Taxation
This figure shows how corporations are taxed twice.
6.3: Corporations
6.3.1: Types of Corporations
Four main types of corporations are designated as C, S, limited liability companies, and nonprofit organizations.
Learning Objective
Distinguish between a C corporation, S corporation, LLC and non-profit
Key Points
- C corporation refers to any corporation that, under United States federal income tax law, is taxed separately from its owners.
- S corporations are corporations that elect to pass corporate income, losses, deductions, and credit through to their shareholders for federal tax purposes.
- An LLC is a flexible form of enterprise that blends elements of partnership and corporate structures.
- A nonprofit organization is an organization that uses surplus revenues to achieve its goals rather than distributing them as profit or dividends.
Key Terms
- corporation
-
A group of individuals, created by law or under authority of law, having a continuous existence independent of the existences of its members, and powers and liabilities distinct from those of its members.
- shareholder
-
One who owns shares of stock.
Four main types of corporations exist in the United States:
- C corporations
- S corporations
- Limited Liability Companies (LLCs)
- Nonprofit Organizations
C Corporations
C corporation refers to any corporation that, under United States federal income tax law, is taxed separately from its owners . A C corporation is distinguished from an S corporation, which generally is not taxed separately. Most major companies (and many smaller companies) are treated as C corporations for U.S. federal income tax purposes. A C corporation has no limit on the number of shareholders, foreign or domestic. Any distribution from the earnings and profits of a C corporation is treated as a dividend for U.S. income tax purposes. Exceptions apply to treat certain distributions as made in exchange for stock rather than as dividends. Such exceptions include distributions in complete termination of a shareholder’s interest and distributions in liquidation of the corporation.
Coca-Cola Company
Coca-Cola is a famous C corporation.
S Corporations
S corporations are merely corporations that elect to pass corporate income, losses, deductions, and credit through to their shareholders for federal tax purposes. Like a C corporation, an S corporation is generally a corporation under the law of the state in which the entity is organized. For federal income tax purposes, however, taxation of S corporations resembles that of partnerships. Thus, income is taxed at the shareholder level and not at the corporate level. Payments to S shareholders by the corporation are distributed tax-free to the extent that the distributed earnings were not previously taxed. Also, certain corporate penalty taxes (e.g., accumulated earnings tax, personal holding company tax) and the alternative minimum tax do not apply to an S corporation. In order to make an election to be treated as an S corporation, the following requirements must be met:
- Must be an eligible entity (a domestic corporation, or a limited liability company which has elected to be taxed as a corporation).
- Must have only one class of stock.
- Must not have more than 100 shareholders.
Limited Liability Company (LLC)
An LLC is a flexible form of enterprise that blends elements of partnership and corporate structures. It is a legal form of company that provides limited liability to its owners in the vast majority of United States jurisdictions. The primary characteristic an LLC shares with a corporation is limited liability, and the primary characteristic it shares with a partnership is the availability of pass-through income taxation. It is often more flexible than a corporation, and it is well-suited for companies with a single owner.
Nonprofit Organization
A nonprofit organization is an organization that uses surplus revenues to achieve its goals rather than distributing them as profit or dividends. While not-for-profit organizations are permitted to generate surplus revenues, they must be retained by the organization for its self-preservation, expansion, or plans.
6.3.2: The Process of Incorporation
Incorporating a business is the formation of a new corporation.
Learning Objective
Outline the process of incorporation
Key Points
- Corporations can raise capital from investors through the issuance of capital stock.
- Corporations are perpetual or durable.
- The process of incorporation in the United States varies from state to state.
Key Term
- incorporation
-
The act of incorporating, forming a corporation or the state of being incorporated.
Examples
- Suppose you decide to form a corporation to import and distribute shoes. For this, you will have to go to your state’s office to file the papers called a charter. This document should mention that it will import shoes from other countries and distribute them throughout the U.S. (place of business). To abide by the bylaws, you might decide to hold shareholder meetings every October 15 (after the fiscal year has ended).
- The papers should clearly state the distinct name of your business. For example you might want to name your business Dynamic Shoe Exporters Inc.
Incorporation is the formation of a new corporation. The corporation may be a business, a nonprofit organization, a sports club, or a government of a new city or town. Even though corporations are not people, they are recognized by the law to have rights and responsibilities like natural persons under the law. The articles of incorporation (also called a charter, certificate of incorporation or letters patent) are filed with the appropriate state office, listing the purpose of the corporation, its principal place of business and the number and type of shares of stock. A registration fee is due, which is usually between $25 and $1,000 depending on the state.
Usually, there are also corporate bylaws which must be filed with the state. Bylaws outline a number of important administrative details such as when annual shareholder meetings will be held, who can vote, and the manner in which shareholders will be notified if there is a need for an additional “special” meeting.
A corporation has a distinct name and it is generally made up of three parts: “distinctive element,” “descriptive element,” and a legal ending. All corporations must have a distinctive element, and in most filing jurisdictions, a legal ending to their names. Some corporations choose not to have a descriptive element. In the name “Tiger Computers, Inc.”, the word “Tiger” is the distinctive element; the word “Computers” is the descriptive element; and the “Inc.” is the legal ending. The legal ending indicates that it is, in fact, a legal corporation and not just a business registration or partnership. Incorporated, limited, and corporation, or their respective abbreviations (Inc., Ltd., Corp. ) are the possible legal endings in the U.S.
Legal Benefits
- Protection of personal assets: One of the most important legal benefits is the safeguarding of personal assets against the claims of creditors and lawsuits. Sole proprietors and general partners in a partnership are personally and jointly responsible for all the liabilities of a business such as loans, accounts payable, and legal judgments. In a corporation, however, stockholders, directors and officers typically are not liable for the company’s debts and obligations. They are limited in liability to the amount they have invested in the corporation. For example, if a shareholder purchased $100 in stock, no more than $100 can be lost. Corporations and limited liability companies (LLCs) may hold assets such as real estate, cars or boats. If a shareholder of a corporation is personally involved in a lawsuit or bankruptcy, these assets may be protected. A creditor of a shareholder of a corporation or LLC cannot seize the assets of the company. However, the creditor can seize ownership shares in the corporation, as they are considered a personal asset .
- Transferable ownership: Ownership in a corporation or LLC is easily transferable to others, either in whole or in part. Some state laws are particularly corporate-friendly. For example, the transfer of ownership in a corporation incorporated in Delaware is not required to be filed or recorded.
- Retirement funds: Retirement funds and qualified retirements plans, such as a 401(k), may be established more easily.
- Taxation: In the United States, corporations are taxed at a lower rate than individuals are. Also, they can own shares in other corporations and receive corporate dividends 80 percent tax-free. There are no limits on the amount of losses a corporation may carry forward to subsequent tax years. A sole proprietorship, on the other hand, cannot claim a capital loss greater than $3,000 unless the owner has offsetting capital gains.
- Raising funds through sale of stock: A corporation can easily raise capital from investors through the sale of stock.
- Durability: A corporation is capable of continuing indefinitely. Its existence is not affected by the death of shareholders, directors, or officers of the corporation.
- Credit rating: Regardless of an owner’s personal credit scores, a corporation can acquire its own credit rating, and build a separate credit history by applying for and using corporate credit.
6.3.3: Ownership of Corporations
A corporation is typically owned and controlled by its shareholders.
Learning Objective
Outline the structure of the ownership in corporations
Key Points
- In a joint-stock company the members are known as shareholders and their share in the ownership, control, and profits of the corporation is determined by their portion of shares.
- In some corporations, the legal document establishing the corporation or containing its rules determines the corporation’s membership.
- The day-to-day activities of a corporation are typically controlled by individuals appointed by the members.
Key Terms
- shareholder
-
One who owns shares of stock.
- committee
-
a group of persons convened for the accomplishment of some specific purpose, typically with formal protocols
Example
- A person can decide to become an owner in a company by investing in the company’s stock. For example, someone might choose to buy shares of Apple stock in the stock market. If that person bought a majority of shares in Apple (a company worth billions of dollars), he/she could even influence Apple’s business by voting in annual general meetings or becoming a board member. By acquiring a controlling interest in the company, a person could suggest product changes in board of directors committee meetings, and the company’s executives could choose to make those changes. If they did not, they could be fired by board members with the majority of votes.
A corporation is typically owned and controlled by its members. In a joint-stock company, the members are known as shareholders and their share in the ownership, control, and profits of the corporation is determined by their portion of shares. Thus, a person who owns a quarter of the shares of a joint-stock company owns a quarter of the company, is entitled to a quarter of the profit (or at least a quarter of the profit given to shareholders as dividends), and has a quarter of the votes that may be cast at general meetings.
In some corporations, the legal document establishing the corporation or containing its rules determines the corporation’s membership. Membership in this case depends on the corporation type. For instance, in a worker cooperative, people who work for the cooperative are members, while in a credit union, people who have credit union accounts are members.
The day-to-day activities of a corporation are typically controlled by individuals appointed by the members. In some cases, this will be a single individual, but more commonly, corporations are controlled by a committee or by committees. Broadly speaking, two kinds of committee structures exist.
A single committee or board of directors is the method favored in most common law countries. The board of directors is composed of both executive and non-executive directors. The latter are responsible for supervising the formers’ management of the company.
A two-tiered committee structure with a supervisory board and a managing board is common in civil law countries. Under this model, the executive directors sit on one committee while the non-executive directors sit on the other.
A Famous Investor
Warren Buffet is perhaps the world’s most famous investor. He owns many companies through his investment firm Berkshire Hathaway.
6.3.4: Structure of Corporations
Corporate structure consists of various departments and divisions that contribute to the company’s overall mission and goals.
Learning Objective
Break down a corporation in to its structural parts
Key Points
- Segments of corporate structure may consist of the marketing department, finance department, accounting department, human resource department, IT department, and the operational aspect of the particular company.
- A division of a business is a distinct part of the firm, however the company is legally responsible for all of the obligations and debts of each division.
- In a large organization, various parts of the business may be run by different subsidiaries, and a business division may include one or many subsidiaries.
Key Terms
- subsidiary
-
A company owned by the parent company or holding company
- IT
-
Information Technology: the use of computers and telecommunications equipment to store, retrieve, transmit, and manipulate data.
Corporate structure consists of various departments that contribute to the company’s overall mission and goals. The Marketing department is considered by some business professionals as the most important entity in the corporate structure. Without this department, sales or new customers cannot be realized. The Finance department is also vitally important, as it is responsible for acquiring capital used in running an organization. Other segments of corporate structure may consist of the Accounting department, HumanResources department, IT department, and the Operational aspect of the particular company. These main six corporate departments represent the major managing resources within a publicly traded company; though there are often smaller departments either within the major segments or in autonomous form.
Another way a corporate structure can be defined is by business divisions. A division of a business is a distinct part of the firm, however the company is legally responsible for all of the obligations and debts of each division. In a large organization, various parts of the business may be run by different subsidiaries, and a business division may include one or many subsidiaries. Each subsidiary is a separate legal entity owned by the primary business or by another subsidiary in the hierarchy. Often a division operates under a separate name and is the equivalent of a corporation or limited liability company that obtains a fictitious name or a “doing business as” certificate.
Hewlett Packard (HP) is a good example of a corporate structure including multiple divisions. The divisions of HP — e.g., the Printing & Multifunction division, the Handheld Devices division, the Servers division (mini and mainframe computers), et cetera — all use the HP brand name. However, Compaq (a part of HP since 2002) operates as a subsidiary, using the Compaq brand name.
Corporate Structure
Hewlett Packard is an example of a corporation with multiple divisions and subsidiaries.
Another example is Google. Google Video is a division of Google, and is part of the same corporate entity. However, the YouTube video service is a subsidiary of Google because it remains operated as YouTube, LLC — a separate business entity even though it is owned by Google.
6.3.5: Advantages of Corporations
Shareholders of a modern business corporation have limited liability for the corporation’s debts and obligations.
Learning Objective
List the advantages of corporations
Key Points
- Unlike a partnership or sole proprietorship, shareholders of a modern business corporation have limited liability for the corporation’s debts and obligations.
- Limited liability reduces the amount that a shareholder can lose in a company so it allows corporations to raise large amounts of finance for their enterprises by combining funds from many owners of stock.
- Another advantage is that the assets and structure of the corporation may continue beyond the lifetimes of its shareholders and bondholders.
Key Term
- shareholders
-
A shareholder or stockholder is an individual or institution (including a corporation) that legally owns a share of stock in a public or private corporation.
Examples
- When a person owns shares in a corporation, the losses cannot exceed the amount invested in the shares, which is called limited liability. For example, if you decide to invest $100,000 in a tech start up, but it goes bankrupt in a year and has debts of $1,000,000, you will only lose your $100,000 and the creditors cannot sue you for the $900,000 that they have lost.
- Also if there are other major shareholders in the company, and one of them dies, the business will still continue. The shares are likely to be inherited by relatives or other persons (according to the dead person’s will) and the company will continue its business.
Advantages of Corporations
Unlike a partnership or sole proprietorship, shareholders of a modern business corporation have limited liability for the corporation’s debts and obligations. As a result, their losses cannot exceed the amount which they contributed to the corporation as dues or payment for shares. This enables corporations to socialize their costs. Socializing a cost is to spread it to society in general. The economic rationale for this is that it allows anonymous trading in the shares of the corporation by eliminating the corporation’s creditors as a stakeholder in such a transaction. Without limited liability, a creditor would probably not allow any share to be sold to a buyer at least as creditworthy as the seller.
Limited liability reduces the amount that a shareholder can lose in a company so it allows corporations to raise large amounts of finance for their enterprises by combining funds from many stock owners. This increases the attraction to potential shareholders and increases both the number of willing shareholders and the amount they are likely to invest.
However, some jurisdictions also permit another type of corporation, in which shareholders’ liability is unlimited, for example the unlimited liability corporation in two provinces of Canada, and the unlimited company in the United Kingdom.
Another advantage is that the assets and structure of the corporation may continue beyond the lifetimes of its shareholders and bondholders. This allows stability and the accumulation of capital, which is then available for investment in larger and longer-lasting projects than if the corporate assets were subject to dissolution and distribution. This was also important in medieval times, when land donated to the Church (a corporation) would not generate the feudal fees that a lord could claim upon a landholder’s death. However, a corporation can be dissolved by a government authority, putting an end to its existence as a legal entity. But this usually only happens if the company breaks the law. For example, it it fails to meet annual filing requirements or, in certain circumstances, if the company requests dissolution.
Welcoming Facebook
Facebook was able to raise $16 billion when it decided to offer shares to the public.
6.3.6: Disadvantages of Corporations
In many countries, corporate profits are taxed at a corporate tax rate, and dividends paid to shareholders are taxed at a separate rate — double taxation.
Learning Objective
List the disadvantages of corporations
Key Points
- In other systems, dividends are taxed at a lower rate than other income (for example, in the US) or shareholders are taxed directly on the corporation’s profits and dividends are not taxed.
- Another disadvantage of corporations is that, as Adam Smith pointed out in the Wealth of Nations, when ownership is separated from management, the latter will inevitably begin to neglect the interests of the former, creating dysfunction within the company.
- The fees and legal costs required to form a corporation may be substantial, especially if the business is just being started and the corporation is low on financial resources.
Key Term
- double taxation
-
Double taxation is the levying of tax by two or more jurisdictions on the same declared income (in the case of income taxes), asset (in the case of capital taxes), or financial transaction (in the case of sales taxes). This double liability is often mitigated by tax treaties between countries.
Examples
- You decide to set up a corporation and have a profit of $1,000,000 in the first year. Suppose the government taxes corporate profits at 30%, then the corporation has to pay $300,000 in taxes. It is decided that $500,000 will be distributed as dividends and the dividend tax is 10%, so you will lose a further $50,000 to the government when you file your personal taxes. This is the concept of double taxation: first the company was taxed for its profits, and later shareholders were taxed for their dividends.
- Also when you hire managers to run your company, they might decide to give themselves bonuses of $200,000 supposedly to increase performance. It will be very hard for you to determine if these bonuses were justified or not and if it was in the best interests of the company. This is the disadvantage of separated ownership.
In many countries, corporate profits are taxed at a corporate tax rate, and dividends paid to shareholders are taxed at a separate rate. Such a system is sometimes referred to as “double taxation”, because any profits distributed to shareholders will eventually be taxed twice.
One solution to this (as in the case of the Australian and UK tax systems) is for the recipient of the dividend to be entitled to a tax credit, which addresses the fact that the profits represented by the dividend have already been taxed. The company profit being passed on is therefore effectively only taxed at the rate of tax paid by the eventual recipient of the dividend.
In other systems, dividends are taxed at a lower rate than other income (for example, in the US) or shareholders are taxed directly on the corporation’s profits and dividends are not taxed. For example, S corporations in the US do not pay any federal income taxes. Instead, the corporation’s income or losses are divided among and passed through to its shareholders. The shareholders must then report the income or loss on their own individual income tax returns.
Another disadvantage of corporations is that, as Adam Smith pointed out in the Wealth of Nations, when ownership is separated from management (i.e. the actual production process required to obtain the capital), the latter will inevitably begin to neglect the interests of the former, creating dysfunction within the company. Some maintain that recent events in corporate America may serve to reinforce Smith’s warnings about the dangers of legally-protected, collectivist hierarchies.
The fees and legal costs required to form a corporation may be substantial, especially if the business is just being started and the corporation is low on financial resources.
Leeman Brothers’ Collapse
The management of Leeman Brothers was involved in presenting a misleading picture of the company which collapsed in 2008.
6.4: Special Forms of Ownership
6.4.1: S-Corporations (S-Corps)
S corporations elect to pass corporate income, losses, deductions, and credit through to their shareholders for federal tax purposes.
Learning Objective
Describe the characteristics of an S corporation
Key Points
- In terms of federal income taxation, S corporations resemble partnerships in that income, deductions, and tax credits flow through annually to shareholders, regardless of whether distributions are made.
- Payments are distributed to S shareholders tax-free to the extent that the distributed earnings were not previously taxed.
- Unlike a C corporation, an S corporation is not eligible for a dividends received deduction, nor is it subject to the ten percent of taxable income limitation applicable to charitable contribution deductions.
Key Terms
- S corporation
-
a legal designation of companies that elect to pass income, losses, deductions, and credit through to their shareholders for federal tax purposes
- shareholder
-
One who owns shares of stock.
- C Corporations
-
any corporation that, under United States federal income tax law, is taxed separately from its owners
- dividends
-
Dividends are payments made by a corporation to its shareholder members. It is the portion of corporate profits paid out to stockholders.
Examples
- Example (from Wikipedia)
- Widgets Inc, an S-Corp, makes $10,000,000 in net income (before payroll) in 2006 and is owned 51% by Bob and 49% by John. Keeping it simple, Bob and John both draw salaries of $94,200 (which is the Social Security Wage Base for 2006, after which no further Social Security tax is owed).
- Employee salaries are subject to FICA tax (Social Security & Medicare tax) –currently 13.3 percent–(4.2% Social Security paid by the employee; 6.2% Social Security paid by the employer; 1.45% employee medicare and 1.45% employer medicare). The distribution of the additional profits from the S corporation will be done without any further FICA tax liability.
- If for some reason, Bob (as the majority owner) was to decide not to distribute the money, both Bob and John would still owe taxes on their pro-rata allocation of business income, even though neither received any cash distribution. To avoid this “phantom income” scenario, S corporations commonly use shareholder agreements that stipulate at least enough distribution must be made for shareholders to pay the taxes on their distributive shares.
- Quarterly estimated taxes must be paid by the individual to avoid tax penalties, even if this income is “phantom income”.
S corporations elect to pass corporate income, losses, deductions, and credit through to their shareholders for federal tax purposes. S status combines the legal environment of C corporations with partnership-like federal income taxation.
Like a C corporation, an S corporation is generally subject to the laws of the state in which it is organized. However, in the manner of a partnership, an S corporation’s income, deductions, and tax credits flow through annually to shareholders, regardless of whether distributions are made. Thus, income is taxed at the shareholder level and not at the corporate level, and payments are distributed to S shareholders tax-free to the extent that the distributed earnings were not previously taxed.
Certain corporate penalty taxes (e.g., accumulated earnings tax, personal holding company tax) and the alternative minimum tax do not apply to an S corporation. Unlike a C corporation, an S corporation is not eligible for a dividends received deduction, nor is it subject to the ten percent of taxable income limitation applicable to charitable contribution deductions.
In order to be eligible for S corporation status, a corporation must meet certain requirements:
- Be an eligible entity (a domestic corporation, or a limited liability company which has elected to be taxed as a corporation)
- Have only one class of stock
- Have no more than 100 shareholders
- Spouses are automatically treated as a single shareholder. Families, defined as individuals descended from a common ancestor, plus spouses and former spouses of either the common ancestor or anyone lineally descended from that person, are considered a single shareholder as long as any family member elects such treatment.
- Shareholders must be U.S. citizens or residents and natural persons, so corporate shareholders and partnerships are generally excluded. However, certain trusts, estates, and tax-exempt corporations, notably 501(c)(3) corporations, are permitted to be shareholders.
- Profits and losses must be allocated to shareholders proportionately to each one’s interest in the business.
Pieter Brueghel the Younger, Paying the Tax (The Tax Collector)
S corporations are not burdened with double taxation.
6.4.2: Limited Liability Companies (LLCs)
An LLC is a hybrid business entity which has characteristics of both a corporation and a partnership, or sole proprietorship in some cases.
Learning Objective
Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of limited liability companies
Key Points
- The primary characteristic an LLC shares with a corporation is limited liability, and the primary characteristic it shares with a partnership is the availability of pass-through income taxation (i.e. no double taxation).
- An LLC is often more flexible than a corporation, and it is well-suited for companies with a single owner.
- There are a number of advantages and disadvantages associated with LLCs, and many of the specific advantages and disadvantages relate to certain states and districts.
Key Term
- double taxation
-
Double taxation is the levying of tax by two or more jurisdictions on the same declared income (in the case of income taxes), asset (in the case of capital taxes), or financial transaction (in the case of sales taxes). This double liability is often mitigated by tax treaties between countries.
Example
- If you decide to set up an LLC, your liability depends on the amount you have invested. For example, you invest $100,000 into your business but it goes through tough times after a year and you decide to close. Before you close the business you may have to pay your creditors. But they can only make claims up to $100,000 (your original investment). If this amount does not satisfy the creditors, they cannot take away your personal property to settle the debt. This could happen if your liabilities were unlimited. Alternately, if you make profits after some time, they have the provision of not being taxed twice. For tax purposes, an LLC can be registered as a partnership or sole proprietorship (and a corporation even though it is not a corporation for other purposes). If you register your LLC as a sole proprietorship or a partnership, you will not have to pay federal taxes on your income.
Limited Liability Companies (LLCs)
A limited liability company (LLC) is a hybrid business entity that has characteristics of both a corporation and a partnership (or sole proprietorship depending on how many owners). An LLC, although a business entity, is a type of unincorporated association and is not a corporation (calling it a limited liability corporation is incorrect). The primary characteristic an LLC shares with a corporation is limited liability, and the primary characteristic it shares with a partnership is the availability of pass-through income taxation (i.e. no double taxation). It is often more flexible than a corporation, and it is well-suited for companies with a single owner.
Membership interests in LLCs and partnership interests are also afforded a significant level of protection through the charging order mechanism. The charging order limits the creditor of a debtor-partner or a debtor-member to the debtor’s share of distributions, without conferring any voting or management rights on the creditor. Limited liability company members may, in certain circumstances, also incur a personal liability in cases where distributions to members render the LLC insolvent.
Advantages
Some advantages of LLCs include the following:
- choice of tax regime: an LLC can choose to be taxed as a sole proprietor, partnership, S or C corporation;
- much less administrative paperwork and record keeping than a corporation;
- pass-through taxation (i.e., no double taxation), unless the LLC elects to be taxed as a C corporation;
- less risk to be stolen by fire-sale acquisitions (more protection against hungry investors).
Disadvantages
Some disadvantages of LLCs are listed below.
State laws regarding stock corporations are very well developed and provide for a variety of governance and protective provisions for the corporation and its shareholders. However, most states do not dictate detailed governance and protective provisions for the members of a limited liability company. Thus, in the absence of such statutory provisions, the members of an LLC must establish governance and protective provisions pursuant to an operating agreement or similar governing document.
It may be more difficult to raise financial capital for an LLC as investors may be more comfortable investing funds in the better-understood corporate form with a view toward an eventual IPO.
Many jurisdictions levy a franchise tax or capital values tax on LLCs. In essence, this franchise or business privilege tax is the fee the LLC pays the state for the benefit of limited liability. The amount of the franchise tax can be based on the following:
- revenue,
- profits,
- number of owners,
- amount of capital employed in the state.
There can also be some combination of the above factors, or simply a flat fee.
YouTube Headquarters
A famous company that started out as an LLC is YouTube.
6.4.3: Publicly Held Corporations
Government-owned companies are either partially or fully owned by a government and have both a distinct legal form and commercial presence.
Learning Objective
Distinguish between a state-owned enterprise, government-linked company, and quasi-governmental organization
Key Points
- There are many possible levels of government involvement in publicly-owned companies. Governments can fully or partially own a company as well as own regular stock.
- While they may also have public policy objectives, publicly-owned companies are differentiated from other forms of government agencies or state entities established to pursue purely non-financial objectives.
- Government-linked companies and quasi-governmental organizations also provide ways for government to be involved in corporations, either through a holding company or through government funding.
Key Terms
- quasi-governmental organization
-
A corporation, business or agency that is regarded by national laws and regulations as being under the guidance of the government, but also separate from the government.
- state-owned enterprise
-
A legal entity created by a government to undertake commercial activities on behalf of an owner government.
- government-linked company
-
A private or public corporate entity in which an existing government owns a stake through a holding company.
Example
- Amtrack is an example of a publicly owned corporation that was started in 1971 to provide inter-city rail transport in the US. It is partially owned by the government because all its preferred stock is under government ownership while its common stock is held by the public. Its board of directors is appointed by the government.
There is no standard definition of a publicly-owned corporation or state-owned enterprise (SOE), although the two terms can be used interchangeably. Their defining characteristics are their distinct legal form, and their operation in commercial affairs. While they may also have public policy objectives, SOEs are different from other government entities established to pursue purely non-financial objectives.
State-owned enterprises can be fully or partially owned by the government. However, the line beyond which a corporation must be considered “state-owned” is unclear, as governments can also own regular stock and have no special influence over business. For example, in 2007 the Chinese Investment Corporation agreed to acquire a 10% interest in the global investment bank Morgan Stanley, but it is unlikely that this would qualify the latter as a government-owned corporation. SOEs are often the result of corporatization, a process in which government agencies are re-organized as semi-autonomous corporate entities.
The term government-linked company (GLC) is sometimes used to refer to private or public corporate entities in which an existing government owns a stake through a holding company. There are multiple ways of defining GLCs, depending on the proportion of the corporate entity a government owns. One rationale for calling a company a GLC is whether or not a government owns an effective controlling interest (>50%); another possible definition defines as a GLC any corporate entity that has a government as a shareholder.
Fannie Mae Headquarters
Fannie Mae was created by the US government to expand the secondary mortgage market.
A quasi-governmental organization is a corporation, business or agency that is regarded by national laws and regulations as being under the guidance of the government, but also separate from the government. While they may receive some revenue from charging customers for services, these organizations are often at least partially funded by the government. Sometimes they are even propped up with cash infusions in times of crisis to help offset situations that would bankrupt a normal privately owned business.
A notable example of an SOE is the Saudi national oil company, Saudi Aramco, which the Saudi government bought in 1988. The Saudi government also owns and operates Saudi Arabian Airlines, as well as many other companies.
6.4.4: Nonprofit Organizations (NPOs)
A nonprofit organization is an organization that uses surplus revenues to achieve goals rather than to distribute them as profit or dividends.
Learning Objective
Describe the types of nonprofit organizations, as well as their legal aspects and organizational goals
Key Points
- While not-for-profit organizations are permitted to generate surplus revenues, they must be retained by the organization for its self-preservation, expansion, or for other plans.
- The two major types of nonprofit organizations are membership and board-only. A membership organization elects the board, has regular meetings, and the power to amend the bylaws. A board-only organization typically has a self-selected board.
- Some NPOs may also be a charity or service organization; they may be organized as a not-for-profit corporation or as a trust, a cooperative, or they exist informally.
Key Terms
- nonprofit corporation
-
a company that uses surplus revenues to achieve its goals rather than distributing them as profit or dividends
- revenues
-
In business, revenue or turnover is income that a company receives from its normal business activities, usually from the sale of goods and services to customers.
Examples
- Feed The Children is an international, nonprofit relief organization with headquarters in Oklahoma City, Oklahoma. They deliver food, medicine, clothing and other necessities to individuals, children, and families who lack these essentials due to famine, war, poverty, or natural disasters (official web site description). In FY 2011, Feed The Children distributed more than 104 million pounds of food and other essentials to children and their families in all 50 states and internationally (official web site).
- It gets its revenues from pledges of cash and gifts-in kind from corporate and individual donors, according to its annual report in 2011. Its web site lists 5 members in its board of directors to direct its activities. Its surplus revenue is used to help needy children, as mentioned in the above paragraph.
Nonprofit Organizations
A nonprofit organization (NPO) is an organization that uses surplus revenues to achieve its goals rather than to distribute them as profit or dividends. While not-for-profit organizations are permitted to generate surplus revenues, they must be retained by the organization for its self-preservation, expansion, or for other plans. NPOs have controlling members or boards. Many have paid staff, including management, while others employ unpaid volunteers and even executives who work with or without compensation (occasionally nominal). Where there is a token fee, in general, it is used to meet legal requirements for establishing a contract between the executive and the organization. The extent to which an NPO can generate surplus revenues may be constrained, or use of surplus revenues may be restricted.
The two major types of nonprofit organizations are membership and board-only. A membership organization elects the board and has regular meetings and power to amend the bylaws. A board-only organization typically has a self-selected board, and a membership whose powers are limited to those delegated to it by the board. A board-only organization’s bylaws may even state that the organization does not have any membership, although the organization’s literature may refer to its donors as members; examples of such organizations are Fairvote and the National Organization for the Reform of Marijuana Laws.
Nature and Goals
Some NPOs may also be a charity or service organization; they may be organized as a not-for-profit corporation or as a trust, a cooperative, or they exist informally. A very similar type of organization termed a supporting organization operates like a foundation, but they are more complicated to administer, hold a more favorable tax status, and are restricted in the public charities they support.
Legal Aspects
NPOs have a wide diversity of structures and purposes. For legal classification, there are some elements of importance:
- Economic activity,
- Supervision and management provisions,
- Representation,
- Accountability and auditing provisions,
- Provisions for the amendment of the statutes or articles of incorporation,
- Provisions for the dissolution of the entity,
- Tax status of corporate and private donors,
- Tax status of the foundation.
Some of the above must be, in most jurisdictions, expressed in the charter of establishment. Others may be provided by the supervising authority at each particular jurisdiction.
While affiliations will not affect a legal status, they may be taken into consideration by legal proceedings as an indication of purpose.
Most countries have laws which regulate the establishment and management of NPOs and require compliance with corporate governance regimes. Most larger organizations are required to publish their financial reports detailing their income and expenditure publicly. In many aspects, they are similar to corporate business entities though there are often significant differences. Both not-for-profit and for-profit corporate entities must have board members, steering committee members, or trustees who owe the organization a fiduciary duty of loyalty and trust. A notable exception to this involves churches, which are often not required to disclose finances to anyone, including church members.
American Cancer Society Offices in Washington D.C.
The American Cancer Society (ACS) is a nationwide voluntary health organization dedicated to eliminating cancer.
6.5: Franchising
6.5.1: Types of Franchises
There are three major types of franchises – business format, product, and manufacturing – and each operates in a different way.
Learning Objective
List the different types of franchises
Key Points
- A business format franchise is a franchising arrangement where the franchisor provides the franchisee with an established business, including name and trademark, for the franchisee to run independently.
- A product franchise is a franchising agreement where manufacturers allow retailers to distribute products and use names and trademarks.
- A manufacturing franchise is a franchising agreement where the franchisor allows a manufacturer to produce and sell products using its name and trademark.
Key Term
- franchise
-
The authorization granted by a company to sell or distribute its goods or services in a certain area.
Example
- Generally, The Coca Cola Company only produces syrup concentrate. This is then sold to bottlers around the world, who finish the product by adding water and distributing it to retail stores, restaurants, and food service distributors.
Types of Franchises
While there are many ways to differentiate between different types of franchises (size, geographic location, etc), we will be looking at how different franchisors allow franchisees to use their name. On this basis, there are three different types of franchise:
- Business format franchises
- Product franchises
- Manufacturing franchises
Business Format Franchises
In business format franchises (which are the most common type), a company expands by supplying independent business owners with an established business, including its name and trademark. The franchiser company generally assists the independent owners considerably in launching and running their businesses. In return, the business owners pay fees and royalties. In most cases, the franchisee also buys supplies from the franchiser. Fast food restaurants are good examples of this type of franchise. Prominent examples include McDonalds , Burger King, and Pizza Hut.
McDonalds
McDonalds is perhaps the most famous franchise in the world.
Product Franchises
With product franchises, manufactures control how retail stores distribute their products. Through this kind of agreement, manufacturers allow retailers to distribute their products and to use their names and trademarks. To obtain these rights, store owners must pay fees or buy a minimum amount of products. Tire stores, for example, operate under this kind of franchise agreement.
Manufacturing Franchises
Through manufacturing franchises, a franchiser grants a manufacturer the right to produce and sell goods using its name and trademark. This type of franchise is common among food and beverage companies. For example, soft drink bottlers often obtain franchise rights from soft drink companies to produce, bottle, and distribute soft drinks. The major soft drink companies also sell the supplies to the regional manufacturing franchises. In the case of Coca Cola, for example, Coca Cola sells the syrup concentrate to a bottling company, who mixes these ingredients with water and bottles the product, and sells it on.
6.5.2: Advantages of Franchises
A franchise agreement can have many benefits for both the franchisor and the franchisee.
Learning Objective
Discuss the advantages of participating in a franchise
Key Points
- Benefits to the franchisor include regular royalty payments, expansion with reduced financial risk, and a greater geographical presence.
- Franchisee benefits include lower risk, lower startup costs, existing brand recognition, and parent company marketing support.
- Potential franchisees can select a franchise based on their location, interests, resources, and needs, which means that entering into a franchising arrangement can be a flexible process.
- – Royalty payments
- Franchisee benefits include:
- – Higher chance of success due to tried and tested business model
- – Franchisor support, training and expertise
- – Brand recognition and national marketing
Key Terms
- franchisor
-
a company or person that authorizes another to sell or distribute its goods or services in a certain area
- royalty
-
Regular payment made from the franchisee to the franchisor for the right to be a franchisee.
Example
- In the United States, the McDonalds Corporation owns only approximately 15% of McDonalds restaurants nationwide. The rest are operated through franchise and joint venture agreements, with profits being made through franchise fees and marketing fees, and at times through rent, as often the franchisee does not own the location of the restaurant.
Benefits for the Franchisor
Franchisors benefit from franchise agreements because they allow companies to expand much more quickly than they could otherwise. A lack of funds and workers can cause a company to grow slowly. Through franchising, a company invests very little capital or labor because the franchisee supplies both. The parent company experiences rapid growth with little financial risk.
A company can also ensure it has competent and highly motivated owners and managers at each outlet through franchising. Since the owners are largely responsible for the success of their outlets, they will put in a strong and constant effort to make sure their businesses run smoothly and prosper. In addition, companies are able to provide franchising rights to only qualified people.
Other benefits include:
- Franchising allows a business to have an international presence.
- Franchisors can experience economies of scale.
- Franchisors can benefit from growth without worrying about running costs.
- Franchisors receive royalty payments that are set as a percentage of profits.
Benefits for the Franchisee
The franchisee also has numerous advantages that come from entering a franchising agreement, including:
– There is a low risk due to the tried and tested formula. Buying a franchise business provides a higher chance for success. They get the benefit of owning a proven business formula that has been tested and shown to work well in other locations. In addition, they receive the support from the main company toward establishing the business, and the training to operate it successfully.
– There are lower start-up costs since the business idea was already developed.
– They are buying a name and brand that is recognized by the public. So they have a big advantage over starting a business from scratch, as they already have an established customer base.
– A franchise gives more security from the beginning. New independent businesses are known to have as high as a 90% failure rate, often causing the business owner heavy losses and at times bankruptcy.
– When you start a business from scratch, you spend huge amounts of time trying to operate the business without being successful because you may not have the necessary skills for that particular area. When you purchase a franchise, all the necessary groundwork has been done already. In addition, the franchisee gets training and head office support from the franchisor; this may be essential if the franchisee is new to running a business and has no experience or business knowledge.
– The franchisee gets the support of national marketing which a small business would not normally be able to afford. In some cases of larger brands, they may have customers waiting for their doors to open (for example in a new McDonalds).
– Since all the product selection and the marketing have been already developed, you simply have to take care of the daily operations of the business. Your goal will be to grow from an established foundation and expand from there.
– The new franchise owner gains many benefits from the association with the main franchise company. The franchisor offers a great deal of business experience that would take years for the average business person to acquire .
Pizza Hut Franchise
Franchisees gain many benefits from being a franchisee rather than starting their own business from scratch.
– There are a lot of part-time franchising opportunities, which are perfect if someone has a small amount to invest and wants to support themselves and maintain their investment. They may be able to sell the franchise to someone else once they no longer wish to run it.
6.5.3: Disadvantages of Franchises
A franchise agreement can also have disadvantages for both the franchisor and the franchisee.
Learning Objective
Discuss the disadvantages of participating in a franchise
Key Points
- Disadvantages to franchisors include a lack of control over franchisees, reputational risks, and slow growth through franchising compared to mergers and acquisitions.
- Disadvantages to franchisees include high costs and royalty payments, strict product rules, and other start up challenges.
- Entering into an agreement with an interested franchisor is important. Uninterested franchisors will not provide adequate support, and are only interested in collecting fees and payments from franchisees.
- Franchisee disadvantages may include:
- – High entry costs, which include fees and start-up capital, and ongoing royalty fees
- – Lack of support from uninterested franchisors
- – Lack of flexibility in how to trade, as well as where to locate
Key Term
- uninterested franchisors
-
Franchisors that have little interest in the actual success of the franchise, and more interest in collecting fees from franchisees.
Example
- In the early 2000’s, the popularity of Krispy Kreme donuts increased rapidly, leading to a huge increase in the number of franchises. However, poor policies on the part of the main company led to struggling franchisees: huge growth led to market saturation and a weakening of the brand as franchisees were found everywhere from malls to gas stations (whereas the original appeal was as a delicacy); Krispy Kreme forced franchisees to buy equipment at very high mark-ups, weakening the franchisee profits. Thus, the company’s focus was on profits through fees and sales to franchisees rather than royalty payments.
Disadvantages to the Franchisor:
Of course, no business arrangement is without potential risks and disadvantages. While there are many advantages for the franchisor in entering a franchising agreement, some of the potential risks are:
– Difficult to control activities of franchisees: In any franchise agreement (particularly when there is geographical separation between the franchisor and the franchisee), it can be difficult to control the activities of the franchisee and ensure that their activities are up to standard.
– Huge risk in reputation by allowing other businesses to use their names: if a franchisee does not live up to the quality standards of the franchisor (cleanliness, customer service, pricing, quality of product, etc.), this can have a negative reputational effect not just on the franchisee, but on the broader reputation of the franchisor as well. Thus, there is a risk in allowing others not directly connected to the business to use the business name and trademark.
– Not as quick a method of growth as mergers or acquisitions: M&A allows companies to expand very rapidly, whereas entering into franchising agreements means that the franchisor enters agreements with numerous individuals over time, and has to wait for them to start up and begin operations (instead of taking over existing operations). This method of expansion can be slow.
Disadvantages to the Franchisee
– High entry and ongoing cost: It can be more expensive to start a franchise than an independent business. You can open your own burger bar for the fraction of the cost of buying the rights to a McDonald’s franchise. Thus, franchising is often an option open only to already wealthy businessmen.
– Franchisees have to pay a significant percentage of their revenues to the franchisor: On top of the upfront money needed to start a franchise, the franchisee must pay fees and royalties to the franchisor. The franchise fee may range anywhere from $5,000 to over $1 million and hence can be a major expenditure for the franchisee. Royalties are paid periodically during the life of the franchise agreement. They are either a percentage of an outlet’s gross income—usually under 10 percent of an outlet’s gross income—or a fixed fee.
– Other franchise costs: In addition to royalties and payments, the franchisee may be required to buy certain items from the franchisor like computer systems and software.
– Uninterested franchisors: Some franchisors may have little interest in their franchisee’s success and may be more interested in just collecting the fees associated with the franchise. Thus, support and marketing may not be adequately provided.
– Strict product rules: Franchisees experience less flexibility to use their own initiative due to restraints from the franchisor. Franchisees can only sell the products of the franchise, and they may be tied into a national brand with a strict set of instructions about how they should trade.
– Start up challenges: The franchisee may have to find or build the right location, hire and train staff and install equipment. This may be difficult for someone with limited business skills just starting out.
Closed shop
Franchisees face risks and disadvantages that may jeopardize their ability to stay open.
Franchise costs vary to some extent because of costs associated with different kinds of businesses and with different locations. For example, a person who wishes to open a franchised employment service operation, such as Talent Force, based in Atlanta, Georgia, can get away with as little as a $7,500 fee, plus one year’s starting capital investment of $50,000 to $110,000. On the other hand, start-up costs for a company like J.O.B.S., based in Clearwater, Florida, can be as little as $45,000, including a $30,000 franchise fee.
6.5.4: Working from Home or Online
Home franchise operations have made franchising more accessible and affordable than ever, but still require knowledge and expertise.
Learning Objective
Assess the factors driving the increase of home-based franchises
Key Points
- Home based franchising allows those who do not have the resources to become traditional franchisees to get involved, due to the fact that there is no need to invest in a dedicated business space (lower cost), as well as increased flexibility.
- This reduced cost is an advantage to both the franchisor and the franchisee.
- There are still risks involved with home based franchising: franchisees must choose opportunities that they are suited for, based on their skills and expertise, as well as based on the local market.
Key Term
- home based franchise
-
Home based franchises are ways of affiliating with organizations and working from home, often involving less investment than traditional franchises, sometimes even needing little more than a computer with an Internet connection.
Example
- According to Entrepreneur Magazine (entrepreneur.com), the #1 home based franchise of 2012 was Servpro, an insurance/disaster restoration and cleaning service. Start-up costs for new franchisees are in the range of $130,000 – $180,000. However, #2 on the list is Stratus Building Solutions, a cleaning company, with start-up costs of just $3,000 – $58,000. Thus, even among home based franchises, start up costs can vary greatly.
One important factor leading to the record number of franchises in recent years is the proliferation of home based franchise opportunities. This has made franchising accessible to a wider group of people. Previously, franchising a business meant that a franchisee would need to come up with a huge cash investment. This was mainly to cover the franchise payment and to establish a real store or business office, as directed by the business agreement. In some cases, this franchise fee is actually dwarfed in size by the cost of the volume needed for the business area.
Because of enormous charges in traditional franchise companies, very few people meet the expense needed to become franchise owners. With home based opportunities, you clear away the need to invest in a real business space by using your present home as a base of operations instead. With a computer and an Internet connection, people are often ready to begin.
Working From Home
Often, your office could be your own home, and your laptop your main asset.
Despite the advantages introduced by home based operation opportunities, a new business owner should not take the responsibilities and decisions lightly. You might have almost all the elements of operating and marketing your franchise–however that does not mean that you can just going to sit back and let the system do all of the work for you. Franchising a successful home business does not necessarily promise that you will always be profitable. In fact, even experienced businesspeople can fail with a successful franchise when they do not choose the right home based opportunity.
In considering franchises, you should see if you are well-suited to particular franchise options by determining your areas of expertise. Decide if your skill set is going to be an asset to the business. Thorough and honest assessment should guide which opportunities you consider, and you should explore your weaknesses as well. If you feel there are certain aspects of the franchise which may be hindrances to your success, then skip those, even if the opportunity is otherwise tempting. For example, if you have been an avid angler all your life, you should consider home based fishing franchise prospects. This can include things like selling fishing gear and other fishing related items on the internet or offering your services as a local fishing tour guide. But if you hate the idea of fishing, that one will probably not be right for you.
6.5.5: Technology in Franchises
Advances in technology benefits franchisors, franchisees, and the end customers.
Learning Objective
Give examples of how franchises are using technology to improve business performance
Key Points
- New technologies, such as greater connectivity, mobile apps, and cloud technology, means that franchisors can spend less time on training and support and focus on value-creating initiatives.
- New technologies, such as the Pulsar Call Management Software adopted by Pop-A-Lock, allow franchisees to better serve customers and meet their needs.
- Being ahead of the technological curve also allows franchisees to outdo their competitors in their local market. Support from the franchisor in this respect means the franchisee does not have to adopt and learn how to use new technologies by themselves.
Key Term
- cloud
-
Regarded as an amorphous omnipresent space for processing and storage on the Internet; the focus of cloud computing.
Example
- Pop-A-Lock’s adoption of T.I.M.E.S allowed users to submit data for consideration immediately, cutting down processing time and ensuring an up to date collection of data at all times. This helped franchisees compete more effectively against rivals.
Dave Materson, Chief Technology Officer of a franchise company in West Palm Beach, Florida believes that new technology benefits those who train franchisees, the franchisees themselves, as well as their customers. Here’s what he has to say about technology and franchises:
“Put our franchisees in the mix and tech “ease of use” shines through in a pronounced way. Our people are subjected to so many pulls at their time, the new technology available can really make a difference. Being able to price and schedule your work from any location is a dream come true. Could this be any easier than with a tablet computer? No way! Storing files in the cloud for accessibility anywhere on any device is wonderful. Posting to social media in real time with pictures, links and information solidifies the belief that each franchisee should “be the expert” in their local market. And we at the Corporate Office are delighted for two reasons. We don’t have to train people on how to use the tools; technology has given us a big lead-in for this task. Most importantly, we DO get to teach how use of the tools is beneficial to their business. We distribute information as to what our collective group finds successful. We focus more on the business of business instead of the buttons and gadgets that for years were the root of so much frustration for new franchisees. “
Franchisees are using technology in various ways. Here are just a few.
Saladworks
In the first quarter of 2010, Saladworks released three new technological advances for the franchise and its customers.
- MySaladworks 2.0 – upgraded company intranet
- FreshCart – new online ordering system
- iPhone App – mobile ordering app available for the iPhone, iPod Touch, and iPad.
Pop-a-Lock
In 2005 Pop-A-Lock adopted the use of the Pulsar Call Management Software platform to assist in performing its dispatch functions. Pulsar is utilized to receive initial information from customers concerning their issues, regulates pricing of service based on standard pricing practices and local franchisee SOP and perform back office functions for payroll and billing.
Pop-A-Lock utilizes T-Mobile as a corporate sustaining partner to provide phone, Blackberry and Internet services in many franchise markets. The franchise does use other phone providers based on specific coverage needs and the desires of the local franchisee.
The T.I.M.E.S (Technical Information Management and Exchange System) was adopted for Pop-A-Lock in 2007 from many other Locksmith companies in order to provide a computer based reference system for Locksmith information including Key Generation procedures, Installation Instructions and other technical information. The TIMES program utilizes an interactive system which allows users to submit data for consideration immediately in order to maintain the most current collection of data possible.
Question from Top New Franchises: What role does technology play in your organization?
Answer from Robyn Elman: A big one! To compete in any business, being technologically savvy has its advantages. From mobile email and texting, to social media, to using the right software & phone systems. By staying on top of all the latest technology, we have not only been able to make the lives of our clients easier (making them even more satisfied with our company and services,) but have been able to out-compete other companies in the industry who aren’t as familiar or comfortable with the newest trends. If any franchisee is lacking in skills in any of these areas, we provide additional (free) training until they are comfortable and excited about what new technology has to offer them.
Technology in franchises
The use of new technologies, such as social media, apps, and smartphone connectivity, can help franchisees and franchisors to get the most out of their business.
6.5.6: Trends in Franchises: Growth
Franchising grew greatly in 2001 to 2005, before stagnating and following the growth trend of the rest of the economy in the years that followed.
Learning Objective
Identify the latest market trends happening in the franchising sector
Key Points
- The franchising sector outgrew most other sections of the US economy between 2001 to 2005, growing 41% compared to other businesses’ growth of 26% over that period.
- Following 2005, growth stagnated. Although the International Franchise Association (IFA) predicts a revival in 2012, recent history shows that these predictions are questionable.
- Franchisers must not repeat the mistakes of the past, when franchise growth was driven by an excess of debt accumulation. It may be necessary to be more selective about choosing potential franchisees.
- Ultimately, an honest appraisal of the state of the franchising industry and the “good ‘ole days” is required.
Key Term
- franchise
-
The authorization granted by a company to sell or distribute its goods or services in a certain area.
Trends in Franchising
From 2001 to 2005, the franchising sector grew at a faster pace than many other sectors of the U.S. economy . Direct economic output expanded by over 41% from $625 billion to $881 billion, while economic output of other businesses grew by 26%, from $16 trillion to $20.1 trillion. Employment generated by franchised businesses grew by 12.6%, from 9.79 million to 11 million, compared to 3.5% for all businesses, from 132 million to 136.7 million. Payroll generated by franchised businesses grew 21.6% compared to 15.4% for all businesses.
McDonald’s Franchise
Franchising is the practice of using another firm’s successful business model.
The International Franchise Association reported that 2012 would be the year that franchising rebounds. In its Franchise Business Economic Outlook for 2012, the IFA stated, “after three years of restrained growth, due to the recession and its lingering effects, franchise businesses show signs of recovery in the year ahead. ” The IFA went on to state that “franchise business growth has been restrained over the past three years due to underlying factors, such as the weak rebound in consumer spending, that have been a drag on the economy as a whole. In addition, tighter credit standards have limited the formation of new franchise small businesses and the expansion of existing businesses. “
Every six months the IFA puts out a statement about how the tight lending standards are retarding the growth of franchising. While that is undoubtedly true, it would be helpful to learn exactly what the IFA deems as the optimal level of liquidity in the system. If the IFA is silently longing for the loose credit standards that reigned supreme in the middle of the last decade then that perhaps is the wrong path down which to proceed. If it is not, then it is incumbent upon the leadership to set forth with more particularity the goals because liquidity in the system is inextricably linked to the franchise growth projections. And if that is the case, then the growth rate that was experienced in the years leading up to the Great Recession cannot be the benchmark for growth in the next decade.
The economic outlook published for 2012 projects an increase of 1.9% in franchise establishments. But as stated above, the one constant with the economic outlooks produced by the IFA over the last four years is that each year the reports change many of the figures stated in the report of the previous year. The reports do have a convenient escape mechanism in that all of the reports state that the numbers are “estimates. ” In other words, neither the IFA nor the high powered accounting and consulting firms commissioned to compile the reports know conclusively how many franchise establishments exist today. If you read the reports carefully you will see that the PWC reports state that 2007 was the first time that there was enough data to even put forth a sound estimate. So while 1.9% may well be the appropriate and realistic growth rate for 2012, given the track record of the reports put forth by the IFA, franchisers must be more than a little skeptical about the numbers that they provide.
6.5.7: Trends in Franchises: International Adoptions
Franchises can be a powerful strategic tool in expanding globally, which has resulted in various trends in international adoption
Learning Objective
Recognize the value in international franchising, and why there are increasing trends in global adoptions
Key Points
- Expanding a business to a new country or locale is complex culturally, linguistically, and legally.
- Franchising offers strategic solutions to these challenges by providing ownership to local business owners who are in touch with the cultural climate.
- International franchising has various pros and cons for the franchisee, the franchiser, and the local governments. The advantages for all parties has created a positive trend in international franchising.
- As companies expand globally using this strategy, the local understanding has evolved product and service offerings to better meet the needs of the local consumers.
- These trends of international adoption are best seen at business like McDonald’s, KFC, and 7-Eleven, where menus and product offerings can vary greatly from region to region.
Key Terms
- BRIC
-
An acronym for Brazil, Russia, India, and China, which have some of the fastest growing economies in the world.
- franchisee
-
The individual who is granted a franchise and opens the new branch of a company in a local area.
- franchiser
-
The parent company that provides the brand assets to the franchisee.
International expansion is complex for both legal and cultural reasons, and franchising is a uniquely strong solution for both. The concept of franchising enables organizations to expand their business through empowering locals in a given area to open a business location representing the parent company’s brand, operational strategy, and products.
The Pros and Cons
When considering the current trends in franchising from an international perspective, it’s important to understand why organizations do this, why individuals are interested in opening a franchise, and why governments are open to allowing this approach. Let’s take a quick look at the benefits of global franchising, and where the potential pitfalls are:
Pros
- For the franchiser (i.e. the parent company), franchising allows rapid expansion with less risk and required capital (as some of this risk is assumed by franchisee, along with funding).
- For the franchiser, success is closely tied to understanding the culture and language of a given area. A franchising model can provide both.
- For the local government, jobs are created and ownership remains local.
- For the franchisee, they are given an opportunity to own a business with an incredible pool of resources, knowledge, and support.
- For the franchisee, much of the initial business plan, sourcing, quality control, marketing, and other core functions are already prepared, tried, and tested.
Cons
- The franchiser is outsourcing some amount of control and returns on investment to the franchisee.
- The franchisee, as a result, is incurring a substantial cost. As of 2010, opening a McDonald’s franchise could cost anywhere from around $1 million to around $2 million (USD).
- For local governments, there are a great deal of legislative and contractual considerations when allowing franchising into the economy. Ensuring each party acts legally and ethically requires resources.
While these lists could both be expanded a great deal, this should provide some context for the why behind the high volume of global franchising.
Trends in International Adoptions
The number of global franchises has seen a great deal of expansion in recent years, particularly with emerging economies (such as the BRIC grouping) seeing substantial growth and increased purchasing power. Considering the cultural advantages discussed earlier, franchising has also seen some unique trends in adopting cultural perspectives and adapting product offerings.
A nice example of adopting cultural tastes can be see in the fast food industry. McDonald’s, KFC, and a variety of other small food chains have distinctly different menu items depending on where in the world you are when you visit one of these chains. Convenience stores that franchise, such as 7-Eleven, operate quite similarly. Understanding local demand and local availability of certain products changes what the consumer in those areas are offered. These cultural adaptations allow globally expanded companies to compete effectively throughout the world.
KFC World Operations
As of 2014, KFC carried out operations in all of the countries highlighted in green. Localizing, adapting to culture, and expanding their scope to this level of global operating is evidence of just how advantageous franchising can be as an expansionary tool.
6.5.8: Franchise Agreements
A Franchise Agreement is a legal, binding contract between a franchisor and franchisee, enforced in the United States at the State level.
Learning Objective
List the items included in a franchise agreement
Key Points
- The Franchise Agreement can vary in content depending on the franchise system, as well as the state in which the franchisor, franchisee and arbitrator are based.
- The typical franchise agreement contains a number of documents including the UFOC or the FDD. It also defines the parties involved, the franchise system, trademarks, license in formation, length of agreement, and other key information pertaining to the franchise.
- The UFOC or FDD is a legal document which is presented to prospective buyers of franchises in the pre-sale disclosure process in the United States.
Key Terms
- franchise rule
-
defines the acts/practices that are considered unfair or deceptive in the US franchise industry. It is published by the FTC.
- Franchise Disclosure Document
-
a legal document which is presented to prospective buyers of franchises in the pre-sale disclosure process in the United States.
A Franchise Agreement is a legal, binding contract between a franchisor and franchisee, enforced in the United States at the State level.
Prior to a franchisee signing a contract, the US Federal Trade Commission regulates information disclosures under the authority of The Franchise Rule .The Franchise Rule requires that a franchisee be supplied a Uniform Franchise Offering Circular (UFOC ) or Franchise Disclosure Document (FDD ) prior to signing a franchise agreement, a minimum of ten days before signing a franchise agreement.
Once the Federal ten-day waiting period has passed, the Franchise Agreement becomes a State level jurisdiction document. Each state has unique laws regarding franchise agreements.
The content of a franchise agreement can vary depending on the franchise system, the state jurisdiction of the franchisor, franchisee, and arbitrator.
A typical franchise agreement contains :
Legal documents
Franchising agreements contain many legal documents that must be understood and filled out.
- Uniform Franchise Offering Circular (UFOC) or FDD Franchise Disclosure Document (FDD)
- Disclosures required by state laws
- Parties defined in the agreement
- Recitals, such as Ownership of System, and Objectives of Parties
- Definitions, such as: Agreement, Territory Area, Area Licensee, Authorized deductions, Gross Receipts, License Network, The System Manual, Trademarks, Start Date, Trade name, Termination, Transfer of license.
- Licensed Rights, such as: Territory, Rights Reserved, Term and Renewal, Minimum Performance Standard
- Franchisors Services, such as: Administration, Collections and Billing, Consultation, Marketing, Manual, Training
- Franchisee Payments, such as: Initial License Fee, Training Fees, Marketing Fund, Royalties, Renewal fee, and Transfer fee
- Franchisee Obligations, such as: Use of Trademarks, Financial Information, Insurance, Financial and Legal responsibility
- Relationship of Parties, such as: Confidentiality, Indemnification, Non-Compete
- Transfer of License, such as: Consent of franchisor, Termination of license, Termination by licensee, Termination by licensee
- Other provisions
- Governing law
- Amendments
- Waivers
- Arbitration
- Severability
6.6: Cooperatives and Joint Ventures
6.6.1: Cooperatives
Cooperatives are independent and democratic organizations in which each member has equal control.
Learning Objective
Consider the potential advantages and disadvantages of a cooperative as an organizational model
Key Points
- A cooperative (coop) is defined as an independent democratic organization, owned and operated equally by all members, with objectives to fill economic, social and/or cultural needs.
- The upsides of a cooperative mostly revolve around equality in ownership and management, along with a strong relationship with relevant communities.
- When outlining a coop business plan, it is useful to take into account Rochdale’s 7 Principles, which provide some context for what is expected of a coop.
- Coops are a great option depending on the objectives of the organization, as they diversify risk while providing positive contributions to the community.
Key Terms
- Autonomy
-
Freedom to act and function independently.
- hierarchy
-
A body of authority defined by fixed ranks and positions.
Cooperatives (often referred to as coops) are loosely defined as an independent group of individuals voluntarily collaborating in pursuit of social, cultural and/or economic objectives. A cooperative is owned and operated by all members equally, and control is created democratically (everyone has a voice in organizational decisions). While it is a business model, it can be applied to a wide variety of other circumstances such as consumer cooperatives, housing cooperatives, credit unions, worker cooperatives, and various non-profit formats.
Why Choose A Coop?
At the core of a coop is the concept of equality. There is no real room for hierarchy in a coop, nor is it built to differentiate between different levels of ownership, contribution, or partnership. Coops are intrinsically democratic, and rely heavily on the assumption that everyone involved has equal stake. This balanced organizational model (flat organizations) can come with both challenges and advantages.
For example, cooperatives are quite resistant to external factors. 80% of coops survive their first five years (compared to 41% of businesses with other ownership types). Another benefit is that cooperatives are often invested in solving social issues and providing value in their communities. Coops can be highly ethical and unifying forces in industries and communities, and demonstrate a commitment to valuing everybody involved.
How To Build A Coop
While there are many perspectives on what makes a coop, the seven Rochdale Principles are a useful starting point when it comes to setting the ideological boundaries of your coop:
- Voluntary and open membership
- Democratic member control
- Economic participation by members
- Autonomy and independence
- Education, training, and information
- Cooperation among cooperatives
- Concern for community
From a legal standpoint, coops are quite simple. It is registered under the stipulation that all members are equal democratic contributors, and that joining it is open and non-discriminatory as long as the approved requirements for participation are met. No individual owner can derive profit exceeding the fixed interest, nor gain greater control over the operations of the cooperative.
Conclusion
Coops are a good option depending on what it is an organization is trying to accomplish. Considering the specificity of this model in terms of structure and decision-making, owners must be comfortable being merely one member among many and being generally oriented towards beneficial objectives for the community.
6.6.2: Joint Ventures
A joint venture is when two or more parties are both invested in an original concept/project in terms of money, time, and effort.
Learning Objective
Explain how a joint venture is formed, how it functions and why it eventually dissolved
Key Points
- Joint ventures are temporary partnerships that can have small or ongoing projects.
- A joint venture can ensure the success of smaller projects since the cost of starting new projects is generally high. A joint venture allows both parties to share the burden of the project, as well as the resulting profits.
- Many countries limit foreign ownership of assets and legally force foreign companies into a joint venture with a local partner in order to do business there.
Key Terms
- emerging countries
-
Countries such as the BRIC nations (Brazil, Russia,India, China) have achieved advanced economic development and, thus, are seen as emerging countries in the global marketplace.
- joint venture
-
A cooperative partnership between two individuals or businesses in which profits and risks are shared.
Examples
- Sony Mobile Communications was founded in 2001 as a joint venture between Sony and the telecommunications company Ericsson. Sony acquired Ericsson’s share in the venture in 2012.
- MillerCoors is a joint venture between SABMiller and Molson Coors Brewing Company. The joint venture has the responsibility of selling brands such as Miller Lite, Miller High Life, Coors, Coors Light, etc.
A joint venture (JV) is a business agreement in which parties agree to develop, for a finite time, a new entity and new assets by contributing equity. They exercise control over the enterprise and consequently share revenues, expenses, and assets. With individuals, when two or more persons come together to form a temporary partnership for the purpose of carrying out a particular project, such partnership can also be called a joint venture where the parties are “co-venturers. “
Joint Venture Basics and Benefits
A joint venture takes place when two parties come together to take on one project. In a joint venture, both parties are equally invested in the project in terms of money, time, and effort to build on the original concept. While joint ventures are generally small projects, major corporations also use this method in order to diversify. A joint venture can ensure the success of smaller projects for those that are just starting in the business world or for established corporations. Since the cost of starting new projects is generally high, a joint venture allows both parties to share the burden of the project, as well as the resulting profits.
The venture can be for one specific project only or for a continuing business relationship which is known as a “consortium JV. ” A consortium JV is formed where one party seeks technological expertise or technical service arrangements, franchise and brand use agreements, management contracts, or rental agreements, for one-time contracts. The JV is dissolved when that goal is reached.
By its formation the JV becomes a new entity with the following implications:
- It is officially separate from its founders, who might otherwise be giant corporations, even amongst the emerging countries
- The JV can contract in its own name, acquire rights (such as the right to buy new companies)
- It has a separate liability from that of its founders, except for invested capital
- It can sue (and be sued) in courts in defense or its pursuance of its objectives
Since money is involved in a joint venture, it is necessary to have a strategic plan in place. In short, both parties must be committed to focusing on the future of the partnership, rather than just the immediate returns. Ultimately, short-term and long-term successes are both important. In order to achieve this success, honesty, integrity, and communication within the joint venture are necessary.
Domestic and Foreign Firm JVs
A joint venture is sometimes a partnership between a domestic firm and a foreign firm. Both partners invest money and share ownership and control of partnership. Joint ventures require a greater commitment from firms than licensing or the various other exporting methods. They have more risk and less flexibility.
A domestic firm may wish to engage in a joint venture for a variety of reasons; for example, General Motors and Toyota have agreed to make a subcompact car to be sold through GM dealers using the idle GM plant in California. Toyota’s motivation was to avoid U.S. import quotas and taxes on cars without any U.S.-made parts.
Many countries limit foreign ownership of assets and legally force foreign companies into a joint venture with a local partner in order to do business there. Poland, for example, limits foreign ownership of farmland and will continue to do so for another decade under agreements with the EU.
Dissolution
The JV is not a permanent structure. It can be dissolved when:
- Aims of original venture are not met
- Either or both parties develop new goals
- Either or both parties no longer agree with joint venture aims
- Time agreed for the joint venture has expired
- Legal or financial issues
- Evolving market conditions mean that the joint venture is no longer appropriate or relevant
- One party acquires the other
Sony Ericsson
Sony (known for its electronics) and Ericsson (known in the B2B telecom industry) created a joint venture in order to expand the business in an industry that’s new to Sony users
6.6.3: Syndicates
A syndicate is a self-organizing group of individuals or entities formed to transact specific business or to promote a common interest.
Learning Objective
Apply the concept of syndicates to business
Key Points
- Syndicates are self-organizing groups of people or firms that form around a common interest.
- A joint venture (JV) is a business agreement in which parties agree to develop, over a specific period of time, a new entity and new assets by contributing equity.
- In the case of individuals, when two or more persons come together to form a temporary partnership for the purpose of carrying out a particular project, such a partnership can also be called a joint venture and the persons referred to as co-venturers.
Key Terms
- franchise agreement
-
a legal, binding contract that authorizes a company to sell or distribute another’s goods and services in a certain area
- franchise
-
The authorization granted by a company to sell or distribute its goods or services in a certain area.
Example
- In finance, a group of banks lending a large amount of money to one single borrower is called a bank syndicate or simply a syndicate.
A syndicate is a self-organizing group of individuals, companies, or entities formed to transact some specific business or to promote a common interest. It may also facilitate criminal activity and organized crime. The term is sometimes associated with anarchist theory, specifically anarcho-syndicalism, which represents an alternative to both the nation state and capitalist corporations. Syndicate comes from the French word syndicat, meaning trade union (syndic meaning administrator). The word can be further traced to the Latin syndicus and the Greek σ (syndikos), which refers to a caretaker of an issue and is comparable in meaning to ombudsman or representative .
Syndicate
A syndicate is a self-organizing group of individuals, companies or entities formed to transact some specific business or to promote a common interest.
In finance, a group of banks lending a (usually) large amount of money to a single borrower for a specific purpose is referred to as a bank syndicate, or often simply as a syndicate.
A joint venture (JV) is a business agreement in which parties agree to develop, over a specific period of time, a new entity and new assets by contributing equity. The parties exercise control over the enterprise and consequently share revenues, expenses and assets. Other types of companies include JV limited by guarantee, in which partners hold shares.
In the case of individuals, when two or more persons come together to form a temporary partnership for the purpose of carrying out a particular project, the partnership may be called a joint venture and the persons referred to as co-venturers.
The venture may concern one specific project, in which case the JV is referred to more correctly as a consortium; alternatively, it may represent an ongoing business relationship. The consortium JV (also known as a cooperative agreement) is formed when one party seeks technological expertise or technical service arrangements, franchise and brand use agreements, management contracts, or rental agreements for one-time contracts. The JV is dissolved when the goal is reached.
6.7: Corporate Growth
6.7.1: Organic Growth
Organic growth is the process of businesses expansion due to increasing the customer base, output per customer, and/or through new sales.
Learning Objective
Discuss how organic growth is achieved, and the advantages and limitations of organic growth
Key Points
- Organic growth may be negative.
- Actions that stimulate organic growth include: changing the price; advertising and promoting; producing improved or better products; selling in different locations; offering customers preferential credit payment terms; increasing capital expenditure; and improving training and development.
- Organic growth, as opposed to inorganic growth, allows companies to retain control and avoid potential culture clashes.
Key Terms
- Organic growth
-
Organic growth is the process of businesses expansion due to increasing overall customer base, increased output per customer, or representative, new sales, or any combination of the above.
- inorganic growth
-
Inorganic growth is the rate of growth of business, sales expansion, etc. by increasing output and business reach by acquiring new businesses by way of mergers, acquisitions, and take-overs.
Examples
- The introduction of the Kuerig coffee maker, which brewed a single cup of coffee at a time, led to tremendous organic growth by it’s creator, Green Mountain Coffee.
- The introduction of the Kuerig coffee maker, which brewed a single cup of coffee at a time, led to tremendous organic growth it’s creators, Green Mountain Coffee.
Introduction
Organic growth is the process of business expansion due to increasing overall customer base, increased output per customer or representative, new sales, or any combination of the above, as opposed to mergers and acquisitions, which are examples of inorganic growth. Typically, the organic growth rate also excludes the impact of foreign exchange, and it can be negative.
Growth including foreign exchange, but excluding divestitures and acquisitions, is often referred to as core growth.
Organic growth figures are adjusted for the effects of acquisitions and disposals of businesses. Organic growth does include growth over a period that results from investment in business the company owned at the beginning of the period. What it excludes is the boost to growth from acquisitions, and the decline from sales and closures of whole businesses.
When a company does not disclose organic growth numbers, it is usually possible to estimate them by estimating the numbers for acquisitions made in the period being looked at and in the previous year. It is useful to break down organic sales growth into that coming from market growth and that coming from gains in market share: This makes it easier to see how sustainable growth is.
Creating Organic Growth
Kuerig
The introduction of the Kuerig coffee maker, which brewed a single cup of coffee at a time, led to tremendous organic growth for it’s creator, Green Mountain Coffee.
A company can take various actions to create organic growth including:
- Changing the price–more customers tend to buy cheaper products.
- Advertising and promoting–people are more likely to buy a product if informed, reminded, or persuaded about benefits of product.
- Producing improved or better products–market research, innovation, new product design (more appealing).
- Selling in different locations (placement)–more locations increases potential for more customers and more sales.
- Offering customers preferential credit payment terms–the ability of customers to “buy now and pay later. “
- Increasing capital expenditure (investment)–new locations, introduction of new production processes/technologies to improve productive efficiency (investment appraisal required).
- Improving training and development is important especially for sales staff with knowledge (increase customer loyalty and high sales).
Implementing these measures may seem like an easy thing to do. However, there are a large number of companies that used to experience high internal growth that have become examples of low-growth companies. One of the reasons for this result could be the acceptance of a company’s fate as it matures. Instead of implementing these steps to generate internal growth, companies simply accept their “fate” and look for growth opportunities outside of the the company (inorganic growth). In doing so, they could be making a big mistake.
Advantages of Organic Growth
Organic growth gives corporations:
- Better control and coordination: Firms maintain control whereas external methods lead to loss of control and ownership.
- Relatively inexpensive: The source comes from retained profits, less risk as the amount of capital involved is relatively lower than external.
- The ability to maintains corporate culture: No problems related to culture clash that might arise in acquisition environments.
Limitations of Organic Growth
In spite of the advantages of organic growth, when compared to external growth, there are still some limitations associated with relying on this type of growth. They include:
- Diseconomies of scale: Hierarchical structures may increase communication problems, and there may be slow decision making.
- Overtrading: If a business grows beyond its means (took too many orders, unable to control costs/manage human resources).
- Need to restructure: When a firm grows, there is a need to restructure (requires times, effort, money), communications will need to be handled with more care, and there is a need for training/retraining/updating the set of skills for staff.
- Dilution of control and ownership: If a company grows from partnership to public limited company, the original owners may need to share decision making with new owners (shareholders), and there may be prolonged decision-making and conflict of interest between shareholders.
- Specialist managers will need to be hired as the workforce expands.
- Delegation of decision-making powers to managers (reducing control of original owners) will take place.
6.7.2: Mergers and Acquisitions (M&As)
M&A refers to the aspect of corporate strategy, corporate finance, and management dealing with the buying and selling of companies.
Learning Objective
Explain the characteristics of mergers and acquisitions
Key Points
- The terms “merger and acquisition” mean slightly different things. When one company takes over another and clearly establishes itself as the new owner, the purchase is called an “acquisition”.
- A merger happens when two firms agree to go forward as a single new company rather than remain separately owned and operated.
- Mergers are generally differentiated from acquisitions partly by the way in which they are financed and partly by the relative size of the companies. Various methods of financing an M&A deal exist: cash, stock, financing options.
Key Terms
- acquisition
-
An acquisition is the purchase of one business or company by another company or other business entity.
- merger
-
A merger happens when two firms agree to go forward as a single new company rather than remain separately owned and operated.
Example
- Exxon and Mobil officially signed an agreement and plan of merger on December 1,1998. Mobil became a wholly owned subsidiary of Exxon. The combined company changed its name to Exxon Mobil Corporation
Mergers and Acquisitions (M&A) refers to the aspect of corporate strategy, corporate finance, and management dealing with the buying and selling of different companies and similar entities that can help an enterprise grow rapidly. M&As are a form of inorganic growth.
Mergers and Acquisitions (M&A
Mergers and Acquisitions (M&A) refers to the aspect of corporate strategy, corporate finance, and management dealing with the buying and selling of different companies and similar entities that can help an enterprise grow rapidly.
Mergers and Acquisitions have, at times, failed to add as much value as initially imagined by the parties involved. Acquiring a company involves integrating two businesses, which can take time and slow both companies down. When considering a M&A it’s helpful to consider the “Better-Off Test” which goes something like this: Do the business units create and capture more value if they are related than they could as separate, single-business entities without formal ties?
Factors that matter include lower costs–shared activities, shared resources, economies of scale or scope-, and increased willingness to pay.
The Better Off Test in the context of horizontal scope: Can a firm achieve lower average costs or higher average prices by including multiple business units in same firm?
Economies of scope (aka, synergies) make product diversification efficient if they are based on a similar common use. For example, as the number of products promoted is increased, more people can be reached for dollar spent.
Diversify if (cost of having units A & B in same firm) < (cost of unit A in firm A) + (cost of unit B in firm B) – Boost in Willingness To Pay (aka, cross-selling) – Diversify if (WTP of activities A & B if done in same firm) > (WTP of activity A in firm A) + (WTP activity B in firm B)
6.7.3: M&A Trends
Modern trends in M&A largely revolve around the acquisition of up-and-coming firms to enable technological advantage and global competencies for larger firms.
Learning Objective
Observe the current trends in strategic alliance, primarily those revolving around technology acquisition
Key Points
- Currently, higher technologies and pharmaceuticals are huge influential arenas for modern strategic alliances, most notably acquisition by large organizations.
- Mergers and acquisitions became prominent in the late 19th century, and have evolved significantly in scale and focus until the modern day.
- Companies such as Apple, Google, Facebook, IBM, and Microsoft are critical focal points for understanding modern acquisitions, as they have acquired hundreds of organizations for hundreds of billions of dollars.
- Modern mergers and acquisitions are valuable in providing key competitive advantages in upcoming technological arenas as well as accessing global markets.
Key Terms
- Mergers
-
In this context, merging two separate firms into one collaborative organization.
- acquisition
-
One firm purchasing another organization.
Mergers and Acquisitions
Mergers and acquisitions (M&A) are a significant aspect of modern strategy, particularly in the technology and pharmaceutical arenas. The reasoning behind M&A’s can vary, ranging from deriving competitive advantages to economies of scale, economies of scope, international expansion, vertical integration, access to unique assets, and perhaps most common today for the acquisition of valuable intellectual property (IP).
Past and Present M&A’s
To understand modern trends in M&A’s, it’s useful to understand the trajectory of this particular strategic alliance approach. Over time, acquisitions have moved through a number of ‘waves’ from a strategy point of view, most recently in order to pursue globalization.
Merger Waves
This is a list of M&A reasoning over time, starting with the horizontal mergers in the late 19th century and moving into the globalization movements in the 21st century.
Modern Trends in M&A’s
Today, the list of recent acquisitions is expanding rapidly. Companies such as Google, Apple, Amazon, Microsoft, and IBM are acquiring new technology companies and platforms rapidly and competitively. The mergers and acquisitions by these five companies alone represents the acquisition of hundreds of business and hundreds of billions of dollars. These moves are an absolutely critical source of competitive advantage from technological, economic, and expansionary perspectives.
Recent High Impact Acquisitions
Let’s look at a few of the largest, most recent acquisitions from some of these influential companies to appreciate the scope and frequency of modern acquisition strategies.
- Facebook – Facebook acquired WhatsApp in 2014 for $19 billion, propelling Facebook further into the domain of mobile messaging. Shortly after they acquired Oculur VR, a virtual reality technology company. They also acquired Surreal Vision and Pebbles in 2015, both computer vision and augmented reality companies.
- Microsoft – Since 1987, Wikipedia lists a total of 197 acquisitions for Microsoft. One particularly notable recent acquisition for Microsoft was that of Nokia for a total of $7.2 billion in 2013. Mojang, a video game developer best known for Minecraft, was acquired by Microsoft in 2014 for a total of $2.5 billion. Other notable acquisitions include forays into education software, music discovery, video streaming, big data analytics, data protection, and mobile communications.
- IBM – IBM is an enormous organization with acquisitions ranging from software storage and management, streaming video, cyber security, salesforce systems, mobile APIs, healthcare, cloud security and capabilities, behavioral marketing, cognitive computing, and an incredibly wide range of other technical abilities.
- Apple – Apple recently spent $200 million to acquire Turi, a machine learning company. They also demonstrate interest in facial recognition with Emotient, augmented reality with Metaio, music analytics with Semetric, education software with LearnSprout, personal health info collection with Gliimpse, and a variety of other industries and segments.
The race for new technological advantages through acquisition is dynamic, and the definition of the modern trend in strategic alliances is definitely along the lines of technological acquisition.
Chapter 5: Business Writing
5.1: Introduction to Business Communications
5.1.1: The Importance of Clarity in Professional Settings
Communication is essential for effective business operation, and clarity leads to effective communication.
Learning Objective
Define business communications and the importance of clarity in business communications
Key Points
- Business communication is used to promote a product, service, or organization; to relay information within the business; or to deal with legal and similar issues.
- Failures of human communication can become amplified in professional settings. In business transactions, especially those involving large amounts of money, a small miscommunication can have devastating effects.
- Customer relationship management (CRM) is a widely implemented model for managing a company’s interactions with customers, clients, and sales prospects. It is needed because there are often multiple business associates that come into contact with a client.
- Barriers to clarity in communication include: complex messages, the withholding of information, ineffective communication throughout the chain of command, and lack of trust due to competition.
Key Terms
- miscommunication
-
an interaction between two parties in which information is not communicated as desired
- communication
-
an instance of information transfer; a conversation or discourse
Example
- CRM – Salesforce.com provides end-to-end customer sourcing and customer relationship management.
Business Communication Defined
Business communication is used to promote a product, service, or organization; relay information within a business; or deal with legal and similar issues. It encompasses a variety of topics including: consumer behavior, advertising, public relations, corporate communication, research and measurement, reputation management, and event management. Business communication may also refer to internal communication: a communications director will typically manage internal communication and craft messages sent to employees. It is vital that internal communications are managed properly because a poorly crafted message could foster distrust or hostility among employees.
Failures of human communication can become amplified in professional settings. In business transactions, especially those involving large amounts of money, a small miscommunication can have devastating effects. For this reason, clarity is absolutely essential. Communication must be consistent, concise, and honest in order to ensure the intended message is received.
Barriers to Clarity in Business Communication
- Complex messages: The use of complex technical terms can result in a lack of clarity. The solution is to stick to the point by using clear and concise messages that are easy to understand.
- Withholding information: Within an organization, some information is kept confidential due to company policies. Make sure the information that is needed is readily available and easily accessible.
- Chain of command: The maintenance of an organization’s hierarchy is essential, but its very presence can reduce the flow of the communication. It is therefore essential to reduce hierarchical levels and increase departmental interaction and communication.
- Lack of trust: The most important cause of a lack of communication within an organization is competition, which leads to a lack of trust among employees. Therefore, employees should share information, communicate openly and honestly, and involve others in decisions.
Customer Relationship Management
Customer relationship management (CRM) is a widely implemented model for managing a company’s interactions with customers, clients, and sales prospects . It is needed because there are often multiple business associates that come into contact with a client. CRM involves using technology to organize, automate, and synchronize business processes—principally sales activities, but also those for marketing, customer service, and technical support. CRM helps everyone in a business stay on the same page and promotes clarity of communication with those outside the organization.
Customer relationship management (CRM)
Customer relationship management (CRM) is a widely implemented model for managing a company’s interactions with customers, clients, and sales prospects.
Developing Relationships
Developing relationships is essential for the effective operation of a business, and clarity of communication is essential in developing relationships.
5.1.2: Creating Effective Messages
The goal of public relations is to disseminate information about a business (that is, to create an effective message).
Learning Objective
Explain how to create effective messaging via public relations
Key Points
- All communication with the media should be clear, concise, and contain all of the pertinent information about the event or product, such as date, time and location.
- Remember to keep the communications free of typos and grammatical errors.
- One way to get attention is to describe a problem, and then explain how the business or product solves that problem.
- One goal of a public relations campaign is to generate editorial coverage for a business, because editorial coverage is perceived as more authentic than advertising.
Key Terms
- disseminate
-
To sow and scatter principles, ideas, opinions, and errors for growth and propagation, such as seed
- buzz
-
Major topic of conversation; widespread rumor; information spread behind the scenes.
Creating Effective Messages
The goal of public relations is to disseminate information about a business. This information can be in advance of upcoming events or product launches, or to quell rumors or stop the spread of incorrect information about a company. Public relations also involves proactively educating staff on responding to media so incorrect information is not released in the first place.
Many small businesses and start-ups lack large advertising budgets; they rely on public relations to build a “buzz” about an upcoming business or product launch. One goal of a public relations campaign is to generate editorial coverage for a business, because editorial coverage is perceived as more authentic than advertising.
Effective Messages
A press release contains all the pertinent information about an event, product, or company.
The problem is getting attention from the media is not easy. The solution is to craft well-written, attention-getting press releases and submit them to the right media outlets. For example, a fashion press release should go to fashion-related media, not a sports journal.
Media Communication
All communication with the media should be clear, concise, and contain all of the pertinent information about the event (or product) such as date, time, and location. This information is often the most critical, so it should be at the top of the press release.
Many press releases also include some background information about the company and sometimes the team members for a particular project. This information is generally found at the bottom of the press release.
Remember to keep the communications free of typos and grammatical errors. For maximum effect, try to incorporate attention-grabbing language. One way to get attention is to describe a problem, and explain how the business or product solves that problem.
5.2: Means of Communication
5.2.1: Choosing the Right Method for the Message
Channels for business communication include meetings, letters, print, radio, television, telephone, word of mouth, and the Internet.
Learning Objective
Define the various communication channels available for packaging and delivering business messaging.
Key Points
- Each communication channel has a variety of specific methods. The Internet, for example, could entail a web-based advertising campaign, a social media advertising campaign, or a website.
- It is important to choose the right method for the message. A company-wide email detailing the holiday hours is acceptable, but a company-wide email listing terminations is not acceptable.
- Consider the audience and their reaction to the message. If a message may invite a lot of questions, a face-to-face meeting will be more beneficial than an email. For example, a message about employee benefits could cause employees to have questions, so this type of message is best presented in a group meeting that allows for a question-and-answer session.
Key Terms
- communication
-
an instance of information transfer; a conversation or discourse
- word of mouth
-
Verbal means of passing of information.
Examples
- Meeting – A personal, interactive exchange often succeeded by a written follow-up; Letter – Typically a formal method of communication suited for important messages such as proposals, inquiries, agreements, and recommendations; Video Conference – Allows people in different locations to hold interactive meetings and interviews in real time; Telephone Conference – Enables participants in different locations to share information; E-mail – Instantaneous medium for both formal notices and updates, as well as, informal exchanges; Report – Official documentation of the activities of any department or organization; Presentation – Usually comprises a formal proposal, update, recommendation, or report involving audiovisual material, slideshows, and statistics; Web-based Communication – A method typically suited for leaving contact information (such as address and phone number) or for sharing transaction details (such as order confirmation); Forum: Allows members to post information publicly and efficiently in a centralized location.
- E-mail (Electronic Mail) is a fast, reliable way of sending messages and interacting with people. This medium straddles the line between informal communication and formal business interaction. All e-mails are saved and recorded, as well as, potentially read by any number of people.
- A memo or memorandum is a communication note that records events or observations on a topic. Memos are typically used as an internal communication tool. They call attention to issues that may need to be resolved.
- Business letters are written messages to a person or group within a professional setting. It can address anyone including, but not limited to, prospects, clients and customers, managers, agencies, suppliers, and other business personnel or organizations. It is important to remember that any business letter is a legal document between the interested parties.
Choosing the Right Method for the Message
Business communication encompasses various channels of communication, including meetings, letters, memos, print (publications), radio, television, telephone, word of mouth, and the Internet.
Specific Methods
Within those channels is a variety of specific methods. The Internet, for example, could entail a web-based advertising campaign, a social media advertising campaign, or a website.
Other methods of communication include:
- Meeting – This is a personal, interactive exchange often succeeded by a written follow-up.
- Letter – This is a formal method of communication typically suited for important messages such as proposals, inquiries, agreements, and recommendations.
- Video conference – These allow people in different locations to hold interactive meetings and interviews in real time.
- Telephone conference – These enable participants in different locations to share information.
- E-mail – This is a instantaneous medium for formal notices and updates, as well as informal exchanges.
- Report – This is the official documentation of the activities of any department or organization.
- Presentation – This method usually comprises a formal proposal, update, recommendation, or report involving audiovisual material, slideshows, and statistics.
- Web-based communication – This method is typically suited for leaving contact information (such as address and phone number) or for sharing transaction details (such as order confirmation).
- Forum This method allows members to post information publicly and efficiently in a centralized location.
With the variety of methods available, it is important to choose the right method for the message. A company-wide email detailing the holiday hours is acceptable, but a company-wide email listing terminations is not acceptable .
Choosing the right method for the message.
A company wide email detailing the holiday hours is acceptable, but a company wide email listing terminations is not acceptable.
When choosing the medium, consider the audience and their reaction to the message. For example, if the message is about employee benefits, the audience most likely will have questions, so this message is best presented in a group meeting that would allow for a question and answer session.
5.2.2: Minimizing Risk of Miscommunication
Miscommunication happens when there is a disconnect between what is being said and what is heard.
Learning Objective
List the six leading causes of miscommunication in businesses
Key Points
- There are six things that cause miscommunication: complex messages, withheld information, hierarchy, silos, lack of trust, and language barriers.
- In business, a miscommunication can lead to costly errors or deadly mistakes.
- When it comes to effective communication, there are certain barriers that every organization faces, such as message overload, which can occur when a person receives too many messages at the same time.
Key Terms
- hierarchy
-
Any group of objects ranked so that every one but the topmost is subordinate to a specified one above it.
- miscommunication
-
an interaction between two parties in which information is not communicated as desired
Examples
- Here are six reasons that cause miscommunication: Complex Messages: The use of complex technical terms can result in miscommunication. Use clear and concise messages that are easy to understand. Withholding Information: For many organizations, important information can be kept confidential due to company policies. Make sure that needed information is readily available and accessible. Hierarchy: Management must keep employees well-informed and encourage feedback. Silos: Hierarchy in an organization is essential but it can also reduce the flow of communication. It is therefore essential to increase departmental interaction and coordination. Lack of Trust: Competition between employees and managers leads to a lack of trust. Share information, communicate openly and honestly, and involve others in decisions. Language Barrier: Due to globalization, messages must be effective when conveyed to a diverse audience.
- Message complexity can also result in a confused audience.
- Message overload can result when a person receives too many messages at the same time.
Miscommunication Defined
Miscommunication happens when there is a disconnect between what is being said and what is heard. In business, a miscommunication can lead to costly errors or deadly mistakes.
Reasons for Miscommunication
Here are six things that cause miscommunication:
- Complex messages: The use of complex technical terms can result in miscommunication. Use clear and concise messages that are easy to understand.
- Withholding information: For many organizations, important information can be kept confidential due to company policies. Make sure that needed information is readily available and accessible.
- Hierarchy: Management must keep employees well-informed and encourage feedback.
- Silos: Hierarchy in an organization is essential but it can also reduce the flow of communication. It is therefore essential to increase departmental interaction and coordination.
- Lack of trust: Competition between employees and managers leads to a lack of trust. Share information, communicate openly and honestly, and involve others in decisions.
- Language barriers: Due to globalization, messages must be effective when conveyed to a culturally diverse audience.
Minimizing the Risk of Miscommunication
When it comes to effective communication, there are certain barriers that every organization faces, such as message overload, which can occur when a person receives too many messages at the same time.
Message complexity can also result in a confused audience. There are several ways to ensure your message is received and understood. When creating the message, read the draft several times and look for confusing statements or awkward wording. After doing that, edit the message for content to ensure there is a clear focus or main idea. Lastly, edit for grammar and misspelled words.
Miscommunication
Complex language often leads to miscommunication.
5.3: Creating High-Value Communications
5.3.1: Appropriate Tone
In writing, tone is defined as the author’s attitude or emotion toward the subject and the reader.
Learning Objective
State the factors that determine appropriate tone in business writing
Key Points
- In business writing, using the appropriate tone ensures that the message is communicated properly. Even the most positive message can be misunderstood if the tone is not correct.
- Answering these questions will help you determine the tone of your communication: What is the purpose of the communication? Who is the audience? What should the audience learn? What actions should the audience take from the communication?
- Most business correspondence is written in the formal tone.
- Accurate interpretation of messages is made easier when nonverbal and verbal communication complement each other.
Key Terms
- tone
-
The manner in which speech or writing is expressed.
- subordination
-
The quality of being properly obedient to a superior (as a superior officer).
Example
- Most business correspondence is written in the formal tone. The exception is internal email communications between coworkers. Even then prudence must be taken, as an email to a supervisor requires a more formal tone than one to a coworker requesting a lunch date.
Appropriate Tone
In writing, tone is defined as the author’s attitude or emotion toward the subject and the reader. While this might only seem appropriate for writers of literature, business writers also need to be concerned about tone. In business writing, using the appropriate tone ensures that the message is communicated properly. Even the most positive message can be misunderstood if the tone is not correct. Answering the following questions will help you determine the tone of your communication, whether it be a letter, memo, or proposal:
- What is the purpose of the communication?
- Who is the audience?
- What should the audience learn?
- What actions should the audience take from the communication?
Formal and Informal Tone
Most business correspondence is written in the formal tone . The exception is internal email communications between coworkers. Even then prudence must be taken, as an email to a supervisor requires a more formal tone than one to a coworker requesting a lunch date. A piece of correspondence written in the formal tone contains the proper subordination, is free from discriminatory language, and contains no slang or text speak. Remember, the overall tone for any business writing is confident, courteous, and sincere. It is important to avoid writing that is overly formal; don’t use long phrases such as “in the event that” when a simple “If” will do.
Appropriate Tone
Most business writing, with the exception of interoffice emails, is written with a formal tone.
Tone and Negative Messages
If the purpose of the correspondence is to deliver a negative message, it is especially important to consider tone. In a negative message, it is best to use a gracious and sincere tone. Try to avoid using the active voice when delivering negative messages.
5.3.2: Using Formatting for Visual Flow
In business writing, the formatting of a document should add to the reader’s ease of understanding.
Learning Objective
Summarize the benefits of formatting visuals in business communications
Key Points
- Common formatting guidelines for business writing include using clear headers, including charts and graphs, and using color to emphasize important information.
- Visuals are commonly used in business settings; they aid in running effective meetings and communicating complex information.
- When using presentation software to create visual presentations, keeping text minimal and visuals clear is particularly important.
- Use color for clarity and emphasis, not for decoration.
- Use bullet points or create lists to organize material. Make sure this is “nice” to look at (easy to read).
- Keep paragraphs short and to the point, ensuring that sentences contain complete thoughts.
Key Terms
- visual
-
All the visual elements of a multi-media presentation or entertainment, usually in contrast with normal text or audio.
- PowerPoint
-
An electronic slide presentation.
Example
- A slide showing revenue trends over the past three years could, for example, include a bar graph of revenue per year on the left of the slide with two to three bullet points to the right of the graph listing major factors influencing the revenue values.
In business writing, how the message is presented is just as important as the message itself. The goal is to produce a well-formatted document that presents all the information in a concise and easy to read manner. The formatting of a document should never make a document more confusing, but rather add to the reader’s ease of understanding.
General guidelines for formatting documents
Labeling
- Use headlines and sub-headlines in large font
- Bold, italicize, or CAPITALIZE important information
- Use bullet points or create lists to organize material; make sure this is “nice” to look at (easy to read)
Charts and Graphs
- Make sure there is clear information presented and that it supports your point; color coordinate charts/graphs if necessary.
- Use text to support/explain charts and graphs (be brief but cover the high points)
- Avoid charts and graphs that can be misleading to your readers
Wording and Lettering
- Limit number of fonts to one or two
- Think about the age of your audience when setting font size and type
Color
- Use color for clarity and emphasis, not for decoration
- Keep a similar color scheme throughout the entire document
- Consider using contrasting colors to highlight main points
Formatting visuals
Visual documents are commonly used in business settings. A study done by the Wharton School of Business showed that the use of visuals reduced meeting times by 28 percent. Another study found that audiences believe presenters who use visuals are more professional and credible than presenters who merely speak. And still other research indicates that meetings and presentations reinforced with visuals help participants reach decisions and consensus in less time. A presentation program such as Microsoft PowerPoint, Apple Keynote, OpenOffice.org Impress or Prezi, is often used to generate the presentation content. Modern internet based presentation software, such as the presentation application in Google Docs and SlideRocket also allow presentations to be developed collaboratively by geographically separate collaborators.
The following are formatting guidelines specific to using PowerPoint or similar presentation software:
- Do not write out the entire presentation on your PowerPoint; instead, create bullet points and headings no longer than three to five words that give the main points
- Include no more than five to seven lines per slide; better to split information onto two slides than it is to cram too much information onto one
- Be consistent with your “theme” (do not use a different theme for each slide)
- Do not overuse flashy transitions; they are meant to enhance your presentation, not take over
- Be careful with your color scheme; again, this is meant to enhance your presentation
- Make sure that the text is big enough for the audience to read
- Do not use complicated or unreadable font
- Use a font color that stands out against the background
Visual Flow
Clear formatting can help make a business document easy to read
5.4: Effective Rhetoric and Presentation
5.4.1: Telling a Story
Storytelling is a powerful tool for leaders, entrepreneurs, and community managers to relay a vision and craft a strong sense of purpose.
Learning Objective
Learn the art of storytelling and recognize it’s applicability to various facets of the business world
Key Points
- It may come as a surprise, but many leaders in business argue that storytelling is one of the most powerful tools in the 21st century business environment.
- Leaders and entrepreneurs are tasked with creating organizational buy in, procuring funding and aligning resources on a single, centralized vision. This is not possible without a strong sense of story.
- Technology and social networks have turned marketing into the art of storytelling, in which engaging and building a community relies heavily on spinning intriguing tales.
- The art of storytelling requires engaging the audience, setting a scene, building tension, staying organized and focused, and ending with a powerful and meaningful conclusion.
Why Storytelling Matters More Than You Think
Leaders
Storytelling is an incredibly powerful skill set, both in regards to effective rhetoric and presentation and leadership. The ability to craft ideas such as strategy, tactics, consumer needs, core competencies, and other concepts into a speech, presentation, or group discussion can create a strong sense of vision, purpose, and unity. It is argued by some leaders in managerial thought that the ability to tell a story is the most important skill a leader can have in the 21st century.
Community Management
Aside from the leaderships and presentation frame, telling a story is the core skill set that enables a powerful presence on social media and other digital distributions of the company culture, brand, and value proposition. Storytelling is a way to relate to prospective users and build a powerful community, which is an invaluable asset in the success of any and all business ventures.
Entrepreneurs
It is also worth noting that start-up ventures require a strong sense of story. When pursuing investment, the entrepreneur must take the concept they are selling and spin it into a vision worthy of taking a risk on. Look no further than Kickstarter campaigns to see how critical it is to build a narrative, and find people who share your passion. This is the key source of enthusiasm and capital that enables start up companies to move forward.
Why Story-Telling?
How To Tell A Story
Depending on the situation, there may be a wide variety of relevant approaches. Delivering a specialized presentation on how to integrate a software solution will undoubtedly require a different tactic than building a twitter community for a new soda brand. That being said, there are a few aspects to any good story that can help us effectively tell a tale:
- Engage the audience – To pull them into your story, you must involve them. Ask a challenging question, or raise a trending topic. Find something in their world, and use that as your starting point. Relevance is key.
- Set the scene – All stories need context, and context will act as a key counterpoint to what unfolds. Pull them into the world the story takes place in and you’ll have their full attention.
- It’s all about tension – Conflict, debate, struggle, emotions, find what it is about the story that creates a sense of tension and provide emphasis. This feeling of conflict has been central to storytelling for all of human history!
- Stay focused on the goal – Stories are anecdotes to communicate concepts. Stay focused on what it is within the story that is important, and relevant to the discussion you are trying to have. Keep the story grounded through the occasional reminder of what it is you’re really trying to say.
- Stay logical – Stories are like puzzles, the pieces need to fit. Keep things organized and maintain a sense of structure. Losing the thread will result in a story evaporating before your eyes.
- End with a punch – The conclusion is your chance to make a point with emphasis (!). Make sure the flow of your story results in a powerful and punchy conclusion that truly speaks to the audience.
5.4.2: The Beginning
Beginning a speech with a quote, statistic, story, or humor can make the audience feel interested and invested in what you have to share.
Learning Objective
Discuss the best practices for opening a speech using quotes, statistics, personal stories, humor, and overviews
Key Points
- It is important to remember to keep your introduction relatively short; wordy introductions can lose your audience before you actually get to the speech itself. It is also important to remember that whatever opening line you choose, you must connect it to the content of your speech.
- Beginning with a quote, statistic, personal story, or even opening with humor are all good options, but only if they are used correctly.
- If the presentation is more formal, you may just want to give an overview of the main topics you will cover in your speech. Using an overview as an opening would be a good choice if you are unsure how your audience will react to a joke or a startling statistic.
Key Term
- introduction
-
An initial section of a book or article, which introduces the subject material.
Example
- Martin Luther King gave one of the most historic and powerful speeches in history (“I have a dream”). It was a serious speech to a crowd of thousands, and he started with a call for justice and equality.
Ways of Beginning a Speech
When you begin your presentation, you want the audience to feel interested and invested in what you have to share. The more interested you get them right off the bat, the more they are going to pay attention throughout the rest of the presentation. This can be done in a multitude of ways, but it is important to remember to keep your introduction relatively short; wordy introductions can lose your audience before you actually get to the speech itself. It is also important to remember that whatever opening line you choose, you must connect it to the content of your speech.
The Opening
There are many ways to start a speech before segueing into an introduction: beginning with a quote, statistic, personal story, or even opening with humor are all good options, but only if used correctly. So be careful, because humor is only funny when it is told right, and humor can sometimes do more harm than good. Be sure to avoid all sexual, religious, and racial topics if you open with humor. It doesn’t matter if you open with a statistic, quote, or sharing a personal story; just be aware that what you choose must be directly related to the main point of the speech.
So how will you begin your speech or presentation? Will you start with a quote, statistic, personal story, a joke, or an overview?
Opening with a quotation
The use of quotations is a tried-and-true way of introducing a subject…if done correctly. Here is an example of an opening making use of a quote from Albert Einstein: “After the nuclear bombs were dropped during World War II, the leading creator of this destructive force said, ‘I know not with what weapons World War III will be fought, but World War IV will be fought with sticks and stones. ‘ Albert Einstein stated this after finally seeing the bombs’ full power; for he knew that he very well may have had a hand in the end of the world. “
Opening with a statistic
Startling statistics might draw the attention of your audience. The following examples concerns modern incarceration rates: “By the end of 2004, 724 out of every 100,000 U.S. residents were incarcerated. The United States of America has the highest jailing rate in the entire world. “
Opening with a personal anecdote
Sharing a personal experience is an effective, but risky, way of opening a presentation. Use this option only if it’s the right fit for your audience.
If you are presenting to a group of Video Game Design students at your school on the topic of fun game play elements, you might use a personal experience like this: “A few years ago, everybody was talking about how awesome this new game was and how sweet the graphics were. So, I did what any gamer would do–drove directly to the store, picked up a copy, brought it home, and popped it into my Xbox. My excitement heightened as the game loaded and the intro sequence played. When the game started, I was absolutely astonished…at how bad the game play was. The game looked cool, but all you did was run around and hit the enemies in the head with a sword over and over again. That game was not fun; let’s make a game that’s fun. “
Opening with humor
Using a joke to start a presentation is often a good idea, as long as it is appropriate. Also, try to make the joke pertain to the subject you are presenting. Here is an example that you might use when doing a presentation on football: “Anyone who makes a bad call against the Detroit Lions risks ticking off their last remaining fan.”
Opening with an overview
If the presentation is more formal, you may want to give a simple, structured overview of the main topics you will cover in your speech. Using an overview as an opening would be a good choice if you are unsure how your audience will react to a joke or a startling statistic.
Your overview should contain a brief introduction of your topic; an explanation of the relevance of the topic to your audience; a forecast of the organization for your presentation; and possibly some background information, if necessary.
Here is an example: “Today, I will be discussing college dropouts. I will be going over the current rate of dropouts, as well as the many common factors that affect these rates. I will also talk about the reasons to stay in college, including that college is a place where you can gain better knowledge, memorable life experiences, and the skills to earn greater pay in the future. “
If you’ve chosen to open with one of the other opening techniques, then an overview should always follow. While there may be rare individual speeches that do not benefit from an overview, there is no form of speech that isn’t improved by this method of welcoming and preparing the audience for what follows.
Martin Luther King, Jr.
Martin Luther King’s “I have a dream” speech is one of the most historic and powerful speeches in history. He began with a story: “Five score years ago, a great American, in whose symbolic shadow we stand, signed the Emancipation Proclamation. This momentous decree came as a great beacon light of hope to millions of Negro slaves who had been seared in the flames of withering injustice. It came as a joyous daybreak to end the long night of captivity.But one hundred years later, we must face the tragic fact that the Negro is still not free. One hundred years later, the life of the Negro is still sadly crippled by the manacles of segregation and the chains of discrimination. One hundred years later, the Negro lives on a lonely island of poverty in the midst of a vast ocean of material prosperity. One hundred years later, the Negro is still languishing in the corners of American society and finds himself an exile in his own land. So we have come here today to dramatize an appalling condition. ” With this opening, he captured his audience’s attention, and the rest is history.
5.4.3: The Middle
The middle of a speech or presentation
offers the audience facts and perspectives which support the
conclusion delivered at the beginning and the end.
Learning Objective
Illustrate the key components of delivering a strong argument during the middle of a presentation to provide compelling support for the conclusion
Key Points
- Generally speaking, speeches and presentations can be divided into three parts: an introduction (beginning), a body (middle), and a conclusion (end).
- When constructing the middle of your speech, one should communicate premises which support their conclusion.
- Understanding an audience is a key success factor to the middle portion of the speech. How much do they know about this topic already? What are their opinions? How detailed should my explanation be?
- Delivering a speech requires credibility. Through fulfilling the 6 I’s of Credibility, a speech should be able to accurately convey a supporting argument and conclusion.
Key Term
- premises
-
Ideas that are assumed or demonstrated to be true in pursuit of deriving a conclusion.
An effective presentation,
speech, or lecture is often divided into three parts: the beginning
(introduction), the middle (body), and the end (conclusion). While
the beginning and end tend to be the most memorable for the
audience, it is in the body of your discussion that you make your
argument. As a result, the middle is key to accomplishing your
objectives for the speech.
There are a number of perspectives and
considerations to keep in mind when preparing your core argument. For
the purpose of this discussion, we’ll look at the organization of
premises to form conclusions, your audience, and the 6 I’s of
Credibility.
Premises and Conclusions
The beginning and end of your speech
should contain an emotionally compelling conclusion, while the middle of
your speech should include the logical argument you are delivering to the audience. The speech can be divided loosely into two categories of
discussion: premises and conclusions.
For the middle of your presentation,
it’s all about selecting and communicating the key premises that
enable your overall conclusion. The logic for this is fairly simple
if you think of premises and conclusions as ‘if’ and ‘then’ statements. If cigarette smoke
increase the risk of cancer, and if exposure to cigarette smoke
doesn’t require smoking the cigarette yourself, then second hand
smoke is a cancer risk. This example is oversimplified, but it
communicates the core logic that is necessary to build into the body of your
presentation. If you do not have premises to support your conclusion,
you should reconsider what you are trying to communicate.
The Anatomy of an Argument
This image outlines the anatomy of an argument. Valid premises lead to sound or cogent conclusions, while invalid premises result in unsound or uncogent conclusions.
Know Your Audience
As you construct your argument, you are
also going to need to understand your audience. As a speaker, you
must be aware not only of what you are trying to say, but also what
your audience already knows about the topic, and their general state
of mind on the subject.
For example, a neuroscientist would
offer a substantially different argument with considerably more
specific details if addressing an audience full of neuroscientists
already aware of the trends in the field. This same speaker
delivering a talk to the general public would need to carefully
consider what information to add or remove in order to bring the
audience up to speed without intimidating them with jargon. It is
primarily in the middle of your speech where this is most important, as it’s very easy to lose your audience in the details.
The 6 I’s of Credibility
With the structure of your discussion
in mind, and a thorough understanding of your audience, you are
almost ready to deliver your core argument. The last topic of
consideration is your own credibility. The following 6 considerations
will help you decide if you are a credible source on the topic, and
how to demonstrate that to your audience:
- Ideation – Find clever ways to
present a concept, and help the audience see how you derived it. - Information – This is where the
premises come in. Make sure your facts are carefully chosen and
communicated. - Influence – Demonstrate confidence
and passion in what you are saying. It’s contagious. -
Integrity – Trust is key. Know what
you don’t know, and make sure the audience does too. -
Impact – Find memorable ways to build
roots in the memories of your audience. Stories and examples are
great tools for this. - Ignition – Finally, make your
conclusion actionable. Motivate your audience not only to agree with
your point, but to build it into their lives.
5.4.4: The End
The ending of a speech can be as important as the beginning and body, because a good end leaves a lasting impression.
Learning Objective
List the different ways of ending a business presentation
Key Points
- After completing the presentation, the presenter should summarize the main points again without repeating verbatim what was said in the introduction.
- “Wow” your audience with one of the techniques for introducing your speech; for example, use a quotation, a startling statistic, a personal experience, a joke, or a formal closure. You may also want to end your speech with a call to action.
- Thanking the audience is one of the most important things to do at the end of a presentation, because they have given up their time to be there.
- Asking for questions is a good way to minimize any confusion that the audience might have or bring to light any relevant connections which you may have overlooked. Answering questions well confirms your authority over the subject matter.
- Thanking the audience is one of the most important things to do at the end of a presentation.
Key Term
- ending
-
A termination or conclusion.
Example
- Remember to thank your audience. Calling for questions can also help the audience clarify any points they may not have understood. For example, “Thank you for your time and attention. Does anyone have any questions? “
Finishing Well
Leaving the audience with a bang ensures making a lasting impression. Remember, the last thing presented tends to be what the audience remembers the best. The ending of a speech is as important as the beginning and body. The conclusion should do what the introduction did, except in reverse.
Ways of Ending a Speech
After completing the presentation, the presenter should summarize the main points again without repeating verbatim what was said in the introduction. You then want to “wow” your audience with one of the techniques you used to introduce your speech. These techniques can include a quotation, a startling statistic, a personal experience, a joke, or a formal closure. If you are presenting persuasive information, you may particularly want to end your speech with a call to action. What are you asking of your audience? What can they do after listening to your speech? Finally, asking for questions is a good way to minimize any confusion that the audience might have or bring to light any relevant connections which you may have overlooked.
Thank Your Audience
While this is one of the most important things to do at the end of a presentation, it is also one of the most frequently forgotten things. Remember that the audience has given up their time to listen to you. They could have been anywhere else in the world doing anything they wanted to do, but they were there with you. You should appreciate that. One way of thanking your audience might be to simply say, “That is all I have for today. I appreciate you giving me your time. Thank you very much and have a great day. “
Training
Training can be conducted in many ways, such as in a lecture or classroom format (above), online, or any number of ways.
Taking Questions
Sometimes it is necessary to take questions at the end of your speech. Many speakers find this challenging, as it is not part of the prepared talk. However, by drawing on your mastery of your subject matter and accurately gauging what the questioner is really asking, you will be able to answer any questions asked in a satisfactory manner. Answering questions effectively strengthens the effect of your speech, as it confirms your authority on the topic in the mind of your audience.
5.4.5: Questions and Answers
The question and answer format is often used to provide a higher quality or higher volume of responses within a business communication.
Learning Objective
Describe the purpose of the question and answer (Q&A) format in business writing
Key Points
- To use this format effectively, the author should anticipate any questions that the reader might have regarding the message and provide the answers.
- The question and answer format (Q & A) presents a series of questions and answers that provides all the pertinent information that the reader needs.
- When presenting a large amount of information that needs to be conveyed, using the question and answer format helps keep the reader engaged.
- The most effective communications answer the following questions. What is the purpose, Who is the audience, Are there any stakeholders, What is the context of this message.
Key Term
- recitation
-
The material recited.
Example
- If you prefer to hold all questions until the end of the presentation, make that clear at the beginning of the presentation. For example, if someone is introducing you as the speaker, that introduction can also include a request to hold questions until the end.
Questions and Answers
Most business writing uses the “one thing after another” approach, which is a plain recitation of the facts . While this method communicates the message, it can often leave the reader with unanswered questions. The question and answer format is often used to provide better or more responses to the business communication.
The Main Purpose of Business Writing
With rhetorical awareness, the focus of communication shifted from simply reproducing forms, templates, and documents to thinking about what the writer wants to accomplish with the document.
In order to use this format effectively, the author should anticipate any questions that the reader might have regarding the message and provide the answers. The question and answer format (Q & A) presents a series of questions and answers that provides all the pertinent information that the reader needs.
While this method is often associated with interviews and other news media, this format doesn’t require two people. The writer essentially asks and answers the question. This format is most successful in the business world when it employs a conversational tone. This method is especially effective in advertising and employee communications.
When presenting a large amount of information that needs to be conveyed, using the question and answer format helps keep the reader engaged. This is because the question and answer format breaks the information down into smaller, easy to read pieces, which can make the content itself seem more inviting. Arranging the questions so they flow into one another encourages the reader to continue and prevents them from skipping over important information.
For example, a memo on upcoming changes to the employee benefit program might include a question and answer like this:
Q: When will the benefits begin?
A: The benefit changes will begin on January 1, 2013
5.4.6: Visuals
Visual aids help us distill complex concepts into clean, elegant expressions that are easily grasped by the audience.
Learning Objective
Integrate visual assets into your presentation skills to clarify your points and simplify your expressions
Key Points
- Visual images have been a part of human communication and language for thousands of years, and for good reason. 60-65% of people think predominantly in pictures, even when listening to words.
- Complexity is a great way to lose the interest of your audience, and visual aids are naturally effective at consolidating complex concepts into elegant high-level expressions.
- There are tons of useful tools to help you on your way, but keep in mind certain visual approaches work better in certain situations than others.
- Graphs are favored for distilling complex data streams into clear correlations, while photos are excellent at building an emotional connection. Consider the point you are making as you select the appropriate image.
Key Terms
- chunking
-
The act of retaining more information through strategically combining concepts.
- visualization
-
The act of transforming data and/or ideas into images.
When delivering an effective presentation, very few tools are more effective than good visuals. There are a number of reasons this is true (aside from the common adage that a picture is worth a thousands words). Understanding why visuals are useful and how to go about using them will give you a critical edge at your next big talk.
Why Visuals Matter
The evolution of communication is largely visual, with pictographs dating back thousands of years. At the onset of communication, humans focused on visual representations of ideas. Approximately 60-65% of people see a series of pictures when listening or looking at a series of words. This is an enormous portion of your audience, so speak their language!
Encoding and Decoding
This image demonstrates the way in which we code and decode messages we send to one another. When I think to say the word tree, and then proceed to say it, you process the word tree and then proceed to think it. Simplifying communication with imagery can often bypass much of the coding and decoding that slows us down.
Aside from this, sometimes the most efficient way to communicate a point with clarity is to wrap up various premises and your core conclusion in one clean image. This can be accomplished through diagrams, charts, tables, graphs, models, and even internet memes. The more creative and memorable the image, the more likely it’ll stick in the forefront of their minds after you’ve gone (which is, after all, the point of all of this).
How To Visualize Well
Specialists in memory and human comprehension confirm that the human mind simply can’t hold all that many words, numbers, or concepts simultaneously. This presents a challenge when communicating complex ideas to a crowd. Distilling complex ideas into an elegant display can aid in this process.
Some of the most useful tools at your disposal are the simplest. Focus on chunking your information, organizing your content, ensuring relevance, creating visual alignment, and emphasizing a single main point. Below is a list of visual aids you can consider, with a brief description of how they are best utilized:
- Physical Objects and Diagrams: These are quite useful when 3-dimensional thinking is required, or when the skill being taught is hands-on. They are not so useful when they are big, distracting, and unwieldy.
- Graphs: For delivering complex data in a single and elegant expression, graphs can’t be beat. However, if there are multiple key concerns and countless possible conclusions, a graph can be quite misleading.
- Photographs: Photos work best when the human element is useful, as they tend to create a sense of empathy and connection. However, photos aren’t as effective at abstraction.
- Maps: Spatial reasoning is difficult, so don’t make people walk through a city via text. Visually showing a map immediately enables your audience to have a strong sense of scope and direction. However, know your audience and keep it simple – maps can also be quite intimidating when over-populated with points of interest.
Gear Pump Diagram
This image shows the breakdown of a gear pump as a technical diagram, with each part clearly labeled and color-coded for ease of understanding. This is an excellent example of how a diagram can help us avoid complex coding and decoding of words, and instead paint a clear image of functionality directly from a visual aid.
5.4.7: Practicing through Anxiety
There are many ideas on how to mitigate the effects of stage fright, such as through thorough preparation and rehearsal.
Learning Objective
List common solutions for dealing with stage fright
Key Points
- In some cases, stage fright may be a part of a larger pattern of social phobia or social anxiety disorder, but many people experience stage fright without any wider problems. Quite often, stage fright arises in a mere anticipation of a performance, often a long time ahead.
- Three solutions to stage fright include: reducing the significance of the other people, eliminating the imagination of negative possibilities, and holding the performance in perspective by seeing its outcome as insignificant in relation to the totality of one’s life.
- Other possible solutions include preparing by rehearsing with visual aids and using physical methods for releasing energy and excitement out of one’s system.
Key Terms
- glossophobia
-
The fear of public speaking.
- stage fright
-
A state of nervousness about performing some action in front of a group of people, on or off a stage; nerves; uncertainty; a lack of self-assurance before an audience.
Example
- One way of reducing anxiety is by rehearsing. If presenting in front of a crowd with a PowerPoint presentation, practice beforehand to coworkers. Rehearse the same way you would deliver the presentation. For example, stand in front of the room or stay seated if recording a webcast.
Stage fright or performance anxiety is the anxiety, fear, or persistent phobia that may be aroused in an individual by the requirement to perform in front of an audience, whether actually or potentially (for example, when performing before a camera). In the context of public speaking, this fear is termed glossophobia, which is one of the most common phobias. Such anxiety may precede or accompany participation in any activity involving public self-presentation. In some cases, stage fright may be a part of a larger pattern of social phobia or social anxiety disorder, but many people experience stage fright without any wider problems.
Solutions to Performance Anxiety
One possible solution to performance anxiety is to reduce the significance of the other people. While experiencing performance anxiety, we often invest the others with imagined power, especially in their ability to affect us through their evaluation of our performance. Ways to reduce this imagined power is to increase the sense of one’s own power, to perceive the vulnerability of others, and to accept oneself.
Another possible solution to performance anxiety is to eliminate the imagination of negative possibilities. A negative outcome is always possible, but that does not justify worrying about it before it occurs. Focusing one’s attention on the present, rather than the future, is much more productive. A way to do this is to monitor our own performance.
A third solution to performance anxiety is to hold the performance in perspective by seeing its outcome as insignificant in relation to the totality of one’s life. By realizing that nothing catastrophic is likely to occur, the need to avoid failure may decrease and switch to a more positive goal. An example of a positive goal would be to provide others with pleasure. Furthermore, it is helpful to focus on the process, the moment-to-moment experience, rather than the results of a performance. Additionally, it is important to concentrate on the enjoyable aspects of the process.
Preparing for Your Speech
There are many ideas on how to mitigate the effects of stage fright. One is as simple as being prepared. According to Lybi Ma with Psychology Today, “Being prepared is your first line of attack. You should be anxious if you haven’t done your homework.”
When preparing to give your speech, it is important to rehearse just as you plan to present it. This includes using your visual aids when you practice. This is necessary to do, since it trains you to make smooth transitions between slides. Take time into consideration as well, since it is hard to sit through a long speech, even if it is interesting. People can usually only concentrate for about twenty minutes at a time. This may mean you need to break your speech up into two parts if it is lengthy. Doing this gives the audience a short break in between and allows them to refocus and retain the important information.
Rehearsing
To rehearse effectively, you should consider the following tips:
- Pay special attention to the delivery of your key points; this is typically where stumbling for your words can become the greatest problem.
- Speak in a conversational style. Do not talk at your audience; pretend you are talking with your audience.
- Prepare for interruptions and questions. On this note, make sure to leave room for questions at the end of your presentation.
- Practice pausing in your speech after important information you would like to stress, as well as when you are transitioning from one main point to another. By doing so, the audience can better digest the information and reflect on what they have just heard.
- Rehearse with your graphics and coordinate them to your talk.
- Display your graphics only when you are talking about them. Graphics should support your presentation, not detract from it.
- Time your rehearsal, and use the same pace you will use when you present.
- Rehearse in front of others. Feedback can improve your speech and having an audience for practice can pinpoint weaknesses in the presentation.
- If possible, rehearse your speech in the location you will be giving it. This will allow you to feel more comfortable when you are giving your presentation.
- Make sure you hear your speech aloud, either by recording it, or by listening carefully to yourself during rehearsal. This will enable you to make sure that your words flow smoothly in an understandable manner.
5.4.8: Dealing with a Difficult Audience
Speaking directly, honestly, and on point can improve the result of a speech, even one in front of a difficult audience.
Learning Objective
Summarize the benefits of delivering extemporaneous speeches
Key Points
- An extemporaneous speech sounds spontaneous because the presenter is not reading word for word.
- The advantage of extemporaneous speeches is that eye contact and body language can increase. The speaker’s head is not down, buried in a manuscript. The speaker is able to take in audience feedback and respond to it as it occurs.
- In dealing with a difficult audience, it is best to be as honest as possible and to remain polite when audience members disagree with points made in the speech.
- It is important to practice presenting with the outline or note cards being used.
- Sometimes your audience may be difficult during the question and answer period. If you do not know the answer to a question asked by an audience member, simply say so, do not lie, and explain any relevant information you do know. If you are interrupted by a question, answer it and continue with your presentation. If an audience member disagrees with your presentation, be polite in your reaction.
Key Term
- extemporaneous
-
Without preparation or advanced thought; offhand.
Example
- Suppose an audience member disagrees with your presentation and presents contrary evidence. Remain polite and respectfully acknowledge the question. If you know the details of the evidence the person has presented, you have the option of presenting a counterargument or reinforcing parts of your presentation that contradict the findings.
Giving a speech or a lecture can be very difficult and intimidating when dealing with a large audience. Not only do presenters have to deal with stage fright, but they have to deal with a difficult audience. If one is unprepared, they can come off as unprofessional. One way to prepare for these situations is by delivering speeches as though they are extemporaneous.
Extemporaneous Speaking
An extemporaneous speech (extemp speech) is delivered from a prepared outline or note cards. The outline or note cards include the main ideas and arguments of the speech. The only information that is typically copied word for word are quotes. Outlines and note cards should be used for keeping the presentation organized and for reminding the presenter what information needs to be provided.
Extemp speaking has many advantages compared to the other methods of delivery. For one, an extemporaneous speech sounds spontaneous because the presenter is not reading word for word. Glancing at an outline or a note card that has key ideas listed allows the presenter to add detail and personality to the information being presented. Second, similar to memorized speaking, eye contact and body language can increase. The speaker’s head is not down, buried in a manuscript. Third, the speaker is able to take in audience feedback and respond to it as it occurs. An audience tends to change moment by moment, and a good speaker can tell when more or less detail is needed for different parts of the presentation.
In order to play to the strengths of extemporaneous speech, it is important to practice presenting with the outline or note cards being used. Inexperienced speakers tend to worry that they will forget important information if they do not write it out on their outline or note card. Practicing your speech, even if it’s just to your pet or mirror, will help increase your confidence level in both delivery and knowledge of the subject. This will help you seem more like an expert in front of your audience.
Answering Difficult Questions
Sometimes your audience may be difficult during the question and answer period . If you do not know the answer to a question asked by an audience member, simply say so, do not lie, and explain any relevant information you do know. If an audience member asks a question in disagreement with your topic, remain in good terms. Politely and respectfully acknowledge the opposing thoughts. If an audience member interrupts your speech with a question, answer it, and return to where you left off.
A Tough Crowd
It may sometimes be difficult to engage the audience during the question and answer period.
5.4.9: Using Humor
Using a joke to start a presentation is often a good idea if used properly.
Learning Objective
Indicate how irony and metaphor are used in presentations
Key Points
- In most cases, keep your joke clean.
- Try to make the joke pertain to the subject you are presenting.
- If you open with humor or use it in any other part of your presentation, be sure to avoid all sexual, religious and racial topics.
Key Terms
- irony
-
A statement that, when taken in context, may actually mean something different from, or the opposite of what is written literally; the use of words expressing something other than their literal intention, notably as a form of humor.
- joke
-
Something said or done for amusement.
- humor
-
The quality of being amusing, comical, funny.
Example
- Here is an example that you might use when doing a presentation on football: “Anyone who makes a bad call against the Detroit Lions risks ticking off their last remaining fan.”
Using Humor
Beginning a presentation with a joke can be an effective strategy for winning over one’s audience, provided the speaker or author knows his or her audience well. However, the speaker better hope the audience thinks the joke is funny! Most often, keeping one’s joke clean is prudent, as not to create discomfort among the audience. Also helpful is telling a joke relevant to the subject being presented. Here, for example, is a joke one might use for a presentation on football: Anyone who makes a bad call against the Detroit Lions risks ticking off their last remaining fan!
Take care with the subject matter as sometimes humor can do more harm than good. If you decide to use humor at any point in your presentation, it is a good rule to avoid all sexual, religious and racial topics or references.
Irony and metaphor
Two common rhetorical devices used to convey special meaning to an audience are irony and metaphor.
The use of irony in rhetoric is primarily to convey an incongruity, often used in humor to deprecate or ridicule an idea or course of action. When taken in context, the statement may actually mean something different from, or opposite of what is said literally.
Irony
A stop sign ironically defaced with a beseechment not to deface stop signs
The use of metaphor in rhetoric is primarily to convey a new idea or meaning by linking it to an existing idea or meaning with which the audience is already familiar. Linking the new with the old and familiar through the use of metaphor is an excellent tool for introducing new concepts to one’s audience.
5.4.10: The Importance of Delivery
Your appearance and delivery are just as important as the content of your speech.
Learning Objective
Explain why appearance and delivery are important in presentations
Key Points
- You want your audience to give you respect and to take you seriously, so be sure to dress well.
- Act poised and confident; don’t let your nerves get the best of you. When rehearsing, identify your weak spots, practice fixing them, as well as practice hitting the crucial points in your speech. Do your best to avoid fidgeting, pacing, looking at the floor, and over using “um”, “uh”, or “and”.
- The most important thing to remember before giving your speech is to deliver your message. If you forget to say certain points it is fine, just deliver your message and let the audience know the main objective of your speech.
- While standing in front of a large or small audience for a presentation, body language is crucial. Remain relaxed and calm, remember to smile, and maintain eye contact with the audience.
Key Terms
- body language
-
Nonverbal communication by means of facial expressions, eye behavior, gestures, posture, and the like; often thought to be involuntary.
- appearance
-
Apparent likeness; external show; how something appears to others.
Example
- Maintain eye contact with the audience. For example, start out your speech looking to the center, and then alternate between left, right, and center for the remainder of the presentation.
The Importance of Delivery
Your appearance and delivery are just as important as your speech. You want your audience to give you respect and to take you seriously, so be sure to dress well. For your dress, consider what your particular audience will expect of you. In most cases, this means business casual, but sometimes a suit or dress may be necessary.
The Importance of Delivery
Your appearance and delivery are just as important as your speech.
In order to dress to impress, men should wear a button-up shirt and tie, blazer (optional), dress pants, and dress shoes. Men should also be clean shaven and have tidy hair.
In order to dress to impress, women should wear a button-up shirt, blouse, or a nice sweater, dress pants or skirt (one that goes below the knee), and dress heels or flats. Women should not wear too much make-up, and they should have tidy hair. Women should also avoid large dangling jewelry, as this can be distracting to your audience.
Deliver Your Message
Act poised and confident; don’t let your nerves get the best of you. Accept your nervousness and work with it. Everyone understands how it feels to be nervous and will be supportive. When rehearsing, identify your weak spots, practice fixing them, as well as practice hitting the crucial points in your speech. Do your best to avoid fidgeting, pacing, looking at the floor, and over using “um”, “uh”, or “and. ” Try to breathe easy and pace your speech. The most important thing to remember before giving your speech is to deliver your message. If you forget to say certain points it is fine, just deliver your message and let the audience know the main objective of your speech. Find comfort in knowing that your nervousness is not as visible to others as it is to you.
Body Language
While standing in front of a large or small audience for a presentation, body language is crucial. Audiences may become distracted if you flail a laser pointer or fidget with a pen. As a presenter, remain relaxed and calm while creating animated and lively facial expressions. Always remember to smile, maintain eye contact with the audience, and enjoy your experience as a presenter.
Your Audience
The great thing about presenting a speech is that you can gauge the understanding of your audience by paying attention to them. If your listeners are looking confused, you can ask if they understand before moving on to the next point. You can then back-up and re-explain your points as needed. Make eye contact with your audience members, and make sure not to stare at your notes the whole time. If you have a large audience, make sure to alternate talking to the audience members to the right and left of you as well as in front of you. When you begin your speech do not look at your notes, look at your audience! You know your topic and who you are so introduce yourself and your topic as you would introduce yourself when you meet a new person.
The following strategies will help you look at your audience:
- Look at your audience before you begin
- Create and follow a plan for looking
- Pick a particular feature of your listeners’ faces
- Practice looking at the audience while rehearsing
- Avoid skimming over faces in your audience
5.5: Word Choice
5.5.1: Keeping the Audience in Mind
The most important concept to keep in mind when writing for business is who your target audience is.
Learning Objective
List the best practices for writing for business audiences
Key Points
- You need to tailor your writing to fit different audiences in different situations. If you address the document’s specific target audience in terms they understand, your document will have a better chance of achieving its goal.
- When selecting words, your first goal should be to increase the usability of your writing by enabling your readers to grasp your meaning quickly and accurately. At the same time, keep in mind that your word choices affect the attitudes your readers have toward you and your subject matter.
- Generally, keeping it simple is a good policy. By not over-elaborating and not using unnecessarily complex words, you make the message easy to understand and accessible to all. There may be situations in which more complex writing is needed, however.
Key Term
- target audience
-
The primary group of people that something, usually an advertising campaign, is aimed at appealing to.
Example
- When writing a business proposal to upper management, your tone would likely be more professional and your word choice more formal than if you were writing an email proposing a team bonding activity.
The most important concept to keep in mind when writing for business is who your target audience is. You need to tailor your writing to fit different audiences in different situations. If you address the document’s specific target audience in terms they understand, your document will have a better chance of achieving its goal.
Every business document has a purpose. You could be trying to persuade your boss that you are due a raise in one instance, and trying to persuade the HR Department that the company picnic would have more participation if it were held at a lake in another instance. In both instances, the language and way you would approach each topic is going to differ .
Know Your Audience
It is important to know your target audience for any piece that you write.
When selecting your words, your first goal should be to increase the usability of your writing by enabling your readers to grasp your meaning quickly and accurately. At the same time, keep in mind that your word choices affect the attitudes your readers have toward you and your subject matter. You also need to choose words that will increase your communication’s persuasiveness. Word choice could make a difference in how your voice is heard and your writing is perceived. A formal tone and more official word selection leads to a very different type of piece than an informal tone and simpler word selection. It is almost always advisable to let a trusted colleague read your writing, and offer suggestions, if needed, before you finalize it to make sure that it accurately and effectively conveys the message that you want it to for your intended audience.
In general, you are keeping the audience in mind when you:
- Use concrete, specific words.
- Use specialized terms only when your readers will understand them.
- Use words accurately.
- Choose plain words over fancy ones.
- Choose words with appropriate associations and connotations.
- Consider the cultural background of your readers when choosing words.
- Use inclusive language.
5.5.2: Avoiding Slang and Jargon
When writing business documents, only use jargon when necessary with appropriate audiences, and completely avoid the use of slang words.
Learning Objective
Differentiate between jargon and slang
Key Points
- Jargon refers to the common vocabulary used by specific professions or groups of people, whereas slang includes expressions and types of speech used informally.
- You can increase the usability and persuasiveness of your writing by wisely using the specialized terms of your own profession.
- Jargon should be avoided when it is only used for the sake of looking knowledgeable in a particular subject as it can make it difficult to understand what is being said. Generally, slang should always be avoided.
Key Terms
- slang
-
Language outside of conventional usage.
- jargon
-
A technical terminology unique to a particular subject.
Example
- Business jargon includes terms like bandwidth, deliverable, bad apples, low-hanging fruit, and Six Sigma. If writing to an audience familiar with the terminology, using these terms can be more efficient. If writing to an audience that is unfamiliar with the terminology, it is best to use broader terms.
Jargon Defined
Jargon is the common vocabulary used by specific professions or groups of people within those professions. It can be similar to slang or it can be highly technical. Legal jargon, medical jargon, and police jargon are all examples of different types of jargon that exist in very different professions .
Police Jargon
Police have their own specific jargon which may not be understood by those outside the profession.
Much like slang, jargon can develop as a kind of short-hand to express ideas that are frequently discussed between members of a group, though it can also be developed deliberately using chosen terms. A standard term may be given a more precise or unique usage among practitioners of a field. In many cases, this causes a barrier to communication with those not familiar with the language of the field. As an example, the words RAM, bit, byte, CPU, HDD, and hexadecimal are jargon terms related to computing.
When writing business documents, it is recommended that authors avoid using technical jargon for the sake of looking smart. Instead, they should use it only when necessary with appropriate audiences who understand their significance. Using simple verbiage instead ensures understanding by a broad spectrum of users.
When to Use Jargon
You can increase the usability and persuasiveness of your writing by wisely using the specialized terms of your own profession. You should use jargon to convey precise, technical meanings efficiently, as many terms have no exact equivalent in everyday speech.
In addition, you should use jargon to help you establish credibility. By using the specialized terms of your field accurately, you show your fellow specialists that you are adept in it. However, you should avoid using technical terms your readers will not understand.
Slang
The term slang includes words, expressions, or the special use of language, used in informal speech.
Slang is especially common in pop, rock, jazz, and rap music, as well as in films, all of which tend to have international audiences. As a result, many foreign speakers who have learned more formal registers are sometimes surprised when they hear expressions like: “I gotta go! ” (I have to go now), or “What’s up bro? ” (How are you my friend). In certain regions, certain dialects may have this non-standard language incorporated into “normal” speech.
Writers of official documents or papers should avoid using slang, whatever the context. While jargon may be acceptable in certain types of documents, one should avoid using slang words, even in documents like memos that always have a conversational style.
5.5.3: Using Impartial Language
In business writing, it is important to communicate the message using impartial or unbiased language.
Learning Objective
Explain why it is important to use impartial language in business writing
Key Points
- Not only does biased language have the potential to offend readers, but it also negatively affects the writer’s credibility and distracts from the message being conveyed.
- Choosing unbiased language avoids offensive language and ensures that the message is effectively communicated.
- Writers should write in a way that is free from gender and group stereotypes including race, age, ethnicity, disability, or sexual orientation.
- When writing business correspondence use respectful language.
Key Term
- unbiased
-
Impartial or without bias or prejudice.
Example
- Always use the preferred designations for ethnic and racial groups. Descriptors used to identify a group should be precise. For instance: In clinical studies, the drug was less effective in Asian, Hispanic, and African American women.
Impartial Language
In business writing, it is important to communicate the message using impartial or unbiased language. Choosing unbiased language avoids offensive language and ensures that the message is effectively communicated. Not only does biased language have the potential to offend readers, but it also negatively affects the writer’s credibility and distracts from the message being conveyed .
Impartial Language
In business writing, it is important to communicate the message using impartial or unbiased language.
Using Unbiased Language
Writers should write in a way that is free from gender and group stereotypes including race, age, ethnicity, disability, or sexual orientation. Here are a few examples that illustrate the use of unbiased language:
Disability
Language that labels individuals by their disability and use of emotionally impartial expressions should be avoided.
Before editing: The facility should be reconstructed because it is not accessible for individuals confined to wheelchairs.
After editing: The facility should be reconstructed because it is not accessible for individuals who use wheelchairs.
Gender
Gender language that could be considered sexist or stereotypical should be avoided. Gender should only be specified if necessary for clarity.
Before editing: The instructor should consider the needs of his students when developing the syllabus.
After editing: Instructors should consider the needs of their students when developing the syllabus.
Racial or Ethnic Identity
Always use the preferred designations for ethnic and racial groups. Descriptors used to identify a group should be precise.
Before editing: In clinical studies, the drug was less effective in Oriental and other Non-White women.
After editing: In clinical studies, the drug was less effective in Asian, Hispanic, and African American women.
5.5.4: Avoiding Passive Voice
A way to focus your sentences on action and actors is to use the active voice rather than the passive voice.
Learning Objective
Give examples of situations where it is appropriate to use passive voice in business writing
Key Points
- To write the active voice, place the actor, which is the person or the thing performing the action, in the subject position. Your verb will then describe the actor’s action.
- Research shows that readers comprehend active sentences more rapidly than passive ones. The active voice also eliminates the vagueness and ambiguity that often characterizes the passive voice.
- Although the passive voice generally reduces readability, it has some good uses, such as when you don’t want to identify the actor.
Key Terms
- active
-
Having the power or quality of acting; causing change; communicating action or motion; acting.
- passive
-
Being subjected to an action without producing a reaction.
Example
- Example of the active voice: The chicken crossed the road.
The Passive Voice Defined
In writing, the passive voice is when the grammatical subject of the verb is the recipient (not the source) of the action denoted by the verb. For example, “the changes were recommended by the consultant” is an example of the passive voice.
Reasons to Avoid the Passive Voice
Research shows that readers comprehend active sentences more rapidly than passive ones. The active voice also eliminates the vagueness and ambiguity that often characterize the passive voice. In the passive voice, a sentence can describe an action without telling who did it. For example, “The ball was hit” is a grammatically correct sentence, but doesn’t tell who or what hit the ball. With the active voice, the writer identifies the actor: “Linda hit the ball. ” Keep in mind, the passive voice is not a grammatical error, it is a stylistic choice.
The active voice keeps the focus of the sentence on the action. To write the active voice, place the actor, which is the person or the thing performing the action, in the subject position. The verb will then describe the actor’s action.
In business writing, the use of the active voice is important to get people to answer a call to action. A memo written in the active voice will have a greater impact than one written in the passive voice. Using the active instead of passive voice in writing technical documents and instructions helps readers understand everything immediately without having to read anything twice.
Appropriate Uses of the Passive Voice
Although the passive voice generally reduces readability, it has some good uses, such as when you don’t want to identify the actor. If the writer decides it would be ethically acceptable to communicate news to the reader without naming the person who made the report, the passive voice is okay. Be careful to avoid using the passive voice to hide an actor’s identity when it is unethical to do so, such as when trying to avoid accepting responsibility for your employer’s actions.
Passive Voice
Using the passive voice in your writing can obscure the meaning of your message.
5.6: Audience Analysis
5.6.1: Anticipating Audience Reaction
It is important to tailor the message to the audience, so the writer must identify the interests, needs, and personality of the audience.
Learning Objective
Discuss the factors business writers must consider when anticipating audience reaction
Key Points
- For business writing, this includes taking into account whether the message is intended for a higher up or a subordinate, and a singular person or a group of people.
- Once the writer determines who the audience is, it is time to consider what reaction the message will generate. If the writer anticipates a positive response, the language of the message can direct.
- When anticipating a negative reaction, the writer must use a great deal of persuasion. This can include using expert opinion and external evidence for support.
- It is essential to pay attention to the tone of the message, because it is a good indicator of how the reader will feel while reading the message.
Key Terms
- tone
-
The manner in which speech or writing is expressed.
- reaction
-
An action or statement in response to a stimulus or other event.
Example
- If the writer/presenter anticipates a positive reaction, she can be direct, stating outright that, for example, a certain change should be made. If the expected reaction is negative, the writer/presenter may start by listing problems caused by the current situation to encourage the audience to consider the problems objectively prior to suggesting changes.
Anticipating Audience Reaction
When writing a message, it is important to tailor the message to the audience. In order to do so, the writer must identify the interests, needs, and personality of the audience . For business writing, this includes taking into account whether the message is intended for a higher up or a subordinate, and a singular person or a group of people.
Impartial Language
In business writing, it is important to communicate the message using impartial or unbiased language.
Once the writer determines who the audience, it is time to consider what reaction the message will generate. If the writer anticipates a positive response, the language of the message can direct. On the other hand, if the writer anticipates a neutral reaction to the message, it is necessary to use language that is more persuasive. Writing a message when the anticipated reaction is a negative one requires the most effort. In this case, the writer must use a great deal of persuasion. This can include using expert opinion and external evidence for support.
The Role of Tone in Audience Reaction
It is essential to pay attention to the tone of the message, because it is a good indicator of how the reader will feel while reading the message. A professional, yet friendly tone makes the writer sound both professional and approachable. Keep in mind that the best messages rely on words that will have a positive impact on the tone of the message. One way to do this is to put the focus of the message on the receiver. This can be achieved by using second-person pronouns throughout the text. This shows that the writer has empathy toward the reader.
Another technique involves using bias-free language, which means the message should be free from gender, race, age, and disability bias. Improperly chosen words can contribute to an overall negative tone and make an otherwise innocuous message sound unpleasant. It is a good idea to use positive words and avoid words that have negative connotations. The most effective messages use simple language and words that are precise, which prevents any miscommunication.
5.6.2: Dynamically Crafting your Message
The most important aspect of business writing is clear and concise writing that gets the message across in the best way.
Learning Objective
Describe how to craft a clear and concise business message
Key Points
- The opening sentence or section or business writing takes on a special importance. It helps to establish the frame of mind readers bring to all the sentences and sections that follow. It also grabs the attention of viewers and keeps them focused until the end.
- The most important function of the beginning is to persuade your readers to devote their full attention to your message rather than skimming it or setting it aside unfinished.
- Unless your communication is very short, its beginning should tell readers what to expect in the segments that follow. A forecasting statement positioned at the beginning of a communication should focus its organization and scope.
- Readers’ expectations and preferences about the beginning of a communication are shaped by their culture.
Key Terms
- unethical
-
Not morally approvable; morally bad; not ethical.
- scope
-
The breadth, depth, or reach of a subject; a domain.
Example
- An e-mail may have a subject line “Next Steps from Organizational Meeting: Assignments” with an outline listing each step and who it is assigned to. The body of the email would further detail each step. The subject line is designed to clearly indicate that it needs to be opened and read by those to whom it pertains. The outline provides a summary for those who may need to be aware of the contents but not need details. Further information is provided later in the email for those to whom it is relevant.
Crafting the Message
Writing is a dynamic interaction between readers and authors. The response of readers to one sentence or paragraph can influence their reactions to all the sentences and paragraphs that follow. Consequently, the opening sentence or section takes on a special importance. It helps to establish the frame of mind readers bring to all the sentences and sections that follow. It also grabs the attention of viewers and keeps them focused until the end.
Give Your Readers a Reason to Pay Attention
The most important function of the beginning of the message to persuade readers to devote their full attention to your message . At work, people complain that they receive too many e-mails and reports. Your goal is to convince them to pay close attention to the message.
Know Your Audience
Give your readers a reason to pay attention.
Tell Your Readers What to Expect
Unless your communication is short, its beginning should tell readers what to expect in the segments that follow. A forecasting statement positioned at the beginning of a communication should focus its organization and scope. This will serve a couple of purposes. First, it will narrow the reader’s attention to only what needs to be addressed. Second, it will deter some of the readers to whom you are not intending to write. This could help in avoiding lawsuits.
Tell about Your Communication’s Organization
By telling your readers about your communication’s organization in your beginning, you provide them with a framework for understanding the connections among the various pieces of information you convey. This framework substantially increases your communication’s usability by helping your readers immediately see how each new point you make relates to a point that they have already read. It also helps skimming readers navigate quickly to the information that they are seeking.
Tell about Your Communication’s Scope
Readers want to know from the beginning what a communication does and does not contain. Even if they are persuaded that you are addressing a subject relevant to them, they may still wonder whether you discuss the specific aspects of the subject that they want to know about. Often you will tell your readers about the scope of your communication when you tell about its organization: when you list the topics it addresses, you indicate its scope. There will be times however, when you will need to include additional information. That happens when you are not addressing your subject comprehensively or are addressing it from a particular point of view.
Encourage Openness to Your Message
Because the way you begin a communication has a strong effect on your readers’ response, you should always pay attention to the persuasive dimension of your beginnings. Always begin in a way that encourages your readers to be open and receptive to the rest of your communication.
Provide Necessary Background Information
As you draft the beginning of a communication, ask yourself whether your readers will need any background information to understand what you are going to tell them.
Include a Summary Unless Your Communication is Very Short
Summaries help busy managers learn the main points without reading the entire document, and they give those readers an overview of the communication’s content and organization. For longer communications, especially those that are long enough to have covers and tables of contents, these summaries are longer and often printed on a separate page.
Adjust the Length of Your Beginning to Your Readers’ Needs
There is no rule of thumb that tells how long the beginning should be. A good, reader-centered beginning may require only a phrase or may take several pages. You need to give your readers only the information that they don’t already know.
Adapt Your Beginning to Your Readers’ Cultural Background
Readers’ expectations and preferences about the beginning of a communication are shaped by their culture. The suggestions you have just read are suitable for readers in the United States and some other Western countries. However, customs vary widely. You must have good understanding of the communication customs of your readers’ culture in order to create an effective opening. If you do not have this understanding, do some research or seek out someone who is from that culture to ask him.
Ethics Guideline: Begin to Address Unethical Practices Promptly and Strategically
Suppose you learn that your employer is engaged in an action you consider to be unethical. Or you are asked to write something that violates your sense of what is ethical. Should you speak up or express your concerns in writing? New employees are sometimes advised to wait until they have achieved security and status before trying to bring about change. But that means you could spend years before addressing a practice you regard as unethical. Ignoring an unethical act would be seen as unethical in itself.
Chapter 4: International Business
4.1: The Drive for International Trade
4.1.1: Competitive Advantage
Competitive advantage is defined as the strategic advantage one business entity has over its rival entities within its competitive industry.
Learning Objective
Differentiate between the theories of competitive advantage and comparative advantage
Key Points
- A country is said to have a comparative advantage in the production of a good (say cloth) if it can produce cloth at a lower opportunity cost than another country.
- Competitive advantage seeks to address some of the criticisms of comparative advantage.
- Competitive advantage occurs when an organization acquires or develops an attribute or combination of attributes that allows it to outperform its competitors.
Key Terms
- comparative advantage
-
The concept that a certain good can be produced more efficiently than others due to a number of factors, including productive skills, climate, natural resource availability, and so forth.
- Opportunity cost
-
The cost of an opportunity forgone (and the loss of the benefits that could be received from that opportunity); the most valuable forgone alternative.
Example
- Opportunity cost – The opportunity cost of cloth production is defined as the amount of wine for example, that must be given up in order to produce one more unit of cloth.
Competitive advantage is defined as the strategic advantage one business entity has over its rival entities within its competitive industry. Achieving competitive advantage strengthens and positions a business better within the business environment.
Competitive advantage seeks to address some of the criticisms of comparative advantage. A country is said to have a comparative advantage in the production of a good (say cloth) if it can produce cloth at a lower opportunity cost than another country. The opportunity cost of cloth production is defined as the amount of wine that must be given up in order to produce one more unit of cloth. Thus, England would have the comparative advantage in cloth production relative to Portugal if it must give up less wine to produce another unit of cloth than the amount of wine that Portugal would have to give up to produce another unit of cloth.
Competitive Advantage
The 640GB drive has a competitive advantage over the 500GB drive in terms of both cost and value.
Michael Porter proposed the theory of competitive advantage in 1985. The competitive advantage theory suggests that states and businesses should pursue policies that create high-quality goods to sell at high prices in the market. Porter emphasizes productivity growth as the focus of national strategies. This theory rests on the notion that cheap labor is ubiquitous, and natural resources are not necessary for a good economy. The other theory, comparative advantage, can lead countries to specialize in exporting primary goods and raw materials that trap countries in low-wage economies due to terms of trade. The competitive advantage theory attempts to correct for this issue by stressing maximizing scale economies in goods and services that garner premium prices.
Competitive advantage occurs when an organization acquires or develops an attribute or combination of attributes that allows it to outperform its competitors. These attributes can include access to natural resources, such as high grade ores or inexpensive power or access to highly trained and skilled personnel human resources. New technologies, such as robotics and information technology, are either to be included as a part of the product or to assist making it. Information technology has become such a prominent part of the modern business world that it can also contribute to competitive advantage by outperforming competitors with regard to Internet presence. From the very beginning (i.e., Adam Smith’s Wealth of Nations), the central problem of information transmittal, leading to the rise of middle men in the marketplace, has been a significant impediment in gaining competitive advantage. By using the Internet as the middle man, the purveyor of information to the final consumer, businesses can gain a competitive advantage through creation of an effective website, which in the past required extensive effort finding the right middle man and cultivating the relationship.
4.1.2: Absolute Advantage and the Balance of Trade
Absolute advantage and balance of trade are two important aspects of international trade that affect countries and organizations.
Learning Objective
Explain the principles of absolute advantage and balance of trade
Key Points
- Absolute advantage: In economics, the principle of absolute advantage refers to the ability of a party (an individual, or firm, or country) to produce more of a good or service than competitors, using the same amount of resources.
- Net exports: The balance of trade (or net exports, sometimes symbolized as NX) is the difference between the monetary value of exports and imports of output in an economy over a certain period. It is the relationship between a nation’s imports and exports.
- Advantageous trade is based on comparative advantage and covers a larger set of circumstances while still including the case of absolute advantage and hence is a more general theory.
Key Terms
- Absolute advantage
-
The capability to produce more of a given product using less of a given resource than a competing entity.
- advantageous
-
Being of advantage; conferring advantage; gainful; profitable; useful; beneficial; as, an advantageous position.
In the drive for international trade, it is important to understand how trade affects countries positively and negatively—both how a country’s imports and exports affect its economy and how effectively the country’s ability to create and export vital goods effects the businesses within that country. Absolute advantage and balance of trade are two important aspects of international trade that affect countries and organizations .
European Free Trade Agreement
The European Free Trade Agreement has helped countries trade internationally without worrying about absolute advantage and increased net exports.
Absolute Advantage
In economics, the principle of absolute advantage refers to the ability of a party (an individual, a firm, or a country) to produce more of a good or service than competitors while using the same amount of resources. Adam Smith first described the principle of absolute advantage in the context of international trade, using labor as the only input. Since absolute advantage is determined by a simple comparison of labor productivities, it is possible for a party to have no absolute advantage in anything; in that case, according to the theory of absolute advantage, no trade will occur with the other party. It can be contrasted with the concept of comparative advantage, which refers to the ability to produce a particular good at a lower opportunity cost.
Balance of Trade
The balance of trade (or net exports, sometimes symbolized as NX) is the difference between the monetary value of exports and imports in an economy over a certain period. A positive balance is known as a trade surplus if it consists of exporting more than is imported; a negative balance is referred to as a trade deficit or, informally, a trade gap. The balance of trade is sometimes divided into a goods and a services balance.
4.1.3: Importing and Exporting
Nations export products for which they have a competitive advantage in order to import products for which they lack a competitive advantage.
Learning Objective
Explain the difference between imports and exports
Key Points
- Exports refers to selling goods and services produced in the home country to other markets.
- Imports are derived from the conceptual meaning, as to bringing in the goods and services into the port of a country.
- An import in the receiving country is an export to the sending country.
Key Term
- capital goods
-
Produced goods that are chiefly used in production of further goods, in contrast to the consumer goods
In International Trade, “exports” refers to selling goods and services produced in the home country to other markets. Any good or commodity, transported from one country to another country in a legitimate fashion, typically for use in trade. Export goods or services are provided to foreign consumers by domestic producers. The buyer of such goods and services is referred to an “importer” who is based in the country of import, whereas the overseas-based seller is referred to as an “exporter. ” Thus, an import is any good (e.g., a commodity) or service brought in from one country to another country in a legitimate fashion, typically for use in trade. It is a good that is brought in from another country for sale. Import goods or services are provided to domestic consumers by foreign producers. An import in the receiving country is an export to the sending country.
When a country, South Africa for example, sells its products to other countries, we call it exporting, and when South Africa buys goods from other countries, we call it importing. South Africa exports mainly primary products, such as products from mining (gold, diamonds, platinum, manganese, chromium, coal, iron ore, and asbestos), and agricultural products, such as wool, sugar, hides, and fruit. South Africa purchases capital goods, such as machinery, computers, and electronic products, from other countries. The money that is earned through exports is used to pay for imported products and in this way, the numerous needs of South Africans are satisfied.
Container Ship in Kaoshiung Habor, ROC
Exporting raw materials accounts for the funds spent on importing finished goods.
4.2: International Trade Barriers
4.2.1: Economics
Trade barriers are government-induced restrictions on international trade, which generally decrease overall economic efficiency.
Learning Objective
Explain the different types of trade barriers and their economic effect
Key Points
- Trade barriers cause a limited choice of products and, therefore, would force customers to pay higher prices and accept inferior quality.
- Trade barriers generally favor rich countries because these countries tend to set international trade policies and standards.
- Economists generally agree that trade barriers are detrimental and decrease overall economic efficiency, which can be explained by the theory of comparative advantage.
Key Terms
- tariff
-
A system of government-imposed duties levied on imported or exported goods; a list of such duties, or the duties themselves.
- quota
-
a restriction on the import of something to a specific quantity.
Trade barriers are government-induced restrictions on international trade. Man-made trade barriers come in several forms, including:
- Tariffs
- Non-tariff barriers to trade
- Import licenses
- Export licenses
- Import quotas
- Subsidies
- Voluntary Export Restraints
- Local content requirements
- Embargo
- Currency devaluation
- Trade restriction
Most trade barriers work on the same principle–the imposition of some sort of cost on trade that raises the price of the traded products. If two or more nations repeatedly use trade barriers against each other, then a trade war results.
A port in Singapore
International trade barriers can take many forms for any number of reasons. Generally, governments impose barriers to protect domestic industry or to “punish” a trading partner.
Economists generally agree that trade barriers are detrimental and decrease overall economic efficiency. This can be explained by the theory of comparative advantage. In theory, free trade involves the removal of all such barriers, except perhaps those considered necessary for health or national security. In practice, however, even those countries promoting free trade heavily subsidize certain industries, such as agriculture and steel. Trade barriers are often criticized for the effect they have on the developing world. Because rich-country players set trade policies, goods, such as agricultural products that developing countries are best at producing, face high barriers. Trade barriers, such as taxes on food imports or subsidies for farmers in developed economies, lead to overproduction and dumping on world markets, thus lowering prices and hurting poor-country farmers. Tariffs also tend to be anti-poor, with low rates for raw commodities and high rates for labor-intensive processed goods. The Commitment to Development Index measures the effect that rich country trade policies actually have on the developing world. Another negative aspect of trade barriers is that it would cause a limited choice of products and, therefore, would force customers to pay higher prices and accept inferior quality.
In general, for a given level of protection, quota-like restrictions carry a greater potential for reducing welfare than do tariffs. Tariffs, quotas, and non-tariff barriers lead too few of the economy’s resources being used to produce tradeable goods. An export subsidy can also be used to give an advantage to a domestic producer over a foreign producer. Export subsidies tend to have a particularly strong negative effect because in addition to distorting resource allocation, they reduce the economy’s terms of trade. In contrast to tariffs, export subsidies lead to an over allocation of the economy’s resources to the production of tradeable goods.
4.2.2: Ethical Barriers
Despite international trading laws and declarations, countries continue to face challenges around ethical trading and business practices.
Learning Objective
Explain how and why groups place ethical barriers on international trade
Key Points
- Although some argue that the increasing integration of financial markets between countries leads to more consistent and seamless trading practices, others point out that capital flows tend to favor the capital owners more than any other group.
- With increased international trade and global capital flows, critics argue that income disparities between the rich and poor are exacerbated, and industrialized nations grow in power at the expense of under-capitalized countries.
- Anti-globalization groups continue to protest what they view as the unethical trading practices of multinational businesses and capitalist nations, often targeting groups such as the WTO and IMF.
Key Terms
- neoliberalism
-
A political movement that espouses economic liberalism as a means of promoting economic development and securing political liberty.
- GDP
-
Gross Domestic Product (Economics). A measure of the economic production of a particular territory in financial capital terms over a specific time period.
Ethical Barriers
International trade is the exchange of goods and services across national borders. In most countries, it represents a significant part of gross domestic product (GDP). The rise of industrialization, globalization, and technological innovation has increased the importance of international trade, as well as its economic, social, and political effects on the countries involved. Internationally recognized ethical practices such as the UN Global Compact have been instituted to facilitate mutual cooperation and benefit between governments, businesses, and public institutions. Nevertheless, countries continue to face challenges around ethical trading and business practices, especially regarding economic inequalities and human rights violations.
Arguments Against International Trade
Capital markets involve the raising and investing money in various enterprises. Although some argue that the increasing integration of these financial markets between countries leads to more consistent and seamless trading practices, others point out that capital flows tend to favor the capital owners more than any other group. Likewise, owners and workers in specific sectors in capital-exporting countries bear much of the burden of adjusting to increased movement of capital. The economic strains and eventual hardships that result from these conditions lead to political divisions about whether or not to encourage or increase integration of international trade markets. Moreover, critics argue that income disparities between the rich and poor are exacerbated, and industrialized nations grow in power at the expense of under-capitalized countries.
Anti-Globalization Movements
The anti-globalization movement is a worldwide activist movement that is critical of the globalization of capitalism. Anti-globalization activists are particularly critical of the undemocratic nature of capitalist globalization and the promotion of neoliberalism by international institutions such as the International Monetary Fund (IMF) and the World Bank. Other common targets of anti-corporate and anti-globalization movements include the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD), the WTO, and free trade treaties like the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA), Free Trade Area of the Americas (FTAA), the Multilateral Agreement on Investment (MAI), and the General Agreement on Trade in Services (GATS). Meetings of such bodies are often met with strong protests, as demonstrators attempt to bring attention to the often devastating effects of global capital on local conditions.
On November 30, 1999, close to fifty thousand people gathered to protest the WTO meetings in Seattle, Washington. Labor, economic, and environmental activists succeeded in disrupting and closing the meetings due to their disapproval of corporate globalization. This event came to symbolize the increased debate and growing conflict around the ethical questions on international trade, globalization and capitalization .
Criticism of the Global Capitalist Economy
Demonstrations, such as the mass protest at the 1999 WTO meeting in Seattle, highlight ethical questions on the effects of international trade on poor and developing nations.
4.2.3: Cultural Barriers
It is typically more difficult to do business in a foreign country than in one’s home country due to cultural barriers.
Learning Objective
Explain how cultural differences can pose as barriers to international business
Key Points
- With the process of globalization and increasing global trade, it is unavoidable that different cultures will meet, conflict, and blend together. People from different cultures find it is hard to communicate not only due to language barriers but also cultural differences.
- It is typically more difficult to do business in a foreign country than in one’s home country, especially in the early stages when a firm is considering either physical investment in or product expansion to another country.
- Expansion planning requires an in-depth knowledge of existing market channels and suppliers, of consumer preferences and current purchase behavior, and of domestic and foreign rules and regulations.
- Recognize useful strategic frameworks and tools for assessing variance in cultural predisposition, such as Hofstede’s Cultural Dimensions Theory.
Key Terms
- red tape
-
A derisive term for regulations or bureaucratic procedures that are considered excessive or excessively time- and effort-consuming.
- individualism
-
The tendency for a person to act without reference to others, particularly in matters of style, fashion or mode of thought.
Culture and Global Business
It is typically more difficult to do business in a foreign country than in one’s home country, especially in the early stages when a firm is considering either physical investment in or product expansion to another country. Expansion planning requires an in-depth knowledge of existing market channels and suppliers, of consumer preferences and current purchase behavior, and of domestic and foreign rules and regulations. Language and cultural barriers present considerable challenges, as well as institutional differences among countries.
With the process of globalization and increasing global trade, it is unavoidable that different cultures will meet, conflict, and blend together. People from different cultures find it hard to communicate not only due to language barriers but also because of cultural differences.
In a survey of Texas agricultural exporting firms, Hollon (1989) found that from a firm management perspective, the initial entry into export markets was significantly more difficult than either the handling of ongoing export activities or the consideration of expansion to new export product lines or markets. From a list of 38 items in three categories (knowledge gaps, marketing aspects, and financial aspects) over three time horizons (start-up, ongoing, and expansion), the three problems rated most difficult were all start-up phase marketing items:
- Poor knowledge of emerging markets or lack of information on potentially profitable markets
- Foreign market entry problems and overseas product promotion and distribution
- Complexity of the export transaction, including documentation and “red tape.”
Two of these items, market entry and transaction complexity, remained problematic in ongoing operations and in new product market expansion. Import restrictions and export competition became more problematic in later phases, while financial problems were pervasive at all phases of the export operation.
Tools for Understanding Cultural Deviations in Business
Recognizing that different geographic regions and/or nationalities represent vastly different business operating characteristics, often due to differences in cultural predisposition, is a critical building block for successful global business leaders. As a result, various researchers in global business have generated business models to illustrate key cultural considerations between different countries. The most recognized and utilized in the field is Geert Hofstede’s Cultural Dimensions Theory, which encompasses six cultural deviations highly relevant to business managers. The figure below provides an example of this model:
Hofstede’s Cultural Dimensions Theory Example
As you can see in the above figure, the six dimensions underline differences in perspective in each category. Two countries (or more) are selected for comparison, at which point can identify differences in business practices based on cultural barriers. For example, Country A demonstrates lower power distance compared to Country B. This means that a resident of Country A operating in Country B must understand that lines of authority are more rigid in Country B and act accordingly.
To briefly explain each dimension:
- PDI rating represents a stronger acceptance of authority in a given culture
- IDV (individualism) rating indicates the degree to which individuals are focused upon as opposed to the broader group
- UAI represents the degree to which risk-taking is commonplace (a higher rating meaning a lower propensity for risk)
- MAS represents the scale between competitiveness, materialism and aggressiveness (high rating) compared to focusing on relationships and quality of life
- LTO indicates the tendency to plan for longer-term agenda items as opposed to pursuing short-term goals
- IVR is simply the frugal (or spendthrift) habits of the average individual in a culture (purchasing beyond necessity)
4.2.4: Technological Barriers
Standards-related trade measures, known in WTO parlance as technical barriers to trade play a critical role in shaping global trade.
Learning Objective
Explain how technical standards can be barriers to trade
Key Points
- Governments, market participants, and other entities can use standards-related measures as an effective and efficient means of achieving legitimate commercial and policy objectives.
- Significant foreign trade barriers in the form of product standards, technical regulations and testing, certification, and other procedures are involved in determining whether or not products conform to standards and technical regulations.
Key Terms
- enterprise
-
A company, business, organization, or other purposeful endeavor.
- standard
-
A level of quality or attainment.
U.S. companies, farmers, ranchers, and manufacturers increasingly encounter non-tariff trade barriers in the form of product standards, testing requirements, and other technical requirements as they seek to sell products and services around the world. As tariff barriers to industrial and agricultural trade have fallen, standards-related measures of this kind have emerged as a key concern. Governments, market participants, and other entities can use standards-related measures as an effective and efficient means of achieving legitimate commercial and policy objectives. But when standards-related measures are outdated, overly burdensome, discriminatory, or otherwise inappropriate, these measures can reduce competition, stifle innovation, and create unnecessary technical barriers to trade. These kinds of measures can pose a particular problem for small- and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs), which often do not have the resources to address these problems on their own. Significant foreign trade barriers in the form of product standards, technical regulations and testing, certification, and other procedures are involved in determining whether or not products conform to standards and technical regulations.
These standards-related trade measures, known in World Trade Organization (WTO) parlance as “technical barriers to trade,” play a critical role in shaping the flow of global trade. Standards-related measures serve an important function in facilitating global trade, including by enabling greater access to international markets by SMEs. Standards-related measures also enable governments to pursue legitimate objectives, such as protecting human health and the environment and preventing deceptive practices. But standards-related measures that are non-transparent, discriminatory, or otherwise unwarranted can act as significant barriers to U.S. trade. These kinds of measures can pose a particular problem for SMEs, which often do not have the resources to address these problems on their own.
Members of the World Trade Organization
Most countries are now part of the World Trade Organization. Those that are not are concentrated in northeast Africa, Oceania, and the Middle East. The European Union is its own bloc within the W.T.O.
4.2.5: The Argument for Barriers
Some argue that imports from countries with low wages has put downward pressure on the wages of Americans and therefore we should have trade barriers.
Learning Objective
Argue in support of trade barriers
Key Points
- Economy-wide trade creates jobs in industries that have a comparative advantage and destroys jobs in industries that have a comparative disadvantage.
- Trade barriers protect domestic industry and jobs.
- Workers in export industries benefit from trade. Moreover, all workers are consumers and benefit from the expanded market choices and lower prices that trade brings.
Key Terms
- comparative advantage
-
The concept that a certain good can be produced more efficiently than others due to a number of factors, including productive skills, climate, natural resource availability, and so forth.
- inflation
-
An increase in the general level of prices or in the cost of living.
It is asserted that trade has created jobs for foreign workers at the expense of American workers. It is more accurate to say that trade both creates and destroys jobs in the economy in line with market forces.
Economy-wide trade creates jobs in industries that have comparative advantage and destroys jobs in industries that have a comparative disadvantage. In the process, the economy’s composition of employment changes; but, according to economic theory, there is no net loss of jobs due to trade. Over the course of the last economic expansion, from 1992 to 2000, U.S. imports increased nearly 240%. Over that same period, total employment grew by 22 million jobs ,and the unemployment rate fell from 7.5% to 4.0% (the lowest unemployment rate in more than 30 years.). Foreign outsourcing by American firms, which has been the object of much recent attention, is a form of importing and also creates and destroys jobs, leaving the overall level of employment unchanged. There is no denying that with international trade there will be short-run hardship for some, but economists maintain the whole economy’s living standard is raised by such exchange. They view these adverse effects as qualitatively the same as those induced by purely domestic disruptions, such as shifting consumer demand or technological change. In that context, economists argue that easing adjustment of those harmed is economically more fruitful than protection given the net economic benefit of trade to the total economy. Many people believe that imports from countries with low wages has put downward pressure on the wages of Americans.
There is no doubt that international trade can have strong effects, good and bad, on the wages of American workers. The plight of the worker adversely affected by imports comes quickly to mind. But it is also true that workers in export industries benefit from trade. Moreover, all workers are consumers and benefit from the expanded market choices and lower prices that trade brings. Yet, concurrent with the large expansion of trade over the past 25 years, real wages (i.e., inflation adjusted wages) of American workers grew more slowly than in the earlier post-war period, and the inequality of wages between the skilled and less skilled worker rose sharply. Was trade the force behind this deteriorating wage performance? Some industries, or at least components of some industries, are vital to national security and possibly may need to be insulated from the vicissitudes of international market forces. This determination needs to be made on a case-by-case basis since the claim is made by some who do not meet national security criteria. Such criteria may also vary from case to case. It is also true that national security could be compromised by the export of certain dual-use products that, while commercial in nature, could also be used to produce products that might confer a military advantage to U.S. adversaries. Controlling such exports is clearly justified from a national security standpoint; but, it does come at the cost of lost export sales and an economic loss to the nation. Minimizing the economic welfare loss from such export controls hinges on a well- focused identification and regular re-evaluation of the subset of goods with significant national security potential that should be subject to control.
Korea International Trade Association
KITA attempts to protect South Korean producers while finding international export markets.
4.2.6: The Argument Against Barriers
Economists generally agree that trade barriers are detrimental and decrease overall economic efficiency.
Learning Objective
Argue against the imposition of trade barriers
Key Points
- Trade barriers are often criticized for the effect they have on the developing world.
- Even countries promoting free trade heavily subsidize certain industries, such as agriculture and steel.
- Most trade barriers work on the same principle: the imposition of some sort of cost on trade that raises the price of the traded products. If two or more nations repeatedly use trade barriers against each other, then a trade war results.
Key Term
- trade war
-
The practice of nations creating mutual tariffs or similar barriers to trade.
Most trade barriers work on the same principle: the imposition of some sort of cost on trade that raises the price of the traded products. If two or more nations repeatedly use trade barriers against each other, then a trade war results
Economists generally agree that trade barriers are detrimental and decrease overall economic efficiency, this can be explained by the theory of comparative advantage. In theory, free trade involves the removal of all such barriers, except perhaps those considered necessary for health or national security. In practice, however, even those countries promoting free trade heavily subsidize certain industries, such as agriculture and steel.
International trade
International trade is the exchange of goods and services across national borders. In most countries, it represents a significant part of GDP.
Trade barriers are often criticized for the effect they have on the developing world. Because rich-country players call most of the shots and set trade policies, goods, such as crops that developing countries are best at producing, still face high barriers. Trade barriers, such as taxes on food imports or subsidies for farmers in developed economies, lead to overproduction and dumping on world markets, thus lowering prices and hurting poor-country farmers. Tariffs also tend to be anti-poor, with low rates for raw commodities and high rates for labor-intensive processed goods.
If international trade is economically enriching, imposing barriers to such exchanges will prevent the nation from fully realizing the economic gains from trade and must reduce welfare. Protection of import-competing industries with tariffs, quotas, and non-tariff barriers can lead to an over-allocation of the nation’s scarce resources in the protected sectors and an under-allocation of resources in the unprotected tradeable goods industries. In the terms of the analogy of trade as a more efficient productive process used above, reducing the flow of imports will also reduce the flow of exports. Less output requires less input. Clearly, the exporting sector must lose as the protected import-competing activities gain. But, more importantly, from this perspective the overall economy that consumed the imported goods must also lose, because the more efficient production process–international trade–cannot be used to the optimal degree, and, thereby, will have generally increased the price and reduced the array of goods available to the consumer. Therefore, the ultimate economic cost of the trade barrier is not a transfer of well-being between sectors, but a permanent net loss to the whole economy arising from the barriers distortion toward the less efficient the use of the economy’s scarce resources.
4.3: International Trade Agreements and Organizations
4.3.1: The General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT)
The General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) is a multilateral agreement regulating international trade.
Learning Objective
Outline the history of the creation of the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT)
Key Points
- The General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) is a multilateral agreement regulating international trade, the purpose of which is the “substantial reduction of tariffs and other trade barriers and the elimination of preferences, on a reciprocal and mutually advantageous basis”.
- The failure to create the International Trade Organization (ITO) resulted in the GATT negotiation at the UN Conference on Trade and Employment.
- GATT was in place from 1947-1993, when it was replaced by the World Trade Organization (WTO) in 1995.
- GATT text is still in effect under the WTO framework, subject to modifications.
- During GATT’s eight rounds, countries exchanged tariff concessions and reduced tariffs.
Key Terms
- multilateral
-
Involving more than one party (often used in politics to refer to negotiations, talks, or proceedings involving several nations).
- tariff
-
A system of government-imposed duties levied on imported or exported goods; a list of such duties, or the duties themselves.
The General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) is a multilateral agreement regulating international trade. According to its preamble, its purpose is the “substantial reduction of tariffs and other trade barriers and the elimination of preferences, on a reciprocal and mutually advantageous basis. ” GATT was negotiated during the UN Conference on Trade and Employment and was the outcome of the failure of negotiating governments to create the International Trade Organization (ITO). GATT was signed in 1947 and lasted until 1993, when it was replaced by the World Trade Organization (WTO) in 1995. The original GATT text (GATT 1947) is still in effect under the WTO framework, subject to the modifications of GATT 1994.
GATT held a total of eight rounds, during which countries exchanged tariff concessions and reduced tariffs.
In 1993, the GATT was updated (GATT 1994) to include new obligations upon its signatories. One of the most significant changes was the creation of the WTO. The 75 existing GATT members and the European Communities became the founding members of the WTO on January 1, 1995. The other 52 GATT members rejoined the WTO in the following two years, the last being Congo in 1997. Since the founding of the WTO, 21 new non-GATT members have joined and 29 are currently negotiating membership. There are a total of 157 member countries in the WTO, with Russia and Vanuatu being new members as of 2012.
Of the original GATT members, Syria and SFR Yugoslavia (SFRY) have not rejoined the WTO. Because FR Yugoslavia (later renamed Serbia and Montenegro) is not recognized as a direct SFRY successor state, its application is considered a new (non-GATT) one. The General Council of WTO, on 4 May 2010, agreed to establish a working party to examine the request of Syria for WTO membership. The contracting parties who founded the WTO ended official agreement of the “GATT 1947” terms on 31 December 1995. Serbia and Montenegro are in the decision stage of the negotiations and are expected to become the newest members of the WTO in 2012 or in the near future.
WTO Membership, 2005
GATT was replaced by the World Trade Organization (WTO) in 1995. This map shows membership in the WTO in 2005.
4.3.2: The European Union
The European Union (EU) is an economic and political union made up of 27 member states that are located primarily in Europe.
Learning Objective
Discuss the establishment of the European Union (EU) and the Euro
Key Points
- The European Union (EU) is an economic and political union made up of 27 member states that are located primarily in Europe.
- Members of the EU include Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, the Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, the Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, and the United Kingdom.
- The EU operates through a system of supranational independent institutions and intergovernmental negotiated decisions by the member states.
- Within the Schengen Area (which includes EU and non-EU states) passport controls have been abolished.
- The creation of a single currency became an official objective of the European Economic Community (EEC) in 1969. On January 1, 2002 euro notes and coins were issued and national currencies began to phase out in the eurozone.
- The ECB is the central bank for the eurozone, and thus controls monetary policy in that area with an agenda to maintain price stability. It is at the center of the European System of Central Banks, which comprises all EU national central banks and is controlled by its General Council, consisting of the President of the ECB, who is appointed by the European Council, the Vice-President of the ECB, and the governors of the national central banks of all 27 EU member states.
Key Terms
- European Union
-
A supranational organization created in the 1950s to bring the nations of Europe into closer economic and political connection. At the beginning of 2012, 27 member nations were Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, The Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, United Kingdom.
- euro
-
The currency unit of the European Monetary Union. Symbol: €
- transparency
-
Open, public; having the property that theories and practices are publicly visible, thereby reducing the chance of corruption.
Example
- The euro is designed to help build a single market by easing travel of citizens and goods, eliminating exchange rate problems, providing price transparency, creating a single financial market, stabilizing prices, maintaining low interest rates, and providing a currency used internationally and protected against shocks by the large amount of internal trade within the eurozone. It is also intended as a political symbol of integration.
The European Union
The European Union (EU) is an economic and political union or confederation of 27 member states that are located in Europe, including:
Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, the Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, the Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, and the United Kingdom.
The EU operates through a system of supranational independent institutions and intergovernmental decisions negotiated by the member states. Important institutions of the EU include the European Commission, the Council of the European Union, the European Council, the Court of Justice of the European Union, and the European Central Bank. The European Parliament is elected every five years by EU citizens. The EU has developed a single market through a standardized system of laws that apply in all member states. Within the Schengen Area (which includes EU and non-EU states) passport controls have been abolished. EU policies aim to ensure the free movement of people, goods, services, and capital, enact legislation in justice and home affairs, and maintain common policies on trade, agriculture, fisheries, and regional development. A monetary union, the eurozone, was established in 1999, and as of January 2012, is composed of 17 member states. Through the Common Foreign and Security Policy the EU has developed a limited role in external relations and defense. Permanent diplomatic missions have been established around the world. The EU is represented at the United Nations, the WTO, the G8 and the G-20.
The Euro
The creation of a single European currency became an official objective of the European Economic Community in 1969. However, it was only with the advent of the Maastricht Treaty in 1993 that member states were legally bound to start the monetary union. In 1999 the euro was duly launched by eleven of the then fifteen member states of the EU. It remained an accounting currency until 1 January 2002, when euro notes and coins were issued and national currencies began to phase out in the eurozone, which by then consisted of twelve member states. The eurozone (constituted by the EU member states that have adopted the euro) has since grown to seventeen countries, the most recent being Estonia, which joined on 1 January 2011. All other EU member states, except Denmark and the United Kingdom, are legally bound to join the euro when the convergence criteria are met, however only a few countries have set target dates for accession. Sweden has circumvented the requirement to join the euro by not meeting the membership criteria.
The euro is designed to help build a single market by easing travel of citizens and goods, eliminating exchange rate problems, providing price transparency, creating a single financial market, stabilizing prices, maintaining low interest rates, and providing a currency used internationally and protected against shocks by the large amount of internal trade within the eurozone. It is also intended as a political symbol of integration. The euro and the monetary policies of those who have adopted it in agreement with the EU are under the control of the European Central Bank (ECB). The ECB is the central bank for the eurozone, and thus controls monetary policy in that area with an agenda to maintain price stability. It is at the center of the European System of Central Banks, which comprises all EU national central banks and is controlled by its General Council, consisting of the President of the ECB, who is appointed by the European Council, the Vice-President of the ECB, and the governors of the national central banks of all 27 EU member states. The monetary union has been shaken by the European sovereign-debt crisis since 2009.
European Union
European Union member countries
4.3.3: The North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA)
NAFTA is an agreement signed by Canada, Mexico, and the United States, creating a trilateral trade bloc in North America.
Learning Objective
Outline the stipulations of NAFTA
Key Points
- The North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA) is an agreement signed by the governments of Canada, Mexico, and the United States, creating a trilateral trade bloc in North America.
- NAFTA came into effect on January 1, 1994 and superseded the Canada – United States Free Trade Agreement.
- Within 10 years of the implementation of NAFTA, all U.S.-Mexico tariffs are to be eliminated except for some U.S. agricultural exports to Mexico which will be phased out within 15 years.
- Most U.S. – Canada trade was duty free before NAFTA.
- NAFTA also seeks to eliminate non-tariff trade barriers and to protect the intellectual property right of the products.
- When viewing the combined GDP of its members, as of 2010 NAFTA is the largest trade bloc in the world.
Key Terms
- tariff
-
A system of government-imposed duties levied on imported or exported goods; a list of such duties, or the duties themselves.
- free trade
-
International trade free from government interference, especially trade free from tariffs or duties on imports.
- trade bloc
-
A trade bloc is a type of intergovernmental agreement, often part of a regional intergovernmental organization, where regional barriers to trade, (tariffs and non-tariff barriers) are reduced or eliminated among the participating states.
The North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA)
The North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA) is an agreement signed by the governments of Canada, Mexico, and the United States, creating a trilateral trade bloc in North America. The agreement came into force on January 1, 1994. It superseded the Canada – United States Free Trade Agreement between the U.S. and Canada.
In terms of combined GDP of its members, the trade bloc is the largest in the world as of 2010. NAFTA has two supplements: the North American Agreement on Environmental Cooperation (NAAEC) and the North American Agreement on Labor Cooperation (NAALC). The goal of NAFTA was to eliminate barriers to trade and investment among the U.S., Canada, and Mexico.
The implementation of NAFTA on January 1, 1994 brought the immediate elimination of tariffs on more than one-half of Mexico’s exports to the U.S. and more than one-third of U.S. exports to Mexico. Within 10 years of the implementation of the agreement, all U.S.–Mexico tariffs would be eliminated except for some U.S. agricultural exports to Mexico that were to be phased out within 15 years. Most U.S.–Canada trade was already duty free. NAFTA also seeks to eliminate non-tariff trade barriers and to protect the intellectual property right of the products.
The agreement opened the door for open trade, ending tariffs on various goods and services, and implementing equality between Canada, America, and Mexico. NAFTA has allowed agricultural goods such as eggs, corn, and meats to be tariff-free. This allowed corporations to trade freely and import and export various goods on a North American scale .
NAFTA countries
The members of NAFTA are the U.S., Canada, and Mexico.
4.3.4: The Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation
APEC is a forum for 21 Pacific Rim countries that seeks to promote free trade and economic cooperation throughout the Asia-Pacific region.
Learning Objective
Explain the role The Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC ) plays in ensuring free trade
Key Points
- Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC) is a forum for 21 Pacific Rim countries that seeks to promote free trade and economic cooperation.
- APEC was established in 1989 in response to the growing interdependence of Asia-Pacific economies and the advent of regional economic blocs.
- APEC member countries include Australia, Brunei, Canada, Chile, China, Hong Kong (Hong Kong, China), Indonesia, Japan, South Korea, Mexico, Malaysia, New Zealand, Papua New Guinea, Peru, Philippines, Russia, Singapore, Taiwan (Chinese Taipei), Thailand, United States, and Vietnam.
- During the meeting in 1994 in Bogor, Indonesia, APEC leaders adopted the Bogor Goals which aim for free and open trade and investment in the Asia-Pacific by 2010, for industrialized economies and by 2020, for developing economies.
Key Term
- bloc
-
A group of countries acting together for political or economic goals, an alliance (e.g., the eastern bloc, the western bloc, a trading bloc).
The Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC) is a forum for 21 Pacific Rim countries (formally Member Economies) that seeks to promote free trade and economic cooperation throughout the Asia-Pacific region. Established in 1989 in response to the growing interdependence of Asia-Pacific economies and the advent of regional economic blocs (such as the European Union) in other parts of the world, APEC works to raise living standards and education levels through sustainable economic growth and to foster a sense of community and an appreciation of shared interests among Asia-Pacific countries.
Member countries are: Australia, Brunei, Canada, Chile, China, Hong Kong (Hong Kong, China), Indonesia, Japan, South Korea, Mexico, Malaysia, New Zealand, Papua New Guinea, Peru, Philippines, Russia, Singapore, Taiwan (Chinese Taipei), Thailand, United States, and Vietnam.
APEC member countries
APEC’s member countries border both the east and the west of the Pacific Ocean.
During the meeting in 1994 in Bogor, Indonesia, APEC leaders adopted the Bogor Goals that aim for free and open trade and investment in the Asia-Pacific by 2010, for industrialized economies and by 2020, for developing economies. In 1995, APEC established a business advisory body named the APEC Business Advisory Council (ABAC), composed of three business executives from each member economy. To meet the Bogor Goals, APEC carries out work in three main areas:
- Trade and investment liberalization
- Business facilitation
- Economic and technical cooperation
APEC is considering the prospects and options for a Free Trade Area of the Asia-Pacific (FTAAP), which would include all APEC member economies. Since 2006, the APEC Business Advisory Council, promoting the theory that a free trade area has the best chance of converging the member nations and ensuring stable economic growth under free trade, has lobbied for the creation of a high-level task force to study and develop a plan for a free trade area. The proposal for a FTAAP arose due to the lack of progress in the Doha round of World Trade Organization negotiations, and as a way to overcome the “spaghetti bowl” effect created by overlapping and conflicting elements of the umpteen free trade agreements. There are approximately 60 free trade agreements, with an additional 117 in the process of negotiation in Southeast Asia and the Asia-Pacific region.
4.3.5: The World Bank
The World Bank is an international financial institution that provides loans to developing countries for various programs.
Learning Objective
Explain the role played by the World Bank in reducing poverty
Key Points
- The World Bank’s official goal is the reduction of poverty.
- According to the World Bank’s Articles of Agreement, all of its decisions must be guided by a commitment to promote foreign investment, international trade, and facilitate capital investment.
- The current President of the Bank, Jim Yong Kim, is responsible for chairing the meetings of the boards of directors and for overall management of the bank.
- Traditionally, the bank president has always been a U.S. citizen nominated by the United States, the largest shareholder in the bank. The nominee is subject to confirmation by the board of executive directors, to serve for a five-year, renewable term.
- For the poorest developing countries in the world, the bank’s assistance plans are based on poverty reduction strategies.
Key Terms
- developing
-
Of a country: becoming economically more mature or advanced; becoming industrialized.
- loan
-
A sum of money or other valuables or consideration that an individual, group, or other legal entity borrows from another individual, group, or legal entity (the latter often being a financial institution) with the condition that it be returned or repaid at a later date (sometimes with interest).
- poverty
-
The quality or state of being poor or indigent; want or scarcity of means of subsistence; indigence; need.
- World Bank
-
a group of five financial organizations whose purpose is economic development and the elimination of poverty
The World Bank is an international financial institution that provides loans to developing countries for capital programs. The World Bank’s official goal is the reduction of poverty. According to the World Bank’s Articles of Agreement (as amended effective February 16,1989), all of its decisions must be guided by a commitment to promote foreign investment, international trade, and facilitate capital investment.
The World Bank differs from the World Bank Group, in that the World Bank comprises only two institutions: the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development (IBRD) and the International Development Association (IDA), whereas the former incorporates these two in addition to three more: International Finance Corporation (IFC), Multilateral Investment Guarantee Agency (MIGA), and International Centre for Settlement of Investment Disputes (ICSID). The curent President of the Bank, Jim Yong Kim, is responsible for chairing the meetings of the boards of directors and for overall management of the bank. Traditionally, the bank president has always been a U.S. citizen nominated by the United States, the largest shareholder in the bank. The nominee is subject to confirmation by the board of executive directors, to serve for a five-year, renewable term.
The International Bank for Reconstruction and Development (IBRD) has 188 member countries, while the International Development Association (IDA) has 172 members.Each member state of IBRD should be also a member of the International Monetary Fund (IMF), and only members of IBRD are allowed to join other institutions within the Bank (such as IDA).
For the poorest developing countries in the world, the bank’s assistance plans are based on poverty reduction strategies; by combining a cross-section of local groups with an extensive analysis of the country’s financial and economic situation, the World Bank develops a strategy pertaining uniquely to the country in question. The government then identifies the country’s priorities and targets for the reduction of poverty, and the World Bank aligns its aid efforts correspondingly. Forty-five countries pledged $25.1 billion in “aid for the world’s poorest countries,” aid that goes to the World Bank International Development Association (IDA) which distributes the loans to 80 poorer countries.
World Bank Headquarters
Washington, DC headquarters of the World Bank
4.3.6: The International Monetary Fund (IMF)
The IMF seeks to promote international economic cooperation, international trade, employment, and exchange rate stability.
Learning Objective
Explain how the International Monetary Fund (IMF) aids its 188 member countries
Key Points
- The International Monetary Fund (IMF) is an international organization that was created on July 22, 1944 at the Bretton Woods Conference.
- The IMF’s stated goal is to stabilize exchange rates and assist the reconstruction of the world’s international payment system after World War II.
- The IMF is run by country contributions. Money is pooled through a quota system from which countries with payment imbalances can borrow funds on a temporary basis.
- It works with developing nations to help them achieve macroeconomic stability and reduce poverty. The rationale for this is that private international capital markets function imperfectly and many countries have limited access to financial markets. Such market imperfections, together with balance of payments financing, provide the justification for official financing, without which many countries could only correct large external payment imbalances through measures with adverse effects on both national and international economic prosperity. The IMF can provide other sources of financing to countries in need that would not be available in the absence of an economic stabilization program supported by the Fund.
- Member countries of the IMF have access to information on the economic policies of all member countries, the opportunity to influence other members’ economic policies, technical assistance in banking, fiscal affairs, and exchange matters, financial support in times of payment difficulties, and increased opportunities for trade and investment. IMF conditionality is a set of policies that the IMF requires in exchange for financial resources. The IMF does not require collateral from countries for loans but rather requires the government seeking assistance to correct its macroeconomic imbalances in the form of policy reform. If the conditions are not met, the funds are withheld. Conditionality is perhaps the most controversial aspect of IMF policies.
- These loan conditions ensure that the borrowing country will be able to repay the Fund and that the country won’t attempt to solve their balance of payment problems in a way that would negatively impact the international economy. The incentive problem of moral hazard, which is the actions of economic agents maximizing their own utility to the detriment of others when they do not bear the full consequences of their actions, is mitigated through conditions rather than providing collateral; countries in need of IMF loans do not generally possess internationally valuable collateral anyway. Conditionality also reassures the IMF that the funds lent to them will be used for the purposes defined by the Articles of Agreement and provides safeguards that country will be able to rectify its macroeconomic and structural imbalances. In the judgment of the Fund, the adoption by the member of certain corrective measures or policies will allow it to repay the Fund, thereby ensuring that the same resources will be available to support other members.
- Voting power in the IMF is, like the money pool, based on a quota system. Each member has a number of “basic votes” (each member’s number of basic votes equals 5.502% of the total votes), plus one additional vote for each Special Drawing Right (SDR) of 100,000 of a member country’s quota. The Special Drawing Right is the unit of account of the IMF and represents a claim to currency. It is based on a basket of key international currencies. The basic votes generate a slight bias in favor of small countries, but the additional votes determined by SDR outweigh this bias.
- The IMF is mandated to oversee the international monetary and financial system and monitor the economic and financial policies of its 188 member countries. This activity is known as surveillance and facilitates international cooperation. Since the demise of the Bretton Woods system of fixed exchange rates in the early 1970s, surveillance has evolved largely by way of changes in procedures rather than through the adoption of new obligations. The responsibilities of the Fund changed from those of guardian to those of overseer of members’ policies.
- Some critics assume that Fund lending imposes a burden on creditor countries. However, countries receive market-related interest rates on most of their quota subscription, plus any of their own-currency subscriptions that are loaned out by the Fund, plus all of the reserve assets that they provide the Fund. Also, as of 2005 borrowing countries have had a very good track record of repaying credit extended under the Fund’s regular lending facilities with the full interest over the duration of the borrowing.
Key Terms
- collateral
-
A security or guarantee (usually an asset) pledged for the repayment of a loan if one cannot procure enough funds to repay. (Originally supplied as “accompanying” security. )
- capital market
-
The market for long-term securities, including the stock market and the bond market.
- moral hazard
-
The prospect that a party insulated from risk may behave differently from the way it would behave if it were fully exposed to the risk.
The International Monetary Fund (IMF) is an international organization that was created on July 22, 1944 at the Bretton Woods Conference and came into existence on December 27, 1945 when 29 countries signed the IMF Articles of Agreement. It originally had 45 members. The IMF’s stated goal was to stabilize exchange rates and assist the reconstruction of the world’s international payment system post-World War II. Countries contribute money to a pool through a quota system from which countries with payment imbalances can borrow funds on a temporary basis. Through this activity and others, such as surveillance of its members’ economies and policies, the IMF works to improve the economies of its member countries. The IMF describes itself as “an organization of 188 countries, working to foster global monetary cooperation, secure financial stability, facilitate international trade, promote high employment and sustainable economic growth, and reduce poverty. “
The organization’s stated objectives are to promote international economic cooperation, international trade, employment, and exchange rate stability, including by making financial resources available to member countries to meet balance of payments needs. Member countries of the IMF have access to information on the economic policies of all member countries, the opportunity to influence other members’ economic policies, technical assistance in banking, fiscal affairs, and exchange matters, financial support in times of payment difficulties, and increased opportunities for trade and investment. Voting power in the IMF is based on a quota system. Each member has a number of “basic votes” (each member’s number of basic votes equals 5.502% of the total votes), plus one additional vote for each Special Drawing Right (SDR) of 100,000 of a member country’s quota. The Special Drawing Right is the unit of account of the IMF and represents a claim to currency. It is based on a basket of key international currencies. The basic votes generate a slight bias in favor of small countries, but the additional votes determined by SDR outweigh this bias.
The IMF works to foster global growth and economic stability. It provides policy advice and financing to members in economic difficulties and also works with developing nations to help them achieve macroeconomic stability and reduce poverty. The rationale for this is that private international capital markets function imperfectly, and many countries have limited access to financial markets. Such market imperfections, together with balance of payments financing, provide the justification for official financing, without which many countries could only correct large external payment imbalances through measures with adverse effects on both national and international economic prosperity. The IMF can provide other sources of financing to countries in need that would not be available in the absence of an economic stabilization program supported by the fund.
The IMF is mandated to oversee the international monetary and financial system and monitor the economic and financial policies of its 188 member countries. This activity is known as “surveillance” and facilitates international cooperation. Since the demise of the Bretton Woods system of fixed exchange rates in the early 1970s, surveillance has evolved largely by way of changes in procedures rather than through the adoption of new obligations.The responsibilities of the fund changed from those of guardian to those of overseer of members’ policies. The fund typically analyzes the appropriateness of each member country’s economic and financial policies for achieving orderly economic growth, and assesses the consequences of these policies for other countries and for the global economy.
IMF conditionality is a set of policies or “conditions” that the IMF requires in exchange for financial resources. The IMF does not require collateral from countries for loans but rather requires the government seeking assistance to correct its macroeconomic imbalances in the form of policy reform. If the conditions are not met, the funds are withheld. Conditionality is the most controversial aspect of IMF policies. These loan conditions ensure that the borrowing country will be able to repay the fund and that the country won’t attempt to solve their balance of payment problems in a way that would negatively impact the international economy. The incentive problem of moral hazard, which is the actions of economic agents maximizing their own utility to the detriment of others when they do not bear the full consequences of their actions, is mitigated through conditions rather than providing collateral; countries in need of IMF loans do not generally possess internationally valuable collateral anyway. Conditionality also reassures the IMF that the funds lent to them will be used for the purposes defined by the Articles of Agreement and provides safeguards that country will be able to rectify its macroeconomic and structural imbalances. In the judgment of the fund, the adoption by the member of certain corrective measures or policies will allow it to repay the fund, thereby ensuring that the same resources will be available to support other members.
IMF Headquarters
Washington, DC headquarters of the IMF
4.3.7: Common Markets
A common market is the first stage towards a single market and may be limited initially to a free trade area.
Learning Objective
Explain the history of the European Economic Community (EEC)
Key Points
- A common market is the first stage towards a single market and may be limited initially to a free trade area, with relatively free movement of capital and of services. However, it is not to a stage where the remaining trade barriers have been eliminated.
- The European Economic Community (EEC) (also known as the Common Market in the English-speaking world and sometimes referred to as the European Community even before it was renamed as such in 1993) was an international organization created by the 1957 Treaty of Rome.
- The main aim of the EEC, as stated in its preamble, was to “preserve peace and liberty and to lay the foundations of an ever closer union among the peoples of Europe”.
Key Term
- free trade
-
International trade free from government interference, especially trade free from tariffs or duties on imports.
Example
- The European Economic Community was the first example of a both common and single market, but it was an economic union since it had additionally a customs union. The European Economic Community (EEC) was an international organization created by the 1957 Treaty of Rome. Its aim was to bring about economic integration, including a common market, among its six founding members: Belgium, France, Germany, Italy, Luxembourg and the Netherlands. Upon the entry into force of the Maastricht Treaty in 1993, the EEC was renamed the European Community (EC) to reflect that it covered a wider range of policy. This was also when the three European Communities, including the EC, were collectively made to constitute the first of the three pillars of the European Union (EU). For the customs union, the treaty provided for a 10% reduction in custom duties and up to 20% of global import quotas. Progress on the customs union proceeded much faster than the twelve years planned.
A common market is a first stage towards a single market and may be limited initially to a free trade area with relatively free movement of capital and of services, but not so advanced in reduction of the rest of the trade barriers.
The European Economic Community (EEC) (also known as the Common Market in the English-speaking world and sometimes referred to as the European Community even before it was renamed as such in 1993) was an international organization created by the 1957 Treaty of Rome. Its aim was to bring about economic integration, including a common market, among its six founding members: Belgium, France, Germany, Italy, Luxembourg, and the Netherlands.
It gained a common set of institutions along with the European Coal and Steel Community (ECSC) and the European Atomic Energy Community (EURATOM) as one of the European Communities under the 1965 Merger Treaty (Treaty of Brussels).
Upon the entry into force of the Maastricht Treaty in 1993, the EEC was renamed the European Community (EC) to reflect that it covered a wider range of policy. This was also when the three European Communities, including the EC, were collectively made to constitute the first of the three pillars of the European Union (EU), which the treaty also founded. The EC existed in this form until it was abolished by the 2009 Treaty of Lisbon, which merged the EU’s former pillars and provided that the EU would “replace and succeed the European Community. ” The main aim of the EEC, as stated in its preamble, was to “preserve peace and liberty and to lay the foundations of an ever closer union among the peoples of Europe. ” Calling for balanced economic growth, this was to be accomplished through:
- The establishment of a customs union with a common external tariff
- Common policies for agriculture, transport, and trade
- Enlargement of the EEC to the rest of Europe
For the customs union, the treaty provided for a 10% reduction in custom duties and up to 20% of global import quotas. Progress on the customs union proceeded much faster than the 12 years planned. However, France faced some setbacks due to its war with Algeria.
The six states that founded the EEC and the other two communities were known as the “inner six” (the “outer seven” were those countries who formed the European Free Trade Association). The six were France, West Germany, Italy, and the three Benelux countries: Belgium, the Netherlands, and Luxembourg. The first enlargement was in 1973, with the accession of Denmark, Ireland, and the United Kingdom. Greece, Spain, and Portugal joined in the 1980s. Following the creation of the EU in 1993, it has enlarged to include an additional 15 countries by 2007.
There were three political institutions that held the executive and legislative power of the EEC, plus one judicial institution and a fifth body created in 1975. These institutions (except for the auditors) were created in 1957 by the EEC but from 1967 on, they applied to all three communities. The council represents governments, the Parliament represents citizens, and the commission represents the European interest.
European Economic Community
Original member states (blue) and later members (green)
4.3.8: The Export-Import Bank of the United States
The Export-Import Bank of the United States (Ex-Im Bank) is the official export credit agency of the United States federal government.
Learning Objective
Explain the purpose of the Export-Import Bank of the United States (Ex-Im Bank)
Key Points
- The mission of the Ex-Im Bank is to create and sustain U.S. jobs by financing sales of U.S. exports to international buyers.
- Ex-Im Bank provides financing for transactions that would otherwise not take place because commercial lenders are either unable or unwilling to accept the political or commercial risks inherent in the deal.
- The Export-Import Bank of the United States focuses much of its energy and resources on providing support to U.S. small businesses for export of American-made products.
- Export Credit Insurance from Export-Import Bank of the United States provides insurance policies to U.S. companies and banks to mitigate risks of non-collection from foreign buyers and borrowers.
- The Working Capital Guarantee program provides loan guarantees to banks willing to lend to exporting companies.
Key Terms
- risk
-
To incur risk [of something].
- guarantee
-
To assume responsibility for a debt.
- credit agency
-
A credit rating agency (CRA) is a company that assigns credit ratings for issuers of certain types of debt obligations as well as the debt instruments themselves. In some cases, the servicers of the underlying debt are also given ratings.
Example
- The Ex-Im Bank provides two types of loans: direct loans to foreign buyers of American exports and intermediary loans to responsible parties, such as foreign government lending agencies that re-lend to foreign buyers of capital goods and related services (for example, a maintenance contract for a jet passenger plane).
The Export-Import Bank of the United States (Ex-Im Bank) is the official export credit agency of the United States federal government. It was established in 1934 by an executive order and made an independent agency in the Executive branch by Congress in 1945. Its purpose is to finance and insure foreign purchases of United States goods for customers unable or unwilling to accept credit risk.
The mission of the Ex-Im Bank is to create and sustain U.S. jobs by financing sales of U.S. exports to international buyers. Ex-Im Bank is the principal government agency responsible for aiding the export of American goods and services through a variety of loan, guarantee, and insurance programs. Generally, its programs are available to any American export firm regardless of size. The Bank is chartered as a government corporation by the Congress of the United States; it was last chartered for a five year term in 2006. Its Charter spells out the Bank’s authorities and limitations. Among them is the principle that Ex-Im Bank does not compete with private sector lenders, but rather provides financing for transactions that would otherwise not take place because commercial lenders are either unable or unwilling to accept the political or commercial risks inherent in the deal.
Export-Import Bank of the United States
Seal of the Export-Import Bank of the United States.
Ex-Im Bank provides the following services:
- The Export-Import Bank of the United States focuses much of its energy and resources on providing support to small American businesses for export of American-made products
- Export Credit Insurance provides insurance policies to U.S. companies and banks to mitigate risks of non-collection from foreign buyers and borrowers.
- The Working Capital Guarantee program provides loan guarantees to banks willing to lend to exporting companies.
- Two types of loans: direct loans to foreign buyers of American exports and intermediary loans to responsible parties, such as foreign government lending agencies that re-lend to foreign buyers of capital goods and related services (for example, a maintenance contract for a jet passenger plane).
4.4: The Money of International Business
4.4.1: Exchange Rates
The price of one country’s currency in units of another country’s currency is known as a foreign currency exchange rate.
Learning Objective
Summarize how exchange rates operate
Key Points
- An exchange rate between two currencies is the rate at which one currency will be exchanged for another.
- Currency may be free-floating, pegged or fixed, or a hybrid.
- A currency will tend to become more valuable whenever demand for it is greater than the available supply.
- Increased demand for a currency can be due to either an increased transaction demand for money or an increased speculative demand for money.
Key Terms
- exchange rate
-
The amount of one currency that a person or institution defines as equivalent to another currency when either buying or selling it at any particular moment.
- fixed exchange rate
-
Sometimes called a pegged exchange rate, a type of exchange rate regime wherein a currency’s value is matched to the value of another single currency or to a basket of other currencies, or to another measure of value, such as gold.
- floating exchange rate
-
A floating or fluctuating exchange rate is a type of exchange rate regime wherein a currency’s value is allowed to fluctuate according to the foreign exchange market.
Example
- Suppose you plan to travel to France from the US. You will need to buy Euros for your stay there. You go to the local money changer and see a direct quote of 0.5 USD/EUR, which means that one US dollar will get you 0.5 Euros. You exchange $5,000 and get €2,500 to travel. Let us say a year later, you decide to go to France again. However, in this time, there is a lot of demand for European goods worldwide and people want more Euros to buy them. This increase in demand has made the Euro more expensive and now the exchange rate is 0.25 USD/EUR in your local money exchange. Your US$5,000 now only gets you €1,250. Because you want to still have €2,500 in your bank when you travel, you will need to spend an extra $5,000 for this. You realize that the Euro has become much more expensive than the previous year, and you need to spend double the amount of USD to get the same amount of Euro you had last year.
Exchange Rates
A foreign currency exchange rate between two currencies is the rate at which one currency will be exchanged for another. It is also regarded as the value of one country’s currency in terms of another’s. Exchange rates are determined in the foreign exchange market. The “forex” or “FX” market is the largest currency exchange market in the world today, where trading averages around 5.3 trillion US dollars per day (data from April, 2013).
Exchange rates can be quoted in two ways: (1) A direct quote, is to state the number of domestic units of currency per one unit of foreign currency; (2) If an exchange rate is an indirect quote, the exchange rate is stated as the number of foreign units per one unit of domestic currency.
Foreign Exchange for Travelers
People may need to exchange currencies in a number of situations. For example, people intending to travel to another country may buy foreign currency in a bank in their home country, where they may buy foreign currency cash, traveler’s checks, or a travel-card. They can only buy foreign cash from a local money changer.
At the destination, travelers can buy local currency at the airport, at their hotel, a local money changer or dealer, through an ATM, or at a bank branch. When they purchase goods in a store and they do not have local currency, they can use a credit card, which will convert to the purchaser’s home currency at its prevailing exchange rate. If they have traveler’s checks or a travel card in the local currency, no currency exchange is necessary.
If a traveler has any foreign currency left over on his return home, he may want to sell it, which he may do at his local bank or money changer. The exchange rate, as well as fees and charges, can vary significantly on each of these transactions, and the exchange rate can vary from one day to the next.
Fluctuations in Exchange Rates
A currency pair is the quotation of the relative value of a currency unit against the unit of another currency in the foreign exchange market. The quotation EUR/USD 1.25 means that one euro is exchanged for 1.25 US dollars.
Each country, through varying mechanisms, manages the value of its currency. As part of this function, it determines the exchange rate regime that will apply to its currency. For example, the currency may be free-floating, pegged or fixed, or a hybrid.
If a currency is free-floating, its exchange rate is allowed to vary against that of other currencies and is determined by the market forces of supply and demand. This currency is said to have a “floating exchange rate. ” Exchange rates for such currencies are likely to change almost constantly as quoted on financial markets, mainly by banks, around the world.
A movable or adjustable peg system is a system of fixed exchange rates, but with a provision for the devaluation of a currency. For example, between 1994 and 2005, the Chinese yuan renminbi (RMB) was pegged to the United States dollar at RMB 8.2768 to $1.00. China was not the only country to do this; from the end of World War II until 1967, Western European countries all maintained fixed exchange rates with the US dollar based on the Bretton Woods system. But that system had to be abandoned due to market pressures and speculations in the 1970s in favor of floating, market-based regimes.
Still, some governments keep their currency within a narrow range. As a result, currencies become over-valued or under-valued, causing trade deficits or surpluses. A market-based exchange rate will change whenever the values of either of the two component currencies change.
A currency will tend to become more valuable whenever demand for it is greater than the available supply. Conversely, it will become less valuable whenever demand is less than available supply. Increased demand for a currency can be due to either an increased transaction demand for money or an increased speculative demand for money.
Transaction Demand vs. Speculative Demand
The transaction demand is highly correlated to a country’s level of business activity, gross domestic product (GDP), and employment levels. The more people who are unemployed, the less the public as a whole will spend on goods and services. Central banks typically have little difficulty adjusting the available money supply to accommodate changes in the demand for money due to business transactions.
Speculative demand is much harder for central banks to accommodate, which they influence by adjusting interest rates. A speculator may buy a currency if the return (that is the interest rate) is high enough. In general, the higher a country’s interest rates, the greater the demand for its currency.
Exchange Rates
Example of exchange rates display in Thailand.
4.4.2: Balance of Trade
The balance of trade is the difference between the monetary value of exports and imports in an economy over a certain period.
Learning Objective
Define the balance of trade
Key Points
- A positive balance is known as a “trade surplus” if it consists of exporting more than is imported; a negative balance is referred to as a trade deficit or, informally, a trade gap.
- Measuring the balance of trade can be problematic because of problems with recording and collecting data.
- The cost of production, the cost and availability of raw materials, and exchange rate movements are some factors that can affect the balance of trade.
Key Terms
- trade credit
-
a form of debt offered from one business to another with which it transacts
- trade surplus
-
A positive balance of trade.
- balance of trade
-
The difference between the monetary value of exports and imports in an economy over a certain period of time.
- trade deficit
-
A negative balance of trade.
Example
- Suppose the USA imported $1 billion worth of goods and services in 2008 and exported $750 million dollars worth of goods and services, then its trade deficit would be $1 billion minus $750 million, which equals a trade deficit of $250 million.
Balance of Trade
The balance of trade (or net exports, sometimes symbolized as NX) is the difference between the monetary value of exports and imports of output in an economy over a certain period. It is the relationship between a nation’s imports and exports. A positive balance is known as a “trade surplus,” if it consists of exporting more than is imported; a negative balance is referred to as a “trade deficit” or, informally, a “trade gap.” The balance of trade is sometimes divided into a goods and a services balance. The trade balance is identical to the difference between a country’s output and its domestic demand (the difference between what goods a country produces and how many goods it buys from abroad; this does not include money re-spent on foreign stock, nor does it factor in the concept of importing goods to produce for the domestic market).
Measuring the balance of trade can be problematic because of problems with recording and collecting data. As an illustration of this problem, when official data for all the world’s countries are added up, exports exceed imports by almost 1%; it appears the world is running a positive balance of trade with itself. This cannot be true, because all transactions involve an equal credit or debit in the account of each nation. The discrepancy is widely believed to be explained by transactions intended to launder money or evade taxes, smuggling and other visibility problems. However, especially for developed countries, accuracy is likely. Factors that can affect the balance of trade include:
- The cost of production (land, labor, capital, taxes, incentives, etc.) in the exporting economy vis-à-vis those in the importing economy
- The cost and availability of raw materials, intermediate goods and other inputs
- Exchange rate movements
- Multilateral, bilateral and unilateral taxes, or restrictions on trade
- Non-tariff barriers, such as environmental, health, or safety standards
- The availability of adequate foreign exchange with which to pay for imports
- Prices of goods manufactured at home (influenced by the responsiveness of supply)
In addition, the trade balance is likely to differ across the business cycle. In export-led growth (such as oil and early industrial goods), the balance of trade will improve during an economic expansion. However, with domestic demand-led growth (as in the United States and Australia), the trade balance will worsen at the same stage in the business cycle as these economies will import additional raw materials and finished goods.
US Trade Balance
U.S. trade balance from 1980-2010
4.4.3: Balance of Payments
Balance of payments (BOP) accounts are an accounting record of all monetary transactions between a country and the rest of the world.
Learning Objective
Define the balance of payments (BOP) account
Key Points
- Balance of payments (BOP) accounts are an accounting record of all monetary transactions between a country and the rest of the world.
- Sources of funds for a nation, such as exports or the receipts of loans and investments, are recorded as positive or surplus items.
- Uses of funds, such as for imports or to invest in foreign countries, are recorded as negative or deficit items.
- When all components of the BOP accounts are included they must equal zero with no overall surplus or deficit.
Key Terms
- Capital Account
-
In macroeconomics and international finance, the capital account (also known as financial account) is one of two primary components of the balance of payments, the other being the current account. Whereas the current account reflects a nation’s net income, the capital account reflects net change in national ownership of assets.
- Current Account
-
In economics, the current account is one of the two primary components of the balance of payments (the other being the capital account). It is the sum of the balance of trade (i.e., net revenue on exports minus payments for imports), times income (earnings on foreign investments minus payments made to foreign investors), and cash transfers.
- balance of payments
-
an accounting record of all monetary transactions between a country and the rest of the world
Example
- Suppose in 2009 that (a) America exports $3 billion worth of goods (that money comes into the US when the goods are sold); (b) Saudi Arabia donates $1 billion to U.S. colleges in aid; (c) Iraq pays $500 million in interest payments for loans taken out from banks in the U.S.; (d) Chinese investors purchase $1 billion in U.S. Treasury bonds. All the activities listed above are sources of foreign exchange because foreigners are paying the U.S. so the total would be $4.5 billion. Also in 2009: (a) America imports $1.5 billion worth of goods from other countries; (b) It donates $2 billion for flood relief in Bangladesh; (c) McDonald’s makes $250 million dividend payments to German shareholders; (d) General Motors spends $250 million on a new plant in China. In all these cases, money is flowing out of the U.S. and we are losing its foreign exchange because the payments have to be made in foreign currency. So in 2009, $4 billion has flown out of the U.S. If we subtract the amount of money coming in and the money going out, the surplus would be $1.5 billion. It has to be kept in mind that the balance of payments accounts have different categories for these transactions called the Current Account and Financial Account.
Balance of Payments
Balance of payments (BOP) accounts are an accounting record of all monetary transactions between a country and the rest of the world. These transactions include payments for the country’s exports and imports of goods, services, financial capital, and financial transfers. The BOP accounts summarize international transactions for a specific period, usually a year, and are prepared in a single currency, typically the domestic currency for the country concerned. Sources of funds for a nation, such as exports or the receipts of loans and investments, are recorded as positive or surplus items. Uses of funds, such as for imports or to invest in foreign countries, are recorded as negative or deficit items.
When all components of the BOP accounts are included, they must sum to zero with no overall surplus or deficit. For example, if a country is importing more than it exports, its trade balance will be in deficit, but the shortfall will have to be counter-balanced in other ways – such as by funds earned from its foreign investments, by running down central bank reserves, or by receiving loans from other countries.
While the overall BOP accounts will always balance when all types of payments are included, imbalances are possible on individual elements of the BOP, such as the current account, the capital account excluding the central bank’s reserve account, or the sum of the two. Imbalances in the latter sum can result in surplus countries accumulating wealth, while deficit nations become increasingly indebted.
The term balance of payments often refers to this example: a country’s balance of payments is said to be in surplus (balance of payments is positive) by a certain amount if sources of funds (such as export goods sold and bonds sold) exceed uses of funds (such as paying for imported goods and paying for foreign bonds purchased) by that amount. There is said to be a balance of payments deficit (the balance of payments is said to be negative) if the former are less than the latter.
Under a fixed exchange rate system, the central bank accommodates those flows by buying up any net inflow of funds into the country or by providing foreign currency funds to the foreign exchange market to match any international outflow of funds, thus preventing the funds flows from affecting the exchange rate between the country’s currency and other currencies. Then the net change per year in the central bank’s foreign exchange reserves is sometimes called the balance of payments surplus or deficit.
Alternatives to a fixed exchange rate system include a managed float where some changes of exchange rates are allowed, or at the other extreme a purely floating exchange rate (also known as a purely flexible exchange rate). The central bank does not intervene with a pure float to protect or devalue its currency, it allows the rate to be set by the market. The central bank’s foreign exchange reserves do not change.
Current Account Balance, 2006
Current Account balance, 2006, U.S. dollars, per capita
4.5: Types of International Business
4.5.1: Licensing
When considering strategic entry into an international market, licensing is a low-risk and relatively fast foreign market entry tactic.
Learning Objective
Identify the benefits and risks associated with licensing as a foreign market entry model
Key Points
- Foreign market entry options include exporting, joint ventures, foreign direct investment, franchising, licensing, and various other forms of strategic alliance.
- Of these potential entry models, licensing is relatively low risk in terms of time, resources, and capital requirements.
- Advantages of licensing include localization through a foreign partner, adherence to strict international business regulations, lower costs, and the ability to move quickly.
- Disadvantages to this entry mode include loss of control, potential quality assurance issues in the foreign market, and lower returns due to lower risk.
- When deciding to license abroad, careful due diligence should be done to ensure that the licensee is a strong investment for the licensor and vice versa.
Key Terms
- licensee
-
In a licensing relationship, the buyer of the produce, service, brand or technology being licensed.
- licensor
-
In a licensing relationship, the owner of the produce, service, brand or technology being licensed.
When considering entering international markets, there are some significant strategic and tactical decisions to be made. Exporting, joint ventures, direct investment, franchising, licensing, and various other forms of strategic alliance can be considered as market entry modes. Each entry mode has different pros and cons, addressing issues like cost, control, speed to market, legal barriers, and cultural barriers with different degrees of efficiency.
Licensing
The 1933 Fiat 508 was manufactured under a license in Poland by Polski Fiat.
What is Licensing
A licensor (i.e. the firm with the technology or brand) can provide their products, services, brand and/or technology to a licensee via an agreement. This agreement will describe the terms of the strategic alliance, allowing the licensor affordable and low risk entry to a foreign market while the licensee can gain access to the competitive advantages and unique assets of another firm. This is potentially a strong win-win arrangement for both parties, and is a relatively common practice in international business.
Let’s consider an example. The licensor is a company involved in energy health drinks. Due to food import regulations in Japan, the licensor cannot sell the product at local wholesalers or retailers. In order to circumvent this strategic barrier, the licensor finds a local sports drink manufacturer to license their recipe to. In exchange, the licensee sells the product locally under a local brand name and kicks back 15% of the overall revenues to the licensor.
The Pros and Cons
Before deciding to use licensing as an entry strategy, it’s important to understand in which situations licensing is best suited.
Advantages
Licensing affords new international entrants with a number of advantages:
- Licensing is a rapid entry strategy, allowing almost instant access to the market with the right partners lined up.
- Licensing is low risk in terms of assets and capital investment. The licensee will provide the majority of the infrastructure in most situations.
- Localization is a complex issue legally, and licensing is a clean solution to most legal barriers to entry.
- Cultural and linguistic barriers are also significant challenges for international entries. Licensing provides critical resources in this regard, as the licensee has local contacts, mastery of local language, and a deep understanding of the local market.
Disadvantages
While the low-cost entry and natural localization are definite advantages, licensing also comes with some opportunity costs:
- Loss of control is a serious disadvantage in a licensing situation in regards to quality control. Particularly relevant is the licensing of a brand name, as any quality control issue on behalf of the licensee will impact the licensor’s parent brand.
- Depending on an international partner also creates inherent risks regarding the success of that firm. Just like investing in an organization in the stock market, licensing requires due diligence regarding which organization to partner with.
- Lower revenues due to relying on an external party is also a key disadvantage to this model. (Lower risk, lower returns.)
4.5.2: Franchising
Franchising enables organizations a low cost and localized strategy to expanding to international markets, while offering local entrepreneurs the opportunity to run an established business.
Learning Objective
Examine the benefits of international franchising
Key Points
- A franchise agreement is defined as the franchiser granting an entrepreneur or local company (the franchisee) access to its brand, trademarks, and products.
- Franchising is designed to enable large organizations rapid access to new markets with relatively low barriers to entry.
- Advantages of franchising (for the franchiser) include low costs of entry, a localized workforce (culturally and linguistically), and a high speed method of market entry.
- Disadvantages of franchising (for the franchiser) include loss of some organizational and brand control, as well as relatively lower returns than other strategic entry models (albeit, with lower risk).
Key Terms
- franchisee
-
A holder of a franchise; a person who is granted a franchise.
- franchiser
-
A franchisor, a company or person who grants franchises.
What is Franchising?
In franchising, an organization (the franchiser) has the option to grant an entrepreneur or local company (the franchisee) access to its brand, trademarks, and products.
In this arrangement, the franchisee will take the majority of the risk in opening a new location (e.g. capital investments) while gaining the advantage of an already established brand name and operational process. In exchange, the franchisee will pay a certain percentage of the profits of the venture back to the franchiser. The franchiser will also often provide training, advertising, and assistance with products.
Why Franchise
Lower Barriers to Entry
Franchising is a particularly useful practice when approaching international markets. For the franchiser, international expansion can be both complex and expensive, particularly when the purchase of land and building of facilities is necessary. With legal, cultural, linguistics, and logistical barriers to entry in various global markets, the franchising model offers and simpler, cleaner solution that can be implemented relatively quickly.
Localization
Franchising also allows for localization of the brand, products, and distribution systems. This localization can cater to local tastes and language through empowering locals to own, manage, and employ the business. This high level of integration into the new location can create significant advantages compared to other entry models, with much lower risk.
Speed
It is also worth noting that franchising is a very efficient, low cost and quickly implemented expansionary strategy. Franchising requires very little capital investment on behalf of the parent company, and the time and effort of building the stores are similar outsources to the franchisee. As a result, franchising can be a way to rapidly expand both domestically and globally.
Starbucks’ Expansion
Starbucks operates with a wide variety of strategic alliances, including a franchising program.
Downsides to Franchising
Franchising has some weaknesses as well, from a strategic point of view. Most importantly, organizations (the franchisers) lose a great deal of control. Quality assurance and protection of the brand is much more difficult when ownership of the franchise is external to the organization itself. Choosing partners wisely and equipping them with the tools necessary for high levels of quality and alignment with the brand values is critical (e.g., training, equipment, quality control, adequate resources).
It is also of importance to keep the risk/return ratio in mind. While the risk of franchising is much lower in terms of capital investment, so too is the returns derived from operations (depending on the franchising agreement in place). While it is a faster and cheaper mode of entry, it ultimately results in a profit share between the franchiser and the franchisee.
4.5.3: Exporting
Exporting is the practice of shipping goods from the domestic country to a foreign country.
Learning Objective
Explain how exports are accounted for in international trade
Key Points
- This term export is derived from the conceptual meaning as to ship the goods and services out of the port of a country.
- In national accounts “exports” consist of transactions in goods and services (sales, barter, gifts or grants) from residents to non-residents.
- Statistics on international trade do not record smuggled goods or flows of illegal services. A small fraction of the smuggled goods and illegal services may nevertheless be included in official trade statistics through dummy shipments that serve to conceal the illegal nature of the activities.
Key Terms
- export
-
to sell (goods) to a foreign country
- import
-
To bring (something) in from a foreign country, especially for sale or trade.
- exporting
-
the sale of capital, goods, and services across international borders or territories
- exporting
-
the act of selling to a foreign country
Example
- When individuals from Country A purchase goods from Country B, this process is known as exporting for Country B (since their goods are being sold) and importing for Country A (since they are buying the goods).
This term “export” is derived from the concept of shipping goods and services out of the port of a country . The seller of such goods and services is referred to as an “exporter” who is based in the country of export whereas the overseas based buyer is referred to as an “importer”. In international trade, exporting refers to selling goods and services produced in the home country to other markets.
Oil Exports 2006
The map shows barrels of oil exported per day in 2006. Russia and Saudi Arabia exported more barrels than any other oil-exporting countries.
Export of commercial quantities of goods normally requires the involvement of customs authorities in both the country of export and the country of import. The advent of small trades over the internet such as through Amazon and eBay has largely bypassed the involvement of customs in many countries because of the low individual values of these trades. Nonetheless, these small exports are still subject to legal restrictions applied by the country of export. An export’s counterpart is an import.
In national accounts, exports consist of transactions in goods and services (sales, barter, gifts, or grants) from residents to non-residents.The exact definition of exports includes and excludes specific “borderline” cases. A general delimitation of exports in national accounts is as follows: An export of a good occurs when there is a change of ownership from a resident to a non-resident; this does not necessarily imply that the good in question physically crosses any border. However, in specific cases, national accounts impute changes of ownership even though in legal terms no change of ownership takes place (e.g. cross border financial leasing, cross border deliveries between affiliates of the same enterprise, goods crossing the border for significant processing to order or repair). Smuggled goods must also be included in the export measurement.
Export of services consist of all services rendered by residents to non-residents. In national accounts, any direct purchases by non-residents in the economic territory of a country are recorded as exports of services; therefore, all expenditure by foreign tourists in the economic territory of a country is considered part of the export of services of that country. International flows of illegal services must also be included.
National accountants often need to make adjustments to the basic trade data in order to comply with national accounts concepts; the concepts for basic trade statistics often differ in terms of definition and coverage from the requirements in the national accounts:
Data on international trade in goods is mostly obtained through declarations to customs services. If a country applies the general trade system, all goods entering or leaving the country are recorded. If the special trade system (e.g., extra-EU trade statistics) is applied, goods which are received into customs warehouses are not recorded in external trade statistics unless they subsequently go into free circulation in the country of receipt.
4.5.4: Importing
Imports are the inflow of goods and services into a country’s market for consumption.
Learning Objective
Explain the methodology behind the selection of products to import
Key Points
- A country specializes in the export of goods for which it has a comparative advantage and imports those for which it has a comparative disadvantage. By doing so, the country can increase its welfare.
- Comparative advantage describes the ability of a country to produce one specific good more efficiently than other goods.
- A country enhances its welfare by importing a broader range of higher-quality goods and services at lower cost than it could produce domestically.
Key Terms
- import
-
To bring (something) in from a foreign country, especially for sale or trade.
- comparative advantage
-
The concept that a certain good can be produced more efficiently than others due to a number of factors, including productive skills, climate, natural resource availability, and so forth.
Example
- A country in certain tropical areas of the world has a comparative advantage at growing crops like sugar or coffee beans, but it would be much less efficient at growing wheat (due to the climate). Therefore, they should export their sugar/coffee beans and import wheat at a lower cost than trying to grow wheat themselves.
The term “import” is derived from the concept of goods and services arriving into the port of a country. The buyer of such goods and services is referred to as an “importer” and is based in the country of import whereas the overseas-based seller is referred to as an “exporter.” Thus, an import is any good (e.g. a commodity) or service brought in from one country to another country in a legitimate fashion, typically for use in trade. It is a good that is brought in from another country for sale.
Singapore
The Port of Singapore is one of the busiest ports in the world. Singapore has to import most of its food and consumer goods.
Imported goods or services are provided to domestic consumers by foreign producers. An import in the receiving country is an export to the sending country. Imports, along with exports, form the basics of international trade. Import of goods normally requires the involvement of customs authorities in both the country of import and the country of export; those goods are often subject to import quotas, tariffs, and trade agreements. While imports are the set of goods and services imported, “imports” also means the economic value of all goods and services that are imported.
Imports are the inflow of goods and services into a country’s market for consumption. A country enhances its welfare by importing a broader range of higher-quality goods and services at lower cost than it could produce domestically. Comparative advantage is a concept often applied to importing and exporting. Comparative advantage is the concept that a country should specialize in the production and export of those goods and services that it can produce more efficiently than other goods and services, and that it should import those goods and services in which it has a comparative disadvantage.
4.5.5: Contract Manufacturing
In contract manufacturing, a hiring firm makes an agreement with the contract manufacturer to produce and ship the hiring firm’s goods.
Learning Objective
Compare the benefits and risks of employing a contract manufacturer (CM)
Key Points
- A hiring firm may enter a contract with a contract manufacturer (CM) to produce components or final products on behalf of the hiring firm for some agreed-upon price.
- There are many benefits to contract manufacturing, and companies are finding many reasons why they should be outsourcing their production to other companies.
- Production outside of the company does come with many risks attached. Companies must first identify their core competencies before deciding about contract manufacture.
Key Terms
- Contract manufacturing
-
a business model where a firm hires another firm to produce components or products
- Contract manufacturing
-
Business model in which a firm hires a contract manufacturer to produce components or final products based on the hiring firm’s design.
A contract manufacturer (“CM”) is a manufacturer that enters into a contract with a firm to produce components or products for that firm. It is a form of outsourcing. In a contract manufacturing business model, the hiring firm approaches the contract manufacturer with a design or formula. The contract manufacturer will quote the parts based on processes, labor, tooling, and material costs. Typically a hiring firm will request quotes from multiple CMs. After the bidding process is complete, the hiring firm will select a source, and then, for the agreed-upon price, the CM acts as the hiring firm’s factory, producing and shipping units of the design on behalf of the hiring firm.
Contract Manufacturing
Ness Corporation is a contract manufacturer in Seven Hills, Australia.
Benefits
Contract manufacturing offers a number of benefits:
- Cost Savings: Companies save on their capital costs because they do not have to pay for a facility and the equipment needed for production. They can also save on labor costs such as wages, training, and benefits. Some companies may look to contract manufacture in low-cost countries, such as China, to benefit from the low cost of labor.
- Mutual Benefit to Contract Site: A contract between the manufacturer and the company it is producing for may last several years. The manufacturer will know that it will have a steady flow of business at least until that contract expires.
- Advanced Skills: Companies can take advantage of skills that they may not possess, but the contract manufacturer does. The contract manufacturer is likely to have relationships formed with raw material suppliers or methods of efficiency within their production.
- Quality: Contract Manufacturers are likely to have their own methods of quality control in place that help them to detect counterfeit or damaged materials early.
- Focus: Companies can focus on their core competencies better if they can hand off base production to an outside company.
- Economies of Scale: Contract Manufacturers have multiple customers that they produce for. Because they are servicing multiple customers, they can offer reduced costs in acquiring raw materials by benefiting from economies of scale. The more units there are in one shipment, the less expensive the price per unit will be.
Risks
Balanced against the above benefits of contract manufacturing are a number of risks:
- Lack of Control: When a company signs the contract allowing another company to produce their product, they lose a significant amount of control over that product. They can only suggest strategies to the contract manufacturer; they cannot force them to implement those strategies.
- Relationships: It is imperative that the company forms a good relationship with its contract manufacturer. The company must keep in mind that the manufacturer has other customers. They cannot force them to produce their product before a competitor’s. Most companies mitigate this risk by working cohesively with the manufacturer and awarding good performance with additional business.
- Quality: When entering into a contract, companies must make sure that the manufacturer’s standards are congruent with their own. They should evaluate the methods in which they test products to make sure they are of good quality. The company has to ensure the contract manufacturer has suppliers that also meet these standards.
- Intellectual Property Loss: When entering into a contract, a company is divulging their formulas or technologies. This is why it is important that a company not give out any of its core competencies to contract manufacturers. It is very easy for an employee to download such information from a computer and steal it. The recent increase in intellectual property loss has corporate and government officials struggling to improve security. Usually, it comes down to the integrity of the employees.
- Outsourcing Risks: Although outsourcing to low-cost countries has become very popular, it does bring along risks such as language barriers, cultural differences, and long lead times. This could make the management of contract manufacturers more difficult, expensive, and time-consuming.
- Capacity Constraints: If a company does not make up a large portion of the contract manufacturer’s business, they may find that they are de-prioritized over other companies during high production periods. Thus, they may not obtain the product they need when they need it.
- Loss of Flexibility and Responsiveness: Without direct control over the manufacturing facility, the company will lose some of its ability to respond to disruptions in the supply chain. It may also hurt their ability to respond to demand fluctuations, risking their customer service levels.
4.5.6: Joint Ventures
In a joint venture business model, two or more parties agree to invest time, equity, and effort for the development of a new shared project.
Learning Objective
Outline the dynamics of a joint venture
Key Points
- Joint business ventures involve two parties contributing their own equity and resources to develop a new project. The enterprise, revenues, expenses and assets are shared by the involved parties.
- Since money is involved in a joint venture, it is necessary to have a strategic plan in place.
- As the cost of starting new projects is generally high, a joint venture allows both parties to share the burden of the project as well as the resulting profits.
Key Term
- joint venture
-
A cooperative partnership between two individuals or businesses in which profits and risks are shared.
Example
- Sony Ericsson is a joint venture between Swedish telecom corporation Ericsson and Japanese electronics manufacturer Sony to develop cellular devices.
Joint Ventures
A joint venture is a business agreement in which parties agree to develop a new entity and new assets by contributing equity. They exercise control over the enterprise and consequently share revenues, expenses and assets.
Joint Venture
Sony Ericsson is a joint venture between Swedish telecom corporation Ericsson and Japanese electronics manufacturer Sony.
When two or more persons come together to form a partnership for the purpose of carrying out a project, this is called a joint venture. In this scenario, both parties are equally invested in the project in terms of money, time and effort to build on the original concept. While joint ventures are generally small projects, major corporations use this method to diversify. A joint venture can ensure the success of smaller projects for those that are just starting in the business world or for established corporations. Since the cost of starting new projects is generally high, a joint venture allows both parties to share the burden of the project as well as the resulting profits.
Since money is involved in a joint venture, it is necessary to have a strategic plan in place. In short, both parties must be committed to focusing on the future of the partnership rather than just the immediate returns. Ultimately, short term and long term successes are both important.To achieve this success, honesty, integrity and communication within the joint venture are necessary.
A consortium JV (also known as a cooperative agreement) is formed when one party seeks technological expertise, franchise and brand-use agreements, management contracts, and rental agreements for one-time contracts. The JV is dissolved when that goal is reached. Some major joint ventures include Dow Corning, MillerCoors, Sony Ericsson, Penske Truck Leasing, Norampac, and Owens-Corning.
4.5.7: Outsourcing
Outsourcing business functions to developing foreign countries has become a popular way for companies to reduce cost.
Learning Objective
Explain why companies outsource
Key Points
- Outsourcing is the contracting of business processes to external firms, usually in developing countries where labor costs are cheaper.
- This practice has increased in prevalence due to better technology and improvements in the educational standards of the countries to which jobs are outsourced.
- The opposite of outsourcing is called insourcing, and it is sometimes accomplished via vertical integration. However, a business can provide a contract service to another business without necessarily insourcing that business process.
Key Terms
- insourcing
-
The obtaining of goods or services using domestic resources or employees as opposed to foreign.
- outsourcing
-
The transfer of a business function to an external service provider.
- offshoring
-
The location of a business in another country for tax purposes.
Example
- Corporations may outsource their helpdesk or customer service functions to 3rd party call centers in foreign countries because these skilled laborers can do these jobs at a lesser cost than their equivalents in the domestic country.
Outsourcing
Overview
Outsourcing is the contracting out of a business process, which an organization may have previously performed internally or has a new need for, to an independent organization from which the process is purchased back as a service. Though the practice of purchasing a business function—instead of providing it internally—is a common feature of any modern economy, the term outsourcing became popular in America near the turn of the 21st century. An outsourcing deal may also involve transfer of the employees and assets involved to the outsourcing business partner. The definition of outsourcing includes both foreign or domestic contracting , which may include offshoring, described as “a company taking a function out of their business and relocating it to another country. “
Outsourcing
Outsourcing is the process of contracting an existing business process to an independent organization. The process is purchased as a service.
The opposite of outsourcing is called insourcing, and it is sometimes accomplished via vertical integration. However, a business can provide a contract service to another business without necessarily insourcing that business process.
Reasons for Outsourcing
Companies outsource to avoid certain types of costs. Among the reasons companies elect to outsource include avoidance of burdensome regulations, high taxes, high energy costs, and unreasonable costs that may be associated with defined benefits in labor union contracts and taxes for government mandated benefits. Perceived or actual gross margin in the short run incentivizes a company to outsource. With reduced short run costs, executive management sees the opportunity for short run profits while the income growth of the consumers base is strained. This motivates companies to outsource for lower labor costs. However, the company may or may not incur unexpected costs to train these overseas workers. Lower regulatory costs are an addition to companies saving money when outsourcing.
Import marketers may make short run profits from cheaper overseas labor and currency mainly in wealth consuming sectors at the long run expense of an economy’s wealth producing sectors straining the home county’s tax base, income growth, and increasing the debt burden. When companies offshore products and services, those jobs may leave the home country for foreign countries at the expense of the wealth producing sectors. Outsourcing may increase the risk of leakage and reduce confidentiality, as well as introduce additional privacy and security concerns.
4.5.8: Offshoring
Offshoring entails a company moving a business process from one country to another.
Learning Objective
Explain the benefits of offshoring
Key Points
- Offshoring is the relocation of certain business processes from one country to the other, resulting in large tax breaks and lower labor costs.
- Offshoring can cause controversy in a company’s domestic country since it is perceived to impact the domestic employment situation negatively.
- Offshoring of a company’s services that were previously produced domestically can be advantageous in lowering operation costs, but has incited some controversy over the economic implications.
Key Terms
- offshoring
-
The location of a business in another country for tax purposes.
- outsourcing
-
The transfer of a business function to an external service provider.
- captive
-
held prisoner; not free; confined
“Offshoring” is a company’s relocation of a business process from one country to another. This typically involves an operational process, such as manufacturing, or a supporting process, such as accounting. Even state governments employ offshoring. More recently, offshoring has been associated primarily with the sourcing of technical and administrative services that support both domestic and global operations conducted outside a given home country by means of internal (captive) or external (outsourcing) delivery models.The subject of offshoring, also known as “outsourcing,” has produced considerable controversy in the United States. Offshoring for U.S. companies can result in large tax breaks and low-cost labor.
Worldwide Offshoring Business
The worldwide offshoring business is projected to equal $500 billion by 2020.
Offshoring can be seen in the context of either production offshoring or services offshoring. After its accession to the World Trade Organization (WTO) in 2001, the People’s Republic of China emerged as a prominent destination for production offshoring. Another focus area includes the software industry as part of Global Software Development and the development of Global Information Systems. After technical progress in telecommunications improved the possibilities of trade in services, India became a leader in this domain; however, many other countries are now emerging as offshore destinations.
The economic logic is to reduce costs. People who can use some of their skills more cheaply than others have a comparative advantage. Countries often strive to trade freely items that are of the least cost to produce.
Related terms include “nearshoring,” “inshoring,” and “bestshoring,” otherwise know as “rightshoring.” Nearshoring is the relocation of business processes to (typically) lower cost foreign locations that are still within close geographical proximity (for example, shifting United States-based business processes to Canada/Latin America). Inshoring entails choosing services within a country, while bestshoring entails choosing the “best shore” based on various criteria. Business process outsourcing (BPO) refers to outsourcing arrangements when entire business functions (such as Finance & Accounting and Customer Service) are outsourced. More specific terms can be found in the field of software development; for example, Global Information System as a class of systems being developed for/by globally distributed teams.
4.5.9: Multinational Firms
With the advent of improved communication and technology, corporations have been able to expand into multiple countries.
Learning Objective
Explain how a multinational corporation (MNC) operates
Key Points
- Multinational corporations operate in multiple countries.
- MNCs have considerable bargaining power and may negotiate business or trade policies with success.
- A corporation may choose to locate in a special economic zone, a geographical region that has economic and other laws that are more free-market-oriented than a country’s typical or national laws.
Key Term
- Multinational corporation
-
A corporation or enterprise that operates in multiple countries.
Example
- McDonalds operates in over 119 different countries, making it a fairly large MNC by any standard
A multinational corporation (MNC) or multinational enterprise (MNE) is a corporation registered in more than one country or has operations in more than one country. It is a large corporation which both produces and sells goods or services in various countries . It can also be referred to as an international corporation. The first multinational corporation was the Dutch East India Company, founded March 20, 1602.
Ford
Ford is a multinational corporation with operations throughout the world.
Corporations may make a foreign direct investment. Foreign direct investment is direct investment into one country by a company located in another country. Investors buy a company in the country or expand operations of an existing business in the country.
A corporation may choose to locate in a special economic zone, a geographical region with economic and other laws that are more free-market-oriented than a country’s typical or national laws.
Multinational corporations are important factors in the processes of globalization. National and local governments often compete against one another to attract MNC facilities, with the expectation of increased tax revenue, employment and economic activity. To compete, political powers push toward greater autonomy for corporations. MNCs play an important role in developing economies of developing countries.
Many economists argue that in countries with comparatively low labor costs and weak environmental and social protection, multinationals actually bring about a “race to the top.” While multinationals will see a low tax burden or low labor costs as an element of comparative advantage, MNC profits are tied to operational efficiency, which includes a high degree of standardization. Thus, MNCs are likely to adapt production processes in many of their operations to conform to the standards of the most rigorous jurisdiction in which they operate.
As for labor costs, while MNCs pay workers in developing countries far below levels in countries where labor productivity is high (and accordingly, will adopt more labor-intensive production processes), they also tend to pay a premium over local labor rates of 10% to 100%.
Finally, depending on the nature of the MNC, investment in any country reflects a desire for a medium- to long-term return, as establishing a plant, training workers and so on can be costly. Therefore, once established in a jurisdiction, MNCs are potentially vulnerable to arbitrary government intervention like expropriation, sudden contract renegotiation and the arbitrary withdrawal or compulsory purchase of licenses. Thus both the negotiating power of MNCs and the “race to the bottom” critique may be overstated while understating the benefits (besides tax revenue) of MNCs becoming established in a jurisdiction.
4.5.10: Direct Investment
FDI is practiced by companies in order to benefit from cheaper labor costs, tax exemptions, and other privileges in that foreign country.
Learning Objective
Explain the effects of foreign direct investment (FDI) for the investor and the host country
Key Points
- FDI is the flow of investments from one company to production in a foreign nation, with the purpose of lowering labor costs and gaining tax incentives.
- FDI can help the economic situations of developing countries, as well as facilitate progressive internal policy reforms.
- A major contributing factor to increasing FDI flow was internal policy reform relating to trade openness and participation in international trade agreements and institutions.
Key Term
- Foreign direct investment
-
investment directly into production in a country by a company located in another country, either by buying a company in the target country or by expanding operations of an existing business in that country.
Example
- Intel is headquartered in the United States, but it has made foreign direct investments in a number of Southeast Asian countries where they produce components of their products in Intel-owned factories.
Foreign direct investment (FDI) is investment into production in a country by a company located in another country, either by buying a company in the target country or by expanding operations of an existing business in that country.
FDI is done for many reasons including to take advantage of cheaper wages in the country, special investment privileges, such as tax exemptions, offered by the country as an incentive to gain tariff-free access to the markets of the country or the region. FDI is in contrast to portfolio investment which is a passive investment in the securities of another country, such as stocks and bonds.
One theory for how to best help developing countries, is to increase their inward flow of FDI. However, identifying the conditions that best attract such investment flow is difficult, since foreign investment varies greatly across countries and over time. Knowing what has influenced these decisions and the resulting trends in outcomes can be helpful for governments, non-governmental organizations, businesses, and private donors looking to invest in developing countries.
Sao Paulo, Brazil
Sao Paulo, Brazil, is home to a growing middle class and significant direct investments.
A study from scholars at Duke University and Princeton University published in the American Journal of Political Science, “The Politics of Foreign Direct Investment into Developing Countries: Increasing FDI through International Trade Agreements,” examines trends in FDI from 1970 to 2000 in 122 developing countries to assess what the best conditions are for attracting investment. The study found the major contributing factor to increasing FDI flow was internal policy reform relating to trade openness and participation in international trade agreements and institutions. The researchers conclude that, while “democracy can be conducive to international cooperation,” the strongest indicator for higher inward flow of FDI for developing countries was the number of trade agreements and institutions to which they were party.
4.5.11: Countertrade
Countertrade is a system of exchange in which goods and services are used as payment rather than money.
Learning Objective
Explain the various methods of countertrading
Key Points
- Countertrade is the exchange of goods or services for other goods or services. This system can be typified as simple bartering, switch trading, counter purchase, buyback, or offset.
- Switch trading: Party A and B are countertrading salt for sugar. Party A may switch its obligation to pay Party B to a third party, known as the switch trader. The switch trader gets the sugar from Party B at a discount and sells it for money. The money is used as Party A’s payment to Party B.
- Counter purchase: Party A sells salt to Party B. Party A promises to make a future purchase of sugar from Party B.
- Buyback: Party A builds a salt processing plant in Country B, providing capital to this developing nation. In return, Country B pays Party A with salt from the plant.
- Offset agreement: Party A and Country B enter a contract where Party A agrees to buy sugar from Country B to manufacture candy. Country B then buys that candy.
Key Terms
- Switch trading
-
Practice in which one company sells to another its obligation to make a purchase in a given country.
- counter purchase
-
Sale of goods and services to one company in another country by a company that promises to make a future purchase of a specific product from the same company in that country.
- barter
-
The exchange of goods or services without involving money.
Examples
- Bartering: One party gives salt in exchange for sugar from another party.
- Switch trading: Party A and Party B are countertrading salt for sugar. Party A may switch its obligation to pay Party B to a third party, known as the switch trader. The switch trader gets the sugar from Party B at a discount and sells it for money. The money is used as Party A’s payment to Party B.
- Counter purchase: Party A sells salt to Party B. Party A promises to make a future purchase of sugar from Party B.
- Buyback: Party A builds a salt processing plant in Country B, providing capital to this developing nation. In return, Country B pays Party A with salt from the plant.
- Offset agreement: Party A and Country B enter a contract where Party A agrees to buy sugar from Country B to manufacture candy. Country B then buys that candy.
Countertrade means exchanging goods or services which are paid for, in whole or part, with other goods or services, rather than with money. A monetary valuation can, however, be used in counter trade for accounting purposes. Any transaction involving exchange of goods or service for something of equal value.
Bartering
Bartering involves exchanging goods or services for other goods or services as payment.
There are five main variants of countertrade:
- Barter: Exchange of goods or services directly for other goods or services without the use of money as means of purchase or payment.
- Switch trading: Practice in which one company sells to another its obligation to make a purchase in a given country.
- Counter purchase: Sale of goods and services to one company in aother country by a company that promises to make a future purchase of a specific product from the same company in that country.
- Buyback: This occurs when a firm builds a plant in a country, or supplies technology, equipment, training, or other services to the country, and agrees to take a certain percentage of the plant’s output as partial payment for the contract.
- Offset: Agreement that a company will offset a hard currency purchase of an unspecified product from that nation in the future. Agreement by one nation to buy a product from another, subject to the purchase of some or all of the components and raw materials from the buyer of the finished product, or the assembly of such product in the buyer nation.
Countertrade also occurs when countries lack sufficient hard currency or when other types of market trade are impossible. In 2000, India and Iraq agreed on an “oil for wheat and rice” barter deal, subject to UN approval under Article 50 of the UN Persian Gulf War sanctions, that would facilitate 300,000 barrels of oil delivered daily to India at a price of $6.85 a barrel, while Iraq oil sales into Asia were valued at about $22 a barrel. In 2001, India agreed to swap 1.5 million tonnes of Iraqi crude under the oil-for-food program.
Chapter 3: Business Ethics and Social Responsibility
3.1: Business Ethics
3.1.1: A Brief Definition of Business Ethics
Business ethics is the written and unwritten principles and values that govern decisions and actions within companies.
Learning Objective
Recall the three disciplines of business ethics
Key Points
- Ethics, broadly, is concerned with the meaning of all aspects of human behavior. Theoretical/normative ethics aims to differentiate right from wrong.
- An organization’s culture sets standards for determining the difference between good and bad decision making. Ethics in business is about knowing the difference between right and wrong and choosing to do what is right.
- There are three intricately related parts to the discipline of business ethics: personal, professional, and corporate.
Key Terms
- ethical behavior
-
Business ethics (also corporate ethics) is a form of applied ethics or professional ethics that examines ethical principles and moral or ethical problems that arise in a business environment. It applies to all aspects of business conduct and is relevant to the conduct of individuals and entire organizations.
- normative ethics
-
A branch of ethics concerned with classifying actions as right and wrong, attempting to develop a set of rules governing human conduct, or a set of norms for action.
- ethics
-
The study of principles relating to right and wrong conduct.
Example
- Corporate social responsibility (CSR) is a form of ethical behavior that requires that organizations understand, identify, and eliminate unethical economic, environmental, and social behaviors.
Ethics: A Brief Definition
Ethics is the branch of philosophy concerned with the meaning of all aspects of human behavior. Theoretical ethics, sometimes called normative ethics, is about delineating right from wrong. It is supremely intellectual and, as a branch of philosophy, rational in nature. It is the reflection on and definition of what is right, what is wrong, what is just, what is unjust, what is good, and what is bad in terms of human behavior. It helps us develop the rules and principles (norms) by which we judge and guide meaningful decision-making.
Business Ethics
Business ethics, also called corporate ethics, is a form of applied ethics or professional ethics that examines the ethical and moral principles and problems that arise in a business environment. It can also be defined as the written and unwritten codes of principles and values, determined by an organization’s culture, that govern decisions and actions within that organization. It applies to all aspects of business conduct on behalf of both individuals and the entire company. In the most basic terms, a definition for business ethics boils down to knowing the difference between right and wrong and choosing to do what is right.
There are three parts to the discipline of business ethics: personal (on a micro scale), professional (on an intermediate scale), and corporate (on a macro scale). All three are intricately related. It is helpful to distinguish among them because each rests on a slightly different set of assumptions and requires a slightly different focus in order to be understood.
Pierre Omidyar and Richard Branson
CEOs must adhere to ethical standards.
3.1.2: Ethical Issues Within a Business
Ethics are of critical importance to organizations, as they can potentially have enormous impacts on their communities.
Learning Objective
Outline the various ethical philosophies over time, and integrate them into a meaningful understanding of ethical behavior
Key Points
- Organizational leaders must be aware of the consequences of certain decisions and organizational trajectories, and ensure alignment with societal interests and ethical behavior.
- Utilitarianism is the ethical philosophy that pursues the greatest outcome for the largest number of people. This is a consequence-oriented point of view.
- Deontological ethics focus on the position that the morality of an action is based on its adherence to rules or obligations set by society or held intrinsically (as opposed to the consequences of that act).
- Virtuousness is the pursuit of a given behavior for the simple sake of that behavior (i.e. the means, not the ends), and the desire for perfect execution of that behavior.
- Finally, communitarian ethics focus on the expectations and needs of a preferred community. This means identifying the duties assigned by the group, and carrying out tasks for their benefit.
Key Terms
- deontological
-
Relating to the the normative ethical position that judges the morality of an action based on the action’s adherence to rules or obligations rather than either the inherent goodness or the consequences of those actions.
- communitarian
-
Pertaining to the idea that a given group is of central importance.
- utilitarian
-
Relating to the ethical point of view that the greatest good for the greatest number of people is ideal.
Ethics are a central concern for businesses, organizations, and individuals alike. Behaving in a way that adds value without inappropriate conduct or negative consequences for any other group or individual, organizational leaders in particular must be completely aware of the consequences of certain decisions and organizational trajectories, and ensure alignment with societal interests.
There are many examples of ethical mistakes in which organizational decision makers pursued interests that benefited them at the cost of society. The 2008 economic collapse saw a great deal of poor decision-making on behalf of the banks. The Enron scandal is another example of individuals choosing personal rewards at the cost of society at large. These types of situations are extremes, but they highlight just how serious the consequences can be when ethics are ignored.
How to Frame Issues Ethically
One complexity of building a strong ethical foundation into an organization is the simple fact that there are many schools of thought. Ethics are in some ways a branch of philosophy, in which the idealized perspective is both malleable and uncertain. However, some powerful examples of ethical frames are available to us from many different time periods. There are four schools of thought that are useful for framing future strategic decisions to ensure ethical behavior. These perspectives are utilitarian, deontological, virtuous, and communitarian approaches.
Utilitarian Approach
Perhaps the cleanest and simplest perspective on ethical behavior, a utilitarian will always ask one question: what is the ideal outcome for the highest number of people? This approach simply considers the impact of ones actions on others, and tries to ensure that the best outcome for the most people is what ultimately occurs.
While this outcome-based reasoning is quite useful, it has one fatal flaw. The definition of ‘best’ when discussing what’s best for the most people can become quite subjective. As a result, when utilizing this ethical reasoning to make decisions, it is important to set terms and create definitions that enable the reasoning to have applicable and measurable logic. Simply put, one must ensure they define their terms, and what they mean by good, when pursuing this ethical line of reasoning.
Deontological Approach
Popularized by Emmanual Kant, the central term in this point of view is duty. Kant disliked the concept of utilitarianism for one simple reason: the ends should not justify the means. Indeed, Kant’s ethical argument is that moral maxims of respect for one another and appropriate behavior serve as a groundwork for all ethical reasoning. It is these core concepts which can never be sacrificed for the greater good.
Virtue Ethics
Popularized by Greek philosophers such as Aristotle, this point of view assumes that virtue is a central benchmark for all ethical behavior. What is meant by virtue in this context is a desire to perform a certain act as a result of deep contemplation on the value of that act. To make this act virtuous is to perform it with excellence. As a result, we have a deep contemplation of the value of a certain behavior or decisions, which we apply great practice and consideration. Following this, we can approach the perfect execution of that act or behavior through our rational minds.
In this school of ethical thought, it is similarly important to discard the justification of a means by the ends of that means. Which is to say this an act should be performed because it is desirable in and of itself, and not for the sake of something else. Each behavior is therefore considered carefully, rationally and virtuously to ensure it is valid, beneficial, and valuable.
Communitarian Ethics
Finally we have communitarian ethics. In this perspective, the individual decision-maker should ask about the duties owed to the communities in which they participate. This is a relatively simple frame of reference, where the individual decision maker will recognize the expectations and consequences of a given decision relative to the needs, demands and impacts of a certain preferred community.
Ethical behavior requires careful consideration of all frames, and a thorough understanding of the impacts of a given decision.
3.1.3: Ethical Issues at an Individual Level
A critical function of organizational management is empowering a positive sense of values and ethos at the individual level.
Learning Objective
Understand the interaction between individual ethics and organizational management
Key Points
- An important aspect of organizational strategy and management is empowering a strong sense of ethics at the individual level.
- Organizations should internally develop a code of conduct and/or ethics statement, provide ethics training, appoint ethics officers, and ensure there is an anonymous way to report ethical problems.
- Providing intrinsic and extrinsic sources of motivation for individual employees to behave ethically reinforces positive ethical behavior.
- Hiring and developing employees who have a strong sense of individual professionalism will ensure best practices are achieved from an ethical point of view.
Key Terms
- Intrinsic
-
An aspect possessed by character; internal.
- extrinsic
-
Outside of; not belong to the thing itself.
The Importance of Ethics
Ethical behavior, be it at the organizational, professional or individual level, is a direct representation of the principles and values that govern the individual and the organization they represent. Organizations create an internal culture, which is reflected externally as organizational values. These values impact the relationships within the organization, productivity, reputation, employee morale and retention, legalities, and the broader community in which they operate.
As a result, most organizations generate a statement of organizational values and codes of conduct for all employees to understand and adhere to. Motivating and reinforcing positive behavior while creating an environment that avoids unethical behavior is a critical responsibility of both managers and employees.
How To Empower Ethics
Structure
At the individual level, organizations must focus on developing and empowering each employee to understand and adhere to ethical standards. There are four basic elements organizations can build to empower individual ethics:
- A written code of ethical standards (ethical code)
- Training for management and employees (ethical training)
- Advice and consulting on a situation to situation basis (ethics officers)
- A confidential and easily accessible system of reporting (ethical reporting)
Equipping organizations with these four components can alleviate much of the burden on the individual, and enable each employee to learn what is appropriate (and what isn’t).
Motivation
As with most facets of management, there is also a critical motivational component to individual ethics. Intrinsic and extrinsic motivations can reinforce positive behavior and/or eliminate negative behavior in the workplace.
Whistleblowing, for example, is a practice that gets quite a bit of both positive and negative media attention. Whistleblowers are individuals who identify unethical practices in organizations and report the behavior to management or the authorities. A whistleblower who behaves honestly, reporting a problem accurately, should be rewarded for their bravery and honesty, as opposed to punished and ostracized. If an employee is blowing the whistle, it is likely that the organization itself has failed to empower and positively reinforce honest and ethical discussions internally.
Another example is rewarding employees for admitting mistakes. An employee who makes a mistake on the assembly line, and accidentally produces a batch of defective goods, could react in a number of ways. If the organization punishes employees for mistakes, the employee is quite likely to be motivated to keep quiet and not mention it to avoid punishment. However, if the organizational is ethical and clever, they will empower employees to take responsibility for their mistakes and even reward them for coming forward, apologizing, and ensuring that no consumer receives a defective product. It seems at first counter-intuitive to reward an employee for a mistake, but ultimately it provides the best outcome for everyone.
Professionalism
Finally, some aspects of individual ethics are rooted in the individual. Attaining a strong sense of professionalism, and recognizing the ethical implications of certain professional decisions, is a key component of education, individual reflection, and experience. For some professions it is even more critical and relevant than others.
Journalists, for example, could easily attain higher notoriety for making up false stories about celebrities to gain traffic to their news website. But an ethical journalist recognizes the repercussions of slander for the individual being discussed, and maintains an honest ethical code of reporting only what they know to be true (and not what they speculate). Psychologists will maintain patient privacy, understanding the repercussions of leaking personal information about their patients.
There are many potential examples, but the primary point is that professionals understand the their field deeply, including the repercussions of making ethical mistakes.
Triple Bottom Line
Balancing ethics with proper business practices at the individual and organizational level can result in a triple bottom line: economic, social, and environmental value.
3.1.4: Ethical Issues at an Organizational Level
Organizational ethics express the values of an organization to its employees and affect all functional areas in a business.
Learning Objective
Evaluate ethical issues that face organizations in the fields finance, human resource management, sales and marketing, and production
Key Points
- An organization’s ethical behavior is an extension of its organizational culture.
- The four elements necessary to quantify an organization’s ethics are a written code of ethics and standards; ethics training for executives, managers, and employees; availability for advice on ethical situations (i.e, advice lines or offices); and systems for confidential reporting.
- Ethical practices need to be established at both the organizational level and the functional level (i.e., sales, marketing, production, etc. ) to be effective.
- Ethical practices need to be established at both the organizational level and the functional level (i.e. sales marketing, production, etc. ) to be effective
Key Term
- ethics
-
A branch of philosophy that involves systematizing, defending, and recommending concepts of right and wrong conduct; also called moral philosophy.
Examples
- The Enron scandal, revealed in October 2001, eventually led to the bankruptcy of the Enron Corporation, an American energy company based in Houston, Texas, and the de facto dissolution of Arthur Andersen, which was one of the five largest audit and accountancy partnerships in the world. In addition to being the largest bankruptcy reorganization in American history at that time, Enron was attributed as the biggest audit failure. Many executives at Enron were indicted for a variety of charges and were later sentenced to prison. Enron’s unethical practices led to their employees and shareholders losing billions of dollars.
- Notable cases of intellectual property copyright infringement cases include Napster, Eldred v. Ashcroft and Air Pirates.
- When organizations go above and beyond mandated behaviors they can be thought of acting ethically. Examples include a plan for its employees by offering “wellness programs” along with general health coverage, and/or a viable stable retirement plan. Further, an organization will allow for paid maternity leave, or even paid time off for new parents after an adoption. Other perks may include, “on-site” childcare, flextime for work hours, employee education reimbursement, and even telecommuting for various days during a week.
Organizational Ethics is how an organization ethically responds to an internal or external stimulus. Organizational ethics express the values of an organization to its employees and other entities, irrespective of governmental and/or regulatory laws. There are at least four elements that make ethical behavior conducive within an organization:
- A written code of ethics and standards
- Ethics training to executives, managers, and employees
- Availability for advice on ethical situations (i.e, advice lines or offices)
- Systems for confidential reporting.
Ethical Issues in Finance
The 2008 financial crisis caused critics to challenge the ethics of the executives in charge of U.S. and European financial institutions and regulatory bodies. Previously, finance ethics was somewhat overlooked because issues in finance are often addressed as matters of law rather than ethics. Fairness in trading practices, trading conditions, financial contracting, sales practices, consultancy services, tax payments, internal audits, external audits, and executive compensation also fall under the umbrella of finance and accounting. Specific corporate ethical/legal abuses include creative accounting, earnings management, misleading financial analysis, insider trading, securities fraud, bribery/kickbacks, and facilitation payments.
Ethical Issues in Human Resource Management
Human resource (HR) management involves recruitment selection, orientation, performance appraisal, training and development, industrial relations and health and safety issues. Discrimination by age (preferring the young or the old), gender, sexual orientation, race, religion, disability, weight, and attractiveness are all ethical issues that the HR manager must deal with.
Ethical Issues in Sales and Marketing
Ethics in marketing deals with the principles, values, and/or ideals by which marketers and marketing institutions ought to act. Ethical marketing issues include marketing redundant or dangerous products/services; transparency about environmental risks, product ingredients (genetically modified organisms), possible health risks, or financial risks; respect for consumer privacy and autonomy; advertising truthfulness; and fairness in pricing and distribution. Some argue that marketing can influence individuals’ perceptions of and interactions with other people, implying an ethical responsibility to avoid distorting those perceptions and interactions.
Marketing ethics involves pricing practices, including illegal actions such as price fixing and legal actions including price discrimination and price skimming. Certain promotional activities have drawn fire, including greenwashing, bait-and-switch, shilling, viral marketing, spam (electronic), pyramid schemes, and multi-level marketing. Advertising has raised objections about attack ads, subliminal messages, sex in advertising, and marketing in schools.
Ethical Issues in Production
Business ethics usually deals with the duties of a company to ensure that products and production processes do not needlessly cause harm. Few goods and services can be produced and consumed with zero risk, so determining the ethical course can be problematic. In some cases, consumers demand products that harm them, such as tobacco products. Production may have environmental impacts, including pollution, habitat destruction, and urban sprawl. The downstream effects of technologies such as nuclear power, genetically modified food, and mobile phones may not be well understood. While the precautionary principle may prohibit introducing new technology whose consequences are not fully understood, that principle would have prohibited most of the new technology introduced since the industrial revolution. Product testing protocols have been attacked for violating the rights of both humans and animals.
Enron Stocks During the 2001 Scandal
Enron’s unethical practices led to their employees and shareholders losing billions of dollars as their stocks became worthless by November of 2001.
3.1.5: Fairness
Treating employees equitably enables substantial organizational benefits while avoiding unethical operations and the corresponding consequences.
Learning Objective
Understand the importance of an employee’s perception of an organization’s decisions, and the impact this can have on performance.
Key Points
- From a common sense perspective, you tend to get what you give. Treating employees in a way that empowers a sense of fairness and equity is a critical component to motivating positive employee behaviors.
- There are three useful frames of reference when considering organizational fairness: distributive justice, procedural justice, and interactional justice.
- Distributive justice is simply the process of making sure an employee’s production output aligns with his or her compensation.
- Procedural justice focuses on allowing all participating employees to have input and accountability when designing operational processes.
- Interactional justice comes in two parts. The first is ensuring that employees are treated in a socially positive and constructive manner. The second is ensuring nobody is left in the dark when important decisions are made.
- Building the above concepts successfully into an organizational norm avoids productivity problems and empowers motivation, citizenship, and commitment.
Key Terms
- Distributive
-
Concerned with the way in which things are shared between people.
- Procedural
-
Concerned with the way in which something is done, or the process which enables it.
- Interactional
-
Concerned with the way in which one individual socially encounters another.
Why Fairness Adds Value
Equitable treatment of all employees and stakeholders is critical to organizational success and the proper execution of business ethics. Awareness of potential fairness pitfalls, and ensuring that all employees feel valued and equitably treated, can avoid a wide variety of ethical and operational problems, while maximizing employee performance through providing a healthy environment for people to flourish and grow.
Organizational Justice
To ensure an organization is fair, one must consider the concept of justice as a central pillar of what creates a fair environment (and what does not). The question is simple: how do employees perceive the behavior of the organization, and how does this impact both employee and organizational outcomes?
In answering these questions, there are three useful perspectives one can adopt in considering fairness in the organization:
- Distributive – Simply put, the distribution of resources should align with the value of an individual’s inputs. Of course, this is more complex than salary. As a manager, ensure that credit, bonuses, and benefits are also distributed fairly.
- Procedural – Employees don’t only want compensation. They also need input into the process, and shared accountability in the decisions being made. When designing the procedure of a given work group, inclusion of everyone’s perspectives can lead to substantially higher satisfaction, efficiency, and fairness.
- Interactional – All members of an organization must both be treated appropriately (from a social frame) and informed respectfully (from an informational frame). In short, employees should be treated with propriety in discussions and shouldn’t be left in the dark when important decisions are made.
Implications of Fairness
There are many overt and subtle outcomes of treating employees equitably. The simplest examples of positive results due to a strong sense of ethical fairness in an organization include:
- Higher Performance and Efficiency – People feel their input is aligned with their compensation
- Commitment – Happy employees tend to stick around.
- Citizenship – If there is inequity in how people are treated, it tends to divide them. This is incredibly dangerous, and can quickly erode the positive benefits of looking out for one another.
- Avoiding Counterproductive Behavior – In short, dissatisfied employees are more prone to working against the established goals of the organization. Behaviors such as not doing certain tasks or helping certain work-groups can quickly become a source of inefficiency.
- Absenteeism – Sick days, skipping meetings, and generally unplugging from the organization is often an outcome of inequitable organizations.
- Emotional Exhaustion – Unsatisfied employees wrestle with insecurity and dissatisfaction, both of which are emotionally draining.
While there are many more examples of consequences avoided and benefits achieved from an ethical operational approach, this paints a clear picture of why it is important and how to frame manager’s perspectives to ensure equitable behavior.
Work Motivation
This model aligns well with Maslow’s hierarchy of needs, but applied to workplace motivation. Through the five M’s identified (in order of chronological achievement being Money; Myself; Member; Mastery; Mission), one can see in this pyramid chart how organizational justice will enable higher levels of individual motivation.
3.1.6: Open Communication of Decisions
Transparency consists of operating in such a way that it is easy for others to see what actions are being performed.
Learning Objective
Explain how a company uses transparency to open communication and why this is crucial to building connections and a sense of community
Key Points
- Transparency implies openness, communication, and accountability.
- Radical transparency is a management method where nearly all decision making is carried out publicly.
- Corporate transparency is the concept of removing all barriers to, and the facilitation of, free and easy public access to corporate information.
Key Term
- transparency
-
Open, public; having the property that theories and practices are publicly visible, thereby reducing the chance of corruption.
Example
- Two examples of organizations utilizing this style are the GNU/Linux community and Indymedia.
Transparency, as used in science, engineering, business, the humanities and in a social context more generally, implies openness, communication, and accountability. Transparency means operating in such a way that it is easy for others to see what actions are performed. For example, a cashier making change at a point of sale by segregating a customer’s large bills, counting up from the sale amount, and placing the change on the counter in such a way as to invite the customer to verify the amount of change demonstrates transparency. Radical transparency is a management method where nearly all decision making is carried out publicly. All draft documents, all arguments for and against a proposal, all final decisions, and the decision making process itself are made public and remain publicly archived.
Corporate transparency, a form of radical transparency, is the concept of removing all barriers to—and the facilitation of—free and easy public access to corporate information. This includes the laws, rules, and processes that facilitate and protect those individuals and corporations that freely join, develop, and improve the process .
Talk to me
Keeping the lines of communication open is important.
Companies should make a commitment to open communication because communication is crucial to building connections and a sense of community. If we cannot communicate our thoughts, opinions and ideas, we remain isolated and cut off from each other. Open communication also allows for the possibility of self correction and group problem solving. Open communication leads to better decision-making and faster error correction. The transparency that occurs as a result of open communication protects against potential abuses of power and makes for a safer environment overall.
3.1.7: Conflicts of Interest
A situation in which someone in a position of trust has competing professional or personal interests is known as a conflict of interest.
Learning Objective
Outline how self-dealing, outside employment, family interests, pump and dumps, and gifts exemplify conflicts of interest, and differentiate that from an impropriety
Key Points
- A conflict of interest can exist even if there are no improper acts that result from it. One way to understand this is to use the term “conflict of roles”.
- The presence of a conflict of interest is independent from the execution of impropriety.
- A conflict of interest becomes a legal matter when an individual either tries and/or succeeds in influencing the outcome of a decision for personal benefit.
- Common types of conflicts of interest include: self-dealing, family interests or nepotism, and the giving of gifts.
- Conflict of interest can be mitigated by several actions including: removal, disclosure, recusal, third-party evaluations, and establishing codes of conduct.
Key Terms
- pump and dump
-
A form of financial fraud where the fraudster buys stocks cheaply, generates artificial excitement about them to create a temporary price increase, then sells the stocks before the price goes back down.
- recusal
-
An act of recusing. To remove oneself from a decision/judgment because of a conflict of interest.
- disclosure
-
The act of revealing something.
Examples
- A person with two roles, such as an individual who owns stock and is also a government official, may experience situations where those two roles conflict. The conflict can be mitigated but it still exists.
- An example of using a third-party to establish an ‘arm’s length’ or fair transaction would be where a corporation that leases an office building that is owned by the CEO might get an independent evaluation showing what the market rate is for such leases in the locale, to address the conflict of interest that exists between the fiduciary duty of the CEO (to the stockholders, by getting the lowest rent possible) and the personal interest of that CEO (to maximize the income that the CEO gets from owning that office building by getting the highest rent possible).
A conflict of interest (COI) occurs when an individual or organization is involved in multiple interests, one of which could possibly corrupt the motivation for an act in the other.
Conflict of Interest
A situation in which someone in a position of trust — e.g., a doctor — has competing professional or personal interests.
The presence of a conflict of interest is independent from the execution of impropriety. Therefore, it can be discovered and voluntarily defused before any corruption occurs. In fact, for many professionals, it is virtually impossible to avoid having conflicts of interest from time to time. It can, however, become a legal matter for example when an individual tries (and/or succeeds in) influencing the outcome of a decision, for personal benefit. A director or executive of a corporation will be subject to legal liability if a conflict of interest breaches his/her Duty of Loyalty.
Conflict of Interest vs. Impropriety
There often is confusion over these two situations. Someone accused of a conflict of interest may deny that a conflict exists because he/she did not act improperly. In fact, a conflict of interest can exist even if there are no improper acts as a result of it. One way to understand this is to use the term “conflict of roles”.
As an example, in the sphere of business and control, according to the Institute of Internal Auditors:
“conflict of interest is a situation in which an internal auditor, who is in a position of trust, has a competing professional or personal interest. Such competing interests can make it difficult to fulfill his or her duties impartially. A conflict of interest exists even if no unethical or improper act results. A conflict of interest can create an appearance of impropriety that can undermine confidence in the internal auditor, the internal audit activity, and the profession. A conflict of interest could impair an individual’s ability to perform his or her duties and responsibilities objectively. “
An organizational conflict of interest (OCI) may exist in the same way (as described above) in the realm of the private sector providing services to the government, where a corporation provides two types of services to the government that have conflicting interest or appear objectionable (i.e.: manufacturing parts, and then participating on a selection committee for parts manufacturers).
Corporations may develop simple or complex systems to mitigate the risk, or perceived risk, of a conflict of interest. These are typically evaluated by a governmental office (e.g., in a US Government RFP) to determine whether the risks pose a substantial advantage to the private organization over the competition or will decrease the overall competitiveness in the bidding process.
Types of Conflicts of Interests
These are some of the most common forms:
- Self-dealing, in which an official who controls an organization causes it to enter into a transaction with the official, or with another organization that benefits the official, i.e., the official is on both sides of the “deal”.
- Outside employment, in which the interests of one job contradict another.
- Family interests, in which a spouse, child, or other close relative is employed (or applies for employment) or where goods or services are purchased from such a relative or a firm controlled by a relative. For this reason, many employment applications ask if one is related to a current employee. In this event, the relative may be recused from any hiring decisions. Abuse of this type of conflict of interest is called nepotism.
- Gifts from friends who also do business with the person receiving the gifts (may include non-tangible things of value such as transportation and lodging).
- Pump and dump, in which a stockbroker who owns a security artificially inflates its price by “upgrading” it or spreading rumors, sells the security and adds short position, then “downgrades” it or spreads negative rumors to push its price down.
Other improper acts that are sometimes classified as conflicts of interests may be better classified elsewhere: e.g., accepting bribes is corruption; the use of government or corporate property or assets for personal use is fraud; not conflict of interest.
Codes of Ethics
These help to minimize problems with conflicts of interest because they spell out the extent to which such conflicts should be avoided, and what the parties should do where such conflicts are permitted (disclosure, recusal, etc.). Thus, professionals cannot claim that they were unaware that their improper behavior was unethical. As importantly, the threat of disciplinary action (for example, a lawyer being disbarred) helps to minimize unacceptable conflicts or improper acts when a conflict is unavoidable.
As codes of ethics cannot cover all situations, some governments have established an office of the ethics commissioner, who should both be appointed by and report to the legislature.
3.2: Promoting Ethical Behavior
3.2.1: Government Regulation
Governments use laws and regulations to point business behavior in what governments perceive to be beneficial directions.
Learning Objective
Summarize the purpose and justify the existence of government regulation
Key Points
- Government regulation attempts to produce outcomes which might not otherwise occur, prevent outcomes that might otherwise occur, or produce or prevent outcomes in different timescales than would otherwise occur.
- Common examples of regulation include controls on: market entries, prices, wages, development approvals, pollution effects, employment for certain people in certain industries, standards of production for certain goods, military forces, and services.
- Regulation can be justified by the presence of market failures, collective desires, diverse experiences, social subordination, endogenous preferences, irreversibility, professional conduct, or interest group transfers.
Key Term
- promulgation
-
The act of promulgating or announcing something, especially a proclamation announcing a new law.
Example
- the US Environmental Protection Agency’s Audit Policy is an example of government regulation. It “safeguards human health and the environment by providing several major incentives for regulated entities to voluntarily come into compliance with federal environmental Laws & Regulations. ” Affected entities must voluntarily discover and act to correct any violations that occur.
Regulation is the promulgation, monitoring, and enforcement of rules. Regulation creates or constrains a right, creates or limits a duty, or allocates a responsibility. Regulation can take many forms: legal restrictions promulgated by a government authority, contractual obligations that bind many parties (e.g., “insurance regulations” that arise out of contracts between insurers and their insureds), self-regulation by an industry such as through a trade association, social regulation, co-regulation, third-party regulation, certification, accreditation, or market regulation. In its legal sense, regulation can and should be distinguished from primary legislation or judiciary law.
Governments use laws and regulations to point business behavior in what governments perceive to be beneficial directions. Government regulation attempts to produce outcomes which might not otherwise occur, prevent outcomes that might otherwise occur, or produce or prevent outcomes in different timescales than would otherwise occur. In this way, regulations can be seen as implementation artifacts of policy statements. Common examples of regulation include controls on market entries, prices, wages, development approvals, pollution effects, employment for certain people in certain industries, standards of production for certain goods, military forces, and services.
Regulations can be justified for a variety of reasons, including:
- Market failures – regulation due to inefficiency. Intervention due to a classical economics arguments about market failure. Market failures can present themselves due to events such as: risk of monopoly, inadequate information, and unseen externalities.
- Collective desires – regulation about collective desires or considered judgments on the part of a significant segment of society.
- Diverse experiences – regulation with a view of eliminating or enhancing opportunities for the formation of diverse preferences and beliefs.
- Social subordination – regulation aimed to increase or reduce social subordination of various social groups.
- Endogenous preferences – regulation aimed at affecting the development of certain preferences on an aggregate level.
- Irreversibility – regulation that deals with the problem of how certain types of conduct from current generations result in outcomes that future generations may not be able to recover from.
- Professional conduct – the regulation of members of professional bodies, either acting under statutory or contractual powers.
- Interest group transfers – regulation that results from efforts by self-interest groups to redistribute wealth in their favor, which may be disguised as one or more of the justifications above.
Beginning in the late 19th and 20th century, much of regulation in the United States was administered and enforced by regulatory agencies which produced their own administrative law and procedures under the authority of statutes. Legislators created these agencies to allow experts in the industry to focus their attention on the issue. At the federal level, one the earliest institutions was the Interstate Commerce Commission which had its roots in earlier state-based regulatory commissions and agencies. Later agencies include the Federal Trade Commission, Securities and Exchange Commission, Civil Aeronautics Board, and various other institutions. These institutions vary from industry to industry and at the federal and state level.
Regulatory Agencies
The Securities and Exchange Commission is an example of a government regulatory agency.
3.2.2: Trade Associations
A trade association is an organization founded and funded by businesses that operate in a specific industry.
Learning Objective
Summarize the methods utilized by trade associations in an attempt to influence public policy in a direction favorable to the group’s members
Key Points
- An industry trade association participates in public relations activities such as advertising, education, political donations, lobbying and publishing, but its main focus is collaboration between companies, or standardization.
- Associations may offer other services, such as organizing conferences, networking or charitable events or offering classes or educational materials.
- One of the primary purposes of trade groups, particularly in the United States, is to attempt to influence public policy in a direction favorable to the group’s members.
- The opportunity to be promoted in trade association media (whether by editorial or advertising) is often an important reason why companies join a trade association in the first place.
- Industry trade groups sometimes produce advertisements targeted to promote the views of an entire industry.
Key Term
- stakeholder
-
A person or organization with a legitimate interest in a given situation, action, or enterprise.
Example
- The American Medical Association sets rules in the medical industry regarding ethics, disciplinary action, and accreditation.
A trade association, also known as an industry trade group, business association, or sector association, is an organization founded and funded by businesses that operate in a specific industry . An industry trade association participates in public relations activities such as advertising, education, political donations, lobbying, and publishing, but its main focus is collaboration between companies, or standardization. Associations may offer other services, such as organizing conferences, networking or charitable events or offering classes or educational materials. Many associations are non-profit organizations governed by bylaws and directed by officers who are also members.
Trade Associations
The Association of Master Upholsterers is an example of a trade association.
One of the primary purposes of trade groups, particularly in the United States, is to attempt to influence public policy in a direction favorable to the group’s members. This can take the form of contributions to the campaigns of political candidates and parties, contributions to “issue” campaigns not tied to a candidate or party, and lobbying legislators to support or oppose particular legislation. In addition, trade groups attempt to influence the activities of regulatory bodies.
Almost all trade associations are heavily involved in publishing activities, whether in print or online. The main media published by trade associations are as follows:
- Association website – The association’s website typically explains its aims and objectives, promotes the association’s products and services, explains the benefits of membership to prospective members, and promotes members’ businesses.
- Members newsletters or magazines – Whether produced in print or online, association newsletters and magazines contain news about the activities of the association, industry news and editorial features on topical issues. Some are exclusively distributed to members, while others are used to lobby lawmakers and regulators, and some are used to promote members’ businesses to potential new customers.
- Printed membership directories and yearbooks – Larger trade associations publish membership directories and yearbooks to promote their association to opinion formers, lawmakers, regulators and other stakeholders. Such publications also help to promote members’ businesses both to each other and to a wider audience. A typical membership directory contains profiles of each association member, a products and services guide, advertising from members, and editorial articles about the aims, objectives, and activities of the association. The emphasis of association yearbooks on the other hand is on editorial features about the association itself and the association’s industry.
The opportunity to be promoted in such media (whether by editorial or advertising) is often an important reason why companies join a trade association in the first place.
Industry trade groups sometimes produce advertisements, just as normal corporations do. However, whereas typical advertisements are for a specific product, industry trade groups advertisements generally are targeted to promote the views of an entire industry.
3.2.3: Corporate Policies
Companies often have corporate ethics statements or codes that identify ethical expectations and offer guidance.
Learning Objective
Examine how corporate policies may lead to greater ethical awareness, consistency in application, and the avoidance of ethical disasters in an organization
Key Points
- A corporate ethics statement is usually broad and more general than a corporate ethics code, which tends to be more detailed and identifies more specific situations that may arise.
- Ethics training also takes place, in the form of seminars, discussion groups, and case studies. Often, a company will require an employee to sign an agreement stating that they will adhere to an ethical code of conduct.
- There are critics of ethical requirements. Some claim that employees should be free to use their judgement to deal with ethical problems. Others feel that these requirements or codes of conduct are borne less out of a need to be ethical, and more to limit legal liability.
Key Terms
- corporate philanthropy
-
charitable monetary donations (not political contributions or commercial sponsorships) by companies
- utilitarianism
-
The theory that action should be directed toward achieving the “greatest happiness for the greatest number of people”; hedonistic universalism.
Example
- There is often a disconnect between a company’s ethics policies and its actual practices. For example, in financial trading environments, lying is often expected, even though it goes against any code of ethics. The 2012 Barclays LIBOR price fixing scandal is an example of grossly unethical behavior that occurred after Barclays admitted that its traders sought to intentionally manipulate LIBOR rates for financial gain.
Due to the increase in comprehensive compliance and ethics programs, many companies have formulated internal policies pertaining to the ethical conduct of employees. These policies can be simple exhortations in broad, highly generalized language (typically called a corporate ethics statement), or they can be more detailed policies, containing specific behavioral requirements (typically called corporate ethics codes). They are generally meant to identify the company’s expectations of workers and to offer guidance on handling some of the more common ethical problems that might arise in the course of doing business. It is hoped that having such a policy will lead to greater ethical awareness, consistency in application, and the avoidance of ethical disasters. An increasing number of companies also require employees to attend seminars regarding business conduct, which often include discussion of the company’s policies, specific case studies, and legal requirements. Some companies even require their employees to sign agreements stating that they will abide by the company’s rules of conduct.
Many companies are assessing the environmental factors that can lead employees to engage in unethical conduct. A competitive business environment may call for unethical behavior. Lying has become expected in fields such as trading. An example of this is the issues surrounding the unethical actions of the Saloman Brothers .
Employee competition
Competition can lead to unethical behavior by employees.
Not everyone supports corporate policies that govern ethical conduct. Some claim that ethical problems are better dealt with by employees using their own judgment.
Others believe that corporate ethics policies are primarily rooted in utilitarianism concerns, and that they are mainly to limit the company’s legal liability, or to curry public favor by giving the appearance of being a good corporate citizen. Ideally, the company will avoid a lawsuit because its employees will follow the rules. Should a lawsuit occur, the company can claim that the problem would not have arisen if the employee had only followed the code properly.
Sometimes there is a disconnection between the company’s code of ethics and actual practices. At worst, whether or not such conduct is explicitly sanctioned by management, the policy is duplicitous; and, at best, the code is merely a marketing tool.
Jones and Parker write, “Most of what we read under the name business ethics is either sentimental common sense, or a set of excuses for being unpleasant. ” Many manuals are procedural form filling exercises unconcerned about the real ethical dilemmas. For instance, the US Department of Commerce ethics program treats business ethics as a set of instructions and procedures to be followed by ‘ethics officers’. Some others claim being ethical just for the sake of it. Business ethicists may trivialize the subject, offering standard answers that do not reflect a situation’s complexity.
3.3: Social Responsibility
3.3.1: A Brief Definition of Corporate Social Responsibility
Social responsibility is the duty of organizations and individuals to act in ways that benefit society and/or the environment.
Learning Objective
Examine how social responsibility helps to sustain the equilibrium between economic development and the welfare of society and the environment
Key Points
- Corporate social responsibility is the expectation that a firm maintain a balance between making a profit and contributing to society.
- Socially responsible entities are conscious of the tradeoff between economic development and the welfare of society and the environment. They therefore refrain from socially harmful practices and contribute to activities that are socially beneficial.
- Companies can demonstrate social responsibility in a variety of ways, such as donating funds to education, arts, culture, and underprivileged children.
Key Terms
- social responsibility
-
A voluntarily assumed obligation toward the good of society at large as opposed to the self alone.
- not-for-profit
-
A company or organization that is not meant to make a profit.
Examples
- Companies that donate proceeds to charitable organizations are socially responsible. For example, many large corporations are major patrons of the arts and education.
- Companies that seek to make their products or their production process more environmentally friendly are socially responsible. This also makes the company’s consumers feel like they are behaving responsibly by supporting that brand.
A tradeoff always exists between material economic development and the welfare of society and the environment. Social responsibility is the idea that an organization or individual is obligated to act to benefit society at large—i.e., to maintain equilibrium between the economy and the ecosystem.
Social responsibility in business is also known as corporate social responsibility (CSR), corporate responsibility, corporate citizenship, responsible business, sustainable responsible business, or corporate social performance. This term refers to a form of self-regulation that is integrated into different disciplines, such as business, politics, economy, media, and communications studies.
The Conference Board of Canada, a not-for-profit organization that specializes in economic trends, organizational performance, and public policy, wrote a National Corporate Social Responsibility Report. In it they explain that corporate social responsibility is a way of conducting business through balancing the long-term objectives, decision making, and behavior of a company with the values, norms, and expectations of society.
Companies can demonstrate social responsibility in a myriad of ways. They can donate funds to education, arts and culture, underprivileged children, or animal welfare, or they can make commitments to reduce their environmental footprint, implement fair hiring practices, sponsor events, and work only with suppliers with similar values. CSR can be practiced passively, through refraining from committing socially harmful acts, or actively, through performing activities that directly advance social goals. The below diagram shows the various ways that a company can invest in being socially responsible and the value those actions can bring to the company.
The Value of CSR
This diagram shows the various ways that a company can invest in being socially responsible and the value those actions can bring to the company.
The Conference Board of Canada, a not-for-profit organization that specializes in economic trends, suggests that social responsibility is a way of conducting business through balancing the long-term objectives, decision-making, and behavior of a company with the values, norms, and expectations of society. Social responsibility can be a normative principle and a soft law principle engaged in promoting universal ethical standards in relationship to private and public corporations.
Companies can demonstrate social responsibility in a myriad of ways. They can donate funds to education, arts and culture, underprivileged children, animal welfare, or they can make commitments to reduce their environmental footprint, implement fair hiring practices, sponsor events, and work only with suppliers with similar values.
Social responsibility in business is also known as corporate social responsibility, corporate responsibility, corporate citizenship, responsible business, sustainable responsible business, or corporate social performance. This term refers to a form of self-regulation that is integrated into different disciplines, including business, politics, economy, media, and communications studies.
3.3.2: Early Efforts in Social Responsibility
Social responsibility is the idea that an entity needs to act in a way that balances its own gain with societal benefits.
Learning Objective
Recognize Andrew Carnegie’s business principles of charity and stewardship as the precursors to modern organizational social responsibility
Key Points
- Social responsibility as an ethical principle was first drawn from the business philosophy of Andrew Carnegie, the 19th century steel magnate who believed in charity and social stewardship.
- Economist Milton Friedman held that humans act in self-interest, to maximize profit, and social issues were the government’s issue.
- After recent significant corporate scandals and disasters, the relationship between society and corporations has been severely tested.
Key Terms
- social audit
-
reporting on the societal and environmental effects of organizations’ economic actions to particular interest groups
- charity
-
An organization, the objective of which is to carry out a charitable purpose.
- social responsibility
-
A voluntarily assumed obligation toward the good of society at large as opposed to the self alone.
Example
- Carnegie’s philanthropic accomplishments included contributions to education by establishing many public libraries around the country.
Social responsibility is the idea that an entity needs to act in a way that balances its own gain with societal benefits. Entities include individuals as well as businesses. Companies do need to make a profit, but not at the expense of society or the environment. Businesses should use ethical decision-making practices to make responsible decisions and reduce the need for government involvement such as, for example, Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), which monitors business decisions and practices to prevent pollution.
The notion of social responsibility is far from new. Its roots are in economics and the writings of Andrew Carnegie (1835-1919), a Scottish-born businessman and founder of U.S. Steel. Carnegie’s business philosophy was based on two principles: charity (the more fortunate should assist those who are less fortunate) and stewardship (the rich hold their money “in trust” for the rest of society, using it for any purpose society deems appropriate).
Milton Friedman (1912-2006), an American economist and Nobel Laureate, later advocated that corporations exist only to maximize profit and behave in their own best self-interest. He argued that corporations’ attempts at social responsibility were “morally wrong,” as social issues and concerns were best dealt with by government. In the last half century, highly publicized corporate behavior like the handling of the Exxon Valdez oil spill, the financial scandal of Enron, and the more recent subprime mortgage crisis has undermined trust in corporations. Social responsibility has taken on heightened importance as a way of building trust in relationships .
Oil Spill
Oil spills and other environmental disasters show the need for social responsibility.
3.3.3: Modern Trends in Social Responsibility
Socially responsible trends include corporate citizenship policies, social investing, sustainable accounting & social entrepreneurship.
Learning Objective
Explain how the advent of socially responsible investing, sustainability accounting, and social entrepreneurship has contributed to the modernization of social responsibility
Key Points
- Corporate social responsibility (CSR) guides individuals and companies to act in socially and environmentally responsible ways.
- Businesses that seek to be socially responsible are described as having a double or triple bottom line; they judge their success not only by profit but also by their social and environmental impact.
- Sustainable accounting is a method of financial disclosure that reveals a corporation’s activities and impact on the environment. This information is available to stakeholders, suppliers, and the government for the sake of transparency.
- Social entrepreneurship is the use of entrepreneurial principles to organize a business venture that addresses a certain social problem. Profit and return may still be important to social entrepreneurs, but a positive impact on society is their key measure of success.
- The adoption of CSR policy is sometimes perceived as “window dressing” to prevent future government oversight.
Key Term
- corporate social responsibility
-
A form of corporate self-regulation integrated into a business model in which companies aim to embrace responsibility for their actions and encourage a positive impact through their activities on the environment, consumers, employees, communities and other stakeholders. Commonly abbreviated as CSR.
Example
- A social entrepreneur can be the founder or co-founder or a chief functionary (president, secretary, treasurer, CEO, or chairman) of a social enterprise or non-profit. Examples of some of social entrepreneurs based in India are Ramji Raghavan, founder and Chairman of the Agastya International Foundation; Harish Hande, founder of Selco India; Rippan Kapur of Child Rights; and You and Jyotindra Nath of Youth United.
Corporate Social Responsibility
Corporate social responsibility (abbreviated CSR; also called corporate conscience, corporate citizenship, social performance, or sustainable responsible business) is a form of self-regulation integrated into a business model. A socially responsible business monitors and ensures its active compliance with the spirit of the law, ethical standards, and international norms. The goal of CSR is for a company to take accountability for its actions and achieve and encourage a positive impact on the environment as well as its consumers, employees, communities, and other stakeholders.
CSR is designed to support an organization’s mission as well as to guide what the company stands for and will deliver to its consumers. ISO 26000 is the recognized international standard for CSR. Public sector organizations (e..g, the United Nations) adhere to the so-called triple bottom line (TBL): maximizing (1) profit, (2) social impact, and (3) environmental impact. The UN has developed the Principles for Responsible Investment as guidelines for investing entities. CSR adheres to similar principles but has no formal act of legislation.
The United Nations
The UN has developed the Principles for Responsible Investment as guidelines for investing entities.
Socially Responsible Investing
Socially responsible investing is the practice of investing funds only in companies deemed to be socially responsible according to a given set of criteria. It is a booming market in both the US and Europe. As of 2010, nearly one out of every eight dollars under professional management in the US is involved in socially responsible investing; this is 12.5% of the $25.2 trillion in total assets under management tracked by Thomson Reuters Nelson.
Sustainability Accounting
Sustainability accounting has increased in popularity over the past few decades. Many companies are adopting new methods and techniques in their financial disclosures that provide information about their core activities and their impact on the environment. As a result of this action, stakeholders, suppliers, and governmental institutions have a better understanding of how companies manage their resources to achieve sustainable development.
Sustainability accounting connects a company’s strategies to a sustainable framework by disclosing three dimensions of information: environmental, economic, and social. In practice, however, it is often difficult to put together policies that simultaneously promote environmental, economic, and social goals.
Social Entrepreneurship
Social entrepreneurship is the recognition of a social problem and the use of entrepreneurial principles to organize, create, and manage a social venture to achieve social change. While a business entrepreneur typically measures performance in profit and return, a social entrepreneur also cares about positive social, cultural, and environmental progress. Social entrepreneurs are commonly associated with the voluntary and not-for-profit sectors, but this doesn’t necessarily mean they don’t make a profit.
Social entrepreneurship practiced with a global perspective or embedded in an international context is called international social entrepreneurship.
One well-known contemporary social entrepreneur is Muhammad Yunus, founder and manager of Grameen Bank and its growing family of social venture businesses. He was awarded a Nobel Peace Prize in 2006. Yunus’ and Grameen Bank’s work supports the claims of modern-day social entrepreneurs regarding the enormous synergies and benefits achieved when business principles are unified with social ventures. In some countries—including Bangladesh and, to a lesser extent, the USA—social entrepreneurs have filled the spaces neglected by a relatively small state. In other countries, particularly Europe and South America, social entrepreneurs tend to work more closely with public organizations at both the national and local levels.
Today, non-profits, non-governmental organizations, foundations, governments, and individuals play a role in promoting, funding, and advising social entrepreneurs around the world.
3.3.4: Stakeholders: Consumers, Employees, and Shareholders
Stakeholders may have different interests related to the pursuit of profit and social impact.
Learning Objective
Identify the importance of an organization recognizing the needs of its stakeholders
Key Points
- Corporations are motivated to become more socially responsible because their most important stakeholders expect them to understand and address the social and community issues that are relevant to them.
- The perspectives of stakeholders play a role in shaping the organization’s socially responsible activities, as the organization leadership should recognize the needs of its stakeholders in order to function effectively.
- It is the stakeholder theory that implies that all stakeholders (or individuals) must be treated equally regardless of the fact that some people will obviously contribute more than others to an organization.
Key Term
- stakeholder
-
A person or organization with a legitimate interest in a given situation, action, or enterprise.
Example
- Suppose a corporation is engaging in environmentally harmful practices. This information comes to the attention of the local community near the production plants or the consumers who buy the products. Pressure from these stakeholders can force the corporation into adopting a corporate self-regulation policy that improves their environmental footprint.
Increasingly, corporations are motivated to become more socially responsible because their most important stakeholders expect them to understand and address the social and community issues that are relevant to them. Understanding what causes are important to employees is usually the first priority because of the many interrelated business benefits that can be derived from increased employee engagement (i.e. loyalty, improved recruitment, increased retention, higher productivity, and so on). Key external stakeholders include customers, consumers, investors (particularly institutional investors), communities in the areas where the corporation operates its facilities, regulators, academics, and the media .
Various Types of Stakeholders
This image shows the various internal and external stakeholders.
Branco and Rodrigues (2007) describe the stakeholder perspective of CSR (corporate social responsibility) as the inclusion of all groups or constituents (rather than just shareholders) in managerial decision making related to the organization’s portfolio of socially responsible activities. This normative model implies that the CSR collaborations are positively accepted when they are in the interests of stakeholders and may have no effect or be detrimental to the organization if they are not directly related to stakeholder interests. The stakeholder perspective suffers from a wheel and spoke network metaphor that does not acknowledge the complexity of network interactions that can occur in cross-sector partnerships. It also relegates communication to a maintenance function, similar to the exchange perspective.
Stakeholder and Other Theories
Whether it is a team, small group, or a large international entity, the ability for any organization to reason, act rationally, and respond ethically is paramount. Leadership must have the ability to recognize the needs of its members (or called “stakeholders” in some theories or models), especially the very basics of a person’s desire to belong and fit into the organization. It is the stakeholder theory that implies that all stakeholders (or individuals) must be treated equally regardless of the fact that some people will obviously contribute more than others to an organization.
Leadership not only has to place aside each of their individual (or personal) ambitions (along with any prejudices) in order to present the goals of the organization, but they also have to engage the stakeholder with the benefit of the organization in mind. Further, it is leadership that has to be able to influence the stakeholders by presenting the strong minority voice in order to move the organization’s members toward ethical behavior. Importantly, the leadership (or stakeholder management) has to have the desire, the will, and the skills to ensure that the other stakeholders’ voices are respected within the organization, and leadership has to ensure that those other voices are not expressing views that are not shared by the larger majority of the members (or stakeholders). Therefore, stakeholder management, as well as any other leadership of organizations, has to take upon themselves the arduous task of ensuring an “ethics system” for their own management styles, personalities, systems, performances, plans, policies, strategies, productivity, openness, and even risk(s) within their cultures or industries.
3.4: Consumer Rights
3.4.1: Basic Consumer Rights
Basic consumer rights ensure a level of protection for consumers owed by a supplier of goods or services.
Learning Objective
Summarize the Consumer Bill of Rights extolled by President John F. Kennedy and the United Nations
Key Points
- The Consumer Bill of Rights pushed for by John F. Kennedy established four basic rights; the right to safety, the right to be informed, the right to choose, and the right to be heard.
- In 1985, the United Nations added four more rights to protect consumers: the right to satisfaction of basic needs, the right to redress, the right to consumer education, and the right to a healthy environment.
- Consumer protection consists of laws and organizations designed to ensure the rights of consumers, as listed above.
- In 1985, the United Nations in 1985 added four more rights to protect consumers: the right to satisfaction of basic need, the right to redress, the right to consumer education, and the right to a healthy environment.
- Consumer protection is the duty of the laws, government agencies, and organizations created to ensure consumer rights.
- Competitive markets also promote the interests of consumers under the principle of economic efficiency.
Key Terms
- Consumer
-
Someone who acquires goods or services for direct use or ownership rather than for resale or use in production and manufacturing.
- right
-
A legal or moral entitlement.
- consumer rights
-
The legal and moral duties of protection owed to a purchaser of goods or services by the supplier.
Example
- Regulatory bodies, such as the FDA, establish and maintain standards for goods and services. In the FDA’s case, drugs and foods are regulated to ensure consumer safety.
What is a Consumer?
A consumer is defined as “someone who acquires goods or services for direct use or ownership rather than for resale or use in production and manufacturing. ” Before the mid-twentieth century, consumers were without rights with regard to their interaction with products and producers. Consumers had little ground on which to defend themselves against faulty or defective products, or against misleading or deceptive advertising methods. By the 1950s, a movement called “consumerism” began pushing for increased rights and legal protection against malicious business practices. By the end of the decade, legal product liability had been established in which an aggrieved party need only prove injury by use of a product, rather than bearing the burden of proof of corporate negligence.
Consumer Bill of Rights
In 1962, President John F. Kennedy presented a speech to the United States Congress in which he extolled four basic consumer rights — later called, The Consumer Bill of Rights. In 1985, these rights were expanded to eight by the United Nations. These eight rights are the:
John F. Kennedy
President John F. Kennedy extolled four basic consumer rights, later called the “Consumer Bill of Rights. “
Right to Safety
The assertion of this right is aimed at the defense of consumers against injuries caused by products other than automobile vehicles, and implies that products should cause no harm to their users if such use is executed as prescribed. The Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) has jurisdiction over thousands of commercial products, and powers that allow it to establish performance standards, require product testing and warning labels, demand immediate notification of defective products, and, when necessary, force product recall.
Right to Be Informed
This right states that businesses should always provide consumers with enough appropriate information to make intelligent and informed product choices. Product information provided by a business should always be complete and truthful. This right aims to achieve protection against misleading information in the areas of financing, advertising, labeling, and packaging.
Right to Choose
The right to free choice among product offerings states that consumers should have a variety of options provided by different companies from which to choose. The federal government has taken many steps to ensure the availability of a healthy environment open to competition through legislation, including limits on concept ownership through Patent Law, prevention of monopolistic business practices through Anti-Trust Legislation, and the outlaw of price cutting and gouging.
Right to Be Heard
This right asserts the ability of consumers to voice complaints and concerns about a product in order to have the issue handled efficiently and responsively. While no federal agency is tasked with the specific duty of providing a forum for this interaction between consumer and producer, certain outlets exist to aid consumers if difficulty occurs in communication with an aggrieving party. State and federal attorney generals are equipped to aid their constituents in dealing with parties who have provided a product or service in a manner unsatisfactory to the consumer in violation of an applicable law.
Right to Satisfaction of Basic Needs
To have access to basic, essential goods and services: adequate food, clothing, shelter, health care, education, public utilities, water, and sanitation.
The Right to Redress
To receive a fair settlement of just claims, including compensation for misrepresentation, shoddy goods or unsatisfactory services.
Right to Consumer Education
To acquire knowledge and skills needed to make informed, confident choices about goods and services, while being aware of basic consumer rights and responsibilities and how to act on them.
Right to a Healthy Environment
To live and work in an environment which is non-threatening to the well-being of present and future generations.
Consumer Protection
Even though consumers have these rights, they can easily be ignored. That’s where consumer protection comes in. Consumer protection consists of laws and organizations designed to ensure the rights of consumers, as well as fair trade competition and the free flow of truthful information in the marketplace. The laws are designed to prevent businesses that engage in fraud or specified unfair practices from gaining an advantage over competitors and may provide additional protection for the weak and those unable to take care of themselves.
Organizations that promote consumer protection include government organizations, individuals as consumer activism, and self-regulating business organizations, such as consumer protection agencies and organizations, the Federal Trade Commission, the Better Business Bureaus, etc.
Consumer interests can also be protected by promoting competition in the markets, which directly and indirectly serve consumers, consistent with economic efficiency.
3.4.2: Forces in Consumerism
The modern understanding of consumerism refers to an emphasis on the consumption of goods, often with a connotation of excess.
Learning Objective
Discuss the forces driving the evolution of consumerism as an economic order that encourages the purchase of goods and services in ever-greater amounts
Key Points
- The modern definition of consumerism, derived from the works of economist Thorstein Veblen, refers to the preoccupation with the acquisition of goods.
- Though consumerism is an international and historical phenomenon, it was magnified dramatically by the Industrial Revolution, which made mass production of consumer goods a reality.
- With the progression of mass production and consumption, some argue that materialism and desire for social status became more prominent in cultures around the world. Modern consumers are now able to emulate the wealthy and iconic through consumption of certain goods.
- Increasing awareness of environmental and social concerns has given rise to ethical consumerism. Consumers are becoming much more conscious of how their consumption behavior is impacting the world around them, and they are beginning to change their purchasing decisions accordingly.
Key Terms
- consumerism
-
An economic theory that increased consumption is beneficial to a nation’s economy in the long run.
- conspicuous consumption
-
A public display of acquisition of possessions with the intention of gaining social prestige; excessive consumerism in order to flaunt one’s purchasing power.
- ethical consumerism
-
consumption of goods and services with a conscious awareness of ethical and environmental implications
Examples
- An example of ethical consumerism is consciously purchasing coffee from a cafe that buys fair trade coffee beans. Concern for the conditions of producers in developing countries and the environmental sustainability of their farming practices shapes the preferences of this ethical consumer.
- Example of ethical consumerism would be consciously purchasing coffee from a cafe that buys fair trade coffee beans. Concern for the conditions of producers in developing countries and the environmental sustainability of their farming practices shapes the preferences of this ethical consumer.
Consumerism
Consumerism is a social and economic order that encourages the purchase of goods and services in ever-greater amounts. The term is often associated with criticisms of consumption starting with Thorstein Veblen. While the term “consumerism” is also used to refer to the consumerists movement, consumer protection or consumer activism, the focus of this section relates to the first definition.
In economics, consumerism refers to economic policies that place emphasis on consumption. In an abstract sense, it is the belief that the free choice of consumers should dictate the economic structure of a society (cf. Producerism, especially in the British sense of term).
The term “consumerism” was first used in 1915 to refer to “advocacy of the rights and interests of consumers” (Oxford English Dictionary). Today the term consumerism more commonly refers to the, “emphasis on or preoccupation with the acquisition of consumer goods” (Oxford English Dictionary), a movement that emerged in the 1960s. This more modern conceptualization is based on the writings of sociologist and economist Thorstein Veblen who lived at the turn of the 20th century. He coined the term “conspicuous consumption” to describe this apparently irrational and confounding form of economic behavior. Veblen’s scathing proposal was that unnecessary consumption is a form of status display .
Conspicuous Consumerism
Conspicuous consumption is when goods are consumed to enhance one’s social status.
History of Consumerism
Consumerism today is an international phenomenon. People purchasing goods and consuming materials in excess of their basic needs is as old as the first civilizations (e.g. Ancient Egypt, Babylon and Ancient Rome).
The seeds of modern day consumerism grew out of the Industrial Revolution. In the nineteenth century, capitalist development and the industrial revolution were primarily focused on the capital goods sector and industrial infrastructure. For example, after observing the assembly lines in the meat packing industry, Frederick Winslow Taylor brought his theory of scientific management to the organization of the assembly line in other industries; this unleashed incredible productivity gains and reduced the costs of all commodities produced on assembly lines. Henry Ford and other leaders of industry understood that mass production presupposed mass consumption.
In the agrarian economy, the working classes labored long hours and had little time for consumption. While previously the norm had been the scarcity of resources, the Industrial Revolution created a new economic situation. After the Industrial Revolution, products were available in outstanding quantities, at low prices, being thus available to virtually everyone. Access to credit, in the form of installment payments aided further consumption.
Modern Consumerism
Beginning in the 1990s, the reason most frequently given for attending college had changed. Making a lot of money outranked previous reasons such as becoming an authority in a field or helping others in difficulty. This rationale correlates with the rise of materialism, specifically the technological aspect: the increasing prevalence of mp3 players, digital media, tablets and smartphones. Madeline Levine criticized what she saw as a large change in American culture; “a shift away from values of community, spirituality, and integrity, and toward competition, materialism and disconnection.”
Businesses have realized that wealthy consumers are the most attractive targets of marketing. Consequently, upper class tastes, lifestyles, and preferences trickle down to become the standard for all consumers. The not so wealthy consumers then “purchase something new that will speak of their place in the tradition of affluence”. A consumer can have the instant gratification of purchasing an expensive item to improve social status.
Emulation is also a core component of 21st century consumerism. As a general trend, regular consumers seek to emulate those who are above them in the social hierarchy. The poor strive to imitate the wealthy and the wealthy imitate celebrities and other icons. The celebrity endorsement of products can be seen as evidence of the evocation of the desire of modern consumers to purchase products partly or solely to emulate people of higher social status. This purchasing behavior may co-exist in the mind of a consumer with an image of oneself as being an individualist.
Ethical Consumerism
The rise in popularity of ethical consumerism over the last two decades can be linked to the rise of the Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) movement. As global population increases, so does the pressure intensify on limited natural resources required to meet rising consumer demand. Industrialization of developing countries, facilitated by technology and globalization is further straining these resources. Consumers are becoming more and more aware of the environmental and social implications of their day-to-day consumer decisions and are therefore beginning to make purchasing decisions based on environmental and ethical implications. However, the practice of ethical consumerism is in its nascent stages and far from universal.